Ford - Edge Fwd - Workshop Manual - 2007 - 2007

Factory Workshop Manual Make Ford Model Edge Fwd Engine and year V6-3.5L (2007) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13 C2086 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 17 C4014 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 18 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. 1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the 2 nuts and the parking aid module. - Disconnect the parking aid module electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 23 Heated Mirror Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 24 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 28 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams C3299A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 29 C3299B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 30 C3299C C3299D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Seat Control Module: Description and Operation DRIVER SEAT MODULE - MEMORY SEAT The power driver seat, power outside rear view mirrors and power adjustable pedals are controlled by the driver seat module (DSM) only when the vehicle is equipped with the programmable/recall memory option. The DSM is located on the driver seat track. This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat to 2 programmable positions. - A power driver seat position can be stored at any time. The driver must move the seat to the desired position using the driver seat switch assembly. The driver must then depress the memory SET switch which activates the memory SET switch light emitting diode (LED). Within 5 seconds (before the LED goes out), the driver must select a memory position. Memory 1 is selected by depressing memory switch 1. Memory 2 is selected by depressing memory switch 2. - If no memory switch input is received within the 5-second time limit, the operation is aborted and the memory seat position switch (set switch) LED is turned OFF. This also occurs if one of the following inputs is received during the 5-second programming limit: Driver seat control switch - Memory seat position switch (set switch) - Power adjustable pedal switch A programmed seat position can only be recalled when the transmission selector is in PARK or NEUTRAL with the ignition switch in the RUN position. A position may be programmed at any time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 37 Power Seat Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 38 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B TSB 08-14-5 07/21/08 POWER LIFT GATE INOPERATIVE - ALL FUNCTIONAL SWITCHES, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY, WITH POWER LIFT GATE TRUNK MODULE DTC B117B FORD: 2008 Taurus X 2007-2008 Edge, Expedition Ford: 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX, Navigator ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Expedition, Navigator Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X and 2009 Flex may exhibit an inoperative power lift gate from remote keyless entry, inside switches or the outside lift gate handle with a power lift gate/trunk module (LTM) with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B117B and PID UCH_OUT set to Active. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check power lift gate operation from all buttons. 2. If the power lift gate is inoperative, then check the LTM for DTC B117B and for PID UCH_Out set to "Active". NOTE THE PID UCH_OUT IS SET TO "INACTIVE" OR ANY OTHER DTC ARE RETRIEVED, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE, PERFORM NORMAL DIAGNOSTICS PER THE WORK SHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-03. 3. If both the DTC B117B and the PID UCH_Out equal "Active" are present, then clear the LTM memory and proceed to Step 4. 4. Reprogram the LTM module to the latest calibration using IDS release 55.13 Patch 28 and higher or 56.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 5. Initialize LTM per Work Shop Manual Section 501-03. 6. Check the operation of the power lift gate. Check for any DTCs. If lift gate operation passes from all switches and there are NO DTCs in the LTM, return the vehicle to the customer. 7. If any DTCs are present after retesting or lift gate is inoperative, from any switches, perform Work Shop Manual diagnosis per Section 501-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081405A 2007-2008 Expedition, 0.5 Hr. Navigator, Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X, 2009 Flex: Reprogram The LTM, Includes Time To Check DTCs And, Lift Gate Operation, Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B > Page 47 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B TSB 08-14-5 07/21/08 POWER LIFT GATE INOPERATIVE - ALL FUNCTIONAL SWITCHES, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY, WITH POWER LIFT GATE TRUNK MODULE DTC B117B FORD: 2008 Taurus X 2007-2008 Edge, Expedition Ford: 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX, Navigator ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Expedition, Navigator Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X and 2009 Flex may exhibit an inoperative power lift gate from remote keyless entry, inside switches or the outside lift gate handle with a power lift gate/trunk module (LTM) with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B117B and PID UCH_OUT set to Active. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check power lift gate operation from all buttons. 2. If the power lift gate is inoperative, then check the LTM for DTC B117B and for PID UCH_Out set to "Active". NOTE THE PID UCH_OUT IS SET TO "INACTIVE" OR ANY OTHER DTC ARE RETRIEVED, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE, PERFORM NORMAL DIAGNOSTICS PER THE WORK SHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-03. 3. If both the DTC B117B and the PID UCH_Out equal "Active" are present, then clear the LTM memory and proceed to Step 4. 4. Reprogram the LTM module to the latest calibration using IDS release 55.13 Patch 28 and higher or 56.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 5. Initialize LTM per Work Shop Manual Section 501-03. 6. Check the operation of the power lift gate. Check for any DTCs. If lift gate operation passes from all switches and there are NO DTCs in the LTM, return the vehicle to the customer. 7. If any DTCs are present after retesting or lift gate is inoperative, from any switches, perform Work Shop Manual diagnosis per Section 501-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081405A 2007-2008 Expedition, 0.5 Hr. Navigator, Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X, 2009 Flex: Reprogram The LTM, Includes Time To Check DTCs And, Lift Gate Operation, Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B > Page 53 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 54 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 55 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams C4174A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 56 C4174B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 57 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair POWER LIFTGATE MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the power liftgate motor assembly. 2. Remove the power liftgate module. - Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the 3 bolts. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Heated Seat Module View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 62 View 151-20 (Rear Seats) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 63 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 64 Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 65 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 66 Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 67 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module C329 C3162 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 70 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Module, Passenger Side C3036A C3036B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 71 C3036C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 72 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module C3322 C3326 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 73 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module C3327 C3328 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Controlled Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Climate Controlled Seat Module CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT MODULE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - When installing a new climate control seat module (CCSM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Before removing the climate control seat module (CCSM), carry out the appropriate steps in the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure. 2. Position the front passenger seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 3. Depower the SRS. 4. Remove the front passenger seat. 5. Remove the CCSM. - Disconnect the 3 electrical connectors. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the CCSM. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 8. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. 9. Install the CCSM software data. Carry out the appropriate steps in the PMI procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Controlled Seat Module > Page 76 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Heated Seat Module Front HEATED SEAT MODULE - FRONT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Position the front passenger seat to access the heated seat module. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. From under the front of the front passenger seat, remove the heated seat module. - Vehicles with power seat track, remove the 2 screws and lower the bracket (if equipped). - Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector. - Remove the screw and heated seat module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Rear HEATED SEAT MODULE - REAR SEAT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the second row 60 percent seat front riser-to-floor nut and bolt. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 2. Pivot the front of the 60 percent seat cushion upward. 3. Remove the screw, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the heated seat module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 81 C135 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 82 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The ABS module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. CAUTION: Do not allow any brake fluid or foreign material to enter the mating side of the ABS module or damage to the solenoids can occur. 1. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU). 2. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 3. NOTE: Visually inspect the ABS module terminals for damage before installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 87 C1554 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 92 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 93 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 97 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR) NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WACF) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 98 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 99 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 104 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module C228A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 107 C228B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 108 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Manual Climate Control Module C2357A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 109 C2357B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 110 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the 4 climate control module screws. 3. Remove the climate control module. 4. NOTE: Be sure the climate control module spacers are correctly positioned before installing the climate control module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 115 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 116 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Control Module: Service and Repair ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING MODULE Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Remove the 3 screws and the adaptive front lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 124 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 125 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 129 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 130 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 131 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 132 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 138 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 139 Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Ultra Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 140 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 144 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality has been integrated into the SJB. - The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 148 configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB into the scan tool. 2. Remove the driver door scuff plate. 3. Disconnect the 6 electrical connectors. 4. Remove the harness pushpin from the SJB. 5. Remove the nut. 6. Lower the SJB (release the SJB from the 2 alignment holes). 7. Push the red lock upward and press the 2 black tangs inward to release the B+ connector from the SJB. 8. Remove the SJB. Installation 1. Install the B+ connector onto the SJB and push the red lock tab downward. 2. Position the 2 SJB alignment tabs into the 2 holes and install the nut. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Install the harness pushpin into the SJB. 4. Connect the 6 electrical connectors. 5. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the driver door scuff plate. 6. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D and B2477. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. - If the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure was not followed when a new SJB was installed, the remote keyless entry (RKE) function (from the integrated keyhead transmitter [IKT]) of the SJB must be programmed, or the IKT RKE functions will be inoperative. IKTs can be programmed to the new SJB by cycling each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. If a new instrument cluster was installed, the IKT keys must be programmed to the new instrument cluster in order to program both the RKE and passive anti-theft system (PATS) functions. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool to the new SJB. 7. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 8. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. Carry out the SJB on-demand self-test, clear DTCs, and then retrieve all DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 153 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 154 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 155 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 156 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 157 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 158 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 159 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 162 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 163 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 164 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 165 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 166 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 167 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 170 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 171 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 172 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 173 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 174 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 175 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 176 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) Body Control Module: Service and Repair Driver Seat Module (DSM) DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 184 Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the DSM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the DSM into the scan tool. 2. NOTE: If the driver seat can be moved to a high enough position, the DSM screws can be removed without removing the driver seat. If necessary, remove the driver seat. 3. Remove the 2 screws. 4. Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors and remove the DSM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 185 5. NOTE: Make sure to download the DSM configuration information from the scan tool into the new DSM. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 186 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is NOT Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position (TP) sensor, and mechanical throttle body. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle when no power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h (30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (~0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. 6. The TP sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage - Signal return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 190 Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts) - 2 signal return (ground) circuits - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) 3. The pedal position signal is convened to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value is substituted for an incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 191 ETC System The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate corrective action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 192 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Since the IPC and the main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential common failure modes. The E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate failure mode and effects management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 193 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2) Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 194 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 4% - Out of range, limp home default position. - Greater than or equal to 4% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key ON, engine OFF. - Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 8% - Enable ice breaker mode. Used to clear potential ice buildup in the throttle body. - Greater than or equal to 8% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard stop) after key-up. - Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide open throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 216 View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 219 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 220 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 221 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 222 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 223 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 224 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 225 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 226 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 227 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 228 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 229 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 230 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 231 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 232 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 233 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 234 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 235 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 236 Engine Control Module: Connector Views C175B (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 237 C175B (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 238 C175E (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 239 C175E (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 240 C175T (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 241 C175T (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Disconnect the 3 powertrain control module (PCM) electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 nuts and the PCM. - Remove the gasket. Installation 1. Install the gasket and the PCM. 2. Install the 2 PCM nuts. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 244 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit (IC) internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 248 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 249 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 254 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 255 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 259 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 265 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 266 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 271 View 151-13 (Right Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 272 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams C310A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 273 C310B (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 274 C310B (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 275 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) operation. If a vehicle equipped with an SRS system has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, a new RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM is restored to its original condition. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 276 personal injury. CAUTION: - Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. If installing a new restraints control module (RCM), carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module installation (PMI). 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the floor console. 4. Disconnect the selector lever cable from the ball stud located on the shifter and remove the cable from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the inner floor console support bracket. 6. Remove the bolts from the inner floor console bracket support-to-instrument panel. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the front inner floor console support bracket. 8. Remove the inner floor console support bracket. 9. Press to release the locking tab and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 277 10. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 11. Remove the 3 bolts and the RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag RCM retaining bolts is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personal injury. Install the restraints control module (RCM) and the 3 bolts. Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 2. Make sure the large RCM connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. CAUTION: Placing the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical wiring connector into the RCM on an angle, may cause bad electrical connections and damaged components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - CAUTION: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the restraints control module (RCM), before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may cause component or connector damage. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 278 4. Connect the large RCM electrical connector. - Using the connector position assurance lever, pivot it toward the RCM, drawing the connector into the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Install the inner floor console support bracket. 7. Install the 4 bolts (2 each side) to the inner floor console support bracket. - Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 8. Install the screws to the inner floor console bracket support-to-floor instrument panel. - Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 9. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing. 10. NOTE: When installing the selector lever cable, make sure that the selector lever cable locking tabs are locked in place and the cable end is snapped onto the ball stud. Press the selector lever cable into the bracket and listen for the cable to click in place. Pull back on the selector lever cable to make sure that it is locked into the bracket. Also make sure that the selector lever cable end is correctly installed onto the ball stud. Pull back on the selector lever cable end to make sure that the cable end is correctly installed. Connect the selector lever cable end to the floor shifter. 11. Attach the electrical connectors to the front inner floor console support bracket. 12. Install the floor console. 13. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 14. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete programmable module installation (PMI). 15. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 279 Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 283 C3159 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE - MANUAL SEAT TRACK Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) module electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the OCS module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 6. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 286 Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 287 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Module - Power Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE - POWER SEAT TRACK Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a restraints control module (RCM) fault. - The restraints control module (RCM) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Center and raise the front passenger seat to its highest position. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front passenger seat. 4. Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) module electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 screws and the OCS module. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Install the front passenger seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 288 8. Repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 9. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Starter Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Starter Relay > Page 294 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Run/Start Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 297 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 298 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Starter Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 299 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 304 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 305 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 310 C1552 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams C127 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 (Rear End - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left C4009 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 321 C4011 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 322 C4010 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 323 C4012 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 324 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the parking aid sensor(s) electrical connector(s). 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams C127 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 334 View 151-22 (Passenger Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side C505 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 337 C605 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 338 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 339 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 340 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Open the cover, remove the screw and position the interior front door handle finish panel aside. 2. Disconnect the door lock control switch electrical connector. 3. Release the locking clips and remove the door lock control switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 344 C527 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 345 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 346 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 347 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door control switch bezel. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Depress the 2 locking tabs. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 352 Power Seat Switch: Locations Power Seat Switch View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 353 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear C4351 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 356 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Power Seat Switch C352 C3016 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 357 C355 C3026 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 360 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 361 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Seat Switch, 8- or 10-Way Power Seats Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 362 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Memory Set Switch MEMORY SET SWITCH Memory SET Switch Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch > Page 365 Memory SET Switch, MKX Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the driver door trim panel. Edge vehicles 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the front of the door trim panel. MK-vehicles 3. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the back of the door trim panel. All vehicles 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch > Page 366 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch-Front Seat Control Switch - Front Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation Warning: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. ALL SEATS 1. If possible, position the seat all the way up and center the seat in the front door opening. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair 3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat in the following sequence. 1. Carefully pull up and out to remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover from the cushion side shield. 2. Remove the safety belt anchor nut. To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat. 4. Remove the seat control switch in the following sequence. 1. Pull out and remove the seat control switch knob(s). 2. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 3. If equipped with manual lumbar, pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retailer. 6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 7. Release the cushion side shield clips and separate the seat control switch. 8. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair PASSENGER SEAT 7. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Refer to See: Relays and Modules/Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems/Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair PINCH STRIP SWITCH Removal and Installation NOTE: Left side shown, right side similar. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the pinch strip electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 370 3. Remove the pinch strip. - Remove the pin-type retainers. - Remove the grommet and route the harness out of the vehicle. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear View 151-23 (Left Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 375 View 151-24 (Right Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear C722 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear > Page 378 C822 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Front SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - FRONT Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. If possible, position the seat all the way up and center the seat in the front door opening. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the seat control switch in the following sequence. 1. Remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover. 2. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 3. If equipped with manual lumbar, pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer. 6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 7. Release the cushion side shield clips and separate the seat control switch. 8. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Rear SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - REAR SEAT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch > Page 381 Seat Control Switch Without Power Liftgate Seat Control Switch With Power Liftgate Removal and Installation Vehicles without power liftgate 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. Vehicles with power liftgate 2. Pull out and remove the power liftgate strut cover in the quarter trim panel. All vehicles 3. Remove the seat control switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Squeeze the tab at the top and bottom of the seat control switch and remove from the quarter trim panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch > Page 382 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat HEATED SEAT SWITCH - REAR SEAT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door handle bezel on the side of the affected switch in the following sequence. 1. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw cover. 2. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw. 3. Separate the rear door handle bezel from the door trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the clips and remove the heated seat switch from the back side of the rear door handle bezel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 386 C503 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-28 (Roof - With Panoramic Vista Roof) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 390 C912 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 391 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the overhead console. 2. Disengage the clips and remove the switch from the overhead console. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 396 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 397 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch C4353 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 400 C4333 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 401 C4216 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 402 C2269 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch - Manual Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Manual LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - MANUAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 5 liftgate release switch moulding nuts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. Depress the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch - Manual > Page 405 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Power LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - POWER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 liftgate release switch moulding bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. Depress the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 410 C3037 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 411 ABS Sensor Block: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 415 C124 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 422 C2015 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 423 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch screw and the switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 427 1. Remove the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Remove the 2 steering wheel rotation sensor bolts. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector and remove the steering wheel rotation sensor. Installation 1. If the arrow on the steering wheel rotation sensor ring and the arrow on the sensor housing are misaligned and/or the straight ahead position of the sensor is not known, follow these steps to align the sensor prior to installing the sensor: 1 Orient the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2 Connect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 3 Connect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4 Carefully rotate the sensor clockwise until it stops. 5 Rotate the sensor counterclockwise 2-1/2 turns. 6 Using the scan tool, read the steering wheel rotation sensor position PID (SWA POS). The PID should read approximately 0 degrees. If not, repeat the procedure. 7 Disconnect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 8 Disconnect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 2. NOTE: Slight rotation of the steering wheel rotation sensor ring is allowed to align the 2 arrows. Make sure the sensor ring arrow is lined up with the steering wheel rotation sensor housing arrow as shown and position the sensor into the multi-function switch housing. 3. Connect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 steering wheel rotation sensor bolts. ^ Tighten to 1 Nm (9 inch lbs). 5. Install the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. ^ If the steering wheel rotation sensor was aligned using the scan tool, diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) will be present in the restrains control module (RCM). Using the scan tool, clear the DTCs in the RCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 431 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 432 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the stability/traction control switch electrical connector. 4. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch from the instrument panel center finish panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 TSB 07-17-2 09/03/07 ABS LAMP ON C1165/C1175 AND/OR C1235/C1236 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge/MKX vehicles built before 6/1/2007 (FWD only) may exhibit an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning lamp and/or a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning lamp illuminated with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1165/C1175 and/or C1235/C1236. This may be due to a faulty rear wheel speed sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTCs C1235/C1236 and/or C1165/C1175 are present. If so, continue on to Step 2. For all other codes follow normal Workshop Manual diagnostics. 2. With the ignition off, proceed with the replacement of the faulted wheel speed sensor. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-09. NOTE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HARNESS ROUTING BRACKETS WHEN PERFORMING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. 3. With a new wheel speed sensor installed, make sure to torque the retaining bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in). 4. Clear continuous DTCs. NOTE THE ABS SYSTEM CONFIRMS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT BASED ON SEVERAL WHEEL REVOLUTIONS ABOVE 24 KM/H (15 MPH). DRIVE VEHICLE FOR AT LEAST 75 FEET AT OR ABOVE 15 MPH. IF WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL INPUT IS MISSING THE ABS LIGHT WILL ILLUMINATE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071702A 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.5 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace One Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) 071702B 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.7 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace Both Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 441 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 TSB 07-17-2 09/03/07 ABS LAMP ON C1165/C1175 AND/OR C1235/C1236 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge/MKX vehicles built before 6/1/2007 (FWD only) may exhibit an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning lamp and/or a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning lamp illuminated with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1165/C1175 and/or C1235/C1236. This may be due to a faulty rear wheel speed sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTCs C1235/C1236 and/or C1165/C1175 are present. If so, continue on to Step 2. For all other codes follow normal Workshop Manual diagnostics. 2. With the ignition off, proceed with the replacement of the faulted wheel speed sensor. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-09. NOTE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HARNESS ROUTING BRACKETS WHEN PERFORMING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. 3. With a new wheel speed sensor installed, make sure to torque the retaining bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in). 4. Clear continuous DTCs. NOTE THE ABS SYSTEM CONFIRMS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT BASED ON SEVERAL WHEEL REVOLUTIONS ABOVE 24 KM/H (15 MPH). DRIVE VEHICLE FOR AT LEAST 75 FEET AT OR ABOVE 15 MPH. IF WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL INPUT IS MISSING THE ABS LIGHT WILL ILLUMINATE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071702A 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.5 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace One Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) 071702B 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.7 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace Both Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 447 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 450 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 451 View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front C150 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 454 C440 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 455 C160 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 456 C426 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the retainers and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the 6 pushpin fasteners. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 459 ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The wheel speed sensor harness must be routed as shown or damage to the harness during vehicle jounce and rebound can occur. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 460 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the harness routing brackets. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor harness from the brackets. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 461 5. Disconnect the pushpin fasteners. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation FAN SPEED SENSOR (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch With (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 476 C107 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 477 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases., and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 478 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 483 C2064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 486 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS) Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS) BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH Edge MKX Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 493 Removal and Installation MKX 1. Remove the driver air bag module. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the steering wheel control bezel. All vehicles 3. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 498 C103 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 499 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cooling fan assembly. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads prior to installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 510 C271 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 511 Blower Motor Switch: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH The blower motor switch is mounted in the EMTC module and controls blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the blower motor resistor in all modes except OFF. The blower motor switch knob is removable and can be separately replaced. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Removal and Installation 1. Detach the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment. 2. Remove the glove compartment. 3. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. 5. Remove the blower motor speed control. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control > Page 514 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the climate control module. 2. Pull to remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control > Page 515 4. Release the 2 retaining tabs with the index finger on each hand, while depressing the blower motor switch shaft with the thumbs to remove the blower motor switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 519 C233 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 520 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 lower steering column opening cover bolts. 2. Detach the lower steering column opening cover. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor aspirator hose. 4. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor electrical connector. 5. Release the 2 in-vehicle temperature sensor clips and remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 6. NOTE: The in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly can be accessed from below the driver side of the instrument panel. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-29 (Front HVAC) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 524 C296 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporator Temperature Sensor Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR The evaporator temperature sensor contains a thermistor which receives a reference voltage from the dual-zone EATC or EMTC module. The thermistor then varies the resistance to the reference voltage based on the evaporator fin temperature. The resulting voltage is returned to the dual-zone EATC or EMTC module where it is interpreted as an evaporator fin temperature reading. The dual-zone EATC module or EMTC module maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by switching off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster when the evaporator temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels, and by switching on the A/C request when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. The evaporator temperature sensor electrical connector is located outside of the heater core and evaporator core housing near the accelerator pedal, with the sensor pigtail leading into the housing to the sensor probe which is inserted between the evaporator core fins. The evaporator temperature sensor is not available as a separate component. To install a new evaporator temperature sensor, a new heater core and evaporator core housing must be installed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporator Temperature Sensor > Page 527 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improve defrost/demist performance, and reduce A/C clutch cycling. NOTE: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 531 C1260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM will not allow the clutch to engage. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 534 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System. Also, refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 535 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 536 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE (ACP) TRANSDUCER SENSOR A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Typical ACP Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch assembly. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Release the 4 tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 544 C479 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 553 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 559 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module > Page 562 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module C463 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module > Page 565 C434 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 566 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 567 Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE AND RESERVOIR The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 570 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 571 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 572 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 573 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 574 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 575 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 576 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 577 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 578 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 579 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 580 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 584 C198 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 588 C2015 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 589 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch screw and the switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 594 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams C286 C287 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 595 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair LIGHT SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the light sensor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 604 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 610 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 611 View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 612 C2064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 613 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 614 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOPLAMP SWITCH Removal 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. NOTE: The stoplamp switch will be difficult to remove if the switch plunger is not depressed. A slight rearward force should be adequate to depress the plunger. With a light force (approximately 1-4 N [1-3 lb]), pull rearward on the brake pedal, rotate the stoplamp switch 45 degrees clockwise and remove the stoplamp switch. Installation CAUTION: It is very important to not press, pull or touch the brake pedal assembly during the installation of the stoplamp switch. Failure to follow these instructions may damage the stoplamp switch. 1. Without movement to the brake pedal assembly, install the stoplamp switch and rotate 45 degrees counterclockwise. 2. Connect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 618 C479 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 622 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Illumination Dimmer Switch View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Illumination Dimmer Switch > Page 627 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 630 C2298 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 633 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 634 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Illumination Dimmer Switch Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 635 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 636 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 637 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 641 C205 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 642 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 643 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 644 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left > Page 649 View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left C2996 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 652 C2997 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 656 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 657 Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 658 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 659 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 660 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 666 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 667 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 671 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 672 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 673 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 674 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 679 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 682 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 683 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 684 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 694 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 695 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 696 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 700 C107 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 701 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases., and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 702 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 708 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 709 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 710 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 711 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 712 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 713 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 714 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 715 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 716 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 717 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 718 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 722 C435 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 723 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 727 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 728 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 729 The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 733 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 734 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 735 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 746 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 747 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 748 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 751 C142 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 752 C171 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 753 C172 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 754 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 757 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Both sensors 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 758 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 759 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 760 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 761 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 765 C1121 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 768 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 772 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 777 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 782 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 783 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 784 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 785 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 786 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 787 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 788 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 789 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 790 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 791 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 792 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 793 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 794 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 795 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 796 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 797 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 798 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 799 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 800 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 801 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 802 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 803 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 804 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 805 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 806 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 807 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 808 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 809 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 810 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 811 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 812 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 813 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 814 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 815 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 820 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 825 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 830 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 831 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 835 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 836 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 837 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 838 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 843 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 850 C4168 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 851 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 852 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 857 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 863 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 866 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 867 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 868 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 872 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 873 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 874 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a suitable tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 882 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 883 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 884 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 889 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Locations Front Impact Sensor View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 894 View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 895 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 896 View 151-13 (Right Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 897 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 898 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor C1465 C1466 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 901 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor C3209 C3211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 902 C3248 C3249 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged SRS components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The tightening torque of the front impact severity sensor retaining nuts is critical for correct system operation. Failure to Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 905 follow tightening instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure the hood latch bracket and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note position of the 2 locator tabs on sensor for installation. Remove the bolt and the front impact severity sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 906 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - B-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the front seat forward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 907 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the front door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 5 retaining clips. 4. Remove the rear door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 2 retaining clips. 5. Detach the 2 retainers and remove the lower B-Pillar trim panel. 6. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 7. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow tightening instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note the position of the side impact sensor locating tabs for installation. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 908 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - C-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Fold down the rear seat backrest. 2. Depower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 909 3. Position aside the quarter trim panel. - Pull out on the quarter trim panel at the C-pillar to release the retaining clip to access the C-pillar side impact sensor. 4. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow tightening instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Note the position of the 2 side impact sensor locating tabs for installation. - Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 914 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver C3065 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 917 C3066 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 922 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 923 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 924 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 C3324 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 927 C3325 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 928 C3330 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 929 C3331 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 930 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) SYSTEM The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is standard equipment on all front passenger seats. For diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - MANUAL SEAT TRACK Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s) 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt anchor. 2. Depower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 3. Remove the front passenger seat. 4. Remove the manual seat track. 5. NOTE: After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat track. Mark the position of both seat track rails. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 6. Remove the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 933 7. NOTE: Outboard front cross brace screws shown, inboard similar. On the side with the affected OCS I-bolt(s), remove the 2 front cross brace screws. 8. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), disengage the seat adjuster handle spring and position it aside. 9. Separate the seat adjuster handle from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s). 10. NOTE: Outboard rear cross brace screws shown, inboard similar. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the 2 rear cross brace screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 934 11. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s). 12. Remove the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s) from the seat track rail. 13. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown. 14. NOTE: Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and retaining clip for installation. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt. 15. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 935 Installation All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 1. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring seal. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clips in the OCS weight sensor groove underneath the O-ring seal. 3. Unclamp the side plate with the installed OCS weight sensor bolt from the bench or table. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 936 4. NOTE: Slight rotational adjustment of the OCS weight sensors bolts may be necessary to install the OCS weight sensor bolts and side plate to the seat track rail. Install the side plate and OCS weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail. 5. NOTE: When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight sensor nuts must be installed. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail. Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft). 6. Install the seat adjuster handle to the seat track rail. 7. Engage the seat adjuster handle spring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 937 8. Install the 2 rear cross brace screws. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Install the 2 front cross brace screws. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 10. Install the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 11. Install the manual seat track. 12. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 13. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 938 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - POWER SEAT TRACK Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 939 Part 2 Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - If any occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt nuts are removed, new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts must be installed. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 940 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt anchor. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the passenger front seat. 4. Remove the power seat track. 5. NOTE: - Inboard seat track rail shown, outboard similar. - After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat track. Mark the position of both seat track rails. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 6. Remove the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 7. Remove the front retainer and the outboard seat track riser cover shield. 8. Remove the 2 retainers and the OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 9. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the nut from the seat track front cross brace. 10. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor(s). 11. NOTE: Outboard side shown, inboard similar. Separate the front seat track motor cable from the affected seat track rail. Then remove the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts from the seat track rail. 12. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 941 the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown. 13. NOTE: Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and retaining clip for installation. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt. 14. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. Installation All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 1. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring seal. Install the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip. 3. Remove the clamp and the side plate from the bench or table. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 942 4. NOTE: Slight rotational adjustment of the front seat track motor cable and OCS weight sensor bolts may be necessary to install the OCS weight sensor bolts and side plate to the seat track rail. Install the front seat track motor cable to the seat track rail. Then install the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail. 5. NOTE: When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight sensor nuts must be installed. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail. Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Outboard side shown, inboard similar. Install the nut to the seat track front cross brace. Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 7. Install the 2 retainers and the OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. 8. Install the front retainer and the outboard seat track riser cover shield. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 9. Install the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 10. Install the power seat track. 11. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 12. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair SEAT POSITION SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Raise the driver seat and then position it to the middle of the track. 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the driver seat. 4. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. Power seats Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 946 5. Detach the wire harness routing pin-type retainer from the seat position sensor bracket. All seats 6. Push apart then inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. 7. Slide the seat position sensor rearward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the seat position sensor. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 950 C356 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a suitable tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 961 C1121 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 964 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 968 C222 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 973 C222 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 978 6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. 8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. 10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Disassembly CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 981 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. 4. Remove the sensor. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor can occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 982 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 983 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Disassembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 984 CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. 2. WARNING: The TPMS band is under tension. Always use safety goggles or a face shield and gloves when removing the TPMS band/strap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in this sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 inch) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers can damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 985 of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap is positioned in the lowest spot possible for correct sensor and cradle retention. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 inch) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch - TCC: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 992 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 993 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 994 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 995 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 996 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 997 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 998 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 999 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1000 Brake Switch - TCC: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1001 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1002 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1003 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1004 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1005 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1006 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1007 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1008 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1009 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Overdrive Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1014 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1015 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1016 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1017 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1018 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1019 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1020 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1021 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1022 Overdrive Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1023 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1024 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1025 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1026 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1027 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1028 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1029 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1030 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1035 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1036 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1037 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1038 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1039 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1040 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1041 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1042 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1043 Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1044 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1045 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1046 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1047 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1048 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1049 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1050 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1051 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1056 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1057 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1058 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1059 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1060 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1061 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1062 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1063 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1064 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1065 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1066 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1067 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1068 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1069 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1070 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1071 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1072 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1073 Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1078 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1079 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1080 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1081 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1082 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1083 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1084 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1085 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1086 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1087 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1088 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1089 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1090 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1091 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1092 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1093 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1094 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1095 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1096 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1097 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1098 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1099 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1100 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1101 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1102 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1103 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1104 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1105 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1106 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1107 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1108 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1109 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1110 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1111 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 1120 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 1121 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 1127 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 1128 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 1134 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 1140 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1143 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1144 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1145 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1146 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1147 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1148 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1149 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1150 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1151 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1152 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1153 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1154 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1155 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1156 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1157 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1158 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1159 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1162 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1163 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1164 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1165 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1166 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1167 23. Remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Route the TSS sensor wiring harness through the cover and the transaxle case. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1168 2. Install the TSS sensor in the cover and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1169 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1170 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1171 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1172 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1173 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1174 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 19. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 20. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 21. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1175 22. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 23. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 25. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1176 26. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1177 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1178 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1179 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1180 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1181 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1182 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1183 23. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1184 3. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 4. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1185 5. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 6. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1186 7. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 8. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 9. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 10. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1187 11. Tighten the main control valve body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1188 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 15. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 16. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1189 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 17. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 19. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 20. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1190 21. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 22. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 23. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 1191 25. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1196 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1197 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1198 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1199 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1200 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1201 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1202 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1203 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1204 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1205 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1206 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1207 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1208 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1209 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1210 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1212 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch View 151-24 (Right Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 1218 View 151-23 (Left Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 1219 View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 1220 View 151-22 (Passenger Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Adjust Switch C504A C504B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1223 C535A C535B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1224 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch C701 C801 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1225 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Power Window Switch, RH Side Front C624 C648 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Adjust Switch Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1228 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1229 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switches Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1230 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1231 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 1232 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1233 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation Edge only 1. Pull the switch bezel straight up to unclip it from the door trim panel. MKX only 2. NOTE: LH front shown, all others similar. Pull up on the front edge of the switch bezel and pull forward to unhook it from the door trim panel. All vehicles 3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 4. Unclip the window control switch from the switch bezel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1238 C138 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1242 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 1245 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 1246 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 1247 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1248 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1249 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1253 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 1256 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 1257 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 1258 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1259 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1260 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 1270 Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 1271 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 1277 Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 1278 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 1284 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1285 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-7-3 Date: 080414 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1286 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1287 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-7-3 Date: 080414 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1288 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1289 NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 1292 Ride Height Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 1293 Bushing Fastener Tightening Height Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 1294 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ride Height Bushing Fastener Tightening Height Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 1295 Alignment: Specifications Ride Height Bushing Fastener Tightening Height General Specifications General Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 1296 Ride Height Bushing Fastener Tightening Height Ball Joint Deflection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1297 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment Angles NOTE: When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when adjustments are made to the rear toe, the rear camber will also be adjusted (in the same direction as the toe adjustment). When making adjustments to the rear camber, the rear toe will also be adjusted (in the opposite direction of the camber adjustment). It will be necessary to check the rear camber whenever rear toe adjustments are made and to check the rear toe whenever rear camber adjustments are made. Front toe is adjusted through the use of adjustable tie-rod ends. Front camber is adjusted through the use of the upper strut plate. Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees. Front caster is not adjustable on the vehicle. Rear toe is adjusted through the use of adjustable toe link cams. Rear camber is adjusted through the use of a cam bolt that attaches the rear lower control arm to the rear subframe. Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct affect on tire wear. Caster Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the ball joints when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. Toe Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1298 Positive Toe (Toe In) Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Ride Height If there is a ride height concern, such as the front or rear of the vehicle being higher or lower than normal or an apparent lean, it should be corrected before aligning the vehicle. Any heavy items such as tool boxes, sample cases or any other items should be removed. If no unusual load is present, check for damaged components or nonstandard replacement suspension components. To measure ride height, the vehicle must be in a level, static ground position with full fluids and a full fuel tank. Front Ride Height (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1299 Front Ride Height (Part 2) Rear Ride Height Measurement Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Shimmy Shimmy, as observed by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and observed by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering is used to describe poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation, felt by the hands on the steering wheel, that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with hands off the steering wheel. ^ A vehicle-related drift/pull, on a flat road, will cause a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and require constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. ^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind, road crown). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1300 Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Efforts may be said to be "flat on center." ^ Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. ^ In the diagnosis of a roadability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment Front Alignment: Service and Repair Camber Adjustment - Front Camber Adjustment - Front NOTE: Front camber is adjusted through the use of the upper strut plate. Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees. 1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the camber. 2. Remove the 4 strut upper mounting plate nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs). 3. Using a suitable jack, raise the vehicle body enough to allow the front strut upper plate mounting studs to clear the frame. 4. NOTE: Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees. Rotate the upper mounting plate 180 degrees. 5. Recheck the front camber settings. 6. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment Front > Page 1303 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment - Front Toe Adjustment - Front 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine OFF and, using a suitable steering wheel holding device, lock the steering wheel in the straight ahead position. 3. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the front toe. 4. Remove the steering gear bellows clamps. 5. Loosen the tie-rod jam nuts. 6. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the tie rod is rotated. Rotate the tie rods until the toe setting is within specifications. 7. Tighten the jam nuts to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamps. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment Front > Page 1304 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment - Rear Toe Adjustment - Rear NOTE: When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when adjustments are made to the rear toe, the rear camber will also be adjusted (in the same direction as the toe adjustment). When making adjustments to the rear camber, the rear toe will also be adjusted (in the opposite direction of the camber adjustment). It will be necessary to check the rear camber whenever rear toe adjustments are made and to check the rear toe whenever rear camber adjustments are made. 1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the rear toe. 2. Loosen the toe link inboard bolt. 3. Rotate the toe link adjuster cam until the toe setting is within specifications. 4. CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the suspension must be at the bushing fastener tightening position. NOTE: Do not allow the toe link adjuster can to rotate while tightening the bolt. Tighten the toe link inboard bolt to 200 Nm (148 ft. lbs). 5. Recheck the rear toe and camber. ^ Adjust as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment Front > Page 1305 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber Adjustment - Rear Camber Adjustment - Rear CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the suspension must be at the bushing fastener tightening position. NOTE: When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when adjustments are made to the rear camber the rear toe will also be affected. Also when adjusting the rear toe, the rear camber will be affected. It will be necessary to check the rear toe whenever rear camber adjustments are made and to check the rear camber whenever rear toe adjustments are made. 1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the rear camber. 2. Loosen the lower arm cam bolt. 3. Rotate the camber adjustment bolt until the camber setting is within specifications. 4. CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the weight of the vehicle must be resting on the wheels and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing damage may occure.. NOTE: Do not allow the camber cam adjuster to rotate while tightening the bolt. Tighten the lower arm cam bolt to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 5. Recheck the rear camber and toe. ^ Adjust as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Fuel Pressure 3.5 L engine running fuel pressure....................................................................................................... ...........................................................450 kPa (65 psi) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Typical Diagnostic Reference Value Measured/PID Values 600 RPM .......................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................... Hot Idle Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER Part 1 Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1316 Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe from the air cleaner. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the air cleaner bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. NOTE: No tools are needed to remove the air cleaner assembly. Removal should be carried out using hands only. Separate the 2 air cleaner feet from the rubber grommets and remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. NOTE: - Make sure that the 2 air cleaner feet are seated into the rubber grommets under the air cleaner assembly. - The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, which may cause personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. Remove the Schrader valve cap. 2. NOTE: This step will drain some fuel out of the system. Place the fuel in a suitable container. Install the special tool and slowly open the manual valve to relieve the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1325 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.29-1.45 mm (0.051-0.057 in) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 1334 Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1335 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................AYFS-22FM Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1336 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1337 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1338 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Removal LH side 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling from the valve cover fitting and position aside. RH side 2. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 3. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs. 5. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1339 NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the 6 spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the 6 spark plugs. 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1340 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the 6 spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil-on-plug boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs and the 6 bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. Connect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. LH side 7. Position and connect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling to the valve cover fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1344 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1345 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance A midrange clearance is the most desirable. Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ....................... 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) Exhaust .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1349 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve covers. 2. NOTE: The valve clearance must be measured with the camshaft at base circle. The engine will have to be rotated with the crankshaft pulley bolt to bring each valve to base circle. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. A midrange clearance is the most desirable: ^ Intake: 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) ^ Exhaust: 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) 3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet reflects the thickness of the valve tappet. For example, a tappet with the number 3.310 has the thickness of 3.31 mm (0.13 inch). If any of the valve clearances are out of specification, select new tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location. 4. If required, install the new selected valve tappets in the marked locations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-23-18 > Nov > 07 > Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold Drive Belt: Customer Interest Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold TSB 07-23-18 11/26/07 POWER STEERING BELT CHIRP/SQUEAL - COLD FORD: 2007 Edge, Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX, MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles, equipped with a 3.5L engine and built between 6/20/2007 - 6/29/2007 and 8/13/2007 - 8/24/2007 may exhibit a power steering belt chirp or squeal noise when cold. Turning the steering wheel to the stop position may also cause the slip and squeal. This may be caused by an incorrect power steering belt being installed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect power steering belt label. 2. If a white label Motorcraft(R) belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301-AB is present, then the vehicle has the correct belt and this TSB does not apply. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-4 diagnostics. 3. If a blue label Motorcraft® belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301 -BB is present, then the vehicle has the incorrect belt and it must be replaced. 4. Cut the old belt off and follow WSM, Section 303-05 for power steering belt installation. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072318A 2007 Edge, MKX 3.5L: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Power Steering Belt (Do Not Use with 8620C) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6C301 38 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-23-18 > Nov > 07 > Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold TSB 07-23-18 11/26/07 POWER STEERING BELT CHIRP/SQUEAL - COLD FORD: 2007 Edge, Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX, MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles, equipped with a 3.5L engine and built between 6/20/2007 - 6/29/2007 and 8/13/2007 - 8/24/2007 may exhibit a power steering belt chirp or squeal noise when cold. Turning the steering wheel to the stop position may also cause the slip and squeal. This may be caused by an incorrect power steering belt being installed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect power steering belt label. 2. If a white label Motorcraft(R) belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301-AB is present, then the vehicle has the correct belt and this TSB does not apply. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-4 diagnostics. 3. If a blue label Motorcraft® belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301 -BB is present, then the vehicle has the incorrect belt and it must be replaced. 4. Cut the old belt off and follow WSM, Section 303-05 for power steering belt installation. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072318A 2007 Edge, MKX 3.5L: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Power Steering Belt (Do Not Use with 8620C) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6C301 38 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 1368 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 1374 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Drive Belt: Exploded Views Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1377 Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams Front Engine Accessory Drive Front Engine Accessory Drive Power Steering Pump Belt Power Steering Pump Belt (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1378 Power Steering Pump Belt (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage. Visual Inspection Chart Visual Inspection Chart 3. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C compressor engagement chirp, power steering cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator whine. 4. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step. V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs 5. NOTE: Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be considered acceptable. If damage exceeds the acceptable limit or any chunks are found to be missing from the ribs, a new belt must be installed. Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard, install a new belt. 6. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and appropriate action taken. 1 Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new belt is not required. 2 Longer deposit areas building up to 50% of the rib height. This is not considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise is apparent, install a new belt. 3 Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a new belt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1381 V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling 7. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this, install a new accessory drive belt. V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 8. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1382 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1383 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1384 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. CAUTION: Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^ wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic transmissions. ^ wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: ^ if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: - the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. ^ if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. ^ if any of the accessories are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. ^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. ^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. ^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and can cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1385 Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists: ^ Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage, especially the mounting pad surface. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. This will result in chirp and squeal noises. ^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. ^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. ^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. 2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to release. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt in the area of the tensioner. 3. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring. 4. Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if necessary. 5. Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and repair any leaks. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner as necessary. 6. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner. Belt Tensioner - Dynamics The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner should move (respond) when the air conditioning clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without air conditioning clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt tensioner. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Removal CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley. 3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 4. Working from under the vehicle, remove the accessory drive belt. Installation 1. Working from under the vehicle, position the accessory drive belt on all pulleys, with the exception of the generator pulley. 2. CAUTION: Make sure the belt is correctly seated on all pulleys. Working from the top of the vehicle, position the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. 3. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1388 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Belt Power Steering Pump Belt Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley. 3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 4. Position the accessory drive belt off the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the Power Steering Belt Removal Tool between the power steering pump belt and pulley, turning the crankshaft bolt clockwise to remove the power steering belt. Installation 1. Install the power steering belt on the crankshaft pulley. 2. CAUTION: After installation, make sure the belt is correctly seated on the crankshaft and power steering pulleys. Position the power steering belt around the Power Steering Installation Tool and the power steering pulley. Make sure that the belt is engaged with the power steering pulley and rotate the crankshaft clockwise to install the power steering belt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1389 3. Position the accessory drive belt on the crankshaft pulley. 4. CAUTION: Make sure the belt is correctly seated on all pulleys. Working from the top of the vehicle, position the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. 5. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER Part 1 Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1394 Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe from the air cleaner. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the air cleaner bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. NOTE: No tools are needed to remove the air cleaner assembly. Removal should be carried out using hands only. Separate the 2 air cleaner feet from the rubber grommets and remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. NOTE: - Make sure that the 2 air cleaner feet are seated into the rubber grommets under the air cleaner assembly. - The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations Air Inlet Duct Cabin Air Filter A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles.EMTC vehicles are not equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with a screen in place of the filter to prevent any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air filter or screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access cover. A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter, but only a screen or a filter should be used, never both. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1398 Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation Air Distribution There are 2 sources of air available to the air distribution system. Outside air - Recirculated air Recirculated air is always used when the climate control assembly is set to the MAX A/C mode on vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) and can be selected in any mode except DEFROST. Vehicles equipped with dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) use recirculated air only when the RECIRC function is selected in any mode other than DEFROST, or when required by the HVAC module in the AUTOMATIC mode. RECIRC is a timed function when selected while operating in FLOOR or FLOOR/DEFROST mode, and will automatically default back to fresh air inlet in 5 minutes if operating with A/C ON at an ambient temperature below (50°F). When operating with A/C OFF, the RECIRC function will always default back to fresh air inlet in5minutes regardless of ambient temperature. Air distribution within the vehicle is determined by the airftow mode selected, or by the dual-zone RAYC system in the AUTOMATIC mode. The air distribution mode on vehicles equipped with dual-zone ~ATC can be ovemdden by the driver if desired. Airflow mode control doors are used to direct airflow within the heater core and evaporator core housing. Electric mode door actuators are used to position these airaow mode doors. Vehicles equipped with dual-zone EA.TQ use 2 separate temperature blend doors. This allows individual temperature settings to be selected for the RH and LH air outlets. The airfow mode doors are not partitioned for separate RH and LH airflow positions. Therefore, the airflow mode will always remain similar for the RH and LH sides of the vehicle regardless of the temperatures selected. Air enters the passenger compartment from the following outlets: Instrument panel registers - Floor duct outlets - Windshield defroster - Side window demisters - Rear footwell duct - Center console registers Passenger compartment air is exhausted from the vehicle through open windows or body air vents. Cabin Air Filter A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles.EMTC vehicles are not equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with a screen in place of the filter to prevent any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air filter or screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access cover. A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter, but only a screen or a filter should be used, never both. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1399 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles.EMTC vehicles are not equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with a screen in place of the filter to prevent any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air filter or screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access cover. A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter, but only a screen or a filter should be used, never both. Air Inlet Duct Removal and Installation 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, 2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the cabin air filter cover and the cabin air filter (if equipped) or air inlet screen (if equipped) 4. Remove the 5 fresh air inlet duct screws. 5. Detach the 4 fresh air inlet duct clips and remove the fresh air inlet duct. 6. Remove the 7 air inlet duct screws. 7. Remove the air inlet duct. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair DUST SEPARATOR Removal and Installation 1. The dust separator is serviced as part of the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister vent solenoid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, which may cause personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. Remove the Schrader valve cap. 2. NOTE: This step will drain some fuel out of the system. Place the fuel in a suitable container. Install the special tool and slowly open the manual valve to relieve the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1412 NOTE: - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. - The compressor-to-condenser discharge line consists of 2 separately serviceable lines. If only one line is to be removed, only carry out the steps qualified for that line. Both compressor-to-condenser discharge lines 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Condenser side compressor-to-condenser discharge line 4. Remove the front bumper cover. 5. Drain the engine coolant. 6. Release the upper radiator hose clamp and disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator. 7. Remove the engine cooling fan. 8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector. 10. Detach the 2 radiator brackets from the core support and position the radiator rearward. 11. Remove the condenser inlet fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 12. Detach the compressor-to-condenser discharge line-to-radiator clip. 13. Remove the condenser side compressor-to-condenser discharge line. Compressor side compressor-to-condenser discharge line 14. Remove the drive belt from the A/C compressor pulley. 15. Disconnect the clutch field coil electrical connector. 16. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket nut. 17. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 18. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. Both compressor-to-condenser discharge lines 19. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 20. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1413 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Evaporator Line CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1414 Removal and Installation NOTE: - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. - The condenser-to-evaporator line consists of 2 separately serviceable lines. If only one line is to be removed, only carry out the steps qualified for that line. Both condenser-to-evaporator lines 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling. - Discard the O-ring seals. Condenser-side condenser-to-evaporator line 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Drain the engine coolant. 5. Release the upper radiator hose clamp at the radiator and disconnect the hose. 6. Remove the engine cooling fan. 7. Remove the condenser-to-evaporator line bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Release the 2 radiator bracket clips from the radiator support and position the radiator rearward. 9. Remove the condenser outlet fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 10. Detach the condenser-to-evaporator line radiator clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1415 11. Remove the condenser-side condenser-to-evaporator line. Evaporator-side condenser-to-evaporator line 12. Remove evaporator outlet line. 13. Remove the 3 coolant reservoir bolts and position the coolant reservoir aside. 14. Remove the 2 power steering reservoir nuts and position the reservoir aside. 15. Detach the 2 wire harness retainers at the RH shock tower. 16. Remove the ground bolt at the RH shock tower. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1416 17. Disconnect the RH front wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 18. Detach the 2 condenser-to-evaporator line clips. 19. Remove the evaporator-side condenser-to-evaporator line. Both condenser-to-evaporator lines 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 21. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1417 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line EVAPORATOR OUTLET LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the ground strap nut at the RH shock tower. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet line bracket stud bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Disconnect the evaporator outlet line spring lock coupling. - Discard the O-ring seals. 5. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1418 8. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 1427 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 1428 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 1434 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 1435 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Material Removal and Installation CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the power steering fluid from the power steering fluid reservoir. 3. Remove the 4 pushpin retainers and the RH splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose > Page 1438 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering fluid cooler hose from the return line. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the return line at the steering gear. 6. Remove the 2 power steering return hose bracket-to-subframe bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose > Page 1439 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose > Page 1440 Removal and Installation CAUTION: When repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the power steering fluid from the power steering fluid reservoir. 3. Remove the power steering pressure line banjo bolt and disconnect the line from the power steering gear. ^ Discard the 2 seals. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (44 ft. lbs). 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the steering gear. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the return line. 6. Remove the 3 power steering line bracket-to-steering gear bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 7. Remove the power steering pressure line banjo bolt and disconnect the line from the power steering pump. ^ Discard the 2 seals. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). 8. To install, reverse removal procedure. ^ Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... PM-1-C Ford Specification .............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... WSS-M6C62-A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 09M04S1 Date: 100331 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1453 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on November 10, 2009. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? No STOCK VEHICLES Do not perform this program unless the affected vehicle exhibits the covered condition. SOLD VEHICLES Only owners with affected vehicles that exhibit the covered condition will be directed to dealers for repairs. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1454 NOTE: Heater core replacement should not be necessary if the flush is performed properly. Prior approval is required to replace the heater core. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and replacement of the heater core and/or cooling system flush related to reduced heater performance. ^ Vehicles that have had a heater core replacement or cooling system flush and are experiencing reduced heater performance will need to have this service performed, beginning with the heater performance evaluation. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter will expire on May 31 2010. ^ Refund Claiming Information (submit on separate repair line). - Program Code: 09M04 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - 0.2 Hrs. - Misc. Expense: REFUND RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Claiming information for 5 gallons of distilled water up to $1 .25 per gallon (submit as Misc. Expense code "OTHER" on the same repair line as the repair). ^ Program Code: 09M04 Misc. Expense: OTHER for actual cost, not to exceed $6.25 maximum Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1455 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this program is 50410. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected water pump inlet tubes and heater cores are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." Overview OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, cooling system corrosion may lead to contamination of the heater core. This contamination may, over time, lead to reduced heater performance. This service procedure is very extensive and detailed. Listed below are the sections of the service procedure along with highlights of important information. VERIFICATION Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1456 ^ Measure temperature difference in the center vents ^ If greater than 15° F (8° C), proceed to the service procedure ^ If less than 15° F (8° C), follow normal WSM diagnosis EQUIPMENT LIST ^ Rotunda Tool Kit # 303-1525 ^ Additional equipment needed WATER PUMP INLET TUBE ^ Replace the water pump inlet tube if the engine build date is on or before 4/1/2008 ^ Do NOT replace the water pump inlet tube, if the engine build date is on or after 4/2/2008 PRE-RINSE ^ Removes old coolant from the cooling system ^ Coolant MUST NOT mix with the VC-11 flush chemical VC-11 FLUSH ^ Removes contamination from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical temperature has to be between 135° F (57° C) and 150° F (65° C) for optimum cleaning performance POST-RINSE AND FILL ^ Removes VC-11 from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical MUST NOT mix with the new coolant Necessary to use 5 gallons of distilled water for the final system fill Verification VERIFY THE CUSTOMER CONCERN BY PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING HEATER PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 1. Idle the engine at shop ambient temperature of 60° F (15° C) or higher, until the engine is fully warmed up. 2. Set the front climate temperature control to the hottest setting. 3. Set the mode to panel/vent (with all vents OPEN) and make sure the A/C is switched to the OFF position. Do NOT set the temperature control to the recirculation mode. 4. Set the blower to the highest speed. 5. Idle the engine for 5 minutes with the hood closed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1457 6. Measure the difference in the discharge air temperature between the left-center vent and the right center vent as shown. The difference should be less than 15° F (8° C) to meet the performance requirement. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS LESS than 15° F (8° C), continue with normal Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostic procedures. Do NOT proceed with this Service Procedure. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS MORE than 15° F (8° C), continue to the Service Procedure. Service Procedure NOTICE: ALL STEPS OF THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MUST BE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO PROPERLY CLEAN THE COOLING SYSTEM. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE STEPS WILL COPROMISE COOLANT PROTECTION CAPABILITY. NOTE: This procedure must be performed at an ambient temperature between 60°F (15° C) and 90° F (32° C) for proper utilization of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. EQUIPMENT LIST Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1458 NOTE: Before starting this service procedure make sure that you have the equipment listed. NOTE: The dealer bulletin contains the parts list for this service procedure (see Attachment II) Necessary equipment for the cooling system flush: 1. Rotunda Tool Kit #303-1525 2. Two large radiator hose pinch-off pliers (not supplied with the tool kit) 3. One clean 5 gallon bucket (not supplied with the tool kit) 4. An infrared thermometer or equivalent (not supplied with the tool kit) 5. Safety equipment (eye protection and chemical gloves, not supplied with the tool kit) 6. AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (not shown, formerly Radkit Plus) 7. Shop water supply hose (not shown) 8. Radiator drain pan (not shown) WATER PUMP INLET TUBE NOTE: Dispose of old coolant in accordance with local state and federal laws. NOTE: On some of the affected vehicles the water pump inlet tube is painted on the inside surface. The flushing chemicals will remove the paint and contaminate the cooling system and components. 1. Place a drain pan under the radiator drain valve and completely drain the cooling system through the radiator drain (degas bottle cap should be loose for proper draining). 2. Remove the air cleaner as an assembly. ^ Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. ^ Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe from the air cleaner assembly. ^ Remove the air cleaner assembly bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1459 ^ Separate the 2 air cleaner assembly feet from the rubber grommets. 3. NOTE: The engine build date is on the engine code label, located on the RH cam cover or the front cover The date is positioned in the center of the label in a date/month/year sequence Locate and check the engine build date See Figure 1. If the engine build date is ON or AFTER 4/2/2008, the water pump inlet tube does NOT need to be replaced Proceed to Step 11. If the engine build date is ON or BEFORE 4/1/2008, it will be necessary to replace the water pump inlet tube Proceed to Step 4. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1460 4. Remove the coolant hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 2. 5. Remove the 3 thermostat housing bolts. 6. Separate the thermostat housing from the water pump inlet tube. 7. NOTE: The water pump inlet tube orientation can be determined by the length of the radius at the ends of the tube The longer radius end is Inserted Into the water pump housing. See Figure 3. Remove the water pump inlet tube from the water pump housing using a slight twisting motion The inlet tube must be replaced with a new inlet tube without paint on the interior surface of the tube. 8. Lubricate the new water pump inlet tube O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1461 9. Install the new water pump inlet tube into the water pump housing. 10. Install the thermostat housing. ^ Lubricate the thermostat housing 0-ring with clean engine coolant. ^ Install the thermostat housing and 3 housing bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). ^ Install the coolant hoses to the thermostat housing EXCEPT for the heater core inlet and outlet hoses See Figure 2. PRE-RINSE NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering Into the cooling system. 11. If the water pump inlet tube was NOT replaced disconnect both the heater core inlet and outlet hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 4. 12. Remove the 2 thermostat housing cover bolts and remove the thermostat. 13. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1462 Position the flush tool kit plug into the thermostat housing to control the flow and thermostat housing cover, and bolts Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). See Figure 6. 14. NOTICE: With the heater core inlet and outlet hoses off from step 11: ^ Connect the heater core inlet hose (1B - lower hose) to the heater return port (upper port) on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit drain hose to the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit hose-to-pump to the heater core outlet hose (OB) for the reverse flushing. 15. Route the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses under the thermostat housing and out of the engine compartment Make sure that the hoses are NOT kinked. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1463 16.NOTICE: To prevent any damage to the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses place shop towels between the radiator shroud and the hoses. Position several shop towels between the hoses and the radiator shroud See Figure 8. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1464 17. Place the flush tool kit pump onto a tool cart in front of the vehicle. Connect the fill hose from the heater core outlet to the pump. See Figure 9. 18. Position the flush tool kit 5 gallon bucket onto the tool cart along side the pump. See Figure 9. 19. Reinstall the air cleaner assembly and connect the MAF electrical connector. It is NOT necessary to secure the air cleaner assembly at this time. 20. NOTE: For measuring purposes it is recommended to use a clean 5 gallon shop bucket. Place a separate empty 5 gallon shop bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. See Figure 9. 21. Place the flush tool kit drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing into the empty bucket on the floor. See Figure 9. 22. Install the tool kit water valve onto the shop fresh water supply hose. Completely fill the cooling system through the degas bottle with fresh water until the water flows from the radiator drain. (NEW!) 23. Allow the radiator to completely drain. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 24. NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system. They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering into the cooling system. NOTE: If the vehicle is being lifted to install and remove the lower radiator hose pinch-off pliers the flush tool kit pump must be secured onto the radiator shroud while lifting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1465 Position and clamp the pinchoff pliers onto the upper radiator hose (see Figure 10) and the lower radiator hose (see Figure 11) as close to the radiator as possible. 25. Place the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket that is along side of the pump. The hose MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. 26. Using the shop fresh water supply, fill the flush tool kit bucket with fresh water. Use the tool kit valve attached to the shop fresh water supply hose to maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 27. Connect a shop air supply to the pump, with the fresh water supply on, and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 28. NOTE: Do NOT allow the tool kit supply bucket to become low or empty. This will introduce air into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition With the fresh water supply on, monitor and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 29. NOTE: Dispose of old coolant and flushing water contaminated with antifreeze in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. 30. After a minimum of 10 gallons of water has flushed through the engine, disconnect the shop air from the pump and turn off the fresh water supply. 31. Remove the tool kit bucket lid and empty the bucket. VC-11 FLUSH Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1466 32. NOTE: Both the suction and drain hoses MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. This will prevent any air from entering into the cooling system and causing an overheating condition. Reposition the drain hose from the 5 gallon bucket on the floor into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket on the tool cart. See Figure 12. 33. Remove the pinchoff pliers from upper and lower radiator hoses. 34. Install the pinchoff pliers onto the flush tool kit drain and suction hose closest to the flush tool kit bucket lid. See Figure 13. 35. WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. NOTICE: Bring the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to room temperature of 68° F (20° C) and shake well Follow all of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC1 1 instructions and Precautions. Add 2 gallons of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to the flush tool kit bucket that is on the tool cart Do not dilute the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 in the flush tool kit bucket (NEW!) 36. NOTICE: It is necessary to use the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) to remove any air from the cooling system. If air remains in the cooling system, the air will inhibit the circulation of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture and will cause an overheating condition and possible damage to the engine. Rinse the shop bucket and fill with fresh water Place the shop bucket so that the fill hose from the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) will siphon the fresh water out of the bucket. Install the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 onto the degas bottle. 37. Remove the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 from the degas bottle and install the degas bottle cap Make sure that the degas bottle is filled to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 38. Remove the pinch-off pliers from both hoses at the flush tool kit bucket. 39. Position one of the pinch-off pliers onto the upper radiator hose closest to the radiator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1467 40. Connect shop air supply to the tool kit pump. The pump will start to siphon the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 from the bucket into the engine. 41. NOTICE: With the heater in the OFF position start the engine and idle until the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) Monitor the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature using an infrared thermometer or equivalent in the flush tool kit bucket. 42. When the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 43. Disconnect the A/C high pressure cut-off switch electrical connector This will activate the engine cooling fans. It may take a few seconds until the cooling fans come on See Figure 14. 44. NOTICE: Make sure that the radiator is NOT obstructed for maximum air flow Any deflection of air may cause an overheating condition. NOTICE: The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST NOT EXCEED 15° F (65° C) or damage to the Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1468 engine may occur. If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the heater blower motor can be turned ON to reduce the mixtures temperature If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature STILL EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the engine MUST be turned OFF and the key left ON. The key MUST remain on for the operation of the heater blower motor to allow the engine to cool down. Continue the flush using the flush tool kit pump, circulating the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture through the cooling system. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the degas bottle to run low or empty This will allow air to enter the cooling system and will cause an overheating condition and prevent the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture from circulating through the entire engine and cooling system. (NEW!) NOTE: Allow the engine to idle for a MINIMUM of 2 hours The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST remain between 135° F (57° C) to 150° F (65° C) NOTE: To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture during the flush install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1469 To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture it is recommended to install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. See Figure 16. 45. EVERY half hour monitor the degas bottle for the correct level and measure the temperature in the tool kit bucket. DO NOT allow the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture to get below the COLD FILL LEVEL. If necessary, release cooling system pressure by loosening the degas bottle cap slowly allowing air to escape and the degas bottle to fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 46. After the engine has idled for a MINIMUM of 2 hours, turn the engine OFF and leave the key in the ON position. Turn the heater blower motor ON and select the highest blower speed. 47. Continue flushing until the cooling system cleaner/water mixture reaches 120° F (49° C) with the heater blower motor on high. The temperature can be identified using an infrared thermometer or equivalent to monitor the mixture temperature in the flush tool kit bucket. 48. Disconnect shop air from the flush tool kit pump. 49. Turn the ignition key OFF. 50. Connect the A/C High Pressure switch and the cooling fan motor electrical connector (if disconnected). POST-RINSE AND FILL WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 51. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Empty and rinse the flush tool kit bucket, and then fill with fresh water. 52. Using caution, slowly open and remove the degas bottle cap. 53. Using caution, open the radiator drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1470 54. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow the radiator to drain completely (degas bottle cap should be OFF). 55. Fill the degas bottle completely with fresh water and allow the radiator to drain. (NEW!) 56. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 57. Place an empty 5 gallon bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. 58. Remove the flush tool kit drain hose from the flush tool kit bucket and place the drain hose into the empty shop bucket. 59. Install pinch-off pliers on the upper and lower radiator hoses as close to the radiator outlets as possible. See Figure 10 and Figure 11. 60. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the flush tool kit bucket to run low or empty during the post-rinse and fill procedure. This will allow air to enter into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition. Keep the fresh water hose in the tool kit bucket and monitor the water level. Do not allow the bucket to run low or empty. 61. Connect air supply to the pump. 62. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1471 63. NOTE: Remove ONLY the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose in this step. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose. 64. NOTICE: Distilled water must be used for the final 5 gallon flush and fill. After flushing the system with a minimum of 10 gallons of fresh shop water, continue the flush using an additional 5 gallons of distilled water. 65. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 66. Remove air supply from flush tool kit pump. 67. Disconnect the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump and remove the drain hose from the shop bucket. Move the tool cart with the bucket and pump aside. 68. Remove the degas bottle cap. 69. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Open the radiator drain and completely drain the radiator. 70. Close the radiator drain. 71. Remove the Air Cleaner Assembly. 72. NOTE: A black residue may be evident after the flushing procedure. This is a normal condition and requires NO action. Remove the heater core inlet hose from the heater return port on the thermostat housing. 73. Remove the drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. 74. Remove the thermostat housing cover and remove the flush tool kit plug. 75. Install the thermostat and housing cover. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 76. Install the heater core inlet and outlet hoses onto the thermostat housing See Figure 17. 77. Install the Air Cleaner Assembly ^ Install the air cleaner assembly into the rubber grommets Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1472 ^ Install the air cleaner assembly bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). ^ Connect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe and tighten the clamp to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) ^ Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector 78. NOTICE: Using the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus), add 5.8 qts (5.5 L) for base models and 6.3 qts (6.0 L) for trailer tow models (vehicles equipped with an oil cooler) of 100% pure concentrated coolant. Use concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to the cooling system. Continue with the purge of air from the system until the coolant reaches 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. The recommended coolant concentration is 50/50 or -34° F (-36° C) using Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to distilled water, as measured with a hydrometer or equivalent. ^ Maximum coolant concentration is 60/40, -60° F (-51° C) for cold weather areas. ^ Minimum coolant concentration is 40/60, -20° F (-29° C) for warm weather areas. 79. Turn the heater to OFF. WARNING: ALWAYS ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE OPENING THE COOLING SYSTEM DO NOT UNSCREW THE COOLANT PRESSURE RELIEF CAP WHEN THE ENGINE IS OPERATING OR THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT THE COOLING SYSTEM MAY BE UNDER PRESSURE; STEAM AND HOT LIQUID CAN COME OUT FORCEFULLY WHEN THE CAP IS LOOSENED SLIGHTLY FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. (NEW!) 80. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to rpm and hold for 30 seconds. 81. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute to purge any large air pockets from the cooling system. 82. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) OR CVC-10-A (Canada). 83. Start the engine and let idle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature and the thermostat is fully open. A fully open thermostat can be verified by the radiator cooling fan cycling on at least once. 84. With the engine ON, thermostat open and the cooling fans cycled at least once, increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds. Then allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds. 85. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute. 86. Repeat Steps 84 and 85 a total of 5 TIMES to remove any remaining air trapped in the system. 87. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL RANGE of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle, and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada). 88. Make sure the degas bottle cap is installed to at least one audible "click." 89. Overlay the new cooling system label onto the degas bottle cap that has been provided by service management. 90. Using the IDS, clear any codes that may have been set during the flush procedure. 91. Service management will provide the Customer Information Sheet to the customer for insertion into vehicle's Owner Guide. This Customer Information Sheet will remind the customer that a revised type of coolant has been installed in their vehicle and will need to be used from this point forward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1473 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1474 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1475 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1476 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 09M04S1 Date: 100331 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1482 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on November 10, 2009. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? No STOCK VEHICLES Do not perform this program unless the affected vehicle exhibits the covered condition. SOLD VEHICLES Only owners with affected vehicles that exhibit the covered condition will be directed to dealers for repairs. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1483 NOTE: Heater core replacement should not be necessary if the flush is performed properly. Prior approval is required to replace the heater core. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and replacement of the heater core and/or cooling system flush related to reduced heater performance. ^ Vehicles that have had a heater core replacement or cooling system flush and are experiencing reduced heater performance will need to have this service performed, beginning with the heater performance evaluation. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter will expire on May 31 2010. ^ Refund Claiming Information (submit on separate repair line). - Program Code: 09M04 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - 0.2 Hrs. - Misc. Expense: REFUND RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Claiming information for 5 gallons of distilled water up to $1 .25 per gallon (submit as Misc. Expense code "OTHER" on the same repair line as the repair). ^ Program Code: 09M04 Misc. Expense: OTHER for actual cost, not to exceed $6.25 maximum Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1484 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this program is 50410. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected water pump inlet tubes and heater cores are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." Overview OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, cooling system corrosion may lead to contamination of the heater core. This contamination may, over time, lead to reduced heater performance. This service procedure is very extensive and detailed. Listed below are the sections of the service procedure along with highlights of important information. VERIFICATION Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1485 ^ Measure temperature difference in the center vents ^ If greater than 15° F (8° C), proceed to the service procedure ^ If less than 15° F (8° C), follow normal WSM diagnosis EQUIPMENT LIST ^ Rotunda Tool Kit # 303-1525 ^ Additional equipment needed WATER PUMP INLET TUBE ^ Replace the water pump inlet tube if the engine build date is on or before 4/1/2008 ^ Do NOT replace the water pump inlet tube, if the engine build date is on or after 4/2/2008 PRE-RINSE ^ Removes old coolant from the cooling system ^ Coolant MUST NOT mix with the VC-11 flush chemical VC-11 FLUSH ^ Removes contamination from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical temperature has to be between 135° F (57° C) and 150° F (65° C) for optimum cleaning performance POST-RINSE AND FILL ^ Removes VC-11 from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical MUST NOT mix with the new coolant Necessary to use 5 gallons of distilled water for the final system fill Verification VERIFY THE CUSTOMER CONCERN BY PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING HEATER PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 1. Idle the engine at shop ambient temperature of 60° F (15° C) or higher, until the engine is fully warmed up. 2. Set the front climate temperature control to the hottest setting. 3. Set the mode to panel/vent (with all vents OPEN) and make sure the A/C is switched to the OFF position. Do NOT set the temperature control to the recirculation mode. 4. Set the blower to the highest speed. 5. Idle the engine for 5 minutes with the hood closed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1486 6. Measure the difference in the discharge air temperature between the left-center vent and the right center vent as shown. The difference should be less than 15° F (8° C) to meet the performance requirement. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS LESS than 15° F (8° C), continue with normal Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostic procedures. Do NOT proceed with this Service Procedure. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS MORE than 15° F (8° C), continue to the Service Procedure. Service Procedure NOTICE: ALL STEPS OF THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MUST BE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO PROPERLY CLEAN THE COOLING SYSTEM. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE STEPS WILL COPROMISE COOLANT PROTECTION CAPABILITY. NOTE: This procedure must be performed at an ambient temperature between 60°F (15° C) and 90° F (32° C) for proper utilization of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. EQUIPMENT LIST Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1487 NOTE: Before starting this service procedure make sure that you have the equipment listed. NOTE: The dealer bulletin contains the parts list for this service procedure (see Attachment II) Necessary equipment for the cooling system flush: 1. Rotunda Tool Kit #303-1525 2. Two large radiator hose pinch-off pliers (not supplied with the tool kit) 3. One clean 5 gallon bucket (not supplied with the tool kit) 4. An infrared thermometer or equivalent (not supplied with the tool kit) 5. Safety equipment (eye protection and chemical gloves, not supplied with the tool kit) 6. AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (not shown, formerly Radkit Plus) 7. Shop water supply hose (not shown) 8. Radiator drain pan (not shown) WATER PUMP INLET TUBE NOTE: Dispose of old coolant in accordance with local state and federal laws. NOTE: On some of the affected vehicles the water pump inlet tube is painted on the inside surface. The flushing chemicals will remove the paint and contaminate the cooling system and components. 1. Place a drain pan under the radiator drain valve and completely drain the cooling system through the radiator drain (degas bottle cap should be loose for proper draining). 2. Remove the air cleaner as an assembly. ^ Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. ^ Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe from the air cleaner assembly. ^ Remove the air cleaner assembly bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1488 ^ Separate the 2 air cleaner assembly feet from the rubber grommets. 3. NOTE: The engine build date is on the engine code label, located on the RH cam cover or the front cover The date is positioned in the center of the label in a date/month/year sequence Locate and check the engine build date See Figure 1. If the engine build date is ON or AFTER 4/2/2008, the water pump inlet tube does NOT need to be replaced Proceed to Step 11. If the engine build date is ON or BEFORE 4/1/2008, it will be necessary to replace the water pump inlet tube Proceed to Step 4. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1489 4. Remove the coolant hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 2. 5. Remove the 3 thermostat housing bolts. 6. Separate the thermostat housing from the water pump inlet tube. 7. NOTE: The water pump inlet tube orientation can be determined by the length of the radius at the ends of the tube The longer radius end is Inserted Into the water pump housing. See Figure 3. Remove the water pump inlet tube from the water pump housing using a slight twisting motion The inlet tube must be replaced with a new inlet tube without paint on the interior surface of the tube. 8. Lubricate the new water pump inlet tube O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1490 9. Install the new water pump inlet tube into the water pump housing. 10. Install the thermostat housing. ^ Lubricate the thermostat housing 0-ring with clean engine coolant. ^ Install the thermostat housing and 3 housing bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). ^ Install the coolant hoses to the thermostat housing EXCEPT for the heater core inlet and outlet hoses See Figure 2. PRE-RINSE NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering Into the cooling system. 11. If the water pump inlet tube was NOT replaced disconnect both the heater core inlet and outlet hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 4. 12. Remove the 2 thermostat housing cover bolts and remove the thermostat. 13. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1491 Position the flush tool kit plug into the thermostat housing to control the flow and thermostat housing cover, and bolts Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). See Figure 6. 14. NOTICE: With the heater core inlet and outlet hoses off from step 11: ^ Connect the heater core inlet hose (1B - lower hose) to the heater return port (upper port) on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit drain hose to the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit hose-to-pump to the heater core outlet hose (OB) for the reverse flushing. 15. Route the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses under the thermostat housing and out of the engine compartment Make sure that the hoses are NOT kinked. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1492 16.NOTICE: To prevent any damage to the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses place shop towels between the radiator shroud and the hoses. Position several shop towels between the hoses and the radiator shroud See Figure 8. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1493 17. Place the flush tool kit pump onto a tool cart in front of the vehicle. Connect the fill hose from the heater core outlet to the pump. See Figure 9. 18. Position the flush tool kit 5 gallon bucket onto the tool cart along side the pump. See Figure 9. 19. Reinstall the air cleaner assembly and connect the MAF electrical connector. It is NOT necessary to secure the air cleaner assembly at this time. 20. NOTE: For measuring purposes it is recommended to use a clean 5 gallon shop bucket. Place a separate empty 5 gallon shop bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. See Figure 9. 21. Place the flush tool kit drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing into the empty bucket on the floor. See Figure 9. 22. Install the tool kit water valve onto the shop fresh water supply hose. Completely fill the cooling system through the degas bottle with fresh water until the water flows from the radiator drain. (NEW!) 23. Allow the radiator to completely drain. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 24. NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system. They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering into the cooling system. NOTE: If the vehicle is being lifted to install and remove the lower radiator hose pinch-off pliers the flush tool kit pump must be secured onto the radiator shroud while lifting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1494 Position and clamp the pinchoff pliers onto the upper radiator hose (see Figure 10) and the lower radiator hose (see Figure 11) as close to the radiator as possible. 25. Place the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket that is along side of the pump. The hose MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. 26. Using the shop fresh water supply, fill the flush tool kit bucket with fresh water. Use the tool kit valve attached to the shop fresh water supply hose to maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 27. Connect a shop air supply to the pump, with the fresh water supply on, and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 28. NOTE: Do NOT allow the tool kit supply bucket to become low or empty. This will introduce air into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition With the fresh water supply on, monitor and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 29. NOTE: Dispose of old coolant and flushing water contaminated with antifreeze in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. 30. After a minimum of 10 gallons of water has flushed through the engine, disconnect the shop air from the pump and turn off the fresh water supply. 31. Remove the tool kit bucket lid and empty the bucket. VC-11 FLUSH Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1495 32. NOTE: Both the suction and drain hoses MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. This will prevent any air from entering into the cooling system and causing an overheating condition. Reposition the drain hose from the 5 gallon bucket on the floor into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket on the tool cart. See Figure 12. 33. Remove the pinchoff pliers from upper and lower radiator hoses. 34. Install the pinchoff pliers onto the flush tool kit drain and suction hose closest to the flush tool kit bucket lid. See Figure 13. 35. WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. NOTICE: Bring the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to room temperature of 68° F (20° C) and shake well Follow all of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC1 1 instructions and Precautions. Add 2 gallons of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to the flush tool kit bucket that is on the tool cart Do not dilute the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 in the flush tool kit bucket (NEW!) 36. NOTICE: It is necessary to use the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) to remove any air from the cooling system. If air remains in the cooling system, the air will inhibit the circulation of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture and will cause an overheating condition and possible damage to the engine. Rinse the shop bucket and fill with fresh water Place the shop bucket so that the fill hose from the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) will siphon the fresh water out of the bucket. Install the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 onto the degas bottle. 37. Remove the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 from the degas bottle and install the degas bottle cap Make sure that the degas bottle is filled to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 38. Remove the pinch-off pliers from both hoses at the flush tool kit bucket. 39. Position one of the pinch-off pliers onto the upper radiator hose closest to the radiator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1496 40. Connect shop air supply to the tool kit pump. The pump will start to siphon the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 from the bucket into the engine. 41. NOTICE: With the heater in the OFF position start the engine and idle until the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) Monitor the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature using an infrared thermometer or equivalent in the flush tool kit bucket. 42. When the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 43. Disconnect the A/C high pressure cut-off switch electrical connector This will activate the engine cooling fans. It may take a few seconds until the cooling fans come on See Figure 14. 44. NOTICE: Make sure that the radiator is NOT obstructed for maximum air flow Any deflection of air may cause an overheating condition. NOTICE: The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST NOT EXCEED 15° F (65° C) or damage to the Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1497 engine may occur. If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the heater blower motor can be turned ON to reduce the mixtures temperature If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature STILL EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the engine MUST be turned OFF and the key left ON. The key MUST remain on for the operation of the heater blower motor to allow the engine to cool down. Continue the flush using the flush tool kit pump, circulating the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture through the cooling system. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the degas bottle to run low or empty This will allow air to enter the cooling system and will cause an overheating condition and prevent the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture from circulating through the entire engine and cooling system. (NEW!) NOTE: Allow the engine to idle for a MINIMUM of 2 hours The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST remain between 135° F (57° C) to 150° F (65° C) NOTE: To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture during the flush install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1498 To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture it is recommended to install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. See Figure 16. 45. EVERY half hour monitor the degas bottle for the correct level and measure the temperature in the tool kit bucket. DO NOT allow the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture to get below the COLD FILL LEVEL. If necessary, release cooling system pressure by loosening the degas bottle cap slowly allowing air to escape and the degas bottle to fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 46. After the engine has idled for a MINIMUM of 2 hours, turn the engine OFF and leave the key in the ON position. Turn the heater blower motor ON and select the highest blower speed. 47. Continue flushing until the cooling system cleaner/water mixture reaches 120° F (49° C) with the heater blower motor on high. The temperature can be identified using an infrared thermometer or equivalent to monitor the mixture temperature in the flush tool kit bucket. 48. Disconnect shop air from the flush tool kit pump. 49. Turn the ignition key OFF. 50. Connect the A/C High Pressure switch and the cooling fan motor electrical connector (if disconnected). POST-RINSE AND FILL WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 51. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Empty and rinse the flush tool kit bucket, and then fill with fresh water. 52. Using caution, slowly open and remove the degas bottle cap. 53. Using caution, open the radiator drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1499 54. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow the radiator to drain completely (degas bottle cap should be OFF). 55. Fill the degas bottle completely with fresh water and allow the radiator to drain. (NEW!) 56. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 57. Place an empty 5 gallon bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. 58. Remove the flush tool kit drain hose from the flush tool kit bucket and place the drain hose into the empty shop bucket. 59. Install pinch-off pliers on the upper and lower radiator hoses as close to the radiator outlets as possible. See Figure 10 and Figure 11. 60. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the flush tool kit bucket to run low or empty during the post-rinse and fill procedure. This will allow air to enter into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition. Keep the fresh water hose in the tool kit bucket and monitor the water level. Do not allow the bucket to run low or empty. 61. Connect air supply to the pump. 62. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1500 63. NOTE: Remove ONLY the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose in this step. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose. 64. NOTICE: Distilled water must be used for the final 5 gallon flush and fill. After flushing the system with a minimum of 10 gallons of fresh shop water, continue the flush using an additional 5 gallons of distilled water. 65. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 66. Remove air supply from flush tool kit pump. 67. Disconnect the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump and remove the drain hose from the shop bucket. Move the tool cart with the bucket and pump aside. 68. Remove the degas bottle cap. 69. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Open the radiator drain and completely drain the radiator. 70. Close the radiator drain. 71. Remove the Air Cleaner Assembly. 72. NOTE: A black residue may be evident after the flushing procedure. This is a normal condition and requires NO action. Remove the heater core inlet hose from the heater return port on the thermostat housing. 73. Remove the drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. 74. Remove the thermostat housing cover and remove the flush tool kit plug. 75. Install the thermostat and housing cover. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 76. Install the heater core inlet and outlet hoses onto the thermostat housing See Figure 17. 77. Install the Air Cleaner Assembly ^ Install the air cleaner assembly into the rubber grommets Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1501 ^ Install the air cleaner assembly bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). ^ Connect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe and tighten the clamp to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) ^ Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector 78. NOTICE: Using the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus), add 5.8 qts (5.5 L) for base models and 6.3 qts (6.0 L) for trailer tow models (vehicles equipped with an oil cooler) of 100% pure concentrated coolant. Use concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to the cooling system. Continue with the purge of air from the system until the coolant reaches 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. The recommended coolant concentration is 50/50 or -34° F (-36° C) using Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to distilled water, as measured with a hydrometer or equivalent. ^ Maximum coolant concentration is 60/40, -60° F (-51° C) for cold weather areas. ^ Minimum coolant concentration is 40/60, -20° F (-29° C) for warm weather areas. 79. Turn the heater to OFF. WARNING: ALWAYS ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE OPENING THE COOLING SYSTEM DO NOT UNSCREW THE COOLANT PRESSURE RELIEF CAP WHEN THE ENGINE IS OPERATING OR THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT THE COOLING SYSTEM MAY BE UNDER PRESSURE; STEAM AND HOT LIQUID CAN COME OUT FORCEFULLY WHEN THE CAP IS LOOSENED SLIGHTLY FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. (NEW!) 80. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to rpm and hold for 30 seconds. 81. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute to purge any large air pockets from the cooling system. 82. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) OR CVC-10-A (Canada). 83. Start the engine and let idle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature and the thermostat is fully open. A fully open thermostat can be verified by the radiator cooling fan cycling on at least once. 84. With the engine ON, thermostat open and the cooling fans cycled at least once, increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds. Then allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds. 85. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute. 86. Repeat Steps 84 and 85 a total of 5 TIMES to remove any remaining air trapped in the system. 87. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL RANGE of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle, and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada). 88. Make sure the degas bottle cap is installed to at least one audible "click." 89. Overlay the new cooling system label onto the degas bottle cap that has been provided by service management. 90. Using the IDS, clear any codes that may have been set during the flush procedure. 91. Service management will provide the Customer Information Sheet to the customer for insertion into vehicle's Owner Guide. This Customer Information Sheet will remind the customer that a revised type of coolant has been installed in their vehicle and will need to be used from this point forward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1502 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1503 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1504 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 1505 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 11.7 quarts (11.09 liters) With Trailer Tow Package ................................................................................................................... .................................................... 12.83 qts (12.14L) NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1508 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with bittering agent (yellow-colored) Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. VC-7-B Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. ............................................... 10.0 quarts (9.5 liters) Note: Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications mat vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1513 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ MERCON V XT-5-QM Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1514 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Check Fluid Level and Condition (All vehicles) CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level indicator shows the fluid below the minimum fluid level mark or internal failure could result. If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time, at highway speeds, in city traffic, in hot weather or while pulling a trailer, the fluid needs to cool down to obtain an accurate reading. The fluid level reading on the fluid level indicator will differ depending on operating and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating temperature range. Fluid Level Check NOTE: The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 80°C-93°C (175°F-200°F) on a level surface. Normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 32 km (20 miles) of driving and can be checked using the scan tool. Under normal circumstances the fluid level should be checked during normal maintenance. If the transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of fluid leaking, the fluid level should be checked. 1. With the transaxle in PARK, the engine at idle, foot pressed on the brake, move the selector lever through each gear and allow engagement of each gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position. 2. Wipe the fluid level indicator cap and remove the fluid level indicator. 3. Wipe the fluid level indicator with a clean cloth. 4. Install the fluid level indicator back in the fluid indicator tube until it is fully seated, then remove the indicator. The fluid level should be within the normal operating range. High Fluid Level A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or damage. Low Fluid Level A low fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of the transaxle seals or gaskets. Adding Fluid CAUTION: MERCON(R) V, MERCON(R) SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission Fluid, Motorcraft Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid and FNR5 automatic transmission fluid are not interchangeable transmission fluids. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transmission will cause transmission damage. If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through the indicator tube. Do not overfill the fluid. Fluid Condition Check Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1515 1. Check the fluid level. 2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be a dark red color, not brown or black or have a burnt odor. 3. Hold the fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain. 4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection. 5. If fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the bottom of the fluid pan, repair the transaxle and clean the fluid cooler tubes and fluid cooler. 6. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, the fluid cooler must be backflushed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1516 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Material 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 4. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine, run through all the gears, check the fluid level and run the engine for 5 minutes. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1517 6. Start the engine, run through all the gears and check the fluid level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1522 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil U.S. ........................................................................................................................................ Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil Canada ................................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil Ford Part Number: ................................................................................................................................ XO-5W20-QSP (US), CXO-5W20LSP12 (Canada) Ford Specification: .................................................................................................................................................. WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification NOTE: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Motorcraft MERCON ATF Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ XT-2-QDX Ford Specification ................................................. ............................................................................................................................................ MERCON Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1526 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Power Steering Fluid Leak Test NOTE: This test should only be carried out if a leak in the system has not been detected during a thorough visual inspection. Refer to Inspection and Verification. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification 1. Check the power steering fluid level. If necessary, add the specified power steering fluid. 2. Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap and tightly install the evacuation cap to the power steering pump reservoir. 3. Install the hose from the fill adapter manifold tee to the evacuation cap on the power steering pump reservoir. 4. Install the vacuum pump to the evacuation cap. 5. Using the vacuum pump, apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg) of vacuum to the power steering system. 6. Observe the vacuum gauge for 30 seconds. If the vacuum gauge reading drops more than 3 kPa (0.88 in-Hg) a leak is present. 7. Remove the vacuum pump. 8. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for more than 3-5 seconds. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Start the engine. With the engine at idle, raise the power steering fluid temperature to 74-80°C (165-176°F) by rotating the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times. 9. Visually inspect the system for leaks. If a leak is evident, repair as necessary. If a leak is not evident, add the specified UV fluorescent tracer dye to the power steering fluid. Use 14.78 mL (1/2 oz) of dye solution for every 1.89 L (2 qt) of power steering fluid. 10. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for more than 3-5 seconds. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Start the engine. With the engine at idle, raise the power steering fluid temperature to 74-80°C (165-176°F) by rotating the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times. 11. NOTE: On vehicles with rack and pinion steering gear, it may be necessary to remove the bellows boot clamp from the steering gear bellows boots to inspect for internal steering gear leaks. Using the special tool (UV lamp), inspect the system for traces of UV dye. Repair as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant and Capacity Capacity................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................0.55 kg (19 oz) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1531 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant and Capacity R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada).........................................................................................................WSH-M17B19-A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1532 Refrigerant: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DYE A fluorescent refrigerant system dye "wafer" is added to the receiver/drier desiccant bag to assist in refrigerant system leak diagnosis using a Rotunda approved ultraviolet blacklight. This fluorescent dye "wafer" will dissolve after about 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has been removed from the system. Additional refrigerant system dye should only be added if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been lost due to a fitting separation, hose rupture, etc. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant Lubricant and Capacity Capacity................................................................................................................................................ ...............................................................118 ml (4 oz) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1537 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant Lubricant and Capacity PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D....................................................................................................................WSH-M1C231-B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Master Cylinder WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or new installation, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. Disconnect the brake master cylinder outlet tubes. 2. Install short brake tubes with ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes without air bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows: 1 Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 2 Loosen the rearmost brake tube fittings until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the brake tube fitting. 3 Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 1542 4 Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 6. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tubes. ^ Tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 1543 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Material Brake System Bleeding Pressure WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if a new anti-lock brake system (ABS) hydraulic control unit (HCU) has been installed. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Carrying out the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Bleed the longest brake tube or hose first. Be sure the bleeder tank contains enough specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 2. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 1544 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 4. Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave the bleeder screw open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows into the container, then tighten the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 7. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear disc brake caliper to the RH front disc brake caliper, ending with the LH front disc brake caliper. 8. Close the bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the cap. Manual WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 1545 CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if a new anti-lock brake system (ABS) hydraulic control unit (HCU) has been installed. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Carrying out the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Install the master cylinder filler cap. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 3. Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 6. Tighten the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 7. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear disc brake caliper. 8. Place a box-end wrench on the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 9. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 10. Loosen the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 11. Tighten the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 1546 12. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LH front disc brake caliper. Gravity WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Performing the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 3. Bleed the rear disc brake calipers. ^ Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Open the bleeder screw and leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows into the container. Repeat for the LH rear disc brake caliper. 4. Tighten the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screws to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 5. Bleed the front disc brake calipers. ^ Place a box-end wrench on the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Attach a rubber hose to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Open the bleeder screw and leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. Repeat for the LH front disc brake caliper. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screws to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Depowering Procedure WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connector on a side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in side air curtain module deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the (SPDJB). 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 3. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1551 exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1552 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in safety canopy deployment, which may result in personal injury. - The safety belt pretensioners are pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in pretensioner or air bag deployment which may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories off. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1553 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. 9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the instrument panel (I/P). - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1554 10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the forward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the I/P. 12. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1555 14. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. MKX 16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH I/P finish panel. 17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the I/P. 18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1556 19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly. 20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket. 21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module. 22. CAUTION: Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the I/P and rest the module on the cross vehicle beam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1557 23. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag module. 25. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 26. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag module from the glove compartment opening. All vehicles 27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1558 29. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy module. 30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 31. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1559 32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB. 34. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation All vehicles 1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector to the seat cushion frame. 4. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1560 6. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. MKX 9. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1561 Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 10. NOTE: During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the hooks are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the I/P. Raise the rear of the passenger air bag module onto the 3 mounting studs. 11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts. 1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1562 13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly. 14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly. 15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the I/P. 16. NOTE: Make sure the RH I/P finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the RH I/P finish panel. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1563 17. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 18. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 19. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). All vehicles 20. Hook the glove compartment door to the I/P. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1564 21. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 22. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 25. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instructions may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will either: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1570 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1571 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1572 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1573 Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1574 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1575 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1576 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1579 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1580 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1581 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1582 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1583 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1584 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1585 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1586 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1587 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1588 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1589 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1590 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1591 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1592 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1593 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1594 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1595 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1598 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1599 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1600 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1601 Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1602 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1603 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1604 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Fuse Block: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1613 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1614 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1615 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1616 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1622 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1623 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1624 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 1625 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1628 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1629 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1630 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1631 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1632 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1633 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1634 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1637 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1638 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1639 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1640 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1641 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1642 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1643 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1644 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1645 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1646 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1647 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1648 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1649 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1650 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1651 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1652 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1653 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1654 Fuse Block: Connector Views C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1655 C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1656 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1657 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1658 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1659 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1660 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1663 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1664 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1665 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1666 Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1667 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1668 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1669 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1674 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1675 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1676 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1677 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1678 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1679 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1680 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1683 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1684 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1685 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1686 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1687 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1688 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1691 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1692 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1693 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1694 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1695 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1696 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 1697 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection TPMS Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. TPMS Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for this condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, perform this procedure to wake up the TPMS sensors. 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2 Adjust the air pressure in the LF tire (as necessary). 3 Activate the LF TPMS sensor, at least 2 times, using the tire pressure monitor activation tool. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5 If the TPMS indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures TPMS Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for these conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has received no signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator for this vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to an Oil Change Reminder Lamp. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: - Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just behind the front wheels. Position the jack so its lift area fits on the frame underneath the triangle. Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just in front of the rear wheels. Position the jack so its lift area fits on the frame underneath the triangle. LIFTING Lifting Points Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1715 CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the vehicle be lifted by the front control arms, front cross braces or rear control arms. Severe damage to the vehicle could result. - Do not allow the lift adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, front cross braces, stabilizer bar, or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the lift adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. 1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. 2. The front lifting points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just behind the front wheels. Position the hoist adapters directly under the frame rail with the triangle centered. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1716 3. The rear lifting points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just in front of the rear wheels. Position the hoist adapters directly under the frame rail with the triangle centered. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1721 6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. 8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. 10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Disassembly CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1724 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. 4. Remove the sensor. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor can occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1725 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1726 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Disassembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1727 CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. 2. WARNING: The TPMS band is under tension. Always use safety goggles or a face shield and gloves when removing the TPMS band/strap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in this sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 inch) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers can damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1728 of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap is positioned in the lowest spot possible for correct sensor and cradle retention. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 inch) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection TPMS Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. TPMS Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for this condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, perform this procedure to wake up the TPMS sensors. 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2 Adjust the air pressure in the LF tire (as necessary). 3 Activate the LF TPMS sensor, at least 2 times, using the tire pressure monitor activation tool. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5 If the TPMS indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures TPMS Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for these conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has received no signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1736 6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. 8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. 10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Disassembly CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1739 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. 4. Remove the sensor. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor can occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1740 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1741 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Disassembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1742 CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. 2. WARNING: The TPMS band is under tension. Always use safety goggles or a face shield and gloves when removing the TPMS band/strap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in this sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 inch) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers can damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1743 of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap is positioned in the lowest spot possible for correct sensor and cradle retention. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 inch) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds TSB 09-11-2 06/15/09 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEED BELOW 10 MPH (16 KM/H) FORD: 2007-2008 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 09-4-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Sport Trac, and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 1/28/2008 and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built prior to 8/18/2008 and equipped with 18 inch wheels may exhibit a noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace the wheel(s) that have the noise with updated service parts. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 1752 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft(R) Silicone Spray Lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) 4. Clean any excess lubricant off the wheel with a soft cloth. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091102A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 1753 MKX: Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning TSB 07-23-4 11/26/07 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEEDS BELOW 10 MPH (16KM/H) FORD: 2007 Edge 2007-2008 Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 07-19-6 to update the vehicle lines. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 8/17/2007 and 2007 Edge vehicles built prior to 8/24/2007 and equipped with 18" wheels may exhibit noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace wheel(s) with updated service parts for 18" Chrome (Bright) Clad Cast Aluminum wheel and Satin Clad Cast Aluminum wheel(s). Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 1758 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft Silicone Spray Lubricant and spray lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) NOTE NEW WHEELS WILL NOT REQUIRE LUBRICATION. 4. Clean any excess lubricate off the wheel with a soft cloth. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072304A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 1759 Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds TSB 09-11-2 06/15/09 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEED BELOW 10 MPH (16 KM/H) FORD: 2007-2008 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 09-4-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Sport Trac, and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 1/28/2008 and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built prior to 8/18/2008 and equipped with 18 inch wheels may exhibit a noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace the wheel(s) that have the noise with updated service parts. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 1765 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft(R) Silicone Spray Lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) 4. Clean any excess lubricant off the wheel with a soft cloth. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091102A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 1766 MKX: Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning TSB 07-23-4 11/26/07 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEEDS BELOW 10 MPH (16KM/H) FORD: 2007 Edge 2007-2008 Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 07-19-6 to update the vehicle lines. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 8/17/2007 and 2007 Edge vehicles built prior to 8/24/2007 and equipped with 18" wheels may exhibit noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace wheel(s) with updated service parts for 18" Chrome (Bright) Clad Cast Aluminum wheel and Satin Clad Cast Aluminum wheel(s). Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 1771 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft Silicone Spray Lubricant and spray lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) NOTE NEW WHEELS WILL NOT REQUIRE LUBRICATION. 4. Clean any excess lubricate off the wheel with a soft cloth. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072304A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 1772 Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1777 Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1778 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tool, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tool, press the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1779 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1780 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles Removal All vehicles CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the brake disc. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 4. Remove and discard the halfshaft nut. 5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the hub and bearing assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1781 All vehicles 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the wheel bearing and wheel hub. ^ Discard the bolts. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the wheel bearing and new wheel hub bolts. ^ Tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 2. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 3. Install the brake disc. AWD vehicles 4. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel bearing and wheel hub. 5. Install the halfshaft hub nut. ^ Tighten to 275 Nm (203 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut ........................................................................................................................... .............................................. 350 Nm (258 ft. lbs). Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 1794 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 1800 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel lug nuts ............................................................................................................................................................. 135 Nm (100 ft. lbs) in a star pattern Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Studs Wheel Studs Removal 1. Remove the wheel hub. 2. Using a press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel bearing and hub assembly. Installation 1. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. 2. Using a press, install a new wheel stud. 3. Install the wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1806 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Studs Wheel Studs Removal 1. Remove the wheel bearing and wheel hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. ^ Discard the wheel stud. Installation 1. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. 2. Using a suitable press, install the wheel stud. 3. Install the wheel bearing and wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: - Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just behind the front wheels. Position the jack so its lift area fits on the frame underneath the triangle. Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just in front of the rear wheels. Position the jack so its lift area fits on the frame underneath the triangle. LIFTING Lifting Points Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1810 CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the vehicle be lifted by the front control arms, front cross braces or rear control arms. Severe damage to the vehicle could result. - Do not allow the lift adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, front cross braces, stabilizer bar, or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the lift adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. 1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. 2. The front lifting points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just behind the front wheels. Position the hoist adapters directly under the frame rail with the triangle centered. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1811 3. The rear lifting points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just in front of the rear wheels. Position the hoist adapters directly under the frame rail with the triangle centered. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1823 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1824 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1830 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1831 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 C1451 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1834 C1452 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1835 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1836 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) OIL CONTROL SOLENOID Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. 2. Remove the bolt and the variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1843 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1844 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft bearing cap bolts ................................................................................................................. .................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Camshaft: Procedures Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter 1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines Special Tool(s) 1. Use a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft end play. 2. Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head. 3. Zero the indicator. 4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play. ^ If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install new camshaft and recheck end play. ^ If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head. Camshaft Surface Inspection 1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the contact area. ^ If excessive pitting or damage is present, install new components as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1853 Camshaft Lobe Lift Special Tool(s) 1. Use a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift. ^ Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading to figure the camshaft lobe lift. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. Camshaft Runout Special Tool(s) 1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout. Using the special tool, measure the camshaft runout. ^ Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1854 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1855 Camshaft: Removal and Replacement Part 1 Camshaft Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1856 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1857 Special Tool(s) (Part 3) Material Removal (Steps 1-40) WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Recover the air conditioning system. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. 3. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 4. Drain the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 5. Remove the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 6. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose and drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. 7. Remove the degas bottle. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 8. Remove the engine air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 9. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to Battery. 10. Disconnect the battery harness electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1858 11. Remove the nut and disconnect the power feed from the battery terminal. 12. Remove the bolt and the ground wire. ^ Detach the 2 wiring harness retainers from the cowl. 13. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the upper intake manifold. 14. Disconnect the upper evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube quick connect coupling from the purge valve. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1859 15. Disconnect the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose and 2 heater hoses from the thermostat housing. 16. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the transaxle control cable bracket. 17. Disconnect the transaxle control cable from the control lever. ^ Detach the control cable from the bracket. 18. Disconnect the transaxle control electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1860 19. If equipped, detach the engine block heater harness retainers from the radiator support and the A/C suction tube. 20. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C pressure tube fitting. ^ Discard the O-ring seal. 21. Remove the safety clip from the A/C fitting. ^ Disconnect the A/C suction tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1861 22. Disconnect the hose from the power steering reservoir. 23. Disconnect the fuel supply tube. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 24. Disconnect the fuel hose routing clip from the transaxle stud and position the fuel hose aside. 25. Disconnect the 2 engine wiring harness electrical connectors. ^ Detach the electrical connector from the LH valve cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1862 26. Remove the oil level indicator. 27. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the RH valve cover stud bolt. 28. Remove the bolt and the ground wire from the engine front cover. 29. Remove the nut, the ground wire and the radio interference capacitor wire from the engine front cover stud. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1863 30. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. 31. Remove the 4 nuts and the exhaust flexible pipe and Y-pipe as an assembly. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. 32. Remove the 3 pin-type retainers, the 7 screws and the radiator splash shield. 33. Remove the LH inner splash shield. 34. Remove the 2 secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1864 35. Using the special tool, disconnect the transaxle cooling tubes. 36. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil. ^ Install the drain plug and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs). 37. Remove and discard the engine oil filter. 38. Remove the power steering cooler bracket bolt from the RH side of the subframe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1865 All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 39. NOTE: Index-mark the driveshaft for installation. Remove the 4 bolts and support the driveshaft with a length of mechanic's wire. All vehicles 40. Remove and discard the RH front halfshaft nut. Part 2 Camshaft Removal (Steps 41-80) 41. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1866 42. Remove the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt. 43. Remove and discard the power steering pressure (PSP) tube-to-pump banjo bolt and the 2 seals. 44. CAUTION: Do not allow the intermediate shaft to rotate while it is disconnected from the gear or damage to the clockspring can occur. If there is evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Remove and discard the steering intermediate shaft bolt. ^ Separate the steering intermediate shaft from the steering gear. 45. NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Remove and discard the cotter pins and tie-rod end nuts. ^ Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1867 46. NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Remove the 2 stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nuts and separate the stabilizer bar links from the lower control arms. 47. NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolts and separate the lower control arms from the knuckles. 48. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts. 49. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1868 50. Position the special tool under the subframe assembly. 51. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets. 52. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. 53. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1869 54. Using the special tool, lower the subframe assembly from the vehicle. 55. If equipped, disconnect the oil cooler coolant hoses. 56. Using the special tools, separate the LH halfshaft from the transaxle and support the halfshaft with a length of mechanic's wire. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1870 57. Using the special tool, separate the RH halfshaft from the hub. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 58. Remove the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts. 59. Remove the bolt, the nut and the RH catalytic converter support bracket. 60. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1871 AWD vehicles 61. Remove the 2 RH halfshaft bearing support bracket bolts and the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly. All vehicles 62. NOTE: Position a block of wood under the transaxle. Install the special tools. 63. Remove the transaxle support insulator through bolt and nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1872 64. Remove the 3 nuts, the bolt and the transaxle support insulator bracket. 65. Remove the nut, bolt and engine mount brace. 66. Remove the 4 engine mount nuts. 67. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1873 68. Lower the engine and transaxle assembly from the vehicle. 69. If equipped, detach the engine block heater wiring harness retainers and position the harness aside. 70. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fitting electrical connector. 71. Disconnect the PCV hose from the PCV valve. 72. Disconnect the throttle body electrical connector. 73. Detach the wiring harness retainers from the upper intake manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1874 74. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. 75. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. 76. Remove the 6 bolts and the upper intake manifold. ^ Discard the gaskets. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1875 77. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor electrical connector. 78. Disconnect the PSP switch electrical connector. 79. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1876 80. Disconnect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. Part 3 Camshaft Removal (Steps 81-119) 81. Disconnect the heated PCV valve electrical connector. 82. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the RH valve cover and stud bolts. 83. Disconnect the LH VCT solenoid electrical connector. 84. Disconnect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1877 85. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the LH valve cover and stud bolts. 86. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 coil-on-plugs. 87. Remove the 11 stud bolts and the LH valve cover. ^ Discard the gasket. 88. Remove the bolt, the 10 stud bolts and the RH valve cover. ^ Discard the gasket. 89. NOTE: VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Install new seals if damaged. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1878 ^ Using the special tools, remove the seal(s). 90. Remove the 3 bolts and the power steering pump. 91. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 92. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer. ^ Discard the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1879 93. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley. 94. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal. 95. Remove the 2 engine mount studs. 96. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount bracket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1880 97. Remove the 22 engine front cover bolts. 98. Install 4 of the engine front cover bolts (finger tight) into the 4 threaded holes in the engine front cover. 1 Tighten the bolts one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern until the engine front cover-to-cylinder block seal is released. 2 Remove the engine front cover. 99. CAUTION: Place clean, lint free shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into the engine. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant. CAUTION: Observe all warnings or cautions and follow all application directions contained on the packaging of the silicone gasket remover and the metal surface prep. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1881 Clean all engine sealing surfaces, including the engine front cover and cylinder block. 1 Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material with a plastic scraper. 2 Apply silicone gasket remover, following package directions, and allow to set for several minutes. 3 Remove the silicone gasket remover with a plastic scraper. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain. 4 Apply metal surface prep, following package directions, to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is normal. 100. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) assemblies as shown. 101. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center position. Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts. 102. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center position. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts. 103. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1882 104. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing. 105. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals. 106. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner. 107. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1883 108. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide. 109. Remove the primary timing chain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1884 LH camshafts 110. Compress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in the collapsed position. 111. NOTE: The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable. Remove and discard the LH VCT assembly bolt and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt. ^ Remove the LH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket as an assembly. 112. NOTE: When the special tool is removed, valve spring pressure will rotate the LH camshafts approximately 3 degrees to a neutral position. Remove the special tool from the LH camshafts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1885 113. CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during removal. Verify the LH camshafts are in the neutral position. 114. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the bolts and the LH camshaft bearing caps. ^ Remove the LH camshafts. RH camshafts 115. Compress the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in the collapsed position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1886 116. NOTE: The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable. Remove and discard the RH VCT assembly bolt and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt. ^ Remove the RH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket as an assembly. 117. Remove the special tool from the RH camshafts. 118. CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during removal. Rotate the RH camshafts counterclockwise to the neutral position. 119. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the bolts and the RH camshaft bearing caps. ^ Remove the RH camshafts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1887 Part 1 Camshaft Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1888 Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1889 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Material Installation (Steps 1-43) WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. All camshafts 1. CAUTION: The crankshaft must remain in the freewheeling position (crankshaft dowel pin at 9 o'clock) until after the camshafts are installed and the valve clearance is checked/adjusted. Do not turn the crankshaft until instructed to do so. Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until the crankshaft dowel pin is in the 9 o'clock position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1890 LH camshafts 2. CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during installation. NOTE: Coat the camshafts with clean engine oil prior to installation. Position the camshafts onto the LH cylinder head in the neutral position as shown. 3. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. Install the 8 camshaft caps and the 16 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1891 RH camshafts 4. CAUTION: The camshafts must remain in the neutral position during installation. NOTE: Coat the camshafts with clean engine oil prior to installation. Position the camshafts onto the RH cylinder head in the neutral position as shown. 5. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. Install the 8 camshaft caps and the 16 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). All camshafts 6. CAUTION: If any components are installed new, the engine valve clearance must be checked/adjusted or engine damage can occur. NOTE: Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts. Using a feeler gauge, confirm that the valve tappet clearances are within specification. If valve tappet clearances are not within specification, the clearance must be adjusted by installing new valve tappet(s) of the correct size. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1892 LH camshafts 7. NOTE: Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts. Rotate the LH camshafts to the top dead center position and install the special tool on the flats of the camshafts. 8. Assemble the LH variable camshaft timing (VCT) assembly, the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the LH secondary timing chain. ^ Align the colored links with the timing marks. 9. Position the LH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts. 10. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1893 11. Remove the lockpin from the LH secondary timing chain tensioner. RH camshafts 12. NOTE: Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts. Rotate the RH camshafts to the top dead center position and install the special tool on the flats of the camshafts. 13. Assemble the RH VCT assembly, the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the RH secondary timing chain. ^ Align the colored links with the timing marks. 14. Position the RH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1894 15. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees. 16. Remove the lockpin from the RH secondary timing chain tensioner. All camshafts 17. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 60 degrees to the top dead center position (crankshaft dowel pin at 11 o'clock.) 18. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1895 19. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 20. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1896 21. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner. ^ Rotate the lever counterclockwise. ^ Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger. ^ Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing. ^ Install a suitable lockpin. 22. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from the timing chain and install the tensioner. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Remove the lockpin. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1897 23. As a post-check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks. 24. Install new VCT housing seals. 25. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1898 26. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 27. Install the special tools. 28. NOTE: If the engine front cover, engine mount bracket and bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19, 20, 23, 24 and 25 are not installed and tightened within 10 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover sealing surfaces including the 3 engine mount bracket bosses. ^ Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan-to-cylinder block joint and the cylinder head-to-cylinder block joint areas of the engine front cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1899 29. Install the engine front cover and bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19 and 20. ^ Tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 30. Install the engine mount bracket and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1900 31. Tighten the bolts in this sequence. ^ Tighten bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19 and 20 to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs). 32. Remove the special tools (alignment pins). 33. NOTE: The remainder of the engine front cover bolts (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21 and 22) must be installed and tightened within 60 minutes of the initial sealant application. Install bolts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21 and 22 and tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages: ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1901 34. Install the 2 engine mount studs. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 35. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front cover. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal. 36. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1902 37. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 38. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 39. Install the power steering pump and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 40. NOTE: Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed during disassembly of the engine. NOTE: Spark plug tube seal installation shown, variable camshaft timing (VCT) seal installation similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1903 Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals. 41. NOTE: If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 5 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover-to-RH cylinder head joints. 42. Using a new gasket, install the RH valve cover, bolt and the 10 stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 43. NOTE: If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 5 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1904 this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover-to-LH cylinder head joints. Part 2 Camshaft Installation (Steps 44-86) 44. Using a new gasket, install the LH valve cover and 11 stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 45. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the 6 coil-on-plug assemblies and the 6 bolts. ^ Tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 46. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the LH valve cover and stud bolts. 47. Connect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1905 48. Connect the LH camshaft VCT solenoid electrical connector. 49. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the RH valve cover and stud bolts. 50. Connect the heated positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve electrical connector. 51. Connect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 52. Connect the RH VCT solenoid electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1906 53. Connect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector. 54. Connect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 55. Using new gaskets, install the upper intake manifold and the 6 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1907 56. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 57. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 58. Attach the wiring harness retainers to the upper intake manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1908 59. Connect the throttle body electrical connector. 60. Connect the PCV hose to the PCV valve. 61. Connect the PCV fitting electrical connector. 62. If equipped, attach the engine block heater wiring harness retainers. 63. Raise the engine and transaxle assembly into the vehicle. 64. Install the engine mount and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1909 65. Install the 4 engine mount nuts. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). 66. Install the engine mount brace, the nut and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 67. Install the transaxle support insulator bracket, the 3 nuts and the bolt. ^ Tighten the nuts to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten the bolt to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). 68. Install the transaxle support insulator through bolt and nut. ^ Tighten to 175 Nm (129 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1910 All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 69. CAUTION: A new powertrain transfer unit (PTU) seal must be installed whenever the intermediate shaft is removed. Install a new powertrain transfer unit (PTU) seal. 70. NOTE: Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface for wear or damage and install new, if necessary. Position the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly in the PTU and in the steering knuckle and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 71. NOTE: Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface for wear or damage and install new if necessary. Position the RH halfshaft/intermediate shaft assembly in the transaxle and in the steering knuckle and install the 2 stud bolts. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 72. NOTE: Do not tighten the 2 catalytic converter support bracket bolts at this time. Install the converter support bracket and the 2 bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1911 73. Install the catalytic converter bracket bolt and the nut. 1 Tighten the nut to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 2 Tighten the bolt to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 74. Tighten the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). All vehicles 75. NOTE: Prior to installation of the halfshaft, inspect the halfshaft sealing surface for wear or damage and install new, if necessary. Install the LH halfshaft into the transaxle. 76. If equipped, connect the oil cooler coolant hoses. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1912 77. Using the special tool, raise the subframe into the installed position. 78. Install the 2 middle subframe nuts. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 79. Install the 2 front subframe nuts. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1913 80. Position the subframe support brackets in place and loosely install the 4 bolts. 81. Install the 2 rear subframe bracket nuts. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 82. Tighten the 4 subframe support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs). 83. Position the lower bumper on the subframe and install the 3 LH nuts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1914 84. Install the 3 RH lower bumper-to-subframe nuts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 85. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Install the ball joints in the steering knuckles and install the pinch bolts. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). 86. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Position the stabilizer bar links in the lower control arms and install the nuts. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). Part 3 Camshaft Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1915 Installation (Steps 87-130) 87. NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Install the tie-rod ends and nuts. ^ Tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). ^ Install new cotter pins. 88. CAUTION: Do not allow the intermediate shaft to rotate while it is disconnected from the gear or damage to the clockspring can occur. If there is evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Install the intermediate shaft onto the steering gear and install a new bolt. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 89. Using a new banjo bolt and 2 new seals, install the PSP tube. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 90. Install the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt. ^ Tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1916 91. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 92. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install a new RH front halfshaft nut. ^ Tighten to 350 Nm (258 ft. lbs). AWD vehicles 93. Line up the index marks on the rear driveshaft to the index marks on the PTU flange made during removal and install the 4 bolts. ^ Tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). All vehicles 94. Install the power steering cooler bracket bolt to the RH side of the subframe. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1917 95. Connect the power steering cooler hose. 96. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing the oil filter. Install a new engine oil filter. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 97. Connect the 2 transmission fluid cooler tubes. 98. Install the 2 secondary latches onto the transmission fluid cooler tubes. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1918 99. Install the LH inner splash shield. 100. Install the radiator splash shield, the 3 pin-type retainers and the 7 screws. 101. Using a new gasket, install the Y-pipe and exhaust flexible pipe assembly and 4 new nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 102. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 103. Install the ground wire, the radio interference capacitor wire and the nut to the engine front cover stud. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1919 104. Install the ground wire and bolt to the engine front cover. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 105. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the RH valve cover stud bolt. 106. Install the oil level indicator. 107. Connect the 2 engine wiring harness electrical connectors. ^ Attach the electrical connector to the LH valve cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1920 108. Connect the fuel hose routing clip to the transaxle stud. 109. Connect the fuel supply tube. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 110. Connect the hose to the power steering reservoir. 111. Connect the A/C suction tube fitting. ^ Install the safety clip onto the A/C fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1921 112. Using a new O-ring seal, connect the A/C pressure tube fitting and install the nut. ^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs). 113. If equipped, attach the engine block heater harness retainers from to the radiator support and the A/C suction tube. 114. Connect the transaxle control electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1922 115. Attach the control cable to the bracket. ^ Connect the transaxle control cable to the control lever. 116. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the transaxle control cable bracket. 117. Connect the upper radiator hose, lower radiator hose and 2 heater hoses to the thermostat housing. 118. Connect the upper evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube quick connect coupling. to the purge valve. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1923 119. Connect the vacuum hose to the upper intake manifold. 120. Install the ground wire and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Attach the 2 wiring harness retainers to the cowl. 121. Connect the power feed to the battery terminal and install the nut. ^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs). 122. Connect the battery harness electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1924 123. Install the battery tray. For additional information, refer to Battery. 124. Install the engine air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 125. Install the degas bottle. 126. Install the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. 127. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. 128. Fill and bleed the cooling system. 129. Fill the power steering system. 130. Recharge the air conditioning system. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection Valve Tappet Inspection OHC engines 1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident, inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Replace components as necessary. Push rod engines Push rod engines Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal Valve Tappets CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. Depending on the valve tappets being serviced, remove the LH and/or the RH camshafts. 2. CAUTION: If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same positions. Mark the components for installation into their original locations. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1930 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Installation Valve Tappets Material CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. CAUTION: The valve tappets must be installed in their original positions. NOTE: Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation. Install the valve tappets. 2. Depending on the valve tappets being serviced, install the LH and/or the RH camshafts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1939 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1940 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1946 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 1947 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Parking Brake Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 1953 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 1959 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 C1451 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 1962 C1452 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1963 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1964 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Bore diameter Grade 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 59.866-59.872 mm (2.3569-2.3571 inch) Grade 2.......................................................................................................................................................... 59.873-59.879 mm (2.3572-2.3574 inch) Grade 3.......................................................................................................................................................... 59.880-59.886 mm (2.3574-2.3577 inch) Bearing-to-crankshaft clearance........................................................................................................... ............................................................................... - Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Piston-to-connecting rod clearance...................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.7 mm (0.1 inch) Rod-to-pin clearance Standard............................................................................................................................................... ............. 0.007-0.021 mm (0.0002-0.0008 inch) Service limit............................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... Pin bore diameter................................................................................................................................. ................... 23.007-23.019 mm (0.905-0.906 inch) Rod length (center-to-center).............................. ............................................................................................................................. 152.68 mm (6.01 inch) Rod maximum allowed bend....................................................................................................... .................................................. 0.038 mm (0.0014 inch) Rod maximum allowed twist....................... ................................................................................................................................... 0.050 mm (0.0019 inch) Rod bearing Bore diameter Grade 1.................................................................................................................................................... 59.866-59.872 mm (2.3569-2.3571 inch) Grade 2.................................................................................................................................................... 59.873-59.879 mm (2.3572-2.3574 inch) Grade 3.................................................................................................................................................... 59.880-59.886 mm (2.3574-2.3577 inch) Bearing-to-crankshaft clearance........................................................................................................... ......................................................................... Rod side clearance (assembled to crank) Standard............................................................................................................................................... ............. 0.175-0.425 mm (0.0068-0.0167 inch) Service limit............................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... - Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt Discard the bolt. First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs). Second pass ....................................................... ................................................................................................................................. Loosen one full turn Third pass ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs). Final pass ...................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... Tighten 90° Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Main bearing journal Diameter............................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 67.5 mm (2.657 inch) Maximum taper.......................................................... ............................................................................................................ 0.004 mm (0.00015 inch) Maximum out-of-round......................................................................................................................... ................................. 0.006 mm (0.00023 inch) Journal-to-cylinder block clearance........................... ................................................................................................................................................... Main bearing bore inside diameter...................................................................................................................... 72.400-72.424 mm (2.8503-2.8513 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Main bearing journal Diameter............................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 67.5 mm (2.657 inch) Maximum taper.......................................................... ............................................................................................................ 0.004 mm (0.00015 inch) Maximum out-of-round......................................................................................................................... ................................. 0.006 mm (0.00023 inch) Journal-to-cylinder block clearance........................... ................................................................................................................................................... Connecting rod journal Diameter............................................................................................................................................... ............. 55.983-56.003 mm (2.204-2.205 inch) Maximum taper......................................................... ............................................................................................................. 0.004 mm (0.00015 inch) Maximum out-of-round......................................................................................................................... ................................. 0.006 mm (0.00023 inch) Maximum end play.................................................................................................................................................. 0.101-0.291 mm (0.0039-0.0114 inch) Main bearing bore inside diameter...................................................................................................................... 72.400-72.424 mm (2.8503-2.8513 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1981 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft End Play Special Tool(s) 1. Measure the crankshaft end play. Use a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure crankshaft end play. 2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block. 3. Zero the indicator. 4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play. ^ If crankshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new crankshaft thrust washer or crankshaft thrust main bearing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Block Heater Block Heater Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 4. Remove the block heater cover. 5. CAUTION: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components, or damage to the wiring can occur. Disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 6. Remove the block heater. ^ To install, tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt Discard the bolt. First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs). Second pass ....................................................... ................................................................................................................................. Loosen one full turn Third pass ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs). Final pass ...................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... Tighten 90° Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1988 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Diagrams Lower End Components - Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1989 Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1990 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer. ^ Discard the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1991 4. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley. Installation 1. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal inner lip with clean engine oil. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley. 3. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1992 4. Install the accessory drive belt and the power steering belt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Diameter - single grade....................................................................................................................................... 92.476-92.490 mm (3.6407-3.6413 inch) Piston-to-cylinder bore clearance........................................................................................................................ 0.010 to 0.044 mm (0.0003-0.0017 inch) Ring end gap Compression (top, gauge diameter)....................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.25 mm (0.0059-0.0098 inch) Compression (bottom, gauge diameter)................................................................................................................. 0.30-0.55 mm (0.0118-0.0216 inch) Oil ring (steel rail, gauge diameter)....................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.45 mm (0.0059-0.0177 inch) Ring groove width Compression (top)............................................................................................................................................... 1.230-1.25 mm (0.0484-0.0492 inch) Compression (bottom)......................................................................................................................................... 1.530-1.55 mm (0.0602-0.0610 inch) Oil ring....................................................................................... ........................................................................... 2.53-2.55 mm (0.0996-0.1003 inch) Ring width Upper comp ring................................................................................................................................................... 1.17-1.19 mm (0.0460-0.0468 inch) Lower comp ring................................................................................................................................................... 1.47-1.49 mm (0.0578-0.0586 inch) Ring-to-groove clearance (upper and lower compression rings)............................................................................. 0.040-0.080 mm (0.0015-0.0031 inch) Piston Pin Bore diameter................................................................................................................................................ 23.002-23.006 mm (0.9055-0.9057 inch) Pin diameter........................................................................ .......................................................................... 22.998-23.000 mm (0.9054-0.9055 inch) Pin length. .............................................................................................................................................................. .................. 55.975 mm (2.203 inch) Pin-to-piston fit........................................................................................................................................... 0.002 to 0.008 mm (0.00007-0.0003 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Rings Ring end gap Compression (top, gauge diameter)....................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.25 mm (0.0059-0.0098 inch) Compression (bottom, gauge diameter)................................................................................................................. 0.30-0.55 mm (0.0118-0.0216 inch) Oil ring (steel rail, gauge diameter)....................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.45 mm (0.0059-0.0177 inch) Ring groove width Compression (top)............................................................................................................................................... 1.230-1.25 mm (0.0484-0.0492 inch) Compression (bottom)......................................................................................................................................... 1.530-1.55 mm (0.0602-0.0610 inch) Oil ring....................................................................................... ........................................................................... 2.53-2.55 mm (0.0996-0.1003 inch) Ring width Upper comp ring................................................................................................................................................... 1.17-1.19 mm (0.0460-0.0468 inch) Lower comp ring................................................................................................................................................... 1.47-1.49 mm (0.0578-0.0586 inch) Ring-to-groove clearance (upper and lower compression rings)............................................................................. 0.040-0.080 mm (0.0015-0.0031 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance A midrange clearance is the most desirable. Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ....................... 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) Exhaust .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2003 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve covers. 2. NOTE: The valve clearance must be measured with the camshaft at base circle. The engine will have to be rotated with the crankshaft pulley bolt to bring each valve to base circle. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. A midrange clearance is the most desirable: ^ Intake: 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) ^ Exhaust: 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) 3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet reflects the thickness of the valve tappet. For example, a tappet with the number 3.310 has the thickness of 3.31 mm (0.13 inch). If any of the valve clearances are out of specification, select new tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location. 4. If required, install the new selected valve tappets in the marked locations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, which may cause personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. Remove the Schrader valve cap. 2. NOTE: This step will drain some fuel out of the system. Place the fuel in a suitable container. Install the special tool and slowly open the manual valve to relieve the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - LH Valve Cover - LH Special Tool(s) Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2011 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2012 Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. Remove the crankcase vent tube. 2. Remove the LH ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 3. Remove the oil level indicator. 4. Disconnect the LH variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector. 5. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the valve cover and the stud bolts. 6. Remove the 11 stud bolts and the LH valve cover. ^ Discard the gasket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2013 7. NOTE: VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals. ^ Using the special tools, remove the seal(s). 8. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and engine front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. Installation 1. NOTE: Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed during disassembly of the engine. NOTE: Spark plug tube seal installation shown, VCT seal installation similar. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2014 2. NOTE: If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 5 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover-to-LH cylinder head joints. 3. Using a new gasket, install the LH valve cover and 11 stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 4. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the valve cover and the stud bolts. 5. Connect the LH VCT solenoid electrical connector. 6. Install the oil level indicator. 7. Install the LH ignition coils. 8. Install the crankcase vent tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2015 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - RH Valve Cover - RH Special Tool(s) Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2016 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2017 Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. Remove the RH ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition System. 2. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and pin-type retainer. 4. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the 3 RH fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Disconnect the heated positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2018 8. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the RH valve cover and the stud bolts. 9. Remove the bolt, the 10 stud bolts and the RH valve cover. ^ Discard the gasket. 10. NOTE: VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals. ^ Using the special tools, remove the seal(s). 11. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and engine front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. Installation 1. NOTE: Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed during disassembly of the engine. NOTE: Spark plug tube seal installation shown, VCT seal installation similar. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2019 2. NOTE: If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 5 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover-to-RH cylinder head joints. 3. Using a new gasket, install the RH valve cover, bolt and the 10 stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 4. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the valve cover and the stud bolts. 5. Connect the heated PCV valve electrical connector. 6. Connect the 3 RH fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Connect the RH VCT electrical connector. 8. Connect the RH HO2S electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 2020 9. Connect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and pin-type retainer. 10. Connect the PSP switch electrical connector. 11. Install the RH ignition coils. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide: Service and Repair Valve Guide Inner Diameter 1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into the combustion chamber side of the valve guide if necessary. Use a ball gauge to determine the inner diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top, middle and bottom of the valve guide. 2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer. 3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, ream the valve guide and install a valve with an oversize stem or remove the valve guide and install a new valve guide. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Inspection Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements CAUTION: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance. 1. Check the valve head and seat. ^ Check valve angles. ^ Check margin width. ^ Be sure margin width is within specification. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. 2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if abnormalities are found. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Spring: Procedures Valve Spring Free Length 1. Measure the free length of each valve spring. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. Valve Spring Squareness 1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring. ^ Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square. Install a new valve spring if out of square. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. Valve Spring Strength Special Tool(s) 1. Use a Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the specified valve spring length. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2031 Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement Removal Valve Spring, Retainer and Seal Special Tool(s) CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. Remove all of the camshafts. 2. Rotate the crankshaft until the piston for the valve being serviced is at the top of its stroke. 3. CAUTION: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure will allow the valve to fall into the cylinder. If air pressure must be removed, support the valve prior to removal. CAUTION: If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in their original positions. Mark the components for installation into their original locations. NOTE: If a valve drops into the cylinder, remove the cylinder head. Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air. 4. Using the special tool, remove the keys, retainer and spring. 5. Remove and discard the valve stem seal. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2032 Installation Valve Spring, Retainer and Seal Special Tool(s) Material 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve stem seal with clean engine oil prior to installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2033 Using the special tool, install a new valve stem seal. 2. Using the special tools, install the valve spring, retainer and key. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Valve: Testing and Inspection Valve Inspection 1. Inspect these valve areas: 1 The end of the stem for grooves or scoring. 2 The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores. 3 The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking. 4 The valve margin for wear. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2037 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter 1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the diameter is within specification. ^ If out of specification, install new components as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-23-18 > Nov > 07 > Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold Drive Belt: Customer Interest Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold TSB 07-23-18 11/26/07 POWER STEERING BELT CHIRP/SQUEAL - COLD FORD: 2007 Edge, Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX, MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles, equipped with a 3.5L engine and built between 6/20/2007 - 6/29/2007 and 8/13/2007 - 8/24/2007 may exhibit a power steering belt chirp or squeal noise when cold. Turning the steering wheel to the stop position may also cause the slip and squeal. This may be caused by an incorrect power steering belt being installed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect power steering belt label. 2. If a white label Motorcraft(R) belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301-AB is present, then the vehicle has the correct belt and this TSB does not apply. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-4 diagnostics. 3. If a blue label Motorcraft® belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301 -BB is present, then the vehicle has the incorrect belt and it must be replaced. 4. Cut the old belt off and follow WSM, Section 303-05 for power steering belt installation. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072318A 2007 Edge, MKX 3.5L: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Power Steering Belt (Do Not Use with 8620C) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6C301 38 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-23-18 > Nov > 07 > Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering Belt Chirp/Squeal When Cold TSB 07-23-18 11/26/07 POWER STEERING BELT CHIRP/SQUEAL - COLD FORD: 2007 Edge, Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX, MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles, equipped with a 3.5L engine and built between 6/20/2007 - 6/29/2007 and 8/13/2007 - 8/24/2007 may exhibit a power steering belt chirp or squeal noise when cold. Turning the steering wheel to the stop position may also cause the slip and squeal. This may be caused by an incorrect power steering belt being installed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect power steering belt label. 2. If a white label Motorcraft(R) belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301-AB is present, then the vehicle has the correct belt and this TSB does not apply. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-4 diagnostics. 3. If a blue label Motorcraft® belt Part Number 7T4E-6C301 -BB is present, then the vehicle has the incorrect belt and it must be replaced. 4. Cut the old belt off and follow WSM, Section 303-05 for power steering belt installation. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072318A 2007 Edge, MKX 3.5L: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Power Steering Belt (Do Not Use with 8620C) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6C301 38 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 TSB 07-17-2 09/03/07 ABS LAMP ON C1165/C1175 AND/OR C1235/C1236 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge/MKX vehicles built before 6/1/2007 (FWD only) may exhibit an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning lamp and/or a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning lamp illuminated with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1165/C1175 and/or C1235/C1236. This may be due to a faulty rear wheel speed sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTCs C1235/C1236 and/or C1165/C1175 are present. If so, continue on to Step 2. For all other codes follow normal Workshop Manual diagnostics. 2. With the ignition off, proceed with the replacement of the faulted wheel speed sensor. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-09. NOTE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HARNESS ROUTING BRACKETS WHEN PERFORMING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. 3. With a new wheel speed sensor installed, make sure to torque the retaining bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in). 4. Clear continuous DTCs. NOTE THE ABS SYSTEM CONFIRMS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT BASED ON SEVERAL WHEEL REVOLUTIONS ABOVE 24 KM/H (15 MPH). DRIVE VEHICLE FOR AT LEAST 75 FEET AT OR ABOVE 15 MPH. IF WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL INPUT IS MISSING THE ABS LIGHT WILL ILLUMINATE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071702A 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.5 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace One Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) 071702B 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.7 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace Both Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 2057 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 2063 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Drive Belt: Exploded Views Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2066 Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams Front Engine Accessory Drive Front Engine Accessory Drive Power Steering Pump Belt Power Steering Pump Belt (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2067 Power Steering Pump Belt (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage. Visual Inspection Chart Visual Inspection Chart 3. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C compressor engagement chirp, power steering cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator whine. 4. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step. V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs 5. NOTE: Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be considered acceptable. If damage exceeds the acceptable limit or any chunks are found to be missing from the ribs, a new belt must be installed. Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 inch) can be considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard, install a new belt. 6. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and appropriate action taken. 1 Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new belt is not required. 2 Longer deposit areas building up to 50% of the rib height. This is not considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise is apparent, install a new belt. 3 Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a new belt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2070 V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling 7. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this, install a new accessory drive belt. V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 8. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2071 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2072 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2073 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. CAUTION: Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^ wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic transmissions. ^ wide open throttle 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: ^ if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: - the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. ^ if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. ^ if any of the accessories are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. ^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. ^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. ^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and can cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2074 Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists: ^ Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage, especially the mounting pad surface. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. This will result in chirp and squeal noises. ^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. ^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. ^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. 2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to release. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt in the area of the tensioner. 3. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring. 4. Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if necessary. 5. Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and repair any leaks. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner as necessary. 6. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner. Belt Tensioner - Dynamics The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner should move (respond) when the air conditioning clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without air conditioning clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt tensioner. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Removal CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley. 3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 4. Working from under the vehicle, remove the accessory drive belt. Installation 1. Working from under the vehicle, position the accessory drive belt on all pulleys, with the exception of the generator pulley. 2. CAUTION: Make sure the belt is correctly seated on all pulleys. Working from the top of the vehicle, position the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. 3. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2077 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Belt Power Steering Pump Belt Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to the accessory drive belt or pulleys. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley. 3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 4. Position the accessory drive belt off the crankshaft pulley. 5. Install the Power Steering Belt Removal Tool between the power steering pump belt and pulley, turning the crankshaft bolt clockwise to remove the power steering belt. Installation 1. Install the power steering belt on the crankshaft pulley. 2. CAUTION: After installation, make sure the belt is correctly seated on the crankshaft and power steering pulleys. Position the power steering belt around the Power Steering Installation Tool and the power steering pulley. Make sure that the belt is engaged with the power steering pulley and rotate the crankshaft clockwise to install the power steering belt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2078 3. Position the accessory drive belt on the crankshaft pulley. 4. CAUTION: Make sure the belt is correctly seated on all pulleys. Working from the top of the vehicle, position the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. 5. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams Drive Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2082 Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Belt Tensioner Automatic tensioners are calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given accessory drive system. Unless a spring or damping band within the tensioner assembly breaks or some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the tensioner for correct tension. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2083 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt from the generator pulley. 3. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 4. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. Installation 1. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 2. CAUTION: Make sure the belt is correctly seated on all pulleys. Working from the top of the vehicle, using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and install the accessory drive belt on the generator pulley. 3. Install the RH inner fender splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2087 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the 4 nuts, the exhaust flexible pipe and the Y-pipe as an assembly. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 4. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. ^ To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2088 5. Loosen the roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs). 6. Remove the roll restrictor through bolt and the 2 roll restrictor-to-transaxle bracket plate bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 8. CAUTION: The special tool must be carefully aligned to the mounting bosses on the oil pan. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the oil pan. Position a floor jack and the special tool under the oil pan. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2089 9. Remove the 3 bolts and position the engine coolant degas bottle aside. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 10. Remove the nut, bolt and engine mount brace. ^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 11. Remove the 4 engine mount nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). 12. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2090 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check these possible sources: ^ Insufficient oil ^ Oil leakage ^ Worn or damaged oil pump ^ Oil pump screen cover and tube ^ Excessive main bearing clearance ^ Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance ^ Chain tensioner leak Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2099 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil U.S. ........................................................................................................................................ Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil Canada ................................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil Ford Part Number: ................................................................................................................................ XO-5W20-QSP (US), CXO-5W20LSP12 (Canada) Ford Specification: .................................................................................................................................................. WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification NOTE: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Oil Cooler Oil Cooler Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 3. Remove the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 4. Disconnect the 2 coolant hoses from the oil cooler. 5. CAUTION: If metal or aluminum material is present in the oil cooler, mechanical concerns exist. Remove the 6 bolts and the oil cooler. ^ Discard the gaskets. ^ Inspect the oil cooler. ^ Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Installation 1. Using new gaskets, install the oil cooler and the 6 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2. Connect the 2 coolant hoses to the oil cooler. 3. Install the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 4. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2103 Oil Cooler: Tools and Equipment 1/2" Oil Cooler Line Rem. AST tool# 8023 Used to disconnect 1/2" transmission oil cooler lines. - Used for R and R of Transmission Oil Cooler Lines - Orange-Anodized Aluminum Construction - Quick line removal - Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set - Fits 2009 Escape with 6F Trans - Fits Ford Edge Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 This Tool is also available in the following kits: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2104 8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter Material Engine With Oil Cooler Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2108 Engine Without Oil Cooler Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove and discard the engine oil filter. 3. If equipped, remove the engine oil cooler. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil filter adapter. ^ Discard the gasket and O-ring seal. ^ Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Installation 1. Using a new gasket and O-ring seal, install the oil filter adapter. ^ Tighten the large bolt to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten the small bolt to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing the oil filter. Install a new engine oil filter. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 3. If equipped, install the engine oil cooler. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal Oil Pan Special Tool(s) Material CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. All vehicles 1. Remove the engine from the vehicle. 2. Remove the 8 bolts and the flexplate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2113 3. Remove the crankshaft sensor ring. 4. CAUTION: Install the engine stand bolts into the cylinder block only. Do not install the bolts into the oil pan. Mount the engine on a suitable engine stand. 5. If equipped, remove the heat shield and disconnect the block heater electrical connector. ^ Detach all of the engine block heater harness retainers and remove the harness. 6. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) fitting electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the PCV hose from the PCV valve. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2114 8. Disconnect the throttle body electrical connector. 9. Detach the wiring harness retainers from the upper intake manifold. 10. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. 11. Remove the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2115 12. Remove the 6 bolts and the upper intake manifold. ^ Discard the gaskets. 13. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 14. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2116 All vehicles 15. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector. 16. Disconnect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 17. Disconnect the heated PCV valve electrical connector. 18. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the RH valve cover and stud bolts. 19. Disconnect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2117 20. Disconnect the LH VCT solenoid electrical connector. 21. Disconnect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 22. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the LH valve cover and stud bolts. 23. NOTE: The A/C compressor must remain bolted to the engine block prior to installing the oil pan. Remove the A/C compressor nut and stud. 24. Remove the 3 bolts and the power steering pump. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2118 25. Remove the 3 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 26. Remove the 4 nuts (3 shown) and the LH catalytic converter. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. FWD vehicles 27. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. All vehicles 28. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater. ^ Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2119 29. Remove the LH cylinder block drain plug. ^ Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block. 30. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 coil-on-plugs. 31. Remove the 11 stud bolts and the LH valve cover. ^ Discard the gasket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2120 32. Remove the bolt, the 10 stud bolts and the RH valve cover. ^ Discard the gasket. 33. NOTE: VCT solenoid seal removal shown, spark plug tube seal removal similar. Inspect the VCT solenoid seals and the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals. ^ Using the special tools, remove the seal(s). 34. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer. ^ Discard the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2121 35. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley. 36. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal. 37. Remove the 2 engine mount studs. 38. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount bracket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2122 39. Remove the 22 engine front cover bolts. 40. Install 4 of the engine front cover bolts (finger tight) into the 4 threaded holes in the engine front cover. 1 Tighten the bolts one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern until the engine front cover-to-cylinder block seal is released. 2 Remove the engine front cover. 41. Remove the 16 oil pan bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2123 42. Install 2 of the oil pan bolts (finger tight) into the 2 threaded holes in the oil pan. 1 Alternately tighten the 2 bolts one turn at a time until the oil pan-to-cylinder block seal is released. 2 Remove the oil pan. 43. CAUTION: Place clean, lint free shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into the engine. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant. CAUTION: Observe all warnings or cautions and follow all application directions contained on the packaging of the silicone gasket remover and the metal surface prep. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2124 Clean all engine sealing surfaces, including the engine front cover, oil pan and cylinder block. 1 Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material with a plastic scraper. 2 Apply silicone gasket remover, following package directions, and allow to set for several minutes. 3 Remove the silicone gasket remover with a plastic scraper. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain. 4 Apply metal surface prep, following package directions, to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is normal. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2125 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Installation Oil Pan Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2126 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Material CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. All vehicles 1. NOTE: The oil pan and bolts must be installed and the oil pan aligned to the cylinder block and A/C compressor within 5 minutes of sealant application. Final tightening of the oil pan bolts must be carried out within 60 minutes of sealant application. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 inch) bead of silicone gasket sealant to the sealing surface of the oil pan. ^ Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 inch) bead of silicone gasket sealant to the 2 crankshaft seal retainer plate-to-cylinder block joint areas on the sealing surface of the oil pan. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2127 2. Install the oil pan and the 16 bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). ^ Loosen the bolts 180 degrees. 3. Align the oil pan to the cylinder block and the A/C compressor. ^ Position the oil pan so the mounting boss is against the A/C compressor and using a straightedge, align the oil pan flush with the rear of the cylinder block at the 2 areas shown. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2128 4. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten the large bolts (1-14) to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten the small bolts (15 and 16) to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 5. Install the A/C compressor mounting stud and nut. ^ Tighten the stud to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs) and the nut to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2129 6. Install the special tools. 7. NOTE: If the engine front cover, engine mount bracket and bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19, 20, 23, 24 and 25 are not installed and tightened within 10 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover sealing surfaces including the 3 engine mount bracket bosses. ^ Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan-to-cylinder block joint and the cylinder head-to-cylinder block joint areas of the engine front cover. 8. Install the engine front cover and bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19 and 20. ^ Tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2130 9. Install the engine mount bracket and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs). 10. Tighten the bolts in this sequence. ^ Tighten bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19 and 20 to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2131 11. Remove the special tools (alignment pins). 12. NOTE: The remainder of the engine front cover bolts (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21 and 22) must be installed and tightened within 60 minutes of the initial sealant application. Install bolts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21 and 22 and tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages: ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 13. Install the 2 engine mount studs. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2132 14. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front cover. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal. 15. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley. 16. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 17. NOTE: Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed during disassembly of the engine. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2133 NOTE: Spark plug tube seal installation shown, variable camshaft timing (VCT) seal installation similar. Using the special tools, install new VCT solenoid and/or spark plug tube seals. 18. NOTE: If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 5 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover-to-RH cylinder head joints. 19. Using a new gasket, install the RH valve cover, bolt and the 10 stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2134 20. NOTE: If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 5 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 8 mm (0.31 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover-to-LH cylinder head joints. 21. Using a new gasket, install the LH valve cover and 11 stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 22. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the 6 coil-on-plug assemblies and the 6 bolts. ^ Tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 23. Install the LH cylinder block drain plug. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs) plus an additional 180 degrees. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2135 24. Install the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 25. Using a new gasket, install the RH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). All vehicles 26. Using a new gasket, install the LH catalytic converter and 4 new nuts (3 shown). ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2136 27. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 28. Install the power steering pump and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 29. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the LH valve cover and stud bolts. 30. Connect the 3 LH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 31. Connect the LH camshaft VCT solenoid electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2137 32. Connect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 33. Attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the RH valve cover and stud bolts. 34. Connect the heated positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve electrical connector. 35. Connect the 3 RH coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 36. Connect the RH VCT solenoid electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2138 FWD vehicles 37. Connect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. All vehicles 38. Connect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector. 39. Using new gaskets, install the upper intake manifold and the 6 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2139 40. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 41. Install the upper intake manifold support bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 42. Attach the wiring harness retainers to the upper intake manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2140 43. Connect the throttle body electrical connector. 44. Connect the PCV hose to the PCV valve. 45. Connect the PCV fitting electrical connector. 46. If equipped, position the engine block heater harness on the engine and attach all of the harness retainers. ^ Connect the engine block heater electrical connector and install the heat shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2141 47. Using the special tools, remove the engine from the stand. 48. Install the crankshaft sensor ring. 49. Install the flexplate and the 8 bolts. ^ Tighten to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). 50. Install the engine in the vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2145 C103 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2146 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cooling fan assembly. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads prior to installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Removal Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the 3 bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube. ^ Discard the O-ring seal. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2151 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Installation Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. Using a new O-ring seal, install the oil pump screen and pickup tube and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2. Install the oil pan. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check these possible sources: ^ Insufficient oil ^ Oil leakage ^ Worn or damaged oil pump ^ Oil pump screen cover and tube ^ Excessive main bearing clearance ^ Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance ^ Chain tensioner leak Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Upper intake manifold bolts ................................................................................................................. ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Lower intake manifold bolts ................................................................................................................. ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold Upper Intake Manifold Upper Intake Manifold (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2164 Upper Intake Manifold (Part 2) Upper Intake Manifold (Part 3) Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the throttle body electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube from the intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold. 5. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube from the PCV valve. 6. Disconnect the PCV fitting electrical connector. 7. Detach the wiring harness retainers from the upper intake manifold. 8. Remove the 2 upper intake manifold support bracket bolts. 9. Remove the 6 bolts and remove the upper intake manifold. ^ Remove and discard the gaskets. ^ Clean and inspect all of the sealing surfaces of the upper and lower intake manifold. Installation 1. Using new gaskets, install the upper intake manifold and the 6 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2165 2. Install the 2 upper intake manifold support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 3. Attach the wiring harness retainers to the upper intake manifold. 4. Connect the PCV fitting electrical connector. 5. Connect the PCV tube to the PCV valve. 6. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold. 7. Connect the EVAP tube to the intake manifold. 8. Connect the throttle body electrical connector. 9. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2166 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold Lower Intake Manifold Lower Intake Manifold Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 3. Remove the fuel rail. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 4. Remove the 3 thermostat housing-to-lower intake manifold bolts. 5. Remove the 10 bolts and the lower intake manifold. ^ Remove and discard the intake manifold and thermostat housing gaskets. ^ Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Installation 1. Using new intake manifold and thermostat housing gaskets, install the lower intake manifold and the 10 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2167 2. Install the 3 thermostat housing-to-lower intake manifold bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 3. Install the fuel rail. 4. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Procedures Crankshaft Rear Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the flexplate. 3. Remove the crankshaft sensor ring. 4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the crankshaft rear seal. ^ Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2173 Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the seal lips and bore with clean engine oil prior to installation. Position the special tool onto the end of the crankshaft and slide a new crankshaft rear seal onto the tool. 2. Using the special tools, install the new crankshaft rear seal. 3. Install the crankshaft sensor ring. 4. Install the flexplate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2174 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Removal and Replacement Removal Crankshaft Rear Seal with Retainer Plate Special Tool(s) Material CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. NOTE: This procedure is for removal of the crankshaft rear seal and retainer plate and requires removal of the oil pan. If you are only removing the crankshaft rear seal, refer to Crankshaft Rear Seal. 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Using the special tools, remove the engine from the stand. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2175 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. 5. Using the special tools, remove and discard the rear crankshaft seal. 6. Remove the 8 crankshaft rear seal retainer bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2176 7. Install the 2 M6 oil pan bolts (finger tight) into the 2 threaded holes in the crankshaft rear seal retainer. 1 Alternately tighten the 2 bolts one turn at a time until the crankshaft rear seal retainer-to-cylinder block seal is released. 2 Remove the crankshaft rear seal retainer. 8. CAUTION: Place clean, lint free shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into the engine. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the gasket. CAUTION: Observe all warnings or cautions and follow all application directions contained on the packaging of the silicone gasket remover and the metal surface prep. Clean sealing surfaces of the crankshaft rear seal retainer and cylinder block. 1 Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material with a plastic scraper. 2 Apply silicone gasket remover, following package directions, and allow to set for several minutes. 3 Remove the silicone gasket remover with a plastic scraper. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain. 4 Apply metal surface prep, following package directions, to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is normal. Installation Crankshaft Rear Seal with Retainer Plate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2177 Special Tool(s) Material CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. NOTE: The crankshaft rear seal retainer must be installed and the bolts tightened within 5 minutes of sealant application. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 inch) bead of silicone gasket sealant to the sealing surface of the crankshaft rear seal retainer. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2178 2. Install the rear seal retainer and the 8 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 3. NOTE: Lubricate the seal lips and bore with clean engine oil prior to installation. Position the special tool onto the end of the crankshaft and slide a new crankshaft rear seal onto the tool. 4. Using the special tools, install the new crankshaft rear seal. 5. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2179 6. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector. 7. Using the special tools, install the engine onto the stand. 8. Install the oil pan. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Diagrams Front Crankshaft Seal: Diagrams Lower End Components - Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2183 Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2184 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal. ^ Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2185 Installation 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front cover. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal. 2. Install the crankshaft pulley. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2190 C103 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2191 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cooling fan assembly. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads prior to installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt Discard the bolt. First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs). Second pass ....................................................... ................................................................................................................................. Loosen one full turn Third pass ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs). Final pass ...................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... Tighten 90° Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing chain tensioner bolts ................................................................................................................ ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2202 Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair Timing Drive Components Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. Remove the engine front cover. 2. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) assemblies as shown. 3. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center position. Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts. 4. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center position. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2203 5. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing. 6. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing. 7. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals. 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2204 9. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm. 10. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2205 11. Remove the primary timing chain. 12. Remove the crankshaft timing chain sprocket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2206 13. Remove the 2 bolts and the upper LH primary timing chain guide. 14. Compress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in the collapsed position. 15. NOTE: The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable. Remove and discard the LH VCT assembly bolt and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt. ^ Remove the LH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket as an assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2207 16. NOTE: It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt. Remove the 2 bolts and the LH secondary timing chain tensioner. 17. Compress the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and install a suitable lockpin to retain the tensioner in the collapsed position. 18. NOTE: The VCT bolt and the exhaust camshaft bolt must be discarded and new ones installed. However, the exhaust camshaft washer is reusable. Remove and discard the RH VCT assembly bolt and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket bolt. ^ Remove the RH VCT assembly, secondary timing chain and the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket as an assembly. 19. NOTE: It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH secondary timing chain tensioner. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2208 20. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH primary timing chain guide. Installation 1. Install the RH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2209 2. NOTE: It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt. Install the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 3. Assemble the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) assembly, the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the RH secondary timing chain. ^ Align the colored links with the timing marks. 4. Position the RH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2210 5. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees. 6. Remove the lockpin from the RH secondary timing chain tensioner. 7. NOTE: It is necessary to tilt the special tool toward the rear of the engine to access the rearmost secondary timing chain tensioner bolt. Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 8. Assemble the LH VCT assembly, the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket and the LH secondary timing chain. ^ Align the colored links with the timing marks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2211 9. Position the LH secondary timing assembly onto the camshafts. 10. Install 2 new bolts and the original washer. Tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten 90 degrees. 11. Remove the lockpin from the LH secondary timing chain tensioner. 12. Install the crankshaft timing chain sprocket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2212 13. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket. 14. Install the upper LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2213 15. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 16. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2214 17. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner. ^ Rotate the lever counterclockwise. ^ Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger. ^ Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing. ^ Install a suitable lockpin. 18. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from the timing chain and install the tensioner. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Remove the lockpin. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2215 19. As a post-check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks. 20. Install new VCT housing seals. 21. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2216 22. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 23. Install the engine front cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Timing Cover: Service and Repair Installation Engine Front Cover Installation 1. Raise the engine to the installed position. 2. CAUTION: Place clean, lint free shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully remove the towels so foreign material is not dropped into the engine. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant, including any sealant from the inner surface of the cylinder block, cylinder head and engine front cover. CAUTION: Observe all warnings or cautions and follow all application directions contained on the packaging of the silicone gasket remover and the metal surface prep. Clean the sealing surfaces of the engine front cover and the mating surfaces on the cylinder heads, the cylinder block and the oil pan. ^ Remove any large deposits of silicone or gasket material with a plastic scraper. ^ Apply silicone gasket remover, following package directions and allow to set for several minutes. ^ Remove the silicone gasket remover with a plastic scraper. A second application of silicone gasket remover may be required if residual traces of silicone or gasket material remain. ^ Apply metal surface prep, following package directions, to remove any remaining traces of oil or coolant and to prepare the surfaces to bond. Do not attempt to make the metal shiny. Some staining of the metal surfaces is normal. 3. Install the special tools. 4. NOTE: If the engine front cover, engine mount bracket and bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19, 20, 23, 24 and 25 are not installed and tightened within 10 minutes, the sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the engine front cover sealing surfaces including the 3 engine mount bracket bosses. ^ Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 inch) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan-to-cylinder block joint and the cylinder head-to-cylinder block joint areas of the engine front cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2221 5. Install the engine front cover and bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19 and 20. ^ Tighten in sequence to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 6. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolt at this time. Lower the engine to allow installation of the engine mount bracket and lower bolt. ^ Install the engine mount bracket and lower bolt as an assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2222 7. Raise the engine to the installed position. ^ Install the 2 upper engine mount bracket bolts. 8. Tighten bolts in sequence to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs). 9. Tighten the bolts in this sequence. ^ Tighten bolts 7, 8, 17, 18, 19 and 20 to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2223 10. Remove the special tools (alignment pins). 11. NOTE: The remainder of the engine front cover bolts (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21 and 22) must be installed and tightened within 60 minutes of the initial sealant application. Install bolts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21 and 22 and tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages: ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 12. Install the 2 engine mount studs. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2224 13. Install the engine mount and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 14. Install the 4 engine mount nuts. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). 15. Install the engine mount brace, nut and bolt. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 16. Tighten the transaxle mount through bolt to 175 Nm (129 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2225 17. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the LH and RH VCT solenoids and bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 18. Install the power steering pump and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 19. Install the power steering reservoir and the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 20. Install the degas bottle and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2226 21. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 22. Connect the purge valve electrical connector. 23. Install the radio interference capacitor, the ground wire and the nut to the cowl stud. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 24. Install the radio interference capacitor wire, the ground wire and the nut to the engine front cover stud. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2227 25. Install the ground wire and bolt on the engine front cover. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 26. Connect the 2 engine wiring harness connectors. 27. Using a new O-ring seal, connect the A/C pressure tube fitting and install the nut. ^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs). 28. Install the A/C pressure tube bracket and bolt. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2228 29. Connect the A/C suction tube fitting. ^ Install the safety clip onto the fitting. 30. Install the LH and RH valve covers. 31. Install the engine air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe. 32. If equipped, attach the engine block heater harness to the radiator support, the A/C suction tube and the engine wiring harness. 33. Align the RH halfshaft splines with the intermediate shaft and push the halfshaft on until the circlip locks the shafts together. ^ Pull the inboard halfshaft outward to make sure the circlip is locked. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2229 34. NOTE: Do not tighten the halfshaft nut at this time. Install the RH halfshaft into the hub and install a new halfshaft nut. 35. Install the RH lower ball joint into the steering knuckle and install the pinch bolt. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). 36. Install the RH stabilizer bar link into the lower control arm and install the nut. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 37. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Tighten the RH halfshaft nut to 350 Nm (258 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2230 38. Install and the transaxle bracket and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 39. Position the roll restrictor and transaxle bracket plate and install the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 40. Tighten the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs). 41. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2231 42. Position the Y-pipe assembly in place and install the 4 nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 43. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 44. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the crankshaft front seal bore in the engine front cover. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal. 45. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surfaces with clean engine oil. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2232 46. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley washer and new bolt and tighten in 4 stages. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs). ^ Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 47. Install the accessory drive belt, tensioner and the power steering belt. 48. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. 49. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 50. Evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2233 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Removal Engine Front Cover Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2234 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Material (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2235 Material (Part 2) Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Recover the air conditioning system. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt, tensioner and the power steering belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 5. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft bolt and washer. ^ Discard the bolt. 6. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley. 7. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2236 8. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. 9. Remove the 4 nuts, the exhaust flexible pipe and the Y-pipe as an assembly. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. 10. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. 11. Remove the roll restrictor through bolt and the 2 roll restrictor-to-transaxle bracket plate bolts. 12. Loosen the roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt. ^ Position the roll restrictor and transaxle bracket plate aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2237 13. Remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle bracket. 14. Remove and discard the RH front halfshaft nut. 15. Remove the RH stabilizer link-to-lower control arm nut. 16. Remove the RH lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolt. ^ Separate the lower control arm from the knuckle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2238 17. Using the special tool, separate the RH halfshaft from the hub. 18. Using the special tools, separate the RH halfshaft from the intermediate shaft. ^ Remove the RH halfshaft. 19. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil. ^ Install the drain plug and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs). 20. If equipped, detach the engine block heater harness from the radiator support, the A/C suction tube and the engine wiring harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2239 21. Remove the engine air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 22. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. 23. Remove the safety clip from the A/C suction tube fitting. ^ Disconnect the A/C suction tube fitting and position the tube aside. 24. Remove the A/C pressure tube bracket bolt. 25. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C pressure tube fitting. ^ Discard the O-ring seal. ^ Position the A/C pressure tube aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2240 26. Disconnect the 2 engine wiring harness connectors. 27. Remove the bolt and the ground wire from the engine front cover. 28. Remove the nut, the ground wire and the radio interference capacitor wire from the engine front cover stud. 29. Remove the nut, the ground wire and the radio interference capacitor from the cowl stud. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2241 30. Disconnect the purge valve electrical connector. 31. Disconnect the 3 powertrain control module (PCM) electrical connectors and position the wiring harness aside. 32. Remove the 3 bolts and position the degas bottle aside. 33. NOTE: The area between the front of the engine and the body of the vehicle must be unobstructed in order to properly remove and install the engine front cover. Remove the 2 power steering reservoir nuts. ^ Support the power steering reservoir and hose away from the front of the engine with a length of mechanic's wire. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2242 34. Remove the 3 power steering pump bolts. ^ Support the power steering pump and hose away from the front of the engine with a length of mechanic's wire. 35. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the bolts, the LH and the RH VCT solenoids. 36. CAUTION: The special tool must be carefully aligned to the mounting bosses on the oil pan. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the oil pan. NOTE: The special tool and floor jack are used to raise and lower the engine to access the engine front cover and engine mount bracket fasteners. Position a floor jack and the special tool under the oil pan. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2243 37. CAUTION: The transaxle through bolt must be loosened prior to removing the engine mount and lowering the front of the engine. Failure to follow these instructions may cause internal damage to the hydraulic transaxle mount and possible fluid leakage. Loosen the transaxle mount through bolt. 38. Remove the nut, bolt and engine mount brace. 39. Remove the 4 engine mount nuts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2244 40. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount. 41. Remove the 2 engine mount studs. 42. Remove the 2 upper engine mount bracket bolts. 43. Lower the engine to access the lower engine mount bracket bolt. 44. Loosen the lower engine mount bracket bolt and remove the engine mount bracket and bolt as an assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2245 45. Remove the 22 engine front cover bolts. 46. Install 4 of the engine front cover bolts (finger tight) into the 4 threaded holes in the engine front cover. 1 Tighten the bolts one turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern until the engine front cover-to-cylinder block seal is released. 2 Remove the engine front cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 2255 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 2256 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 2262 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 2263 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 C1451 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 2266 C1452 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2267 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2268 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) OIL CONTROL SOLENOID Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. 2. Remove the bolt and the variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Fuel Pressure 3.5 L engine running fuel pressure....................................................................................................... ...........................................................450 kPa (65 psi) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Typical Diagnostic Reference Value Measured/PID Values 600 RPM .......................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................... Hot Idle Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER Part 1 Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2282 Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe from the air cleaner. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the air cleaner bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. NOTE: No tools are needed to remove the air cleaner assembly. Removal should be carried out using hands only. Separate the 2 air cleaner feet from the rubber grommets and remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. NOTE: - Make sure that the 2 air cleaner feet are seated into the rubber grommets under the air cleaner assembly. - The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, which may cause personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. Remove the Schrader valve cap. 2. NOTE: This step will drain some fuel out of the system. Place the fuel in a suitable container. Install the special tool and slowly open the manual valve to relieve the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2291 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.29-1.45 mm (0.051-0.057 in) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 2300 Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2301 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................AYFS-22FM Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2302 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2303 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2304 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Removal LH side 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling from the valve cover fitting and position aside. RH side 2. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 3. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs. 5. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2305 NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the 6 spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the 6 spark plugs. 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2306 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the 6 spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil-on-plug boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs and the 6 bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. Connect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. LH side 7. Position and connect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling to the valve cover fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2310 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2311 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance A midrange clearance is the most desirable. Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ....................... 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) Exhaust .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2315 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve covers. 2. NOTE: The valve clearance must be measured with the camshaft at base circle. The engine will have to be rotated with the crankshaft pulley bolt to bring each valve to base circle. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. A midrange clearance is the most desirable: ^ Intake: 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) ^ Exhaust: 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) 3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet reflects the thickness of the valve tappet. For example, a tappet with the number 3.310 has the thickness of 3.31 mm (0.13 inch). If any of the valve clearances are out of specification, select new tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location. 4. If required, install the new selected valve tappets in the marked locations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Coolant pump bolts .............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2319 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 3. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. 4. Remove the 4 nuts, the exhaust flexible pipe and the Y-pipe as an assembly. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. 5. Remove the LH and RH catalytic converters. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 6. If equipped, remove the heat shield and disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 7. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater. ^ Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2320 8. Remove the LH cylinder block drain plug. ^ Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block. 9. Remove the engine front cover. 10. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) assemblies as shown. 11. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center (TDC) position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2321 Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts. 12. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts. 13. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing. 14. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing. 15. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2322 16. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner. 17. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm. 18. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2323 19. Remove the primary timing chain. 20. Remove the 2 bolts and the upper LH primary timing chain guide. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2324 21. Remove the RH primary timing chain guide lower bolt. 22. NOTE: The RH primary timing chain guide must be repositioned to allow the coolant pump to be removed. Loosen the RH primary timing chain guide upper bolt. ^ Rotate the guide and tighten the bolt. 23. Remove the 8 bolts and the coolant pump. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2325 Installation 1. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install the coolant pump and the 8 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2. Loosen the RH primary timing chain guide upper bolt. ^ Position the RH primary timing chain guide and install the lower bolt. ^ Tighten the 2 bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 3. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2326 4. Install the upper LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 5. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2327 6. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm. 7. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner. ^ Rotate the lever counterclockwise. ^ Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger. ^ Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing. ^ Install a suitable lock pin. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2328 8. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from the timing chain and install the tensioner. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Remove the lock pin. 9. As a post check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2329 10. Install new VCT housing seals. 11. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 12. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2330 13. Install the engine front cover. 14. Install the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater. ^ Tighten the cylinder block drain plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten the block heater to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 15. NOTE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components, or damage to the wiring can occur. If equipped, connect the block heater electrical connector and install the heat shield. 16. Install the LH cylinder block drain plug. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs) plus an additional 180 degrees. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2331 17. Install the LH and RH catalytic converters. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 18. Position the Y-pipe assembly in place and install the 4 nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 19. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 20. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 09M04S1 Date: 100331 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2341 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on November 10, 2009. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? No STOCK VEHICLES Do not perform this program unless the affected vehicle exhibits the covered condition. SOLD VEHICLES Only owners with affected vehicles that exhibit the covered condition will be directed to dealers for repairs. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2342 NOTE: Heater core replacement should not be necessary if the flush is performed properly. Prior approval is required to replace the heater core. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and replacement of the heater core and/or cooling system flush related to reduced heater performance. ^ Vehicles that have had a heater core replacement or cooling system flush and are experiencing reduced heater performance will need to have this service performed, beginning with the heater performance evaluation. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter will expire on May 31 2010. ^ Refund Claiming Information (submit on separate repair line). - Program Code: 09M04 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - 0.2 Hrs. - Misc. Expense: REFUND RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Claiming information for 5 gallons of distilled water up to $1 .25 per gallon (submit as Misc. Expense code "OTHER" on the same repair line as the repair). ^ Program Code: 09M04 Misc. Expense: OTHER for actual cost, not to exceed $6.25 maximum Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2343 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this program is 50410. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected water pump inlet tubes and heater cores are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." Overview OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, cooling system corrosion may lead to contamination of the heater core. This contamination may, over time, lead to reduced heater performance. This service procedure is very extensive and detailed. Listed below are the sections of the service procedure along with highlights of important information. VERIFICATION Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2344 ^ Measure temperature difference in the center vents ^ If greater than 15° F (8° C), proceed to the service procedure ^ If less than 15° F (8° C), follow normal WSM diagnosis EQUIPMENT LIST ^ Rotunda Tool Kit # 303-1525 ^ Additional equipment needed WATER PUMP INLET TUBE ^ Replace the water pump inlet tube if the engine build date is on or before 4/1/2008 ^ Do NOT replace the water pump inlet tube, if the engine build date is on or after 4/2/2008 PRE-RINSE ^ Removes old coolant from the cooling system ^ Coolant MUST NOT mix with the VC-11 flush chemical VC-11 FLUSH ^ Removes contamination from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical temperature has to be between 135° F (57° C) and 150° F (65° C) for optimum cleaning performance POST-RINSE AND FILL ^ Removes VC-11 from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical MUST NOT mix with the new coolant Necessary to use 5 gallons of distilled water for the final system fill Verification VERIFY THE CUSTOMER CONCERN BY PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING HEATER PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 1. Idle the engine at shop ambient temperature of 60° F (15° C) or higher, until the engine is fully warmed up. 2. Set the front climate temperature control to the hottest setting. 3. Set the mode to panel/vent (with all vents OPEN) and make sure the A/C is switched to the OFF position. Do NOT set the temperature control to the recirculation mode. 4. Set the blower to the highest speed. 5. Idle the engine for 5 minutes with the hood closed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2345 6. Measure the difference in the discharge air temperature between the left-center vent and the right center vent as shown. The difference should be less than 15° F (8° C) to meet the performance requirement. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS LESS than 15° F (8° C), continue with normal Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostic procedures. Do NOT proceed with this Service Procedure. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS MORE than 15° F (8° C), continue to the Service Procedure. Service Procedure NOTICE: ALL STEPS OF THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MUST BE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO PROPERLY CLEAN THE COOLING SYSTEM. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE STEPS WILL COPROMISE COOLANT PROTECTION CAPABILITY. NOTE: This procedure must be performed at an ambient temperature between 60°F (15° C) and 90° F (32° C) for proper utilization of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. EQUIPMENT LIST Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2346 NOTE: Before starting this service procedure make sure that you have the equipment listed. NOTE: The dealer bulletin contains the parts list for this service procedure (see Attachment II) Necessary equipment for the cooling system flush: 1. Rotunda Tool Kit #303-1525 2. Two large radiator hose pinch-off pliers (not supplied with the tool kit) 3. One clean 5 gallon bucket (not supplied with the tool kit) 4. An infrared thermometer or equivalent (not supplied with the tool kit) 5. Safety equipment (eye protection and chemical gloves, not supplied with the tool kit) 6. AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (not shown, formerly Radkit Plus) 7. Shop water supply hose (not shown) 8. Radiator drain pan (not shown) WATER PUMP INLET TUBE NOTE: Dispose of old coolant in accordance with local state and federal laws. NOTE: On some of the affected vehicles the water pump inlet tube is painted on the inside surface. The flushing chemicals will remove the paint and contaminate the cooling system and components. 1. Place a drain pan under the radiator drain valve and completely drain the cooling system through the radiator drain (degas bottle cap should be loose for proper draining). 2. Remove the air cleaner as an assembly. ^ Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. ^ Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe from the air cleaner assembly. ^ Remove the air cleaner assembly bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2347 ^ Separate the 2 air cleaner assembly feet from the rubber grommets. 3. NOTE: The engine build date is on the engine code label, located on the RH cam cover or the front cover The date is positioned in the center of the label in a date/month/year sequence Locate and check the engine build date See Figure 1. If the engine build date is ON or AFTER 4/2/2008, the water pump inlet tube does NOT need to be replaced Proceed to Step 11. If the engine build date is ON or BEFORE 4/1/2008, it will be necessary to replace the water pump inlet tube Proceed to Step 4. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2348 4. Remove the coolant hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 2. 5. Remove the 3 thermostat housing bolts. 6. Separate the thermostat housing from the water pump inlet tube. 7. NOTE: The water pump inlet tube orientation can be determined by the length of the radius at the ends of the tube The longer radius end is Inserted Into the water pump housing. See Figure 3. Remove the water pump inlet tube from the water pump housing using a slight twisting motion The inlet tube must be replaced with a new inlet tube without paint on the interior surface of the tube. 8. Lubricate the new water pump inlet tube O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2349 9. Install the new water pump inlet tube into the water pump housing. 10. Install the thermostat housing. ^ Lubricate the thermostat housing 0-ring with clean engine coolant. ^ Install the thermostat housing and 3 housing bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). ^ Install the coolant hoses to the thermostat housing EXCEPT for the heater core inlet and outlet hoses See Figure 2. PRE-RINSE NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering Into the cooling system. 11. If the water pump inlet tube was NOT replaced disconnect both the heater core inlet and outlet hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 4. 12. Remove the 2 thermostat housing cover bolts and remove the thermostat. 13. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2350 Position the flush tool kit plug into the thermostat housing to control the flow and thermostat housing cover, and bolts Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). See Figure 6. 14. NOTICE: With the heater core inlet and outlet hoses off from step 11: ^ Connect the heater core inlet hose (1B - lower hose) to the heater return port (upper port) on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit drain hose to the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit hose-to-pump to the heater core outlet hose (OB) for the reverse flushing. 15. Route the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses under the thermostat housing and out of the engine compartment Make sure that the hoses are NOT kinked. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2351 16.NOTICE: To prevent any damage to the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses place shop towels between the radiator shroud and the hoses. Position several shop towels between the hoses and the radiator shroud See Figure 8. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2352 17. Place the flush tool kit pump onto a tool cart in front of the vehicle. Connect the fill hose from the heater core outlet to the pump. See Figure 9. 18. Position the flush tool kit 5 gallon bucket onto the tool cart along side the pump. See Figure 9. 19. Reinstall the air cleaner assembly and connect the MAF electrical connector. It is NOT necessary to secure the air cleaner assembly at this time. 20. NOTE: For measuring purposes it is recommended to use a clean 5 gallon shop bucket. Place a separate empty 5 gallon shop bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. See Figure 9. 21. Place the flush tool kit drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing into the empty bucket on the floor. See Figure 9. 22. Install the tool kit water valve onto the shop fresh water supply hose. Completely fill the cooling system through the degas bottle with fresh water until the water flows from the radiator drain. (NEW!) 23. Allow the radiator to completely drain. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 24. NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system. They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering into the cooling system. NOTE: If the vehicle is being lifted to install and remove the lower radiator hose pinch-off pliers the flush tool kit pump must be secured onto the radiator shroud while lifting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2353 Position and clamp the pinchoff pliers onto the upper radiator hose (see Figure 10) and the lower radiator hose (see Figure 11) as close to the radiator as possible. 25. Place the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket that is along side of the pump. The hose MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. 26. Using the shop fresh water supply, fill the flush tool kit bucket with fresh water. Use the tool kit valve attached to the shop fresh water supply hose to maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 27. Connect a shop air supply to the pump, with the fresh water supply on, and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 28. NOTE: Do NOT allow the tool kit supply bucket to become low or empty. This will introduce air into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition With the fresh water supply on, monitor and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 29. NOTE: Dispose of old coolant and flushing water contaminated with antifreeze in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. 30. After a minimum of 10 gallons of water has flushed through the engine, disconnect the shop air from the pump and turn off the fresh water supply. 31. Remove the tool kit bucket lid and empty the bucket. VC-11 FLUSH Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2354 32. NOTE: Both the suction and drain hoses MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. This will prevent any air from entering into the cooling system and causing an overheating condition. Reposition the drain hose from the 5 gallon bucket on the floor into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket on the tool cart. See Figure 12. 33. Remove the pinchoff pliers from upper and lower radiator hoses. 34. Install the pinchoff pliers onto the flush tool kit drain and suction hose closest to the flush tool kit bucket lid. See Figure 13. 35. WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. NOTICE: Bring the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to room temperature of 68° F (20° C) and shake well Follow all of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC1 1 instructions and Precautions. Add 2 gallons of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to the flush tool kit bucket that is on the tool cart Do not dilute the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 in the flush tool kit bucket (NEW!) 36. NOTICE: It is necessary to use the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) to remove any air from the cooling system. If air remains in the cooling system, the air will inhibit the circulation of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture and will cause an overheating condition and possible damage to the engine. Rinse the shop bucket and fill with fresh water Place the shop bucket so that the fill hose from the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) will siphon the fresh water out of the bucket. Install the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 onto the degas bottle. 37. Remove the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 from the degas bottle and install the degas bottle cap Make sure that the degas bottle is filled to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 38. Remove the pinch-off pliers from both hoses at the flush tool kit bucket. 39. Position one of the pinch-off pliers onto the upper radiator hose closest to the radiator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2355 40. Connect shop air supply to the tool kit pump. The pump will start to siphon the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 from the bucket into the engine. 41. NOTICE: With the heater in the OFF position start the engine and idle until the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) Monitor the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature using an infrared thermometer or equivalent in the flush tool kit bucket. 42. When the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 43. Disconnect the A/C high pressure cut-off switch electrical connector This will activate the engine cooling fans. It may take a few seconds until the cooling fans come on See Figure 14. 44. NOTICE: Make sure that the radiator is NOT obstructed for maximum air flow Any deflection of air may cause an overheating condition. NOTICE: The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST NOT EXCEED 15° F (65° C) or damage to the Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2356 engine may occur. If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the heater blower motor can be turned ON to reduce the mixtures temperature If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature STILL EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the engine MUST be turned OFF and the key left ON. The key MUST remain on for the operation of the heater blower motor to allow the engine to cool down. Continue the flush using the flush tool kit pump, circulating the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture through the cooling system. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the degas bottle to run low or empty This will allow air to enter the cooling system and will cause an overheating condition and prevent the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture from circulating through the entire engine and cooling system. (NEW!) NOTE: Allow the engine to idle for a MINIMUM of 2 hours The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST remain between 135° F (57° C) to 150° F (65° C) NOTE: To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture during the flush install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2357 To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture it is recommended to install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. See Figure 16. 45. EVERY half hour monitor the degas bottle for the correct level and measure the temperature in the tool kit bucket. DO NOT allow the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture to get below the COLD FILL LEVEL. If necessary, release cooling system pressure by loosening the degas bottle cap slowly allowing air to escape and the degas bottle to fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 46. After the engine has idled for a MINIMUM of 2 hours, turn the engine OFF and leave the key in the ON position. Turn the heater blower motor ON and select the highest blower speed. 47. Continue flushing until the cooling system cleaner/water mixture reaches 120° F (49° C) with the heater blower motor on high. The temperature can be identified using an infrared thermometer or equivalent to monitor the mixture temperature in the flush tool kit bucket. 48. Disconnect shop air from the flush tool kit pump. 49. Turn the ignition key OFF. 50. Connect the A/C High Pressure switch and the cooling fan motor electrical connector (if disconnected). POST-RINSE AND FILL WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 51. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Empty and rinse the flush tool kit bucket, and then fill with fresh water. 52. Using caution, slowly open and remove the degas bottle cap. 53. Using caution, open the radiator drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2358 54. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow the radiator to drain completely (degas bottle cap should be OFF). 55. Fill the degas bottle completely with fresh water and allow the radiator to drain. (NEW!) 56. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 57. Place an empty 5 gallon bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. 58. Remove the flush tool kit drain hose from the flush tool kit bucket and place the drain hose into the empty shop bucket. 59. Install pinch-off pliers on the upper and lower radiator hoses as close to the radiator outlets as possible. See Figure 10 and Figure 11. 60. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the flush tool kit bucket to run low or empty during the post-rinse and fill procedure. This will allow air to enter into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition. Keep the fresh water hose in the tool kit bucket and monitor the water level. Do not allow the bucket to run low or empty. 61. Connect air supply to the pump. 62. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2359 63. NOTE: Remove ONLY the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose in this step. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose. 64. NOTICE: Distilled water must be used for the final 5 gallon flush and fill. After flushing the system with a minimum of 10 gallons of fresh shop water, continue the flush using an additional 5 gallons of distilled water. 65. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 66. Remove air supply from flush tool kit pump. 67. Disconnect the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump and remove the drain hose from the shop bucket. Move the tool cart with the bucket and pump aside. 68. Remove the degas bottle cap. 69. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Open the radiator drain and completely drain the radiator. 70. Close the radiator drain. 71. Remove the Air Cleaner Assembly. 72. NOTE: A black residue may be evident after the flushing procedure. This is a normal condition and requires NO action. Remove the heater core inlet hose from the heater return port on the thermostat housing. 73. Remove the drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. 74. Remove the thermostat housing cover and remove the flush tool kit plug. 75. Install the thermostat and housing cover. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 76. Install the heater core inlet and outlet hoses onto the thermostat housing See Figure 17. 77. Install the Air Cleaner Assembly ^ Install the air cleaner assembly into the rubber grommets Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2360 ^ Install the air cleaner assembly bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). ^ Connect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe and tighten the clamp to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) ^ Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector 78. NOTICE: Using the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus), add 5.8 qts (5.5 L) for base models and 6.3 qts (6.0 L) for trailer tow models (vehicles equipped with an oil cooler) of 100% pure concentrated coolant. Use concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to the cooling system. Continue with the purge of air from the system until the coolant reaches 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. The recommended coolant concentration is 50/50 or -34° F (-36° C) using Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to distilled water, as measured with a hydrometer or equivalent. ^ Maximum coolant concentration is 60/40, -60° F (-51° C) for cold weather areas. ^ Minimum coolant concentration is 40/60, -20° F (-29° C) for warm weather areas. 79. Turn the heater to OFF. WARNING: ALWAYS ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE OPENING THE COOLING SYSTEM DO NOT UNSCREW THE COOLANT PRESSURE RELIEF CAP WHEN THE ENGINE IS OPERATING OR THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT THE COOLING SYSTEM MAY BE UNDER PRESSURE; STEAM AND HOT LIQUID CAN COME OUT FORCEFULLY WHEN THE CAP IS LOOSENED SLIGHTLY FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. (NEW!) 80. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to rpm and hold for 30 seconds. 81. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute to purge any large air pockets from the cooling system. 82. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) OR CVC-10-A (Canada). 83. Start the engine and let idle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature and the thermostat is fully open. A fully open thermostat can be verified by the radiator cooling fan cycling on at least once. 84. With the engine ON, thermostat open and the cooling fans cycled at least once, increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds. Then allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds. 85. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute. 86. Repeat Steps 84 and 85 a total of 5 TIMES to remove any remaining air trapped in the system. 87. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL RANGE of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle, and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada). 88. Make sure the degas bottle cap is installed to at least one audible "click." 89. Overlay the new cooling system label onto the degas bottle cap that has been provided by service management. 90. Using the IDS, clear any codes that may have been set during the flush procedure. 91. Service management will provide the Customer Information Sheet to the customer for insertion into vehicle's Owner Guide. This Customer Information Sheet will remind the customer that a revised type of coolant has been installed in their vehicle and will need to be used from this point forward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2361 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2362 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2363 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2364 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 09M04S1 Date: 100331 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2370 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on November 10, 2009. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? No STOCK VEHICLES Do not perform this program unless the affected vehicle exhibits the covered condition. SOLD VEHICLES Only owners with affected vehicles that exhibit the covered condition will be directed to dealers for repairs. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2371 NOTE: Heater core replacement should not be necessary if the flush is performed properly. Prior approval is required to replace the heater core. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and replacement of the heater core and/or cooling system flush related to reduced heater performance. ^ Vehicles that have had a heater core replacement or cooling system flush and are experiencing reduced heater performance will need to have this service performed, beginning with the heater performance evaluation. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Customer Notification Letter will expire on May 31 2010. ^ Refund Claiming Information (submit on separate repair line). - Program Code: 09M04 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - 0.2 Hrs. - Misc. Expense: REFUND RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Claiming information for 5 gallons of distilled water up to $1 .25 per gallon (submit as Misc. Expense code "OTHER" on the same repair line as the repair). ^ Program Code: 09M04 Misc. Expense: OTHER for actual cost, not to exceed $6.25 maximum Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2372 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this program is 50410. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected water pump inlet tubes and heater cores are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." Overview OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, cooling system corrosion may lead to contamination of the heater core. This contamination may, over time, lead to reduced heater performance. This service procedure is very extensive and detailed. Listed below are the sections of the service procedure along with highlights of important information. VERIFICATION Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2373 ^ Measure temperature difference in the center vents ^ If greater than 15° F (8° C), proceed to the service procedure ^ If less than 15° F (8° C), follow normal WSM diagnosis EQUIPMENT LIST ^ Rotunda Tool Kit # 303-1525 ^ Additional equipment needed WATER PUMP INLET TUBE ^ Replace the water pump inlet tube if the engine build date is on or before 4/1/2008 ^ Do NOT replace the water pump inlet tube, if the engine build date is on or after 4/2/2008 PRE-RINSE ^ Removes old coolant from the cooling system ^ Coolant MUST NOT mix with the VC-11 flush chemical VC-11 FLUSH ^ Removes contamination from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical temperature has to be between 135° F (57° C) and 150° F (65° C) for optimum cleaning performance POST-RINSE AND FILL ^ Removes VC-11 from the cooling system ^ VC-11 flush chemical MUST NOT mix with the new coolant Necessary to use 5 gallons of distilled water for the final system fill Verification VERIFY THE CUSTOMER CONCERN BY PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING HEATER PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 1. Idle the engine at shop ambient temperature of 60° F (15° C) or higher, until the engine is fully warmed up. 2. Set the front climate temperature control to the hottest setting. 3. Set the mode to panel/vent (with all vents OPEN) and make sure the A/C is switched to the OFF position. Do NOT set the temperature control to the recirculation mode. 4. Set the blower to the highest speed. 5. Idle the engine for 5 minutes with the hood closed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2374 6. Measure the difference in the discharge air temperature between the left-center vent and the right center vent as shown. The difference should be less than 15° F (8° C) to meet the performance requirement. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS LESS than 15° F (8° C), continue with normal Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostic procedures. Do NOT proceed with this Service Procedure. If the temperature DIFFERENCE IS MORE than 15° F (8° C), continue to the Service Procedure. Service Procedure NOTICE: ALL STEPS OF THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MUST BE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO PROPERLY CLEAN THE COOLING SYSTEM. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE STEPS WILL COPROMISE COOLANT PROTECTION CAPABILITY. NOTE: This procedure must be performed at an ambient temperature between 60°F (15° C) and 90° F (32° C) for proper utilization of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. EQUIPMENT LIST Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2375 NOTE: Before starting this service procedure make sure that you have the equipment listed. NOTE: The dealer bulletin contains the parts list for this service procedure (see Attachment II) Necessary equipment for the cooling system flush: 1. Rotunda Tool Kit #303-1525 2. Two large radiator hose pinch-off pliers (not supplied with the tool kit) 3. One clean 5 gallon bucket (not supplied with the tool kit) 4. An infrared thermometer or equivalent (not supplied with the tool kit) 5. Safety equipment (eye protection and chemical gloves, not supplied with the tool kit) 6. AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (not shown, formerly Radkit Plus) 7. Shop water supply hose (not shown) 8. Radiator drain pan (not shown) WATER PUMP INLET TUBE NOTE: Dispose of old coolant in accordance with local state and federal laws. NOTE: On some of the affected vehicles the water pump inlet tube is painted on the inside surface. The flushing chemicals will remove the paint and contaminate the cooling system and components. 1. Place a drain pan under the radiator drain valve and completely drain the cooling system through the radiator drain (degas bottle cap should be loose for proper draining). 2. Remove the air cleaner as an assembly. ^ Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. ^ Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe from the air cleaner assembly. ^ Remove the air cleaner assembly bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2376 ^ Separate the 2 air cleaner assembly feet from the rubber grommets. 3. NOTE: The engine build date is on the engine code label, located on the RH cam cover or the front cover The date is positioned in the center of the label in a date/month/year sequence Locate and check the engine build date See Figure 1. If the engine build date is ON or AFTER 4/2/2008, the water pump inlet tube does NOT need to be replaced Proceed to Step 11. If the engine build date is ON or BEFORE 4/1/2008, it will be necessary to replace the water pump inlet tube Proceed to Step 4. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2377 4. Remove the coolant hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 2. 5. Remove the 3 thermostat housing bolts. 6. Separate the thermostat housing from the water pump inlet tube. 7. NOTE: The water pump inlet tube orientation can be determined by the length of the radius at the ends of the tube The longer radius end is Inserted Into the water pump housing. See Figure 3. Remove the water pump inlet tube from the water pump housing using a slight twisting motion The inlet tube must be replaced with a new inlet tube without paint on the interior surface of the tube. 8. Lubricate the new water pump inlet tube O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2378 9. Install the new water pump inlet tube into the water pump housing. 10. Install the thermostat housing. ^ Lubricate the thermostat housing 0-ring with clean engine coolant. ^ Install the thermostat housing and 3 housing bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). ^ Install the coolant hoses to the thermostat housing EXCEPT for the heater core inlet and outlet hoses See Figure 2. PRE-RINSE NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering Into the cooling system. 11. If the water pump inlet tube was NOT replaced disconnect both the heater core inlet and outlet hoses from the thermostat housing. See Figure 4. 12. Remove the 2 thermostat housing cover bolts and remove the thermostat. 13. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2379 Position the flush tool kit plug into the thermostat housing to control the flow and thermostat housing cover, and bolts Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). See Figure 6. 14. NOTICE: With the heater core inlet and outlet hoses off from step 11: ^ Connect the heater core inlet hose (1B - lower hose) to the heater return port (upper port) on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit drain hose to the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. ^ Connect the flush tool kit hose-to-pump to the heater core outlet hose (OB) for the reverse flushing. 15. Route the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses under the thermostat housing and out of the engine compartment Make sure that the hoses are NOT kinked. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2380 16.NOTICE: To prevent any damage to the flush tool kit drain and fill hoses place shop towels between the radiator shroud and the hoses. Position several shop towels between the hoses and the radiator shroud See Figure 8. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2381 17. Place the flush tool kit pump onto a tool cart in front of the vehicle. Connect the fill hose from the heater core outlet to the pump. See Figure 9. 18. Position the flush tool kit 5 gallon bucket onto the tool cart along side the pump. See Figure 9. 19. Reinstall the air cleaner assembly and connect the MAF electrical connector. It is NOT necessary to secure the air cleaner assembly at this time. 20. NOTE: For measuring purposes it is recommended to use a clean 5 gallon shop bucket. Place a separate empty 5 gallon shop bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. See Figure 9. 21. Place the flush tool kit drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing into the empty bucket on the floor. See Figure 9. 22. Install the tool kit water valve onto the shop fresh water supply hose. Completely fill the cooling system through the degas bottle with fresh water until the water flows from the radiator drain. (NEW!) 23. Allow the radiator to completely drain. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 24. NOTE: The pinch-off pliers are used to control the direction of fluids in certain areas of the cooling system. They are also used for optimum cleaning and to prevent air from entering into the cooling system. NOTE: If the vehicle is being lifted to install and remove the lower radiator hose pinch-off pliers the flush tool kit pump must be secured onto the radiator shroud while lifting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2382 Position and clamp the pinchoff pliers onto the upper radiator hose (see Figure 10) and the lower radiator hose (see Figure 11) as close to the radiator as possible. 25. Place the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket that is along side of the pump. The hose MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. 26. Using the shop fresh water supply, fill the flush tool kit bucket with fresh water. Use the tool kit valve attached to the shop fresh water supply hose to maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 27. Connect a shop air supply to the pump, with the fresh water supply on, and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 28. NOTE: Do NOT allow the tool kit supply bucket to become low or empty. This will introduce air into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition With the fresh water supply on, monitor and maintain the water level in the tool kit bucket. 29. NOTE: Dispose of old coolant and flushing water contaminated with antifreeze in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. 30. After a minimum of 10 gallons of water has flushed through the engine, disconnect the shop air from the pump and turn off the fresh water supply. 31. Remove the tool kit bucket lid and empty the bucket. VC-11 FLUSH Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2383 32. NOTE: Both the suction and drain hoses MUST be kept a minimum of 2 inches from the bottom of the tool kit bucket. This will prevent any air from entering into the cooling system and causing an overheating condition. Reposition the drain hose from the 5 gallon bucket on the floor into one of the small holes in the lid of the flush tool kit bucket on the tool cart. See Figure 12. 33. Remove the pinchoff pliers from upper and lower radiator hoses. 34. Install the pinchoff pliers onto the flush tool kit drain and suction hose closest to the flush tool kit bucket lid. See Figure 13. 35. WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. NOTICE: Bring the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to room temperature of 68° F (20° C) and shake well Follow all of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC1 1 instructions and Precautions. Add 2 gallons of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 to the flush tool kit bucket that is on the tool cart Do not dilute the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 in the flush tool kit bucket (NEW!) 36. NOTICE: It is necessary to use the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) to remove any air from the cooling system. If air remains in the cooling system, the air will inhibit the circulation of the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture and will cause an overheating condition and possible damage to the engine. Rinse the shop bucket and fill with fresh water Place the shop bucket so that the fill hose from the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus) will siphon the fresh water out of the bucket. Install the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 onto the degas bottle. 37. Remove the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 from the degas bottle and install the degas bottle cap Make sure that the degas bottle is filled to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 38. Remove the pinch-off pliers from both hoses at the flush tool kit bucket. 39. Position one of the pinch-off pliers onto the upper radiator hose closest to the radiator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2384 40. Connect shop air supply to the tool kit pump. The pump will start to siphon the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11 from the bucket into the engine. 41. NOTICE: With the heater in the OFF position start the engine and idle until the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) Monitor the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature using an infrared thermometer or equivalent in the flush tool kit bucket. 42. When the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature reaches 140° F (60° C) remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 43. Disconnect the A/C high pressure cut-off switch electrical connector This will activate the engine cooling fans. It may take a few seconds until the cooling fans come on See Figure 14. 44. NOTICE: Make sure that the radiator is NOT obstructed for maximum air flow Any deflection of air may cause an overheating condition. NOTICE: The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST NOT EXCEED 15° F (65° C) or damage to the Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2385 engine may occur. If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the heater blower motor can be turned ON to reduce the mixtures temperature If the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture temperature STILL EXCEEDS 150° F (65° C), the engine MUST be turned OFF and the key left ON. The key MUST remain on for the operation of the heater blower motor to allow the engine to cool down. Continue the flush using the flush tool kit pump, circulating the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture through the cooling system. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the degas bottle to run low or empty This will allow air to enter the cooling system and will cause an overheating condition and prevent the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture from circulating through the entire engine and cooling system. (NEW!) NOTE: Allow the engine to idle for a MINIMUM of 2 hours The Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC11/water mixture temperature MUST remain between 135° F (57° C) to 150° F (65° C) NOTE: To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture during the flush install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2386 To control any odor from the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture it is recommended to install a shop exhaust hose into the lid of the tool kit bucket. See Figure 16. 45. EVERY half hour monitor the degas bottle for the correct level and measure the temperature in the tool kit bucket. DO NOT allow the Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture to get below the COLD FILL LEVEL. If necessary, release cooling system pressure by loosening the degas bottle cap slowly allowing air to escape and the degas bottle to fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. 46. After the engine has idled for a MINIMUM of 2 hours, turn the engine OFF and leave the key in the ON position. Turn the heater blower motor ON and select the highest blower speed. 47. Continue flushing until the cooling system cleaner/water mixture reaches 120° F (49° C) with the heater blower motor on high. The temperature can be identified using an infrared thermometer or equivalent to monitor the mixture temperature in the flush tool kit bucket. 48. Disconnect shop air from the flush tool kit pump. 49. Turn the ignition key OFF. 50. Connect the A/C High Pressure switch and the cooling fan motor electrical connector (if disconnected). POST-RINSE AND FILL WARNING: THE USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EYE PROTECTION AND CHEMICAL GLOVES IS REQUIRED FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY 51. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Empty and rinse the flush tool kit bucket, and then fill with fresh water. 52. Using caution, slowly open and remove the degas bottle cap. 53. Using caution, open the radiator drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2387 54. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Allow the radiator to drain completely (degas bottle cap should be OFF). 55. Fill the degas bottle completely with fresh water and allow the radiator to drain. (NEW!) 56. Close the radiator drain and install the degas bottle cap. 57. Place an empty 5 gallon bucket on the floor in front of the vehicle. 58. Remove the flush tool kit drain hose from the flush tool kit bucket and place the drain hose into the empty shop bucket. 59. Install pinch-off pliers on the upper and lower radiator hoses as close to the radiator outlets as possible. See Figure 10 and Figure 11. 60. NOTICE: Do NOT allow the flush tool kit bucket to run low or empty during the post-rinse and fill procedure. This will allow air to enter into the cooling system and cause an overheating condition. Keep the fresh water hose in the tool kit bucket and monitor the water level. Do not allow the bucket to run low or empty. 61. Connect air supply to the pump. 62. Allow a minimum of 10 gallons of water to flush through the engine and out the drain hose into the shop bucket on the floor. It will be necessary to disconnect the shop air supply from the pump to eliminate the water flow from the drain hose while emptying the shop bucket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2388 63. NOTE: Remove ONLY the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose in this step. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the lower radiator hose. 64. NOTICE: Distilled water must be used for the final 5 gallon flush and fill. After flushing the system with a minimum of 10 gallons of fresh shop water, continue the flush using an additional 5 gallons of distilled water. 65. Remove the pinch-off pliers from the upper radiator hose. 66. Remove air supply from flush tool kit pump. 67. Disconnect the flush tool kit suction hose from the pump and remove the drain hose from the shop bucket. Move the tool cart with the bucket and pump aside. 68. Remove the degas bottle cap. 69. NOTE: Dispose of Motorcraft(R) Engine Cooling System Cleaner VC-11/water mixture in the same way as coolant in accordance with local, state and federal laws. Open the radiator drain and completely drain the radiator. 70. Close the radiator drain. 71. Remove the Air Cleaner Assembly. 72. NOTE: A black residue may be evident after the flushing procedure. This is a normal condition and requires NO action. Remove the heater core inlet hose from the heater return port on the thermostat housing. 73. Remove the drain hose from the heater core inlet port on the thermostat housing. 74. Remove the thermostat housing cover and remove the flush tool kit plug. 75. Install the thermostat and housing cover. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 76. Install the heater core inlet and outlet hoses onto the thermostat housing See Figure 17. 77. Install the Air Cleaner Assembly ^ Install the air cleaner assembly into the rubber grommets Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2389 ^ Install the air cleaner assembly bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). ^ Connect the air cleaner assembly outlet pipe and tighten the clamp to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) ^ Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector 78. NOTICE: Using the AirLift Cooling Tester UVU-550000 (formerly Radkit Plus), add 5.8 qts (5.5 L) for base models and 6.3 qts (6.0 L) for trailer tow models (vehicles equipped with an oil cooler) of 100% pure concentrated coolant. Use concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to the cooling system. Continue with the purge of air from the system until the coolant reaches 1 inch (25 mm) above the COLD FILL LEVEL. The recommended coolant concentration is 50/50 or -34° F (-36° C) using Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to distilled water, as measured with a hydrometer or equivalent. ^ Maximum coolant concentration is 60/40, -60° F (-51° C) for cold weather areas. ^ Minimum coolant concentration is 40/60, -20° F (-29° C) for warm weather areas. 79. Turn the heater to OFF. WARNING: ALWAYS ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE OPENING THE COOLING SYSTEM DO NOT UNSCREW THE COOLANT PRESSURE RELIEF CAP WHEN THE ENGINE IS OPERATING OR THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT THE COOLING SYSTEM MAY BE UNDER PRESSURE; STEAM AND HOT LIQUID CAN COME OUT FORCEFULLY WHEN THE CAP IS LOOSENED SLIGHTLY FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. (NEW!) 80. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to rpm and hold for 30 seconds. 81. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute to purge any large air pockets from the cooling system. 82. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL when cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) OR CVC-10-A (Canada). 83. Start the engine and let idle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature and the thermostat is fully open. A fully open thermostat can be verified by the radiator cooling fan cycling on at least once. 84. With the engine ON, thermostat open and the cooling fans cycled at least once, increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds. Then allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds. 85. Turn the engine OFF and wait for 1 minute. 86. Repeat Steps 84 and 85 a total of 5 TIMES to remove any remaining air trapped in the system. 87. NOTE: Add concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada) to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL RANGE of the degas bottle. Check the engine coolant level in the degas bottle, and if necessary, fill to 1 inch (25 mm) above the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine warm or to the top of the COLD FILL LEVEL with the engine cold using concentrated coolant, Motorcraft(R) Specialty Green Engine Coolant VC-10-A2 (US) or CVC-10-A (Canada). 88. Make sure the degas bottle cap is installed to at least one audible "click." 89. Overlay the new cooling system label onto the degas bottle cap that has been provided by service management. 90. Using the IDS, clear any codes that may have been set during the flush procedure. 91. Service management will provide the Customer Information Sheet to the customer for insertion into vehicle's Owner Guide. This Customer Information Sheet will remind the customer that a revised type of coolant has been installed in their vehicle and will need to be used from this point forward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2390 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2391 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2392 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 09M04S1 > Mar > 10 > Campaign - Potential Cooling System Corrosion > Page 2393 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 11.7 quarts (11.09 liters) With Trailer Tow Package ................................................................................................................... .................................................... 12.83 qts (12.14L) NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2396 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with bittering agent (yellow-colored) Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. VC-7-B Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Degas Bottle Degas Bottle Removal and Installation 1. WARNING: To avoid personal injury, do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap while the engine is operating or hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one half turn counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap. 2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the lower degas bottle hose. 3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle. 4. Disconnect the upper degas bottle hose and position it aside. 5. Disconnect the lower degas bottle hose and position it aside. 6. Remove the degas bottle-to-washer bottle screw. 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the degas bottle. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Fill the degas bottle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2404 C1554 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2409 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2410 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2411 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2412 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2413 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2414 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2415 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2416 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2417 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2418 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2419 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2420 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2421 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2422 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2423 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2424 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2425 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2426 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation FAN CONTROL The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs. For variable speed electric fan(s): Edge/MKX, Five Hundred/Freestyle/Montego, Fusion/Milan/MKZ, Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Town Car: FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM (Negative Duty Cycle) The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable (FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power applied to the fan motor). For relay controlled fans: 2.0L Focus (with A/C) And Taurus: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds 2.3L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2427 Freestar, Monterey: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC) (single speed fan applications), low fan control (LFC), medium fan control (MFC), and/or high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some applications will have the xFC circuit wired to 2 separate relays. For 3-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium, and high fan control (FC), cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the table. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation FAN SPEED SENSOR (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch With (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation Fan Clutch: Description and Operation COOLING FAN CLUTCH Cooling Fan Clutch With Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The cooling fan clutch is an electrically actuated viscous clutch that consists of 3 main elements: - a working chamber - a reservoir chamber - a cooling fan clutch actuator valve and a fan speed sensor (FSS) The cooling fan clutch actuator valve controls the fluid flow from the reservoir into the working chamber. Once viscous fluid is in the working chamber, shearing of the fluid results in fan rotation. The cooling fan clutch actuator valve is activated with a pulse width modulated (PWM) output signal from the PCM. By opening and closing the fluid port valve, the PCM can control the cooling fan clutch speed. The cooling fan clutch speed is measured by a Hall-effect sensor and is monitored by the PCM during closed loop operation. The PCM optimizes fan speed based on engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), transmission fluid temperature (TFT), intake air temperature (IAT), or air conditioning requirements. When an increased demand for fan speed is requested for vehicle cooling, the PCM monitors the fan speed through the Hall-effect sensor. If a fan speed increase is required, the PCM outputs the PWM signal to the fluid port, providing the required fan speed increase. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2434 Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005 Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan. 2009 Suggested user price: $41.20 Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2442 C107 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2443 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases., and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2444 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. If equipped, detach the 2 block heater wiring clips from the radiator support. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2448 4. Detach the 5 wiring harness retainers and position the harness aside. 5. Position aside the upper radiator hose from the cooling fan motor and shroud. 6. Disconnect the cooling fan motor and shroud electrical connector. 7. If equipped, remove the bolt and position aside the oil cooler bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs). 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud. ^ To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2452 Removal and Installation NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be pressure leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Remove the 6 floor duct screws and the floor duct. 3. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal. 4. Remove the heater tube bracket screw and the heater tube bracket. 5. Remove the 5 fresh air inlet duct screws and the fresh air inlet duct. 6. Disconnect the wire harness from the plenum chamber. 7. Remove the 7 lower facing plenum chamber screws. 8. Orient the heater core and evaporator core housing with the plenum chamber upright. 9. Remove the upper facing plenum chamber screw. 10. Remove the 2 plenum chamber clips and remove the plenum chamber being careful not to allow the evaporator core to become dislodged from the installed position. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the heater core by the inlet and/or outlet tube to remove. Handling the heater core by the tubes may damage the joints and lead to failure of the heater core. Remove the heater core. 1 Grasp the heater core by the core-side of the heater tube connections and partially remove it from the plenum chamber. 2 Grasp the heater core by the top of the core and remove it from the plenum chamber. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2453 12. NOTE: It is not necessary to carry out this step if the evaporator core has not become dislodged from the installed position during this procedure. If the evaporator core has been moved at any point during heater core removal, remove the evaporator core, verify that the drain seal is installed in the correct position and install the evaporator core in the correct position. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator Radiator (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2457 Radiator (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose and lower degas bottle hose from the radiator. 5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 6. Lift and remove the tabs from the radiator support and position the radiator towards the engine. 7. Remove the 2 A/C condenser bolts from the radiator and separate the condenser from the radiator. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 8. Remove the radiator. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2462 C1554 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation FAN SPEED SENSOR (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch With (FSS) The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2474 C107 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2475 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases., and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2476 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Opening Temperatures Starts to open....................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 86°C (187°F) Fully open........................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 96°C (205°F) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2480 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat Material Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly and outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and position aside the thermostat housing cover. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 4. Remove the O-ring seal and thermostat. ^ Clean and inspect the O-ring seal. Install a new seal if necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the thermostat O-ring seal with clean engine coolant. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Thermostat Housing Material Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Disconnect the 5 coolant hoses from the thermostat housing and position them aside. 4. Remove the 3 thermostat housing bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 5. CAUTION: Do not pull the other end of the coolant tube out of the engine block when separating the thermostat housing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2484 Separate the thermostat housing from the coolant tube and remove the thermostat housing. ^ Remove and discard the O-ring seals. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the new O-ring seals with clean engine coolant. 7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Coolant pump bolts .............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2488 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. 3. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. 4. Remove the 4 nuts, the exhaust flexible pipe and the Y-pipe as an assembly. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. 5. Remove the LH and RH catalytic converters. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 6. If equipped, remove the heat shield and disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 7. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater. ^ Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2489 8. Remove the LH cylinder block drain plug. ^ Allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block. 9. Remove the engine front cover. 10. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the variable camshaft timing (VCT) assemblies as shown. 11. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the top dead center (TDC) position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2490 Install the special tool onto the flats of the LH camshafts. 12. NOTE: The special tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position. Install the special tool onto the flats of the RH camshafts. 13. Remove the 3 bolts and the RH VCT housing. 14. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH VCT housing. 15. Remove and discard the VCT housing seals. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2491 16. Remove the 2 bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner. 17. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm. 18. Remove the 2 bolts and the lower LH primary timing chain guide. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2492 19. Remove the primary timing chain. 20. Remove the 2 bolts and the upper LH primary timing chain guide. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2493 21. Remove the RH primary timing chain guide lower bolt. 22. NOTE: The RH primary timing chain guide must be repositioned to allow the coolant pump to be removed. Loosen the RH primary timing chain guide upper bolt. ^ Rotate the guide and tighten the bolt. 23. Remove the 8 bolts and the coolant pump. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2494 Installation 1. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install the coolant pump and the 8 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2. Loosen the RH primary timing chain guide upper bolt. ^ Position the RH primary timing chain guide and install the lower bolt. ^ Tighten the 2 bolts to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 3. Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT assemblies and the crankshaft sprocket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2495 4. Install the upper LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 5. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2496 6. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm. 7. Reset the primary timing chain tensioner. ^ Rotate the lever counterclockwise. ^ Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger. ^ Align the hole in the lever with the hole in the tensioner housing. ^ Install a suitable lock pin. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2497 8. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the crankshaft slightly to remove slack from the timing chain and install the tensioner. Install the primary tensioner and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). ^ Remove the lock pin. 9. As a post check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2498 10. Install new VCT housing seals. 11. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the LH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 12. CAUTION: Make sure the dowels on the VCT housing are fully engaged in the cylinder head prior to tightening the bolts. Install the RH VCT housing and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2499 13. Install the engine front cover. 14. Install the RH cylinder block drain plug or, if equipped, the block heater. ^ Tighten the cylinder block drain plug to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten the block heater to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 15. NOTE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components, or damage to the wiring can occur. If equipped, connect the block heater electrical connector and install the heat shield. 16. Install the LH cylinder block drain plug. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs) plus an additional 180 degrees. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2500 17. Install the LH and RH catalytic converters. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 18. Position the Y-pipe assembly in place and install the 4 nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 19. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 20. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. 21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview V-Engines In-Line Engines The catalytic converter and exhaust Systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O) However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the PCM. For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Monitors/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor The number of HO2Ss used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on the vehicle emission certification level (LEV, LEV-II, ULEV, PZEV). On most vehicles only 2 HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) use 3 HO2Ss for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) located before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensors (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensors (HO2S13/HO2S23) located after the catalyst are used for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control). Current PZEV vehicles use only a 4-cylinder engine, so only the bank 1 HO2Ss are used. Catalytic Converter Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2505 A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. Exhaust System Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2506 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. On some PZEV, there is a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst. Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to Catalytic Converter, Exhaust System. Three-Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase. the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Catalytic Converter - LH Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: If necessary, the catalytic converter heat shield can be serviced separately. NOTE: Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 4. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket-to-transmission bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the 4 nuts and the LH catalytic converter. ^ Discard the 4 LH catalytic converter nuts and gasket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket and nuts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH > Page 2509 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Catalytic Converter - RH All vehicles 1. NOTE: If necessary, the catalytic converter heat shield can be serviced separately. NOTE: Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the catalyst monitor sensor. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. 3. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. All wheel drive (AWD) 4. Remove and discard the 4 universal joint (U-joint) flange bolts and separate the front driveshaft and secure it with a length of mechanic's wire. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the RH halfshaft assembly. 6. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). Front wheel drive (FWD) 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the power steering rack shield. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs). 8. Remove the catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor shield. ^ To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH > Page 2510 10. Remove the roll restrictor bolt and rotate the engine forward. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 11. Remove the 2 bracket-to-RH catalytic converter bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 12. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter. ^ Discard the 4 RH catalytic converter nuts and gasket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket and nuts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Discard the nuts and studs. Studs ................................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Nuts ..................................................................... ................................................................................................................................. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2514 Exhaust Manifold: Testing and Inspection Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection Special Tool(s) 1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the gasket sealing surfaces. 2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an exhaust manifold is serviced. Using the special tool (or a precision straight edge) and a feeler gauge, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 inch), install a new exhaust manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold - LH Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold - LH Exhaust Manifold - LH Material Removal 1. Remove the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 2. Remove the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the LH exhaust manifold heat shield. 4. Remove the 6 nuts and the LH exhaust manifold. ^ Discard the nuts and gasket. 5. Clean and inspect the LH exhaust manifold. 6. Remove and discard the 6 LH exhaust manifold studs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold - LH > Page 2517 7. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These may cause scratches and gouges resulting in leak paths. Use a plastic scraper to clean the sealing surfaces. Clean the exhaust manifold mating surface of the cylinder head with metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Installation 1. Install 6 new LH exhaust manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. Using a new gasket, install the LH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 3. Install the LH exhaust manifold heat shield and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 4. Install the LH HO2S. 5. Install the LH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold - LH > Page 2518 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold - RH Exhaust Manifold - RH Material Removal 1. Remove the RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. 2. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. Remove the 6 nuts and the RH exhaust manifold. ^ Discard the nuts and gasket. 4. Clean and inspect the RH exhaust manifold. 5. Remove and discard the 6 RH exhaust manifold studs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold - LH > Page 2519 6. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These may cause scratches and gouges resulting in leak paths. Use a plastic scraper to clean the sealing surfaces. Clean the exhaust manifold mating surface of the cylinder head with metal surface prep. Follow the directions on the packaging. Installation 1. Install 6 new RH exhaust manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. Using a new gasket, install the RH exhaust manifold and 6 new nuts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 3. Connect the RH HO2S electrical connector. 4. Install the RH catalytic converter. For additional information, refer to Catalytic Converter. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Flexible Pipe Exhaust Flexible Pipe Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not excessively bend, twist or allow the exhaust to hang from the flexible pipe. 1. NOTE: Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust flexible pipe-to-exhaust Y-pipe nuts. ^ Discard the gasket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the Torca(R) clamp. 4. Separate the 2 exhaust flexible pipe isolators and remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket and nuts. 6. Start the engine and check for exhaust leaks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe > Page 2524 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Y-Pipe Exhaust Y-Pipe Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not excessively bend, twist or allow the exhaust to hang from the flexible pipe. NOTE: Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe-to-LH and RH catalytic converter nuts. ^ Discard the gaskets. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 3. Remove and discard the exhaust Y-pipe-to-exhaust flexible pipe nuts and remove the exhaust Y-pipe. ^ Discard the gasket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new gaskets and nuts. 5. Start the engine and check for exhaust leaks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler and Tailpipe Removal and Installation NOTE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the isolators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. NOTE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the isolators may cause the exhaust hanger isolator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Support the muffler and tailpipe with a suitable jackstand. 3. Remove the Torca(R) clamp. 4. CAUTION: Do not damage or tear the isolators during removal. Using soapy water, separate the 4 muffler and tailpipe isolators from the vehicle. 5. Separate the muffler and tailpipe from the exhaust flexible pipe and remove the muffler and tailpipe. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Inspect and replace any isolators damaged or torn during the removal process. 7. Start the engine and check for exhaust leaks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) Body Control Module: Service and Repair Driver Seat Module (DSM) DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 2536 Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the DSM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the DSM into the scan tool. 2. NOTE: If the driver seat can be moved to a high enough position, the DSM screws can be removed without removing the driver seat. If necessary, remove the driver seat. 3. Remove the 2 screws. 4. Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors and remove the DSM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 2537 5. NOTE: Make sure to download the DSM configuration information from the scan tool into the new DSM. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 2538 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is NOT Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position (TP) sensor, and mechanical throttle body. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle when no power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h (30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (~0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. 6. The TP sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage - Signal return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2542 Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts) - 2 signal return (ground) circuits - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) 3. The pedal position signal is convened to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value is substituted for an incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2543 ETC System The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate corrective action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2544 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Since the IPC and the main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential common failure modes. The E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate failure mode and effects management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2545 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2) Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2546 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 4% - Out of range, limp home default position. - Greater than or equal to 4% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key ON, engine OFF. - Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 8% - Enable ice breaker mode. Used to clear potential ice buildup in the throttle body. - Greater than or equal to 8% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard stop) after key-up. - Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide open throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Rear Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 2573 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 2579 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2580 View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2583 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2584 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2585 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2586 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2587 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2588 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2589 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2590 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2591 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2592 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2593 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2594 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2595 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2596 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2597 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2598 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2599 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2600 Engine Control Module: Connector Views C175B (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2601 C175B (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2602 C175E (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2603 C175E (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2604 C175T (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2605 C175T (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Disconnect the 3 powertrain control module (PCM) electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 nuts and the PCM. - Remove the gasket. Installation 1. Install the gasket and the PCM. 2. Install the 2 PCM nuts. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 2608 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit (IC) internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2612 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2613 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2618 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2619 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2623 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2624 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2629 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2630 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2636 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2637 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2641 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2642 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2643 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2644 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2649 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2652 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2653 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2654 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2664 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2665 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2666 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2670 C107 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2671 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases., and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2672 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2678 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2679 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2680 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2681 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2682 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2683 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2684 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2685 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2686 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2687 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 2688 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2692 C435 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2693 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2697 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2698 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2699 The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2703 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2704 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2705 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2716 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2717 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2718 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2721 C142 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2722 C171 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2723 C172 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2724 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2727 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Both sensors 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2728 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2729 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2730 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2731 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2735 C1121 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2738 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2742 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 2747 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2752 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2753 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2754 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2755 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2756 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2757 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2758 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2759 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2760 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2761 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2762 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2763 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2764 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2765 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2766 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2767 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2768 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2769 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2770 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2771 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2772 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2773 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2774 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2775 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2776 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2777 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2778 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2779 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2780 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2781 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2782 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2783 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2784 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2785 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2790 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2795 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2800 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2801 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2805 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2806 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2807 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2808 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 2813 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2820 C4168 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2821 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2822 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 2827 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2833 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2836 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2837 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2838 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2842 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2843 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2844 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a suitable tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2852 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2853 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2854 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Fuel Pressure 3.5 L engine running fuel pressure....................................................................................................... ...........................................................450 kPa (65 psi) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Typical Diagnostic Reference Value Measured/PID Values 600 RPM .......................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................... Hot Idle Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER Part 1 Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2865 Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe from the air cleaner. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the air cleaner bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. NOTE: No tools are needed to remove the air cleaner assembly. Removal should be carried out using hands only. Separate the 2 air cleaner feet from the rubber grommets and remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. NOTE: - Make sure that the 2 air cleaner feet are seated into the rubber grommets under the air cleaner assembly. - The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, which may cause personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. Remove the Schrader valve cap. 2. NOTE: This step will drain some fuel out of the system. Place the fuel in a suitable container. Install the special tool and slowly open the manual valve to relieve the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2874 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.29-1.45 mm (0.051-0.057 in) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 2883 Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2884 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................AYFS-22FM Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2885 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2886 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2887 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Removal LH side 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling from the valve cover fitting and position aside. RH side 2. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 3. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs. 5. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2888 NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the 6 spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the 6 spark plugs. 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2889 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the 6 spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil-on-plug boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs and the 6 bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. Connect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. LH side 7. Position and connect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling to the valve cover fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2893 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2894 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance A midrange clearance is the most desirable. Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ....................... 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) Exhaust .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2898 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance Check 1. Remove the valve covers. 2. NOTE: The valve clearance must be measured with the camshaft at base circle. The engine will have to be rotated with the crankshaft pulley bolt to bring each valve to base circle. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location. A midrange clearance is the most desirable: ^ Intake: 0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.01 inch) ^ Exhaust: 0.300 - 0.400 mm (0.0118 - 0.0157 inch) 3. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet reflects the thickness of the valve tappet. For example, a tappet with the number 3.310 has the thickness of 3.31 mm (0.13 inch). If any of the valve clearances are out of specification, select new tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the base tappet thickness - most desirable thickness. Select the tappets and mark the installation location. 4. If required, install the new selected valve tappets in the marked locations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2903 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2904 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2908 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2909 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2910 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2911 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2915 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2916 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2917 The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) Body Control Module: Service and Repair Driver Seat Module (DSM) DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 2923 Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the DSM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the DSM into the scan tool. 2. NOTE: If the driver seat can be moved to a high enough position, the DSM screws can be removed without removing the driver seat. If necessary, remove the driver seat. 3. Remove the 2 screws. 4. Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors and remove the DSM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 2924 5. NOTE: Make sure to download the DSM configuration information from the scan tool into the new DSM. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 2925 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is NOT Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 2929 C2064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2932 Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS) Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS) BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2937 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2940 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2941 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2942 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2952 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2953 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2954 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2960 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2961 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2962 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2963 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2964 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2965 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2966 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2967 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2968 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2969 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2970 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2971 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2972 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2973 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2974 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2975 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2976 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2977 C251 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2981 C1368 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 2982 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation ELECTRONIC THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (TAC) The electronic TAC is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. There are 2 designs for the TAC, parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing. Two springs are used; one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle when no power is applied. The force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring. The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h (30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degree from the hard stop angle. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (~ 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position (TP) sensor, and mechanical throttle body. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle when no power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h (30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (~0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. 6. The TP sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage - Signal return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2986 Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts) - 2 signal return (ground) circuits - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) 3. The pedal position signal is convened to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value is substituted for an incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2987 ETC System The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate corrective action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2988 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Since the IPC and the main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential common failure modes. The E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate failure mode and effects management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2989 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2) Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2990 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 4% - Out of range, limp home default position. - Greater than or equal to 4% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key ON, engine OFF. - Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 8% - Enable ice breaker mode. Used to clear potential ice buildup in the throttle body. - Greater than or equal to 8% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard stop) after key-up. - Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide open throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3017 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3018 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3019 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3020 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3026 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3027 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3028 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 3029 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3030 View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3033 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3034 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3035 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3036 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3037 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3038 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3039 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3040 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3041 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3042 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3043 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3044 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3045 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3046 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3047 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3048 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3049 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3050 Engine Control Module: Connector Views C175B (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3051 C175B (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3052 C175E (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3053 C175E (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3054 C175T (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3055 C175T (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Disconnect the 3 powertrain control module (PCM) electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 nuts and the PCM. - Remove the gasket. Installation 1. Install the gasket and the PCM. 2. Install the 2 PCM nuts. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3058 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit (IC) internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3062 C107 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3063 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases., and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3064 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3070 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3071 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3072 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3073 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3074 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3075 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3076 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3077 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3078 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3079 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3080 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3084 C435 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3085 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to operate. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3093 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3094 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3095 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3096 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3097 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3098 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3099 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3100 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3101 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3102 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3103 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3104 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3105 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3106 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3107 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3108 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3109 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3110 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 14-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3111 14-2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3112 14-3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3113 14-4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3114 14-5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3115 14-6 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3116 Information Bus: Description and Operation COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK Vehicle communication utilizes both medium and high speed controller area network (CAN) communications. CAN is used for many modules to communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking, is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus. Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial data network reduces the number of wires combining the signals on a single network. Information is sent to the individual control modules that control each function. The vehicle has 2 module communication networks: - Medium speed (MS) CAN - High speed (HS) CAN Both networks are connected to the data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module on both networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the steering column and the audio unit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3117 Network Topology MS-CAN Network Operation The MS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3118 - SJB - Audio unit - Instrument cluster - DSM (if equipped) - DVD player (if equipped) - EATC module (if equipped) - SDARS module (if equipped) - Parking aid module (if equipped) - Power liftgate module (if equipped) - THX(R) amplifier (if equipped) - Climate controlled seat module (if equipped) HS-CAN Network Operation The HS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules: PCM - RCM - ABS module - Instrument cluster - Occupant classification sensor module - 4WD control module (if equipped) - Steering angle sensor module (if equipped) - Adaptive front lighting module (if equipped) Network Termination The CAN network uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The network termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination resistors. Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages are broadcast in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network, and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or total resistance is 60 ohms. Network termination improves bus message reliability by: stabilizing bus voltage. - eliminating electrical interference. Gateway Module The instrument cluster is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice versa. This information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The instrument cluster is the only module on this vehicle that has this ability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect the following for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): 15 (40A) (no communication with ABS module) - 16 (30A) (no communication with climate controlled seat module) - 50 (10A) (no communication with ABS module) - 51 (5A) (no communication with adaptive front lighting module) - 57 (40A) (no communication with ABS module) - 59 (30A) (no communication with power liftgate module) - 60 (30A) (no communication with driver seat module [DSM]) - Smart junction box (SJB) fuse(s): 3 (15A) (no communication with digital versatile disc [DVD] player) - 5 (10A) (no communication with SJB) - 11 (10A) (no communication with four wheel drive [4WD] control module) - 12 (7.5A) (no communication with DSM) - 13 (7.5A) (no communication with satellite radio receiver) - 14 (10A) (no communication with power liftgate module) - 15 (10A) (no communication with electronic automatic temperature control [EATC] module) - 18 (20A) (no communication with THX(R) amplifier) - 20 (15A) (no power to scan tool) - 26 (10A) (no communication with instrument cluster) - 28 (5A) (no communication with audio unit) - 29 (5A) (no communication with instrument cluster) - 34 (5A) (no communication with steering angle sensor module) - 35 (10A) (no communication with parking aid module, 4WD control module) - 37 (10A) (no communication with EATC module) - 38 (20A) (no communication with THX(R) amplifier) - 39 (20A) (no communication with audio unit) - 41 (15A) (no communication with audio unit) - 46 (7.5A) (no communication with restraints control module [RCM], occupant classification sensor module) - Data link connector (DLC) - Wiring harness - Wiring, terminals or connectors 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the DLC. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - GO to Pinpoint Test U, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Test U: No Power To The Scan Tool 5. NOTE: During the network test, the scan tool will first attempt to communicate with the PCM, after establishing communication with the PCM, the scan tool will then attempt to communicate with all other modules on the vehicle. Carry out the network test. If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs and proceed to Step 6. - If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to continue diagnosis for the module not communicating. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3121 Procedures 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Communication Network DTC Chart. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Module Communications Network NOTE: Follow the non-network DTC diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to the network DTC (U-codes) diagnostics. 7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Vehicle communication utilizes both medium and high speed controller area network (CAN) communications. CAN is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus. The vehicle is equipped with 2 module communication networks: - High speed (HS) CAN - Medium speed (MS) CAN HS-CAN and MS-CAN CAN is a communication network that uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+) and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the network CAN circuits allowing multiple modules to communicate with each other. The MS-CAN network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus messages and is designed for general information transfer. The HS-CAN network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for real time information transfer and control. Certain network faults may cause inconsistent message communication. The CAN network may remain operational with only 1 of the 2 termination resistors present. CAN Network Communication Fault Chart The fault chart describes the specific CAN network failures and their resulting symptom. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3122 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3123 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3124 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart (Part 3) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3125 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart (Part 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3126 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart (Part 5) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3127 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart (Part 6) NOTE: Some HS-CAN faults may result in a no-start condition. Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure when another Vehicle System directs to carry out configuration or when DTCs from the below list are present. See: Body Control Module/Service and Repair Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a repair procedure. Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the settings are unique to each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in improper operation and/or any of the following DTCs setting: - B2477 and/or B2141 - sets when a body/chassis module is not configured. - B2900 - sets when there is a VIN mismatch between the module with the B2900 and the PCM. Either the PCM or the body module stored VIN may be incorrect. - P0602, P0605 and/or P1639 - sets when the PCM vehicle identification (VID) block is not configured or is configured incorrectly. - U0300 and/or U0301 - sets when the configuration between 2 or more modules do not match. - U2050 and/or U2051 - sets when a valid strategy/calibration is not present. The following are the 3 different methods of configuration: - Programmable module installation (PMI) - Module reprogramming ("flashing") - Programmable parameters Some modules do not support all 3 methods. Definition of Terms The following are definitions of configuration terms: Programmable Module Installation (PMI) PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a new module. Data used for the PMI process is automatically downloaded from the original module and stored when a scan tool session is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module being replaced, the scan tool may prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter values that need to be manually selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a strategy/calibration update is available. NOTE: A module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order to carry out PMI. It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to removing any modules. To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation. See: Body Control Module/Service and Repair Module Reprogramming Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool process which updates the strategy/calibration in a module. Module reprogramming is automatically carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available. Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not improve module operation or repair a hardware failure. NOTE: Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) procedure recommends doing so. - A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while being reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other modules during reprogramming. Programmable Parameters Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be modified by the dealer via scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a procedure listed in the vehicle Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a module, only a few of these options are programmable parameters. Adaptive Learning and Calibration Some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out if replaced as part of a repair procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. Vehicle Identification (VID) Block Some PCMs contain a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block commonly stores powertrain configuration items Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3128 such as VIN, tire size, axle ratio, and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with speed control. As-Built Data As-Built data is a VIN specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As Built data will not reflect customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured. NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This data may be accessed from the technician service publication website. Body/Chassis Module Addresses For As-Built Entry The chart lists body/chassis module As-Built data addresses. Module Configuration And Parameter Index (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3129 Module Configuration And Parameter Index (Part 2) The chart describes specific module programming information. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3130 Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions U0002-U0102 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3131 U0115-U0155 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3132 U0155-U0197 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3133 U0208-U2023 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3134 U2023-U2511 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3135 B2477-B2900 / P0602-P1639 / U0300-U2050 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3136 U2051 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3137 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3138 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3139 Symptom Chart (Part 3) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3140 Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL A1-A2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3141 A2-A3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3142 A4 Normal Operation The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the PCM. The PCM shares the HS-CAN network with the ABS module, the restraints control module (RCM), the occupant classification sensor module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the adaptive front lighting module (if equipped), the steering angle sensor module (if equipped) and the instrument cluster. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - PCM Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST B: THE ABS MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL B1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3143 B1-B3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3144 B4 Normal Operation The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the ABS module. The ABS module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the restraints control module (RCM), the occupant classification sensor module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the adaptive front lighting module (if equipped), the steering angle sensor module (if equipped) and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits CBB50 (YE/OG), SBB57 (RD) and SBB15 (WH/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD121 (BK/YE). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ABS module Test C: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST C: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3145 C1-C3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3146 C4-C5 Normal Operation The RCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the RCM. The RCM shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the occupant classification sensor module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the adaptive front lighting module (if equipped), the steering angle sensor module (if equipped) and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the RCM is provided by circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), and the RCM is case grounded. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Case ground open - RCM Test E: The Occupant Classification Sensor Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST E: THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3147 E1-E2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3148 E2-E3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3149 E4 Normal Operation The occupant classification sensor module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the occupant classification sensor module. The occupant classification sensor module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the restraints control module (RCM), the adaptive front lighting module (if equipped), the steering angle sensor module (if equipped) and the instrument cluster. Voltage to the occupant classification sensor module is supplied by circuit CBP46 (WH/BU). Ground is supplied by circuit GD143 (BK/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Occupant classification sensor module Test F: The Adaptive Front Lighting Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST F: THE ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL F1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3150 F1-F2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3151 F3-F4 Normal Operation The adaptive front lighting module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the adaptive front lighting module. The adaptive front lighting module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the restraints control module (RCM), the occupant classification sensor module, the steering angle sensor module (if equipped) and the instrument cluster. Voltage to the adaptive front lighting module is supplied by circuit CBB51 (BN). Ground is supplied by circuit GD120 (BK/GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Adaptive front lighting module Test G: The Steering Angle Sensor Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST G: THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3152 G1-G2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3153 G2-G3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3154 G4 Normal Operation The steering angle sensor module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the steering angle sensor module. The steering angle sensor module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the restraints control module (RCM), the occupant classification sensor module, the adaptive front lighting module (if equipped) and the instrument cluster. Voltage to the steering angle sensor module is supplied by circuit CBP34 (VT/BN). Ground is supplied by circuit GD115 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Steering angle sensor module Test H: The Instrument Cluster Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST H: THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3155 H1-H3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3156 H4-H5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3157 H5-H6 Normal Operation The instrument cluster communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN network connection to the instrument cluster and circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the MS-CAN network connection to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the restraints control module (RCM), the occupant classification sensor module, the adaptive front lighting module (if equipped) and the steering angle sensor module (if equipped). The instrument cluster shares the MS-CAN network with the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the climate controlled seat module (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), and the digital versatile disc (DVD) player (if equipped). Voltage for the instrument cluster is provided by circuits CBP29 (WH/VT) and SBP26 (YE/RD). Circuit GD115 (BK/GY) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Instrument cluster Test I: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST I: THE SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3158 I1-I2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3159 I3-I4 Normal Operation The SJB communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the SJB. The SJB shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the climate controlled seat module (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped) and the digital versatile disc (DVD) player (if equipped). Voltage for the SJB is provided by circuit CDC33 (VT/GN). Circuit GD133 (BK) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - SJB Test J: The Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST J: THE ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3160 J1-J2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3161 J2-J3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3162 J4 Normal Operation The EATC module communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the EATC module. The EATC module shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player, the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the power liftgate module and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the EATC module is provided by circuits CBP37 (WH) and SBP15 (WH/RD). Circuit GD115 (BK/GY) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - EATC module Test K: The Audio Unit Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST K: THE AUDIO UNIT DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL K1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3163 K1-K3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3164 K3-K4 Normal Operation The audio unit communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the audio unit. The audio unit shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player, the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the power liftgate module and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the audio unit is provided by circuits CBP28 (GY/VT), CBP41 (BU) and SBP39 (WH/RD). Circuit GD114 (BK/BU) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Audio unit Test L: The THX(R) Amplifier Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST L: THE THX(R) AMPLIFIER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3165 L1-L3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3166 L3-L4 Normal Operation The THX(R) amplifier communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the THX(R) amplifier. The THX(R) amplifier shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player, the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the power running board module (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped) and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the THX(R) amplifier is provided by circuits SBP38 (BN/RD) and SBP18 (YE/RD). Three circuits GD148 (BK/YE) provide ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - THX(R) amplifier Test M: The Satellite Radio Receiver Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST M: THE SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3167 M1-M2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3168 M2-M3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3169 M4 Normal Operation The satellite radio receiver communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the satellite radio receiver. The satellite radio receiver shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player (if equipped), the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped) and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the satellite radio receiver is provided by circuit CBP13 (GY/BN). Circuit GD148 (BK/YE) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Satellite radio receiver Test N: The Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST N: THE DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD) PLAYER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL N1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3170 N1-N3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3171 N3-N4 Normal Operation The DVD player communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the DVD player. The DVD player shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped) and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the DVD player is provided by circuit SBP03 (BU/RD). Circuit GD114 (BK/BU) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DVD player Test O: The Driver Seat Module (DSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST O: THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3172 O1-O3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3173 O3-O4 Normal Operation The DSM communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the DSM. The DSM shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player (if equipped) and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the DSM is provided by circuits SBP12 (GN/RD) and SBB60 (GN/RD). Circuits GD133 (BK) and GD145 (BK/BU) provide ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DSM Test P: The Climate Controlled Seat Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST P: THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3174 P1-P2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3175 P3-P4 Normal Operation The climate controlled seat module communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the climate controlled seat module. The climate controlled seat module shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player (if equipped), the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), and the power liftgate module (if equipped). Voltage for the climate controlled seat module is provided by circuit SBB16 (VT/RD). Circuit GD145 (BK/BU) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Climate controlled seat module Test Q: The Parking Aid Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST Q: THE PARKING AID MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3176 Q1-Q2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3177 Q2-Q3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3178 Q4 Normal Operation The parking aid module communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the parking aid module. The parking aid module shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player (if equipped), the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped) and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the parking aid module is provided by circuit CBP35 (YE/GY). Circuit GD133 (BK) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Parking aid module Test R: The Power Liftgate Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST R: THE POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL R1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3179 R1-R3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3180 R3-R4 Normal Operation The power liftgate module communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the power liftgate module. The power liftgate module shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) player (if equipped), the driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped), and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped). Voltage for the power liftgate module is provided by circuits SBP14 (BN/RD) and SBB59 (BU/RD). Circuit GD149 (BK/GY) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Power liftgate module Test S: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding PINPOINT TEST S: NO MEDIUM SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (MS-CAN) COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3181 NOT RESPONDING S1-S2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3182 S2-S4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3183 S5-S7 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3184 S7-S8 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3185 S9-S12 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3186 S12-S16 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3187 S16-S20 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3188 S20-S24 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3189 S24-S27 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3190 S27-S29 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3191 S29-S33 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3192 S33-S37 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3193 S37-S41 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3194 S41-S44 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3195 S45-S48 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3196 S49-S53 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3197 S54-S56 Normal Operation The MS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) and VDB07 (VT/OG) provide the network connection to all modules on the network. The smart junction box (SJB), the instrument cluster, the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped), the audio unit, the THX(R) amplifier (if equipped), the satellite radio receiver (if equipped), the digital versatile disc (DVD) (if equipped), the parking aid module (if equipped), the power liftgate module (if equipped), the driver seat module (if equipped), and the climate controlled seat module (if equipped) all communicate with the scan tool using the MS-CAN network. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - SJB - Instrument cluster - Audio unit - DVD player (if equipped) - EATC module (if equipped) - Parking aid module (if equipped) - Power liftgate module (if equipped) - Satellite radio receiver (if equipped) - THX(R) amplifier (if equipped) - Driver seat module (DSM) (if equipped) - Climate controlled seat module (if equipped) Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding PINPOINT TEST T: NO HIGH SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (HS-CAN) COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3198 T1-T2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3199 T3-T4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3200 T5-T6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3201 T7-T8 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3202 T8-T9 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3203 T10-T11 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3204 T12-T14 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3205 T14-T17 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3206 T17-T20 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3207 T21-T23 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3208 T23-T25 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3209 T25-T28 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3210 T28-T31 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3211 T32-T34 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3212 T35-T38 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3213 T39-T40 Normal Operation The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) and VDB05 (WH). The PCM, the ABS module, the restraints control module (RCM), the occupant classification sensor module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module (if equipped), the steering angle sensor module (if equipped), the adaptive front lighting module (if equipped) and the instrument cluster all communicate with the scan tool using the HS-CAN. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - PCM - RCM - ABS module - Instrument cluster - Occupant classification sensor - 4WD control module (if equipped) - Steering angle sensor module (if equipped) - Adaptive front lighting module (if equipped) Test U: No Power To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST U: NO POWER TO THE SCAN TOOL U1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3214 U1-U3 Normal Operation The scan tool is connected to the data link connector (DLC) to communicate with the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN) and the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) communications network. Voltage for the scan tool is provided by circuit SBP20 (GN/RD). Ground is provided by circuits GD115 (BK/GY) and GD116 (BK/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Scan tool Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3215 Information Bus: Programming and Relearning PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Not Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3216 Information Bus: Service and Repair PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Not Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Module Communications Network Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Module Communications Network > Page 3219 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3223 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3224 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3225 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3229 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3230 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3244 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3245 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3246 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3249 C142 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3250 C171 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3251 C172 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3252 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3255 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Both sensors 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3256 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3257 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3258 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3259 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3263 C1121 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3266 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3270 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) Body Control Module: Service and Repair Driver Seat Module (DSM) DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 3277 Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the DSM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the DSM into the scan tool. 2. NOTE: If the driver seat can be moved to a high enough position, the DSM screws can be removed without removing the driver seat. If necessary, remove the driver seat. 3. Remove the 2 screws. 4. Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors and remove the DSM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 3278 5. NOTE: Make sure to download the DSM configuration information from the scan tool into the new DSM. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 3279 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is NOT Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) valve, 3-wire throttle position (TP) sensor, and mechanical throttle body. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: 1. The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are 2 designs: parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-series design has a separate motor housing. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle when no power is applied. This is for limp home reasons (the force of the plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). The default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 48 km/h (30 mph). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (~0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable operated throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. 6. The TP sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope TP signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires 4 circuits. 5-volt reference voltage - Signal return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3283 Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) And Accelerator Pedal Assembly The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are 3 pedal position signals required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 and APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are 2 VREF circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. 2 reference voltage circuits (5 volts) - 2 signal return (ground) circuits - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0 volts) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5 volts) 3. The pedal position signal is convened to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 4. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. A value is substituted for an incorrect signal if 2 of the 3 signals are incorrect. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3284 ETC System The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an enhanced-quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate corrective action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3285 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Since the IPC and the main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential common failure modes. The E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate failure mode and effects management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3286 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation (Part 2) Accelerator and Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3287 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to maintain the throttle position at the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle (DC) signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: Less than 4% - Out of range, limp home default position. - Greater than or equal to 4% but less than 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - Greater than or equal to 6% but less than 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key ON, engine OFF. - Greater than or equal to 7% but less than 8% - Enable ice breaker mode. Used to clear potential ice buildup in the throttle body. - Greater than or equal to 8% but less than 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard stop) after key-up. - Greater than or equal to 10% but less than or equal to 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard stop) and 82 degrees, 10% duty cycle equals 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle equals 82 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 92% but less than or equal to 96% - Wide open throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - Greater than 96% but less than or equal to 100% - Out of range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate be closed against the hard stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H driver (also in PCM). The H driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the electronic throttle body motor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 07-19-5 > Oct > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 07-19-5 10/01/07 MIL ON DTC P0451 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 which may be caused by electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) interference. ACTION If normal Workshop Manual Diagnostics are unable to resolve the concern, install a Capacitor/Jumper Harness Kit following the installation instruction sheet included with the kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071905A 2007 Edge/MKX: Install A 0.7 Hr. Capacitor Jumper Harness Kit (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9C052 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3309 View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3312 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3313 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3314 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3315 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3316 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3317 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3318 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3319 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3320 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3321 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3322 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3323 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3324 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3325 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3326 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3327 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3328 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3329 Engine Control Module: Connector Views C175B (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3330 C175B (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3331 C175E (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3332 C175E (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3333 C175T (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3334 C175T (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Disconnect the 3 powertrain control module (PCM) electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 nuts and the PCM. - Remove the gasket. Installation 1. Install the gasket and the PCM. 2. Install the 2 PCM nuts. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3337 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit (IC) internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs P1635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3341 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3342 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3347 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3348 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3352 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3353 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3354 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3355 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3360 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3363 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3364 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3365 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3375 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3376 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3377 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3381 C107 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3382 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases., and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3383 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove and discard the CHT sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3389 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3390 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3391 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3392 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3393 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3394 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3395 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3396 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3397 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3398 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Level Sensor > Page 3399 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3403 C435 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3404 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3408 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3409 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3410 The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3414 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3415 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3416 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3427 View 151-6 (Engine, Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3428 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 3429 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3432 C142 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3433 C171 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3434 C172 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3435 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3438 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Both sensors 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3439 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3440 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR RH Sensors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3441 LH Sensors Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3442 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3446 C1121 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3449 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3453 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3458 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3464 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3465 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3466 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3467 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3468 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3469 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3470 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3471 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3472 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3473 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3474 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3475 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3476 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3477 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3478 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3479 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3480 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3481 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3482 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3483 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3484 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3485 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3486 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3487 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3488 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3489 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3490 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3491 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3492 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3493 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3494 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3495 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3496 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3501 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3506 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3511 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3512 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3513 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3514 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3515 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3516 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3517 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3518 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3519 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3520 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3521 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3522 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3523 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3524 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3525 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3526 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3527 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3528 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3529 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3530 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3531 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3532 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3533 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3534 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3535 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3536 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3537 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3538 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3539 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3540 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3541 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3542 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3543 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3544 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 3553 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 3554 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set TSB 10-16-1 08/30/10 3.5L / 3.7L ENGINE - VCT CODES P0011, P0012, P0021, P0022 - RUNS ROUGH OR MISSES VEHICLES BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/15/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKZ 2009 MKS 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 09-13-10 to update Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge, MKX, MKZ, 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus X, Sable, 2009 Flex and MKS vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 3.7L engine and vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008 may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on and one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022. Vehicle may also exhibit rough idle or misses. ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct this condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using IDS, verify DTCs are present. 2. Verify vehicle build date on or before 12/15/2008. a. If the vehicle was built after 12/15/2008, this procedure does not apply, refer to the Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual for further diagnosis. b. If the vehicle was built on or before 12/15/2008 and has any Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) DTCs P0011, P0012, P0016, P0018, P0021, P0022 proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove both cam covers. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-01. 4. Inspect the part number on the front of the camshaft phaser. You may need to rotate the engine crank to move the phasers in position. The left cam phaser should be 7T4E-6C524-EC and the right cam phaser should be 8T4E-6C524-AC. a. If either one or both don't match the updated part numbers replace the phaser(s). Refer to WSM, Section 303-01. b. If both camshaft phasers have the updated part numbers, this procedure does not apply and refer to the PC/ED manual for further diagnosis. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 3560 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101601A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.5 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.0 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.3 DOHC: Check DTCs Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 6.9 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601A 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.0 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace The Right Or Left Phazer (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2009 Flex: Check DTCs, 7.2 Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 7.0 Hrs. Taurus X 3.5L DOHC 2009 MKS 3.7L: Check DTCs Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ AWD 3.5L 10.4 DOHC: Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 10-16-1 > Aug > 10 > Engine - MIL ON/Camshaft Phaser DTC's Set > Page 3561 101601B 2007-2009 MKZ FWD 3.5L 10.2 DOHC:Check DTCs, Hrs. Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101601B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 7.7 Hrs. 3.5L DOHC: Check DTCs, Inspect Both Phaser Part Numbers, Replace Both Right And Left Phazers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A257 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 C1451 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1 > Page 3564 C1452 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3565 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position sensor (CKP) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3566 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) OIL CONTROL SOLENOID Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH or RH valve cover. 2. Remove the bolt and the variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED (OSS) SENSOR The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3574 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) BYPASS SOLENOID Secondary AIR Bypass Solenoid The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is used by the PCM to control vacuum to the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is a normally closed solenoid. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum release. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation SECONDARY AIR DIVERTER VALVE Secondary AIR Diverter Valve The secondary AIR diverter valve is used with the secondary AIR pump to provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the secondary AIR pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the secondary AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the secondary AIR system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation SECONDARY AIR PUMP Secondary Air Pump The secondary AIR pump provides pressurized air to the secondary AIR system. The secondary AIR pump functions independently of RPM and is controlled by the PCM. The secondary AIR pump is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system backpressure and system voltage. The secondary AIR pump draws dry filtered air from the intake air system downstream of the MAF/IAT sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview V-Engines In-Line Engines The catalytic converter and exhaust Systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O) However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the PCM. For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Monitors/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor The number of HO2Ss used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on the vehicle emission certification level (LEV, LEV-II, ULEV, PZEV). On most vehicles only 2 HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) use 3 HO2Ss for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) located before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensors (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensors (HO2S13/HO2S23) located after the catalyst are used for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control). Current PZEV vehicles use only a 4-cylinder engine, so only the bank 1 HO2Ss are used. Catalytic Converter Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3589 A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. Exhaust System Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3590 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. On some PZEV, there is a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst. Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to Catalytic Converter, Exhaust System. Three-Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase. the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Catalytic Converter - LH Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: If necessary, the catalytic converter heat shield can be serviced separately. NOTE: Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 4. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket-to-transmission bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the 4 nuts and the LH catalytic converter. ^ Discard the 4 LH catalytic converter nuts and gasket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket and nuts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH > Page 3593 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Catalytic Converter - RH All vehicles 1. NOTE: If necessary, the catalytic converter heat shield can be serviced separately. NOTE: Always install new fasteners and gaskets. Clean flange faces prior to new gasket installation to make sure of correct sealing. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the catalyst monitor sensor. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control Systems. 3. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. All wheel drive (AWD) 4. Remove and discard the 4 universal joint (U-joint) flange bolts and separate the front driveshaft and secure it with a length of mechanic's wire. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the RH halfshaft assembly. 6. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). Front wheel drive (FWD) 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the power steering rack shield. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs). 8. Remove the catalytic converter support bracket-to-engine block bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor shield. ^ To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH > Page 3594 10. Remove the roll restrictor bolt and rotate the engine forward. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 11. Remove the 2 bracket-to-RH catalytic converter bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 12. Remove the 4 nuts and the RH catalytic converter. ^ Discard the 4 RH catalytic converter nuts and gasket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket and nuts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams C1195 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3599 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve NOTE: The EVAP canister purge valve may also be referred to as a vapor management valve (VMV). The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve. The EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors by way of a solenoid, eliminating the need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. The PCM outputs a signal between 0 mA and 1,000 mA to control the EVAP canister purge valve. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3600 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER PURGE VALVE Removal and Installation WARNING: - The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the 2 EVAP canister purge valve vapor tube quick connect couplings. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3601 3. Depress the tab and remove the EVAP canister purge valve from the bracket. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair DUST SEPARATOR Removal and Installation 1. The dust separator is serviced as part of the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister vent solenoid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3608 Part 2 Removal and Installation WARNING: - The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. NOTE: Correct placement of the hoist arm to the frame lifting point is essential for the removal and installation of the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister assembly. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 3 bolts, pushpin retainer and the evaporative emission (EVAP) shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the 2 quick connect couplings from the EVAP canister assembly. 5. Disconnect the EVAP vapor tube from the EVAP dust separator. 6. Remove the 3 EVAP canister assembly bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Release the EVAP canister assembly pushpin retainer and remove the EVAP canister assembly. 8. NOTE: When installing the EVAP canister assembly, insert the alignment tab into the body first, then install the pushpin and 3 bolts. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair FUEL VAPOR TUBE ASSEMBLY WARNING: - The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3612 result in personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 3 bolts, pushpin retainer and the evaporative emission (EVAP) shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. 4. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly from the 2 front retainer clips. 5. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure transducer (FTPT) electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3613 6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly quick connect coupling from the fuel tank. 7. Position a suitable lifting device under the fuel tank. 8. Remove the 2 fuel tank bracket bolts and the 4 fuel tank mounting bolts. Partially lower the fuel tank enough to access the 2 rear fuel vapor tube assembly retainer clips. To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 9. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly from the 2 rear retainer clips. 10. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3617 C377 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3618 Leak Detection Valve: Description and Operation CANISTER VENT (CV) SOLENOID Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3619 Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER VENT SOLENOID Removal and Installation WARNING: - The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, which can cause a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquefied fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3620 result in personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 3 bolts, pushpin retainer and the evaporative emission (EVAP) shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the 2 EVAP vapor tubes from the EVAP canister vent solenoid and dust separator assembly. 5. Depress the tab and remove the EVAP canister vent solenoid and dust separator assembly from the EVAP canister assembly bracket. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Vacuum Output (IN-HG) EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid is an electromagnetic device used to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR valve. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Tube: Description and Operation EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY EGR Orifice Tube Assembly The orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also contains the metering orifice and 2 pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides feedback to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve ELECTRIC EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EEGR) VALVE EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly Depending on the application, the EEGR valve is a water cooled or an air cooled motor/valve assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the valve (against the motor opening force). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3632 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM) EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM MODULE (ESM) ESM The ESM is an integrated differential pressure feedback EGR system that functions in the same manner as a conventional differential pressure feedback EGR system. The various system components have been integrated into a single component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake manifold with a metal gasket that forms the metering orifice. This arrangement increases system reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute pressure (MAP). This MAP signal is used for EGR correction and inferred barometric pressure (BARO) at key on. The system provides the powertrain control module (PCM) with a differential pressure feedback EGR signal, identical to a traditional differential pressure feedback EGR system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3633 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE Typical EGR Valve EGR Flowrate The EGR valve in the differential pressure feedback EGR system is a conventional, vacuum-actuated. The valve increases or decreases the flow of EGR. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg). Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is impractical. The on board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3637 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair PCV Heater: Service and Repair POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) HEATER ELEMENT Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) heater element electrical connector. 2. Release the spring tension clamp and remove the PCV hose from the PCV heater element. 3. NOTE: The intake manifold is manufactured with an optional set of mounting holes for the PCV heater element self-tapping retaining screws that may be used if necessary. Remove the 2 PCV heater element retainer screws. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the PCV heater element from the intake manifold 5. NOTE: - To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, make sure the PCV heater element electrical connector is in the correct position to allow the wiring harness to be connected. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve C190 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve > Page 3646 C1556 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3647 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the PCV hose from the PCV valve. 3. CAUTION: A new PCV valve must be installed if removed from the valve cover. Upon removal, damage will occur to the locking mechanism on the PCV valve. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, make sure the PCV valve electrical connector is pointing in the correct position to allow the wiring harness to be connected. Incorrect installation would require removal and installation of a new valve. Rotate the PCV valve counterclockwise and remove from the valve cover. Discard the PCV valve. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR TUBE MOUNTED Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3652 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the large plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Fuel Pressure 3.5 L engine running fuel pressure....................................................................................................... ...........................................................450 kPa (65 psi) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, which may cause personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. Remove the Schrader valve cap. 2. NOTE: This step will drain some fuel out of the system. Place the fuel in a suitable container. Install the special tool and slowly open the manual valve to relieve the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Typical Diagnostic Reference Value Measured/PID Values 600 RPM .......................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................... Hot Idle Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3666 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND BRACKET Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the safety lock tab mechanism on the accelerator pedal sensor electrical connector prior to disconnecting. Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 3 nuts and the accelerator pedal and bracket. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3670 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3671 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Housing: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER Part 1 Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3675 Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe from the air cleaner. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the air cleaner bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. NOTE: No tools are needed to remove the air cleaner assembly. Removal should be carried out using hands only. Separate the 2 air cleaner feet from the rubber grommets and remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. NOTE: - Make sure that the 2 air cleaner feet are seated into the rubber grommets under the air cleaner assembly. - The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3679 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3680 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3681 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3682 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed correctly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before servicing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, which may cause personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. Remove the Schrader valve cap. 2. NOTE: This step will drain some fuel out of the system. Place the fuel in a suitable container. Install the special tool and slowly open the manual valve to relieve the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector Resistance ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 11 - 18 Ohms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 C181 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3696 C182 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3697 C183 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3698 C184 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3699 Fuel Injector: Diagrams C181 C182 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3700 C183 C184 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 3701 C185 C186 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3702 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation FUEL INJECTORS Typical Fuel Injector CAUTION: Do not apply battery positive voltage (B+) directly to the fuel injector electrical connector terminals. The solenoids may be damaged internally in a matter of seconds. The fuel injector is a solenoid-operated valve that meters fuel flow to the engine. The fuel injector is opened and closed a constant number of times per crankshaft revolution. The amount of fuel is controlled by the length of time the fuel injector is held open. The fuel injector is normally closed, and is operated by a 12-volt source from either the electronic engine control (EEC) power relay or fuel pump relay. The ground signal is controlled by the PCM. The injector is the deposit resistant injector (DRI) type and does not have to be cleaned. However, it can be flow checked and, if found outside of specification, a new fuel injector should be installed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3703 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL Exploded View Removal WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3704 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3. Remove the upper intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 5. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts. 7. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly. 8. Remove the 6 fuel injector clips and the 6 fuel injectors. - Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals. Installation 1. CAUTION: - Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. The use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seals. - The upper and lower O-ring seals are not interchangeable. NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil. Install the 6 fuel injectors and the 6 fuel injector clips into the fuel rail. 2. Install the fuel rail and fuel injectors as an assembly. 3. Install the 4 fuel rail bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 5. Connect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. Install the upper intake manifold. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair QUICK CONNECT COUPLING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Disconnect - Type I WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: - If the liquid or vapor tube is damaged (torn, holes or delaminated), a new tube assembly must be installed. Do not use aftermarket sleeving. Do not re-adhere loose sleeving material. - When reusing liquid or vapor tube quick connect couplings, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector locking tab area before separating the quick connect coupling from the tube. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the quick connect coupling onto the tube. - Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or tubes. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. 2. Depress the locking tab and release the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type I Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3708 1. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the quick connect coupling onto the tube. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated. 2. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened. Disconnect - Type II WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: - If the liquid or vapor tube is damaged (torn, holes or delaminated), a new tube assembly must be installed. Do not use aftermarket sleeving. Do not re-adhere loose sleeving material. - When reusing liquid or vapor tube quick connect couplings, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector locking tab area before separating the quick connect coupling from the tube. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the quick connect coupling onto the tube. - Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or tubes. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the quick connect coupling primary locking tab. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3709 3. Rotate the primary locking tab to the fully opened position and squeeze the secondary locking tabs to release the locking mechanism. 4. Push the locking mechanism outward and release the tube. 5. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type II 1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3710 2. CAUTION: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing. Depress the locking mechanism until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing and is fully seated onto the tube. 3. Rotate the primary locking tab on the retainer clip to the closed position. 4. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened. Disconnect - Type III WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: - If the liquid or vapor tube is damaged (torn, holes or delaminated), a new tube assembly must be installed. Do not use aftermarket sleeving. Do not re-adhere loose sleeving material. - When reusing liquid or vapor tube quick connect couplings, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector locking tab area before separating the quick connect coupling from the tube. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the quick connect coupling onto the tube. - Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or tubes. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3711 2. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer locking tabs to release the locking mechanism. 3. Push the locking mechanism outward to release the tube. 4. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type III 1. CAUTION: Make sure that the tube clicks into place when installing the quick connect coupling. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube. 2. Depress the quick connect coupling locking mechanism into the locked position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3712 3. Visually inspect and verify that the locking mechanism is flush with the quick connect coupling housing and that the locking tabs are securely fastened. 4. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened. Disconnect - Type IV WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: - If the liquid or vapor tube is damaged (torn, holes or delaminated), a new tube assembly must be installed. Do not use aftermarket sleeving. Do not re-adhere loose sleeving material. - When reusing liquid or vapor tube quick connect couplings, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector locking tab area before separating the quick connect coupling from the tube. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the quick connect coupling onto the tube. - Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or tubes. 1. Install the special tool on the tube and push into the quick connect coupling locking clip to release the locking tabs. 2. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3713 Connect - Type IV 1. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated. 2. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened. Disconnect - Type V WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: - If the liquid or vapor tube is damaged (torn, holes or delaminated), a new tube assembly must be installed. Do not use aftermarket sleeving. Do not re-adhere loose sleeving material. - When reusing liquid or vapor tube quick connect couplings, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector locking tab area before separating the quick connect coupling from the tube. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the quick connect coupling onto the tube. 1. Squeeze the outer edges of the quick connect coupling to release the locking tabs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3714 2. Remove the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type V 1. CAUTION: Make sure the quick connect coupling locking tabs click into place when installing onto the tube. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated. 2. Pull on the quick connect coupling and the tube to make sure it is securely fastened. Disconnect - Type VI WARNING: - Do not carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and can ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: - If the liquid or vapor tube is damaged (torn, holes or delaminated), a new tube assembly must be installed. Do not use aftermarket sleeving. Do not re-adhere loose sleeving material. - When reusing liquid or vapor tube quick connect couplings, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector locking tab area before separating the quick connect coupling from the tube. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube before inserting the quick connect coupling onto the tube. - Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or tubes. 1. Release the lock tab on the quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3715 2. Separate the quick connect coupling from the fitting. Connect - Type VI 1. Release the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting. 2. Apply the lock tab into the latched position. 3. Pull on the quick connect coupling to make sure it is securely fastened. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 3720 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER Typical Fuel Rail Pulse Damper The fuel rail pulse damper is located on the fuel rail and reduces the fuel system noise caused by the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold vacuum to avoid fuel spillage if the pulse damper diaphragm ruptures. The fuel rail pulse damper should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator; it does not regulate the fuel rail pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Fuel Pressure 3.5 L engine running fuel pressure....................................................................................................... ...........................................................450 kPa (65 psi) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3731 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3732 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL Exploded View Removal WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3736 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3. Remove the upper intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 5. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 6. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts. 7. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly. 8. Remove the 6 fuel injector clips and the 6 fuel injectors. - Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals. Installation 1. CAUTION: - Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. The use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seals. - The upper and lower O-ring seals are not interchangeable. NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil. Install the 6 fuel injectors and the 6 fuel injector clips into the fuel rail. 2. Install the fuel rail and fuel injectors as an assembly. 3. Install the 4 fuel rail bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 5. Connect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. Install the upper intake manifold. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair FUEL LINES Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3740 Part 2 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The evaporative emissions system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, and possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquid fuel are present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire hazard. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3741 3. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) outlet tube-to-EVAP purge valve quick connect coupling. 4. Disconnect the fresh air tube-to-vent hose quick connect coupling. 5. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-fuel supply tube quick connect coupling. 6. Remove the 3 bolts, pushpin retainer and the EVAP shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3742 7. Disconnect the EVAP purge valve outlet tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. 8. Disconnect the EVAP vapor-to-dust separator tube. 9. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel tank jumper tube quick connect coupling. 10. Release the EVAP and fuel supply tubes from the bundle retainer clips and remove the tubes the from the vehicle. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3747 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3748 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The fuel in the tank may be pressurized. Remove the fuel tank cap slowly. If a hissing sound is heard, wait until the condition stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3749 3. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 4. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining the fuel tank filler pipe. 5. Remove the 3 fuel tank filler pipe flange retaining screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. Remove the LH rear wheel splash shield. 7. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module, fuel level sensor (if equipped) and the fuel tank inlet spout are below the fuel level when the fuel tank is completely full. Make sure to drain any residual fuel from the fuel tank filler pipe prior to removing the fuel tank filler pipe clamp and hose. NOTE: The fuel tank filler pipe may have some residual fuel remaining in it after draining. Upon disconnecting the fuel tank filler pipe hose, carefully drain the residual fuel into a suitable container. Release the clamp and disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe-to-fuel tank hose. To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3750 8. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 9. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly from the vehicle. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 3759 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 3765 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3768 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module C463 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3771 C434 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3772 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3773 Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE AND RESERVOIR The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3776 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3777 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3778 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3779 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3780 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3781 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3782 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3783 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3784 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3785 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 3786 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3790 C463 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3791 Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3792 Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE AND RESERVOIR The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to operate. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3802 C4168 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3803 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3804 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER OUTLET PIPE Part 1 Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3808 Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube and vacuum tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe-to-air cleaner cover clamp. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe-to-throttle body clamp. - Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3812 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3813 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3818 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3819 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3823 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3824 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3829 C2040 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3830 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the torque demand. There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APPS1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APPS2 and APPS3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APPS1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There are 2 reference voltage circuits and 2 signal return circuits for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3834 C128 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3835 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3836 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3837 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE (FRP) SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and the resistance decreases as the pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 3842 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3849 C4168 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3850 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature for the location of the IFS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3851 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3856 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair Throttle Body: Service and Repair THROTTLE BODY Removal and Installation CAUTION: The throttle body must be removed from the vehicle to be cleaned. Do not hold the throttle plate open with any object that could scratch the bore or plate while servicing or cleaning the throttle body. 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and the throttle body (TB). - Discard the TB gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. NOTE: Install a new TB gasket. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) POSITION SENSOR The ETB position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative slope ETB position sensor signal (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The 2 ETB position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Position Sensor > Page 3864 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: - closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV) WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent injury, be careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated. The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position. The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below approximately 2,600 RPM. The shutter is in the closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake manifold. The motorized unit is energized above approximately 2,600 RPM. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 3874 Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Engine Engine Cylinder Identification Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3883 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3886 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3887 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3888 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3892 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3893 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3894 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 C111 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3900 C112 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3901 C113 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3902 C114 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3903 Ignition Coil: Diagrams C111 C112 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3904 C113 C114 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3905 C115 C116 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3906 C174 C194 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3907 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation COIL ON PLUG (COP) Typical Coil On Plug (COP) The COP ignition operates similar to a standard coil pack ignition except each plug has one coil per plug. The COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure mode effects management (FMEM). COIL PACK Typical Four-Tower Coil Pack Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3908 Typical Six-Tower Coil Pack The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed, voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil. The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as one spark plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Coil packs come in 4-tower, 6-tower horizontal and series 5 6-tower models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3. When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired, the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3909 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG Exploded View Removal and Installation LH side 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling from the valve cover fitting and position aside. RH side 2. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH ignition coil-on-plugs. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 3. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3910 - Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil-on-plug boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3914 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3915 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3919 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3920 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3921 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3926 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3927 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3933 View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor C1366 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3936 C1367 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3937 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil-on-plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3938 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation RH sensor 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. LH sensor 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Both sensors 3. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3942 C101 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3943 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid deceleration between teeth. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3944 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH catalytic converter. 3. Remove the bolt, nut and the heat shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Remove the rubber grommet cover. 5. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a suitable tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3952 C109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3953 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3954 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair KNOCK SENSOR (KS) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat housing. 2. Remove the lower intake manifold. 3. Remove the coolant tube. - Discard the O-ring. 4. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the KS. - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine coolant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.29-1.45 mm (0.051-0.057 in) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 3959 Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3960 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................AYFS-22FM Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3961 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3962 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3963 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Removal LH side 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling from the valve cover fitting and position aside. RH side 2. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 3. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the 6 bolts and the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs. 5. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3964 NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the 6 spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the 6 spark plugs. 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3965 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the 6 spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil-on-plug boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the 6 ignition coil-on-plugs and the 6 bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. Connect the 6 ignition coil-on-plug electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. LH side 7. Position and connect the crankcase vent tube quick connect coupling to the valve cover fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3974 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3975 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3976 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3977 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3978 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3979 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3980 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3981 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3982 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3983 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3984 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3985 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3986 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3987 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3988 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3989 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3990 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3991 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3992 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3993 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3994 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3995 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3996 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3997 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3998 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3999 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4000 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4001 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4002 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4003 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4004 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4005 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4006 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4007 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4008 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4014 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4015 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4016 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4017 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4018 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4019 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4020 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4021 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4022 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4023 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4024 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4025 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4026 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4027 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4028 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4029 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4030 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4031 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4032 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4033 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4034 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4035 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4036 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4037 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4038 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4039 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4040 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4041 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4042 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4043 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4044 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4045 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4046 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4047 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4048 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4054 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4055 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4056 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4057 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4058 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4059 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4060 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4061 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4062 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4063 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4064 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4065 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4066 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4067 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4068 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4069 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4070 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4071 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4072 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4073 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4074 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4075 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4076 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4077 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4078 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4079 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4080 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4081 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4082 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4083 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4084 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4085 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch - TCC: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4097 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4098 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4099 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4100 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4101 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4102 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4103 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4104 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4105 Brake Switch - TCC: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4106 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4107 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4108 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4109 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4110 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4111 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4112 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4113 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4114 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Overdrive Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4119 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4120 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4121 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4122 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4123 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4124 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4125 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4126 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4127 Overdrive Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4128 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4129 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4130 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4131 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4132 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4133 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4134 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4135 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4140 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4141 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4142 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4143 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4144 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4145 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4146 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4147 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4148 Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4149 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4150 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4151 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4152 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4153 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4154 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4155 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4156 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4161 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4162 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4163 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4164 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4165 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4166 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4167 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4168 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4169 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4170 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4171 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4172 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4173 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4174 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4175 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4176 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4177 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4178 Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4183 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4184 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4185 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4186 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4187 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4188 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4189 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4190 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4191 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4192 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4193 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4194 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4195 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4196 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4197 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4198 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4199 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4200 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4201 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4202 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4203 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4204 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4205 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4206 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4207 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4208 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4209 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4210 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4211 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4212 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4213 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4214 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4215 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4216 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4225 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4226 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4232 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4233 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4236 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4237 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4238 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4239 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4240 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4241 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4242 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4243 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4244 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4245 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4246 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4247 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4248 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4249 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4250 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4251 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4252 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4255 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4256 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4257 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4258 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4259 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4260 23. Remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Route the TSS sensor wiring harness through the cover and the transaxle case. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4261 2. Install the TSS sensor in the cover and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4262 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4263 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4264 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4265 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4266 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4267 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 19. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 20. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 21. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4268 22. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 23. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 25. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4269 26. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4270 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4271 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4272 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4273 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4274 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4275 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4276 23. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4277 3. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 4. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4278 5. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 6. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4279 7. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 8. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 9. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 10. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4280 11. Tighten the main control valve body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4281 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 15. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 16. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4282 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 17. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 19. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 20. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4283 21. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 22. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 23. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4284 25. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4289 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4290 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4291 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4292 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4293 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4294 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4295 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4296 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4297 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4298 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4299 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4300 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4301 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4302 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4303 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4304 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4305 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-26-8 > Jan > 09 > Engine Controls - Harsh Low Speed Driveline Clunk PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Harsh Low Speed Driveline Clunk TSB 08-26-8 01/05/09 HARSH DRIVELINE CLUNK / LOW SPEED BELOW 10 MPH (16 KM/H) ON TIP-IN OR VEHICLE ROLLS ON INCLINE WHILE STOPPED WITHOUT BRAKE APPLIED-IN DRIVE OR REVERSE FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 08-25-2 to update the calibration information. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a harsh driveline clunk at low speed, below 10 MPH (16 Km/h) during stop and go driving on tip in while touching the accelerator pedal (could be perceived as a harsh 1-2 upshift or 2-1 downshift) may be due to a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration. There is a new calibration that will improve the low speed stop and go driving feel. ACTION Reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.14 and higher or 58.5 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AUTHORIZATION DECAL NOT REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082608A 2007 Edge, MKX: Check 0.3 Hr. For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM. Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 09-11-15 > Jun > 09 > Engine Controls - Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls Rough/Rolling Idle/Idle Speed Drop TSB 09-11-15 06/15/09 ROUGH / ROLLING IDLE / IDLE SPEED DROPS BELOW SPECIFICATION / LIGHT THROTTLE WITH CRUISE ENGAGED / LOW SPEED TIP IN CLUNK FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable This article supersedes TSB 8-23-5 to update the vehicle lines and Action statement. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Taurus, Taurus-X, Sable and 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a rough, rolling idle, or the idle speed dropping below specification. This condition typically occurs most often in hot ambient temperatures with the A/C on when idling for extended periods. Vehicles may also exhibit idle speed dropping below specification on light throttle application with vehicle cruise control engaged and traveling down a hill or a low speed tip in clunk. ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using IDS release 61.05 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091115A 2008-2009 Taurus, Sable, 0.3 Hr. Taurus X. 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Reprogram The PCM, Authorization Decal Not Required. (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 08-26-8 > Jan > 09 > Engine Controls - Harsh Low Speed Driveline Clunk PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls Harsh Low Speed Driveline Clunk TSB 08-26-8 01/05/09 HARSH DRIVELINE CLUNK / LOW SPEED BELOW 10 MPH (16 KM/H) ON TIP-IN OR VEHICLE ROLLS ON INCLINE WHILE STOPPED WITHOUT BRAKE APPLIED-IN DRIVE OR REVERSE FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 08-25-2 to update the calibration information. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a harsh driveline clunk at low speed, below 10 MPH (16 Km/h) during stop and go driving on tip in while touching the accelerator pedal (could be perceived as a harsh 1-2 upshift or 2-1 downshift) may be due to a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calibration. There is a new calibration that will improve the low speed stop and go driving feel. ACTION Reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.14 and higher or 58.5 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AUTHORIZATION DECAL NOT REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082608A 2007 Edge, MKX: Check 0.3 Hr. For DTCs And Reprogram The PCM. Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4335 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4336 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4337 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4338 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4339 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4340 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4341 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4342 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4343 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4344 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4345 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4346 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4347 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4348 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4349 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4350 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4351 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4352 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4353 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4354 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4355 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4356 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4357 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4358 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4359 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4360 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4361 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4362 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4363 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4364 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4365 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4366 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4367 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4368 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4369 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4375 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4376 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4377 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4378 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4379 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4380 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4381 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4382 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4383 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4384 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4385 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4386 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4387 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4388 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4389 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4390 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4391 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4392 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4393 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4394 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4395 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4396 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4397 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4398 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4399 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4400 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4401 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4402 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4403 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4404 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4405 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4406 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4407 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4408 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4409 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4415 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4416 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4417 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4418 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4419 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4420 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4421 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4422 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4423 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4424 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4425 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4426 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4427 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4428 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4429 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4430 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4431 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4432 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4433 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4434 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4435 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4436 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4437 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4438 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4439 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4440 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4441 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4442 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4443 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4444 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4445 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4446 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4454 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4455 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4456 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4457 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4458 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4459 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4460 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4461 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4462 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4471 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4472 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4473 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4474 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4475 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4476 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4477 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4478 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4479 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4480 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4481 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4482 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4483 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4484 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4485 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4486 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4487 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4488 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4494 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4495 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4496 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4497 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4498 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4499 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4500 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4501 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4502 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4503 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4504 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4505 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4506 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4507 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4508 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4509 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4510 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4511 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4512 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4513 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4514 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4515 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4516 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4517 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4518 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4519 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4520 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4521 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4522 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4523 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4524 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4525 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4526 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4527 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4528 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4534 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4535 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4536 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4537 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4538 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4539 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4540 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4541 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4542 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4543 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4544 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4545 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4546 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4547 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4548 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4549 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4550 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4551 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4552 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4553 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4554 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4555 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4556 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4557 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4558 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4559 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4560 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4561 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4562 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4563 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4564 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4565 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch - TCC: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4570 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4571 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4572 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4573 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4574 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4575 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4576 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4577 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4578 Brake Switch - TCC: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4579 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4580 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4581 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4582 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4583 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4584 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4585 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4586 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4587 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Clutch: Specifications Clutch Application Chart Clutch Application Chart (Part 1) Clutch Application Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. ............................................... 10.0 quarts (9.5 liters) Note: Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications mat vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4595 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ MERCON V XT-5-QM Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4596 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Check Fluid Level and Condition (All vehicles) CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level indicator shows the fluid below the minimum fluid level mark or internal failure could result. If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time, at highway speeds, in city traffic, in hot weather or while pulling a trailer, the fluid needs to cool down to obtain an accurate reading. The fluid level reading on the fluid level indicator will differ depending on operating and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating temperature range. Fluid Level Check NOTE: The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 80°C-93°C (175°F-200°F) on a level surface. Normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 32 km (20 miles) of driving and can be checked using the scan tool. Under normal circumstances the fluid level should be checked during normal maintenance. If the transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of fluid leaking, the fluid level should be checked. 1. With the transaxle in PARK, the engine at idle, foot pressed on the brake, move the selector lever through each gear and allow engagement of each gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position. 2. Wipe the fluid level indicator cap and remove the fluid level indicator. 3. Wipe the fluid level indicator with a clean cloth. 4. Install the fluid level indicator back in the fluid indicator tube until it is fully seated, then remove the indicator. The fluid level should be within the normal operating range. High Fluid Level A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or damage. Low Fluid Level A low fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction and/or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of the transaxle seals or gaskets. Adding Fluid CAUTION: MERCON(R) V, MERCON(R) SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission Fluid, Motorcraft Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid and FNR5 automatic transmission fluid are not interchangeable transmission fluids. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transmission will cause transmission damage. If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through the indicator tube. Do not overfill the fluid. Fluid Condition Check Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4597 1. Check the fluid level. 2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be a dark red color, not brown or black or have a burnt odor. 3. Hold the fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the stain. 4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection. 5. If fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the bottom of the fluid pan, repair the transaxle and clean the fluid cooler tubes and fluid cooler. 6. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, the fluid cooler must be backflushed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4598 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Material 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 4. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine, run through all the gears, check the fluid level and run the engine for 5 minutes. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4599 6. Start the engine, run through all the gears and check the fluid level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Special Tool(s) Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4603 Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4604 Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes (Part 2) Removal CAUTION: MERCON(R) V, MERCON(R) SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission Fluid, Motorcraft Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid and FNR5 Automatic Transmission Fluid are not interchangeable transmission fluids. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transmission will cause transmission damage. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4605 5. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 7. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 8. Remove the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 9. Remove the battery tray. 1 Disconnect the wiring harness fasteners. 2 Remove the 3 bolts and the battery tray. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4606 10. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners from the radiator support. 11. Remove the secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler. 12. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4607 13. Remove the 2 secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve. 14. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve. 15. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Pull up on the tabs on both sides of the radiator support, position the radiator back and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the cooling module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4608 16. Remove the 2 transmission fluid cooler tube bolts. 17. Inspect the transaxle case to be sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seals and backing rings were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tubes and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seals or backing rings are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seals and backing rings. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4609 18. Loosen the 2 fluid cooler tube fittings and remove the 2 fluid cooler tubes from the thermal bypass valve and the transaxle. 19. Remove the 2 nuts and the thermal bypass valve. Installation 1. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4610 2. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing rings and seals for damage and install new backing rings or seals if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seals with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing rings and seals on the transmission fluid cooler tubes. 3. Position the 2 fluid cooler tubes on the transaxle and tighten the 2 fluid cooler tube fittings. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 4. Install the 2 transmission fluid cooler tube bolts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4611 5. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Route the transmission fluid cooler tubes through the cooling module and fasten the upper radiator brackets to the radiator support through the cooling module. 6. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve. 7. Install the 2 secondary latches on the transmission fluid cooler tubes at the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4612 8. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tubes to the transmission fluid cooler. 9. Install the secondary latches on the transmission fluid cooler. 10. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners to the radiator support. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4613 11. Install the battery tray. 1 Install the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2 Connect the wiring harness fasteners to the battery tray. 12. Install the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 13. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 14. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 15. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4614 16. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 17. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 18. Install the front bumper cover. 19. Check the transmission fluid level and add automatic transmission fluid as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Main control cover bolts ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4618 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair Main Control Cover Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4619 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4620 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4621 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4622 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4623 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. Installation 1. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 2. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4624 3. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4625 5. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 6. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 7. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 8. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4626 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 9. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 10. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4627 13. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 14. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 15. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 16. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4628 17. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Overdrive Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4637 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4638 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4639 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4640 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4641 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4642 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4643 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4644 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4645 Overdrive Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4646 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4647 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4648 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4649 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4650 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4651 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4652 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4653 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4659 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4660 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4661 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4662 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4663 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4664 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4665 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4666 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4667 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4668 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4669 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4670 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4671 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4672 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4673 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4674 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4675 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4676 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4677 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4678 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4679 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4680 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4681 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4682 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4683 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4684 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4685 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4686 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4687 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4688 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4689 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4690 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4691 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4692 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4693 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - RH Halfshaft Seal - RH, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Special Tool(s) Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4698 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the halfshaft nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4699 3. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolt and separate the lower control arm from the knuckle. 4. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the 2 catalytic converter support bracket bolts. 6. Remove the bolt, the nut and the catalytic converter support bracket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4700 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the RH halfshaft. 8. Inspect the halfshaft hub for wear or damage and install a new halfshaft if necessary. 1 Inspect the differential seal surface. 2 Inspect the halfshaft bushing surface. If this surface is damaged, inspect the halfshaft bushing for damage. 3 Inspect the differential side gear splines. 9. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal. 10. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4701 Installation 1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the special tool. 2. Using the special tool, install the RH halfshaft seal. 3. Position the RH halfshaft and intermediate shaft support bracket in the transaxle and in the steering knuckle. Install the 1 stud bolt and 1 bolt. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 4. Position the catalytic converter support bracket in place and install the bolt and the nut. 1 Tighten the nut to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 2 Tighten the bolt to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4702 5. Install the 2 RH catalytic converter support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs). 6. Install the ball joint in the steering knuckle and install the pinch bolt. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs). 7. Install the halfshaft nut. ^ Tighten to 350 Nm (258 ft. lbs). 8. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4703 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - LH Halfshaft Seal - LH Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front LH halfshaft. 3. Inspect the halfshaft hub for wear or damage and install a new halfshaft if necessary. 1 Inspect the differential seal surface. 2 Inspect the halfshaft bushing surface. If this surface is damaged, inspect the halfshaft bushing for damage. 3 Inspect the differential side gear splines. 4. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4704 5. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal. Installation 1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the special tool. 2. Using the special tool, install the LH halfshaft seal. 3. Install the front LH halfshaft. 4. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4705 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4706 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4707 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4708 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4709 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4710 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4711 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4712 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park pawl Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4713 actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. 28. Using a suitable tool, remove the manual lever shaft seal. Installation 1. Using the special tool, install a new manual lever shaft seal. 2. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4714 3. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 4. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 5. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4715 CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 6. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts 7. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4716 8. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. 9. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 10. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4717 11. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location 13. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4718 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4719 17. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 19. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 20. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4720 21. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 22. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 23. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 24. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4721 25. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 26. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 28. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Halfshaft Seal - RH > Page 4722 29. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch - TCC: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4728 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4729 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4730 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4731 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4732 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4733 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4734 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4735 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4736 Brake Switch - TCC: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4737 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4738 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4739 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4740 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4741 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4742 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4743 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4744 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4745 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Overdrive Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4750 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4751 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4752 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4753 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4754 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4755 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4756 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4757 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4758 Overdrive Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4759 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4760 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4761 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4762 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4763 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4764 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4765 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4766 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4771 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4772 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4773 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4774 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4775 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4776 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4777 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4778 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4779 Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4780 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4781 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4782 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4783 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4784 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4785 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4786 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4787 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4792 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4793 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4794 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4795 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4796 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4797 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4798 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4799 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4800 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4801 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4802 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4803 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4804 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4805 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4806 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4807 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4808 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4809 Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4814 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4815 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4816 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4817 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4818 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4819 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4820 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4821 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4822 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4823 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4824 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4825 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4826 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4827 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4828 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4829 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4830 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4831 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4832 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4833 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4834 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4835 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4836 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4837 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4838 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4839 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4840 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4841 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4842 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4843 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4844 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4845 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4846 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4847 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4856 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4857 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4863 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 4864 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4867 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4868 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4869 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4870 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4871 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4872 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4873 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4874 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4875 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4876 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4877 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4878 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4879 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4880 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4881 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4882 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4883 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4886 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4887 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4888 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4889 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4890 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4891 23. Remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Route the TSS sensor wiring harness through the cover and the transaxle case. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4892 2. Install the TSS sensor in the cover and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4893 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4894 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4895 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4896 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4897 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4898 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 19. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 20. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 21. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4899 22. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 23. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 25. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4900 26. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4901 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4902 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4903 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4904 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4905 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4906 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4907 23. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4908 3. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 4. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4909 5. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 6. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4910 7. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 8. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 9. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 10. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4911 11. Tighten the main control valve body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4912 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 15. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 16. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4913 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 17. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 19. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 20. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4914 21. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 22. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 23. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 4915 25. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4920 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4921 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4922 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4923 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4924 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4925 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4926 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4927 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4928 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4929 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4930 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4931 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4932 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4933 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4934 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4935 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4936 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4941 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4942 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4943 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4944 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4945 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4946 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4947 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4948 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4949 Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4950 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4951 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4952 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4953 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4954 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4955 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4956 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4957 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4958 Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 37-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4959 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4965 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4966 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4967 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4968 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4969 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4970 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4971 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4972 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4973 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4974 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4975 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4976 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4977 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4978 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4979 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4980 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4981 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4982 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4983 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4984 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4985 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4986 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4987 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4988 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4989 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4990 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4991 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4992 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4993 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4994 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4995 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4996 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4997 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4998 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4999 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams C3245 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Selector Lever Selector Lever Removal MKX 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the selector lever trim ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5005 All vehicles 2. Lift the armrest. Using a suitable tool, remove the center console trim cover. 3. Remove the 2 fasteners and position aside the power outlet trim cover. 4. Remove the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 5. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever housing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5006 6. Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector. 7. Remove the bolts and the selector lever. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the selector lever and the bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. Connect the selector lever electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5007 3. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing. 4. Place the selector lever in REVERSE. 5. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 6. Install the selector lever cable end on the selector lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5008 7. Place the selector lever in DRIVE. 8. Position the power outlet trim cover in place and install the 2 fasteners. 9. Install the center console trim cover. 10. Install the selector lever trim ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5009 All vehicles 11. Place the manual lever in DRIVE. 1 Rotate the manual lever clockwise until it stops. 2 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise one detent. 12. Unlock the adjuster by sliding the locking tab over. 13. Slide the cable end forward or backward to align it with the manual lever. 14. With the adjuster locking tab released, connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5010 15. Slide the release tab back to lock the adjuster. 16. Verify that the vehicle starts in PARK and NEUTRAL only and that the reverse lamps illuminate in REVERSE. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5011 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Knob Selector Lever Knob Selector Lever Knob Removal MKX 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the selector lever trim ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5012 All vehicles 2. Lift the armrest. Using a suitable tool, remove the center console trim cover. 3. NOTE: Center console side trim cover removed for clarity. Disconnect the transmission control (TC) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove and discard the selector lever knob trim covers by carefully prying out on the bottom front corners and then pry out on the top front corner and remove the covers. 5. NOTE: Inspect the knob body for damage. Install a new knob body if necessary. Remove and discard the 2 selector lever knob screws and remove the selector lever knob while routing the TC switch electrical connector harness out of the selector lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5013 Installation All vehicles 1. Route the TC switch electrical connector harness through the selector lever and install the shift knob and 2 new screws. Loosely install both screws before tightening. ^ Tighten to 2 Nm (18 inch lbs). 2. NOTE: Be sure that the shift knob bezel is correctly installed on the shift knob. Install new selector lever knob trim covers. 3. NOTE: Center console side trim cover removed for clarity. Connect the transmission control (TC) switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever > Page 5014 4. Install the center console trim cover. MKX 5. Install the selector lever trim ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Cable: Service and Repair Selector Lever Cable Selector Lever Cable (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5019 Selector Lever Cable (Part 2) Removal All vehicles 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5020 5. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 6. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 7. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 8. Using a suitable tool, remove the selector lever trim ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5021 All vehicles 9. Lift the armrest. Using a suitable tool, remove the center console trim cover. 10. Remove the 2 fasteners and position aside the power outlet trim cover. 11. Remove the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 12. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever housing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5022 13. Remove the center console side cover. 14. Remove the 2 nuts from the grommet and remove the selector lever cable. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the selector lever cable, position the grommet in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2. Install the center console side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5023 3. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing. 4. Place the selector lever in REVERSE. 5. Install the selector lever cable end on the selector lever. 6. Place the selector lever in DRIVE. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5024 7. Position the power outlet trim cover in place and install the 2 fasteners. 8. Install the center console trim cover. 9. Install the selector lever trim ring. All vehicles 10. Install the selector lever cable in the bracket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5025 11. Place the manual lever in DRIVE. 1 Rotate the manual lever clockwise until it stops. 2 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise one detent. 12. Unlock the adjuster by sliding the locking tab over. 13. Slide the cable end forward or backward to align it with the manual lever. 14. With the adjuster locking tab released, connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5026 15. Slide the release tab back to lock the adjuster. 16. Connect the selector lever cable on the manual lever. 17. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5027 19. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 20. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 21. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 22. Verify that the vehicle starts in PARK and NEUTRAL only and that the reverse lamps illuminate in REVERSE. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sun Gear: > 08-9-4 > May > 08 > A/T - No Reverse/3rd or 5th Gears/MIL ON/DTC's Set Sun Gear: Customer Interest A/T - No Reverse/3rd or 5th Gears/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 08-9-4 05/12/08 6F50 TRANSAXLE BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/15/2008 - NO REVERSE ENGAGEMENT, NO 3RD OR 5TH GEAR - DTC P0733, P0735, P0756 FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus, Sable, and Taurus X vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle and built on or before 3/15/2008 may experience no reverse engagement, no 3rd and 5th gears with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0733, P0735, P0756 and a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transaxle following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. 2. Replace the intermediate shell/sun gear assembly and the number 3 bearing next to the sun gear with revised parts following WSM, Section 307-03. 3. Install the transaxle following WSM, Section 307-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080904A 2008 Taurus, Sable, 13.7 Taurus X AWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) 080904A 2008 Taurus, Sable, 12.7 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sun Gear: > 08-9-4 > May > 08 > A/T - No Reverse/3rd or 5th Gears/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5036 Taurus X FWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) 080904A 2007-2008 Edge, MKX 13.8 FWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) 080904A 2007-2008 Edge, MKX 13.9 AWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A019 01 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 08-9-4 > May > 08 > A/T - No Reverse/3rd or 5th Gears/MIL ON/DTC's Set Sun Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Reverse/3rd or 5th Gears/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 08-9-4 05/12/08 6F50 TRANSAXLE BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/15/2008 - NO REVERSE ENGAGEMENT, NO 3RD OR 5TH GEAR - DTC P0733, P0735, P0756 FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus, Sable, and Taurus X vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle and built on or before 3/15/2008 may experience no reverse engagement, no 3rd and 5th gears with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0733, P0735, P0756 and a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transaxle following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. 2. Replace the intermediate shell/sun gear assembly and the number 3 bearing next to the sun gear with revised parts following WSM, Section 307-03. 3. Install the transaxle following WSM, Section 307-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080904A 2008 Taurus, Sable, 13.7 Taurus X AWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) 080904A 2008 Taurus, Sable, 12.7 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sun Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sun Gear: > 08-9-4 > May > 08 > A/T - No Reverse/3rd or 5th Gears/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5042 Taurus X FWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) 080904A 2007-2008 Edge, MKX 13.8 FWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) 080904A 2007-2008 Edge, MKX 13.9 AWD Built before Hrs. 3/15/2008: Replace The Intermediate Shell/Sun Gear Assembly And The Number 3 Bearing, Includes Time To Check For DTCs, Remove And Install Transmission (This Labor Operation Is All Inclusive Do Not Claim With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A019 01 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5047 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5048 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5049 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5050 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5051 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5052 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5053 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5054 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5055 Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5056 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5057 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5058 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5059 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5060 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5061 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5062 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5063 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Specifications Torque Converter: Specifications Stall Speed Chart Stall Speed Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5067 Torque Converter: Description and Operation Torque Converter The torque converter transmits and multiplies torque. The torque converter is a 4-element device: ^ Impeller assembly ^ Turbine assembly ^ Reactor assembly ^ Clutch and damper assembly The standard torque converter components operate as follows: ^ Rotation of the converter housing and impeller set the fluid in motion. ^ The turbine reacts to the fluid motion from the impeller, transferring rotation to the geartrain through the input shaft. ^ The reactor redirects fluid going back into the impeller, providing for torque multiplication. ^ The clutch and damper assembly dampens powertrain torsional vibration and provides a direct mechanical connection for improved efficiency. ^ Power is transmitted from the torque converter to the planetary gearsets and other components through the input shaft. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter Diagnosis Prior to torque converter installation, all diagnostic procedures must be followed. This is to prevent the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque converters. Only after a complete diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new or remanufactured torque converter. Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows: 1. Preliminary Inspection 2. Know and Understand the Customer's Concern 3. Verify the Concern carry out the torque converter operation test. 4. Carry out Diagnostic Procedures: ^ Run on-board diagnostics. Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first. - Repair all transmission DTCs. - Rerun On-Board Diagnostic to verify repair. - Carry out Line Pressure Test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Line Pressure Test - Carry out Stall Speed Test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Stall Speed Test - Carry out diagnostic routines. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines - Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine will list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each component listed, diagnose and repair as required, before installing a new torque converter . Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test This test verifies that the TCC control system and the torque converter are operating correctly. 1. Carry out Quick Test, refer to the tester manual. Check for DTCs. 2. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 3. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for approximately 15 minutes in (D) position. 4. If the vehicle stalls in (D) at idle with vehicle at a stop, move the selector lever to manual L position. If the vehicle stalls, refer to torque converter operation concerns. Repair as required. If the vehicle does not stall in (D), refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines/Torque Converter Operation Concerns 250/350-252/352 See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 5070 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Torque Converter 1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of these statements is true: ^ A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures. ^ Converter bolt holes, impeller hub or bushing are damaged. ^ Discoloration (due to overheating). ^ Evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to these transmission or converter failure modes: Major metallic failure. - Multiple clutches or clutch plate failures. - Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination. - Internal torque converter contamination present. For additional information, refer to Torque Converter Contamination Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Torque Converter Contamination Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 5071 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection Material CAUTION: Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque converter or transmission damage will occur. Use only clean automatic transmission fluid designated for the transmission and converter being serviced. 1. If a new or remanufactured torque converter is not being installed, these steps must be completed. 2. With the torque converter on a bench, pour a small amount of transmission fluid from the torque converter onto an absorbent white tissue or through a paper filter and examine the fluid. 3. Observe the color and odor of the fluid. The fluid should be red, not brown or black. Odor may indicate an overheating condition such as clutch disc or band failure. 4. Examine the stain on the tissue for evidence of particles (spec of any kind). If particles are present in the fluid, a new torque converter must be installed. 5. If there are no particles or contamination present, drain the remainder of the transmission fluid from the torque converter. 6. Add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean automatic transmission fluid into the converter and agitate by hand. 7. Thoroughly drain the fluid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5077 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5078 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5079 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5080 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5081 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5082 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5083 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5084 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5085 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5086 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5087 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5088 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5089 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5090 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5091 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5092 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5093 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5094 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5095 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5096 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5097 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5098 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5099 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5100 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5101 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5102 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5103 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5104 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5105 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5106 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5107 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5108 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications General Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5113 Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5114 Transmission Cooler: Locations Transaxle Cooling Transaxle Cooling (Part 1) Transaxle Cooling (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install new components if a fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s). GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5117 Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart Symptom Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5118 Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Transmission Fluid Cooler CAUTION: Whenever a transaxle has been disassembled to install new parts or because the main control valve body sticks from foreign material, the main control valve body, transaxle fluid cooler and fluid cooler inlet tube and fluid cooler tube must be cleaned and flushed using Torque Converter/Oil Cooler Cleaner. Under no circumstances should an attempt be made to clean the torque converter by hand agitation with solvent. When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material or band material may have been carried into the torque converter and transaxle fluid cooler. These contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle troubles and must be removed from the system before the transaxle is put back into use. Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test NOTE: The transaxle linkage/cable adjustment, fluid level and line pressure must be within specification before carrying out this test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures for line pressure test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Line Pressure Test 1. Remove fluid level indicator from fluid filler tube. 2. Place funnel in fluid filler tube. 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 4. Remove the cooler return line (lower fitting) from the fitting on the transaxle case. 5. Connect one end of a hose to the cooler return line and route other end of the hose up to a point where it can be inserted into the funnel at the fluid filler tube. 6. Remove the safety stands and lower the vehicle. Insert end of hose into the funnel. 7. Start the engine and run it at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL position. 8. When fluid flowing from hose is in a steady stream, a liberal amount of fluid should be observed. "Liberal" is described as about 1L (1 qt) delivered in 30 seconds. If a liberal flow is observed, the test is complete. 9. If the flow is not liberal, stop the engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return line and connect it to the converter outline fitting (upper fitting) on the transmission case. 10. Repeat Steps 7 and 8. If flow is now approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler - Backflushing and Cleaning. If the flow is still not approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, repair the pump and/or the torque converter. If new fluid cooler tubes need to be installed, refer to Fluid Line/Hose, A/T. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Transmission Cooler: Procedures Transmission Fluid Cooler - Backflushing and Cleaning Special Tool(s) Material NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing will be carried out using the special tool. Follow the manufacturer's instructions included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. 1. Check and top off fluid level of the special tool tank with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the fluid in the flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F) before using. 3. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler lines. 4. NOTE: The FRONT transaxle cooler line on the thermal bypass valve is the cooler pressure line. Attach the flusher's red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure line quick disconnect fitting. 5. Attach the flusher's blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return line quick disconnect fitting. 6. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the cooler lines and cooler prior to starting the flushing procedure. 7. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. 8. Clean the transaxle mounted fluid cooler tubes and the thermal bypass valve by hand. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5121 Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Special Tool(s) Material Transmission Fluid Cooler (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5122 Transmission Fluid Cooler (Part 2) Removal CAUTION: MERCON(R) V, MERCON(R) SP, Motorcraft Premium Automatic Transmission Fluid, Motorcraft Continuously Variable Chain Type Transmission Fluid and FNR5 Automatic Transmission Fluid are not interchangeable transmission fluids. The use of any fluid other than what is recommended for this transmission will cause transmission damage. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Disconnect the 2 transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners from the radiator support. 4. Remove the secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5123 5. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler. 6. Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 transmission fluid cooler support brackets. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5124 7. Remove the transmission fluid cooler. Installation 1. Position the transmission fluid cooler in place. 2. Install the 2 transmission fluid cooler support brackets and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 3. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tubes to the transmission fluid cooler. 4. Install the secondary latches on the transmission fluid cooler. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5125 5. Connect the transmission fluid cooler tube fasteners to the radiator support. 6. Install the front bumper cover. 7. Check the transmission fluid level and add automatic transmission fluid as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Special Tools Used With Diagnosis and Testing Transmission Cooler: Tools and Equipment Special Tools Used With Diagnosis and Testing Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Special Tools Used With Diagnosis and Testing > Page 5128 Transmission Cooler: Tools and Equipment Material Used With Diagnosis and Testing Material Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5136 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5137 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5138 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5139 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5140 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5141 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5142 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5143 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5144 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5145 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5146 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5147 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5148 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5149 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5150 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5151 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5152 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5153 Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5157 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Loosen the exhaust flexible pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. 3. Remove the 4 nuts and the exhaust flexible pipe and Y-pipe as an assembly. ^ Discard the nuts and the gasket. 4. Remove the 2 nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5158 5. Loosen the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt. 6. Remove the 3 bolts from the roll restrictor bracket. 7. Remove the 3 bolts and the roll restrictor bracket. 8. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5159 9. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 10. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 11. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 12. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5160 13. Remove the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 14. Remove the battery tray. 1 Disconnect the wiring harness fasteners. 2 Remove the 3 bolts and the battery tray. 15. CAUTION: The special tool must be carefully aligned to the mounting bosses on the oil pan. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the oil pan. NOTE: The special tool and floor jack are used to raise and lower the engine to access the engine front cover and engine mount bracket fasteners. Position a floor jack and the special tool under the oil pan and raise the floor jack high enough to release the pressure on the transaxle support insulator. 16. Remove the transaxle support insulator through bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5161 17. Remove the 3 nuts, the bolt and the transaxle support insulator bracket. 18. Lower the jack until the transmission fluid cooler tube clears the lower transmission support insulator bolts. 19. Loosen the battery tray support bracket bolts. 20. Remove the top transaxle support insulator bolts. 21. Remove the bottom transaxle support insulator bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5162 Installation 1. Install the bottom transaxle support insulator bolts. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 2. Install the top transaxle support insulator bolts. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 3. Tighten the battery tray support bracket bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 4. Using the jack, lift the transaxle into place. 5. Install the transaxle support insulator bracket, install the bolt and the 3 nuts. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5163 6. Install the transaxle support insulator through bolt. ^ Tighten to 175 Nm (129 ft. lbs). 7. Install the battery tray. 1 Install the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 2 Connect the wiring harness fasteners to the battery tray. 8. Install the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery. 9. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 10. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5164 11. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 12. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 13. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 14. Check the transmission fluid level and fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 15. Position the roll restrictor bracket on the transaxle and install the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5165 16. Position the roll restrictor in place, install the bracket and the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 17. Install the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe through bolt. ^ Tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs). 18. Install the roll restrictor heat shield and the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 19. Position the exhaust Y-pipe assembly in place and install the 4 nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5166 20. Install the 2 exhaust hangers and tighten the exhaust clamp. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5171 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5172 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5173 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5174 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5175 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5176 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5177 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5178 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5179 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5180 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5181 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5182 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5183 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5184 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5185 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5186 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5187 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5188 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5189 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5190 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5191 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5192 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5193 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5194 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5195 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5196 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5197 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5198 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5199 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5200 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5201 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5202 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5203 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5204 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5213 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5214 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5220 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5221 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5224 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5225 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5226 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5227 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5228 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5229 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5230 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5231 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5232 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5233 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5234 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5235 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5236 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5237 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5238 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5239 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5240 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5243 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5244 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5245 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5246 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5247 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5248 23. Remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Route the TSS sensor wiring harness through the cover and the transaxle case. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5249 2. Install the TSS sensor in the cover and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5250 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5251 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5252 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5253 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5254 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5255 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 19. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 20. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 21. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5256 22. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 23. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 25. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5257 26. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5258 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5259 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5260 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5261 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5262 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5263 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5264 23. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5265 3. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 4. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5266 5. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 6. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5267 7. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 8. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 9. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 10. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5268 11. Tighten the main control valve body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5269 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 15. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 16. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5270 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 17. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 19. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 20. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5271 21. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 22. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 23. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5272 25. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5277 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5278 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5279 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5280 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5281 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5282 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5283 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5284 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5285 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5286 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5287 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5288 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5289 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5290 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5291 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5292 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5293 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Locations Valve Body: Locations Check Ball Locations fm07edge_30701-323d Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5297 Valve Body: Diagrams Main Control Assembly - Exploded Views Main Control Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5298 Lower Valve Body (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5299 Lower Valve Body (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Valve Body: Removal and Replacement Main Control Main Control Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5302 Removal NOTE: If cleaning of the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control Assembly. If installing a new main control assembly continue with this procedure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5303 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5304 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5305 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5306 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5307 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5308 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5309 2. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 3. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5310 4. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5311 6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 7. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 8. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 9. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5312 2 Studbolt location 10. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5313 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5314 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5315 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 23. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5316 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5317 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5318 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5319 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5320 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5321 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5322 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5323 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5324 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5325 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5326 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5327 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5328 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5329 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5330 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5331 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5332 Valve Body: Overhaul Main Control Assembly Main Control Assembly Main Control Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5333 Lower Valve Body (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5334 Lower Valve Body (Part 2) Disassembly 1. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolt for assembly. Remove the 6 bolts and the cover assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5335 2. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 5 bolts and the transfer plate assembly. 3. Remove and discard the valve body separator plate. 4. NOTE: Note the location of the check balls for assembly. Remove the 7 check balls from the valve body. Check Ball Locations 5. Remove the lower valve body assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5336 6. Remove and discard the lower valve body separator plate and gasket. 7. Remove the manual valve from the valve body. 8. CAUTION: Remove the valves by tapping the valve body on the palm of the hand to slide the valves out of the bores. It may be necessary to remove the valves and springs using a pick. If it is necessary to use a pick, use extreme caution to prevent damaging the valves or valve bores. If necessary, disassemble parts of the main control valve body in small groups. Take special care when handling the main control components, since they are the most precise and delicate parts of the transaxle. Neatly arrange the parts as they are removed to avoid mixing similar pieces. CAUTION: Do not stone or polish any valves. If the valves do not move freely, install a new assembly. Remove the individual valves and springs from the main control valve body and lower valve body by removing the retaining clips. See the main control valve body assembly illustration for valve and spring locations. Clean valves, springs, main control valve body and lower valve body. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Do not stone or polish any valves. If the valves do not move freely during assembly, replacement of install a new valve body. Install the valve body valves, springs, and retaining clips in the main control valve body and lower valve body. See the main control valve body assembly illustration for valve and spring locations. 2. Install the manual valve in the valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5337 3. Position a new lower valve body separator plate and gasket on the main control valve body. 4. Position the lower valve body on the main control valve body. 5. NOTE: Install the check balls in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the 7 check balls. 6. Install a new valve body separator plate and gasket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5338 7. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the transfer plate assembly and hand tighten the 5 bolts. 1 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 2 35 mm (1.37 inch) bolts 8. Tighten the 5 bolts. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 9. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the cover assembly and hand tighten the 6 bolts. 1 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 2 35 mm (1.37 inch) bolts 10. Tighten the 6 bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5339 ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Solenoid Body Assembly Disassembly 1. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5340 CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 2. Remove and discard the solenoid body assembly electrical connector seal. 3. Clean and inspect the solenoid body assembly for damage and replace if necessary. Assembly 1. Install a new solenoid body assembly electrical connector seal. 2. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5341 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Cover: Service and Repair Differential Housing Cover Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear axle assembly. 3. Remove the 10 bolts and the rear differential cover. ^ Drain the differential fluid from the housing. Installation 1. CAUTION: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the differential housing cover are clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination. NOTE: Make sure the differential vent located on the rear cover is free of obstruction. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover. 2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly cured. Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration. 3. Install the differential housing cover and the 10 bolts. ^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 4. Fill the rear axle with 1.15L (2.43 pt) of rear axle lubricant, 3-5 mm (0.118-0.196 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole and install the filler Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5346 plug. ^ Tighten to 29 Nm (21 ft. lbs). 5. Install the axle assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Output Shaft Bearing: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. To remove the seal, use the special tool to remove the stub shaft seal. The stub shaft pilot bearing is not serviced. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5351 Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal with grease. Using the special tools, install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal. 2. CAUTION: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal with fine crocus cloth. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Pinion Flange: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft universal joint flange bolts. ^ Support the driveshaft. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5355 3. NOTE: Discard the nut after removing it. Install a new nut during installation. Using the special tool, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut. ^ Remove the nut. 4. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the yoke. 5. Using the special tool, remove the pinion flange. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5356 6. Using the special tools, remove the seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal. Using the special tool, install the seal. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with premium long-life grease. Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange. 3. Using the special tool, install the pinion nut. ^ Tighten to 244 Nm (180 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5357 4. Line up the index marks and install the rear driveshaft universal joint flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. To remove the seal, use the special tool to remove the stub shaft seal. The stub shaft pilot bearing is not serviced. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 5362 Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal with grease. Using the special tools, install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal. 2. CAUTION: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal with fine crocus cloth. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 5363 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal Drive Pinion Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft universal joint flange bolts. ^ Support the driveshaft. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 5364 3. NOTE: Discard the nut after removing it. Install a new nut during installation. Using the special tool, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut. ^ Remove the nut. 4. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the yoke. 5. Using the special tool, remove the pinion flange. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 5365 6. Using the special tools, remove the seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal. Using the special tool, install the seal. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with premium long-life grease. Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange. 3. Using the special tool, install the pinion nut. ^ Tighten to 244 Nm (180 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 5366 4. Line up the index marks and install the rear driveshaft universal joint flange. ^ Tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-25-8 > Dec > 07 > Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking/Creaking Noises Constant Velocity Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking/Creaking Noises TSB 07-25-8 12/24/07 NOISE COLD - FRONT HALF SHAFTS - RATCHETING/CLICKING/CREAKING - COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES - BELOW 15 DEGREES F (-9 C) BUILT BEFORE 5/1/2007 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-11-14 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 5/1/2007 may exhibit a ratcheting, clicking, and creaking noise from the front half shafts in cold ambient temperatures after a vehicle cold soaks. The noise occurs on medium to heavy acceleration when turning but goes away quickly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the grease in both front halfshaft outer constant velocity (CV) joints. The inner CV joints do not require grease replacement. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 205-04 for the constant velocity (CV) joint boot removal and replacement procedure. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072508A 2007 Edge/MKX FWD: 2.2 Hrs Replace The CV Joint Boots And Grease. Includes Time To Remove And Install Halfshaft: Both Halfshafts (Do Not Use With 3329A, 3329A1) 072508A 2007 Edge/MKX AWD: 2.7 Hrs. Replace The CV Joint Boots And Grease. Includes Time To Remove And Install Halfshaft: Both Front Halfshafts Sides (Do Not Use With 4462A, 4462A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A331 42 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-25-8 > Dec > 07 > Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking/Creaking Noises > Page 5377 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-25-8 > Dec > 07 > Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking/Creaking Noises Constant Velocity Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking/Creaking Noises TSB 07-25-8 12/24/07 NOISE COLD - FRONT HALF SHAFTS - RATCHETING/CLICKING/CREAKING - COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES - BELOW 15 DEGREES F (-9 C) BUILT BEFORE 5/1/2007 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-11-14 to update the Service Procedure and add a production fix date. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 5/1/2007 may exhibit a ratcheting, clicking, and creaking noise from the front half shafts in cold ambient temperatures after a vehicle cold soaks. The noise occurs on medium to heavy acceleration when turning but goes away quickly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the grease in both front halfshaft outer constant velocity (CV) joints. The inner CV joints do not require grease replacement. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 205-04 for the constant velocity (CV) joint boot removal and replacement procedure. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072508A 2007 Edge/MKX FWD: 2.2 Hrs Replace The CV Joint Boots And Grease. Includes Time To Remove And Install Halfshaft: Both Halfshafts (Do Not Use With 3329A, 3329A1) 072508A 2007 Edge/MKX AWD: 2.7 Hrs. Replace The CV Joint Boots And Grease. Includes Time To Remove And Install Halfshaft: Both Front Halfshafts Sides (Do Not Use With 4462A, 4462A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A331 42 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-25-8 > Dec > 07 > Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking/Creaking Noises > Page 5383 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 5389 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 5390 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 5396 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 5397 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Front Drive Halfshafts Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot Special Tool(s) Disassembly 1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. For the inboard CV joint, remove and discard the boot clamps. 3. Remove the inboard CV joint retaining ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5402 4. CAUTION: Do not let the roller bearings fall. For the inboard CV joint: ^ Remove and discard the retainer circlip. ^ Slide the boot away from the CV joint. 5. Using a suitable 3-jaw puller, remove the CV joint. 6. Remove and discard the inner CV boot. 7. NOTE: The outboard CV joint is not removable from the halfshaft. The boot must be removed or installed from the inboard CV joint side of the shaft. For the outboard CV joint: 1 Remove and discard the boot clamps. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5403 2 Remove and discard the boot. 8. If necessary, press the anti-lock brake sensor indicator ring from the outer CV joint. Assembly 1. NOTE: Do not mix the boot clamps. If removed, install a new anti-lock brake sensor indicator ring on the outer CV joint. 2. Lubricate the outboard CV joint. 1 Pack the outboard CV joint with grease from the kit. ^ One-third of the grease must be installed in the joint with the remainder placed in the boot. 2 Spread the remaining grease evenly inside the boot. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5404 3. Position the boot so the rib on the boot is located in the groove of the shaft. 4. Position the outboard halfshaft boot and the outboard boot clamps. 1 Position the boot. 2 Position the boot clamps. 5. Install the outboard CV boot clamps. 6. Position the inboard clamp and boot. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5405 7. Install the CV joint and snap ring on the halfshaft. 8. Fill the inboard CV joint housing with grease from the kit. ^ One-half of the grease must be installed in the joint and the remainder placed in the boot. 9. CAUTION: Do not let the roller bearings fall. Position the CV housing on the CV joint. 10. Install the retaining ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5406 11. Position the inboard halfshaft boot and clamps. ^ Position the boot in the housing groove. ^ Position the boot clamps. 12. Set the halfshaft assembled length to specifications. 1 Measure the entire assembly length. 2 Push in or pull out on the inner joint as necessary to adjust the halfshaft assembled length. 3 Hold the inner joint to prevent the assembled length from changing, and insert a small flat-blade screwdriver between the boot and the joint to equalize the pressure. 13. Install the boot clamps. ^ Lever arm to the closed position and use a soft-faced hammer to close the tabs. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5407 14. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5408 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Rear Drive Halfshafts Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot Special Tool(s) Disassembly 1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. Remove and discard the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint boot clamps. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5409 3. With the inboard CV joint boot removed from the housing, remove the retaining ring. 4. Remove the 8 balls and outer race. 5. Remove the CV joint housing snap ring. 6. Remove and discard the boot. 7. NOTE: The outboard CV joint is not removable from the halfshaft. The boot must be removed or installed from the inboard CV joint side of the shaft. For the outboard CV joint boot, carry out the following: 1 Remove and discard the boot clamps. 2 Remove and discard the boot. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5410 Assembly 1. For the outboard CV joint, carry out the following: 1 Slide the boot on the interconnecting shaft. 2 Pack the outboard CV joint with 80 g (2.82 oz) of grease. 3 Spread any remaining grease evenly inside the boot. 4 Install the boot by seating it in the groove in the CV joint housing. 2. Using the special tool, install the 79.6 mm (3.13 inch) boot clamps on the large end of the boot. 3. Install the small clamp on the small end of the boot. 4. CAUTION: Install a new circlip every time the halfshaft is removed from the axle. CAUTION: Start one end of the circlip in the groove and work the circlip over the halfshaft and into the groove to prevent the circlip from overexpanding. Install a new retainer circlip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5411 5. Position the small clamp on the interconnecting shaft before installing the boot. 6. Position the boot on the interconnecting shaft. 7. Install the inner race and the retainer snap ring. 8. Install the outer race with 8 balls. 9. Insert the assembly in the housing. 10. Install the retaining ring. 11. For the inboard CV joint, carry out the following: 1 Pack the inboard CV joint housing with 108 g (3.80 oz) of grease. 2 Spread any remaining grease evenly inside the boot and CV joint. 3 Install the inboard CV joint housing, seating the boot in the groove in the housing. 12. Set the halfshaft assembled length to specifications. 1 Measure the entire assembly length. 2 Push in or pull out on the inner joint as necessary to adjust the halfshaft assembled length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 5412 3 Hold the inner joint to prevent the assembled length from changing and insert a soft, flat tool between the boot and the joint to equalize the pressure. 13. Using the special tool, install the 77.5 mm (3.05 inch) boot clamps on the large end of the boot. 14. Install the smaller boot clamp. 15. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5417 Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5418 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tool, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tool, press the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5419 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5420 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles Removal All vehicles CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the brake disc. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 4. Remove and discard the halfshaft nut. 5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the hub and bearing assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5421 All vehicles 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the wheel bearing and wheel hub. ^ Discard the bolts. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the wheel bearing and new wheel hub bolts. ^ Tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 2. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 3. Install the brake disc. AWD vehicles 4. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel bearing and wheel hub. 5. Install the halfshaft hub nut. ^ Tighten to 275 Nm (203 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut ........................................................................................................................... .............................................. 350 Nm (258 ft. lbs). Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 5434 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 5440 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Driveshaft Driveshaft Removal and Installation WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never attempt to remove any part of the system until it has cooled. Be especially careful when working around the catalytic converters. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after only a few minutes of engine operation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Index-mark both the driveshaft flanges. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts. Install new bolts or damage to the vehicle may occur. Remove and discard the 4 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5445 3. Remove and discard the 4 universal joint flange bolts and remove the front driveshaft. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). 4. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts for the rear U-joint flange. Install new bolts. Remove and discard the 4 universal joint flange bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). 5. With the help of an assistant, remove the 4 center bearing support nuts and the driveshaft. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 6. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index the driveshaft. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation Universal Joint: Description and Operation Universal Joints The center and rear joints are: ^ a lubed-for-life design that requires no periodic lubrication. ^ equipped with nylon thrust washers, located at the base of each bearing cup, which control end play, position the needle bearings and improve grease movement. ^ staked in place and not serviced individually. If worn or damaged, install a new driveshaft assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flexplate bolts ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5452 Flex Plate: Diagrams Lower End Components - Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft Front Seal Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5453 Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate and Crankshaft Rear Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5454 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Flexplate Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle. 3. NOTE: One of the 8 flexplate holes are offset so the flexplate can only be installed in one position. Remove the bolts and the flexplate. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Power Take-Off > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Take-Off: Description and Operation POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) SWITCH AND CIRCUITS The PTO circuit is used by the PCM to disable some of the on board diagnostics (OBD) monitors during PTO operation. The PTO switch is normally open. When the PTO unit is activated, the PTO switch is closed and battery voltage is supplied to the PTO input circuit. This indicates to the PCM that an additional load is being applied to the engine. The PTO indicator lamp illuminates when the PTO system is functioning correctly and flashes when the PTO system is damaged When the PTO unit is activated, the PCM disables some OBD monitors, which may not function reliably during PTO operation. Without the PTO circuit information to the PCM, false DTCs may be set during PTO operation. Prior to an Inspection/Maintenance test, operate the vehicle with the PTO disengaged long enough to successfully complete the OBD Monitors. PTO Circuits Description The 3 PTO input circuits are PTO mode, PTO engage, and PTO RPM. The PTO engage circuit is used when the operator is requesting the PCM to check the needed inputs required to initiate the PTO engagement. The PTO RPM circuit is used for the operator to request additional engine RPM for PTO operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch - TCC: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5469 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5470 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5471 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5472 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5473 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5474 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5475 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5476 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5477 Brake Switch - TCC: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5478 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5479 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5480 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5481 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5482 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5483 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5484 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5485 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5486 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Overdrive Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5491 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5492 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5493 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5494 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5495 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5496 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5497 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5498 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5499 Overdrive Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5500 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5501 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5502 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5503 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5504 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5505 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5506 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5507 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5512 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5513 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5514 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5515 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5516 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5517 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5518 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5519 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5520 Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5521 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5522 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5523 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5524 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5525 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5526 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5527 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5528 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5533 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5534 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5535 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5536 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5537 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5538 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5539 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5540 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5541 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5542 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5543 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5544 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5545 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5546 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5547 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5548 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5549 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5550 Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5555 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5556 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5557 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5558 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5559 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5560 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5561 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5562 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5563 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5564 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5565 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5566 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5567 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5568 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5569 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5570 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5571 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5572 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5573 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5574 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5575 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5576 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5577 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5578 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5579 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5580 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5581 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5582 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5583 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5584 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5585 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5586 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5587 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5588 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5597 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5598 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5604 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5605 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5608 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5609 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5610 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5611 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5612 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5613 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5614 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5615 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5616 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5617 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5618 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5619 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5620 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5621 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5622 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5623 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5624 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5627 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5628 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5629 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5630 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5631 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5632 23. Remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Route the TSS sensor wiring harness through the cover and the transaxle case. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5633 2. Install the TSS sensor in the cover and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5634 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5635 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5636 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5637 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5638 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5639 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 19. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 20. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 21. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5640 22. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 23. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 25. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5641 26. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5642 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5643 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5644 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5645 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5646 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5647 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5648 23. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5649 3. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 4. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5650 5. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 6. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5651 7. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 8. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 9. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 10. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5652 11. Tighten the main control valve body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5653 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 15. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 16. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5654 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 17. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 19. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 20. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5655 21. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 22. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 23. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5656 25. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5661 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5662 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5663 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5664 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5665 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5666 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5667 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5668 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5669 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5670 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5671 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5672 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5673 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5674 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5675 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5676 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5677 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5686 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5687 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5688 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5689 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5690 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5691 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5692 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5693 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5694 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5702 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5703 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5704 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5705 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5706 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5707 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5708 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5709 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5710 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5711 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5712 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5713 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5714 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5715 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5716 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5717 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5718 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5719 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5720 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5726 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5727 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5728 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5729 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5730 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5731 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5732 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5733 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5734 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5735 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5736 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5737 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5738 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5739 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5740 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5741 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5742 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5743 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage. Clean, repair or install new components as required. Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Diagnosis Chart A. "In Between" reading could be caused by a shift cable or digital TR sensor misaligned or a digital TR sensor circuit failure of TR1, TR2, TR3 or TR4. B. TRD: 1= Open digital TR switch, 0= Closed digital TR switch. C. VCM Readings: Taken from PCM signal pins for TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 to signal return. Wiggle Test Information for Open/Shorts A. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent open with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the closed position and monitor the TR_D with the scan tool. B. Check TR1, TR2, TR3 and TR4 circuits for an intermittent short with the TR sensor positioned so that suspect circuit is in the open position and monitor the TRD with the scan tool. To determine the shorted components while observing TRD, unplug the TR and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present unplug the transaxle harness and determine if the short goes away. If the short is still present, then the short is in the powertrain control module (PCM) or vehicle harness. Remove the suspect circuit(s) wire terminal from the PCM connector. If the short is still present, then the PCM has an internal failure. Otherwise, the failure is in the vehicle harness. Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis Use this shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A. Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5744 Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF" Failed ON/OFF due to powertrain control module and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically, mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off. SSA SSB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5745 SSC SSD SSE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5746 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5747 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5748 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5749 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5750 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5751 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5752 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5753 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5754 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5755 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5756 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5757 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5758 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5759 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5760 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5766 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5767 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5768 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5769 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5770 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5771 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5772 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5773 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5774 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5775 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5776 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5777 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5778 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5779 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5780 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5781 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5782 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5783 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5784 Removal NOTE: The PCM must be updated with a new solenoid body strategy data file and solenoid body ID anytime a new solenoid body is installed. A new solenoid body service tag must be installed over the current solenoid body service tag on top of the transaxle case. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5785 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5786 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5787 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5788 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle main control cover. 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5789 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5790 Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5791 3. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 4. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5792 5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 6. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 7. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5793 9. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 10. Wipe the surface of the existing solenoid body strategy tag on top of the transaxle case clean and install the new solenoid body strategy tag (supplied with the solenoid body service kit) over it. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5794 11. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 12. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 13. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 14. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5795 ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 15. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 16. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 18. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5796 19. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 20. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 21. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 22. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5797 23. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 24. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. 25. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch - TCC: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5809 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5810 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5811 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5812 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5813 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5814 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5815 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5816 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5817 Brake Switch - TCC: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5818 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5819 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5820 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5821 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5822 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5823 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5824 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5825 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5826 Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Overdrive Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5831 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5832 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5833 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5834 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5835 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5836 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5837 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5838 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5839 Overdrive Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5840 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5841 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5842 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5843 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5844 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5845 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5846 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5847 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5852 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5853 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5854 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5855 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5856 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5857 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5858 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5859 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5860 Throttle Position Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5861 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5862 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5863 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5864 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5865 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5866 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5867 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Throttle Position Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5868 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Mode Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5873 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5874 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5875 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5876 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5877 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5878 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5879 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5880 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5881 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5882 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5883 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5884 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5885 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5886 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5887 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5888 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5889 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5890 Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5895 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5896 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5897 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5898 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5899 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5900 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5901 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5902 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5903 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5904 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5905 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5906 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5907 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5908 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5909 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5910 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5911 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5912 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5913 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5914 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5915 13. Remove the nut and the manual lever. 14. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5916 17. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 18. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 19. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5917 20. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 21. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 22. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5918 23. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 24. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5919 25. Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the TR sensor locking pin. 26. NOTE: TR sensor removed for clarity. Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. 27. CAUTION: Make sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment or transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. Remove the TR sensor. 1 Slide the TR sensor down until the manual shaft is out of the transaxle case. 2 Rotate the TR sensor detent plate counterclockwise, as viewed from below until the plate rests against the transaxle case, remove the park Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5920 pawl actuating rod from the TR sensor and remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. Install the TR sensor. 1 Position the park pawl actuating rod in the TR sensor. 2 Install the TR sensor in the transaxle case. 2. Using the special tool, install a new TR sensor locking pin. 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5921 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5922 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5923 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle main control cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle main control cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5924 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5925 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5926 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the manual lever and the nut. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 19. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual lever. 20. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 21. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5927 22. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 23. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 24. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 25. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5928 26. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 27. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. 28. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5937 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5938 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's TSB 07-21-11 10/29/07 6F50 TRANSAXLES BUILT PRIOR TO 10/21/2007 - DTC P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 AND/OR HARSH ENGAGEMENT, NO UPSHIFT, FIFTH GEAR ONLY FORD: 2008 Taurus X, Taurus 2007-2008Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2008 Sable This article supersedes TSB 07-3-11 to update the transaxle built date coverage and Part List. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX, 2008 Taurus Taurus X, and Sable vehicles equipped with a 6F50 transaxle with a build date prior to 10/21/2007, with any Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor or Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor diagnostic trouble code(s) (DTCs) P0715, P0717, P0718, P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or harsh engagements, no upshift, fifth gear only, could have an intermittent short in the OSS or TSS sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If any DTCs related to OSS or TSS are present, check the transaxle build date following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. a. If the build date is before 10/21/2007 go to Step 2. b. If vehicle transaxle is built on or after 10/21/2007 do not continue with this TSB and follow normal WSM, Section 307-01 Automatic Transaxle/Transmission-6F50 Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5944 2. To repair an OSS or TSS DTC refer to WSM, Section 307-01, follow pin point test (PPT) C. The TSS sensor is located in the end cover assembly (Figure 1). The OSS sensor is located inside the transaxle under the main Control (Figure 2). Both sensor connectors are plugged into the solenoid body. Both sensor connectors look the same but are wired differently (Figure 3). 3. If you work through PPT C and get to Step C9 before finding the cause of the concern, replace the sensor (DO NOT REPLACE THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AT THIS TIME). Reassemble as needed and verify the concern is fixed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 07-21-11 > Oct > 07 > A/T Harsh Engagement/No Shift/Multiple DTC's > Page 5945 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT072111 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING BASIC PART NO. CONDITION 7M101 CODE 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5967 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5968 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5969 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5970 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5971 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5972 23. Remove the bolt and the TSS sensor. Installation 1. Route the TSS sensor wiring harness through the cover and the transaxle case. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5973 2. Install the TSS sensor in the cover and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5974 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 5. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5975 6. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 7. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5976 8. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 9. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 10. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 11. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5977 12. Tighten the main control cover bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 13. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5978 14. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 15. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 16. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5979 17. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 18. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 19. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 20. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 21. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5980 22. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 23. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 25. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5981 26. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5982 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness fastener from the air cleaner assembly. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the engine breather from the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5983 6. Loosen the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body and remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet pipe assembly. 7. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain. 8. Install the transmission fluid drain plug. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 9. NOTE: The coolant hoses do not need to be removed from the engine. Remove the coolant hoses from the transmission fluid filler tube and position aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5984 10. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator. 11. NOTE: The coolant hoses have been removed for clarity. Remove the nut, rotate the transmission fluid filler tube counterclockwise 90 degrees and remove the transmission fluid filler tube. 12. Loosen the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting from the thermal bypass valve. 13. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bolt and the transmission fluid cooler tube. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5985 14. Inspect the transaxle case to make sure that the transmission fluid cooler tube seal and backing ring were removed with the transmission fluid cooler tube and are not stuck in the transaxle case. If the transmission fluid cooler tube seal or backing ring are stuck in the transaxle case, remove the seal and backing ring. 15. Disconnect the transaxle electrical connector. 16. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve straight up and position it aside. 17. NOTE: Note the location of the of the stud bolts for assembly. Remove the 14 bolts and the transaxle side cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5986 18. Disconnect the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. 1 Slide the lock over. 2 Press the tab and disconnect the connector. 19. Disconnect the turbine shaft speed (TSS) and output shaft speed (OSS) sensor electrical connectors. 20. CAUTION: The solenoid body should be handled with care, damage to the solenoid body may occur. NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly. Remove the 11 bolts and the solenoid body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5987 21. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when removing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. Remove the solenoid body filter assembly by pulling it straight up from the alignment tabs. Discard the filter. 22. Remove the 10 bolts, the TR sensor detent spring and the main control valve body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5988 23. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor. Installation 1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 2. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual valve. Position the TSS, OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control valve body, the TR sensor detent spring and the 10 bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5989 3. CAUTION: Do not handle the solenoid body in the leadframe area or by the screens of the solenoid body filter or damage to the solenoid body can occur. CAUTION: Use care not to break the alignment tabs when installing the solenoid body filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the solenoid body is not correctly aligned. CAUTION: Make sure that the filter passage areas are clean of foreign material before installing the filter. Damage to the transaxle will occur if the filter passages are not clean. Install a new solenoid body filter assembly by pushing it straight down on to the alignment tabs. 4. CAUTION: Make sure not to pinch the TSS, OSS or TR sensor wiring harnesses when installing the solenoid body. Damage to the wiring harness will occur. NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the solenoid body and the 11 bolts. 1 42 mm (1.65 inch) bolt 2 63 mm (2.48 inch) bolts 3 80 mm (3.14 inch) bolts 4 95 mm (3.74 inch) bolts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5990 5. Tighten the solenoid body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 6. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5991 7. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 1 Connect the electrical connector. 2 Slide the locking tab over. 8. Connect the TSS sensor electrical connector. 9. Inspect the transaxle side cover seal for damage and install new if necessary. 10. CAUTION: Inspect the 20 pin solenoid body connector seal to make sure that the seals is on the inside of the main control cover. Transmission fluid leak will occur. NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly. Install the transaxle side cover and install the 14 bolts. 1 Bolt location 2 Studbolt location Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5992 11. Tighten the main control valve body bolts in the sequence shown. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs). 12. Position the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass valve and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in place and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5993 13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector. 14. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler tube backing ring and seal for damage and install a new backing ring or seal if necessary. Lubricate the transmission fluid cooler tube seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and install the backing ring and seal on the transmission fluid cooler tube. 15. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 16. Tighten the transmission fluid cooler tube fitting. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5994 ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 17. Install the fluid filler tube and the nut. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 18. Install the transmission fluid level indicator. 19. Route the coolant hoses in the transmission fluid filler tube. 20. Position the air cleaner assembly in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5995 21. Tighten the air cleaner outlet pipe clamp at the throttle body. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 22. Connect the engine breather to the air cleaner assembly. 23. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the air cleaner assembly. 24. Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and connect the electrical harness fastener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 5996 25. Fill with clean automatic transmission fluid to the correct level. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6015 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6016 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6017 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 6023 C3037 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 6024 ABS Sensor Block: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6028 C135 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6029 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The ABS module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. CAUTION: Do not allow any brake fluid or foreign material to enter the mating side of the ABS module or damage to the solenoids can occur. 1. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU). 2. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 3. NOTE: Visually inspect the ABS module terminals for damage before installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6033 Removal and Installation WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube and the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Remove the battery and battery tray. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the 6 brake tube fittings. ^ To install, tighten the brake master cylinder tubes to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs). ^ To install, tighten the remaining tubes to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU) bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 6. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and the HCU. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-HCU bolts and separate the HCU from the bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs). 8. NOTE: Make sure the HCU and ABS module are clean and free of any brake fluid or foreign material before separating the components. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6040 1. Remove the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Remove the 2 steering wheel rotation sensor bolts. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector and remove the steering wheel rotation sensor. Installation 1. If the arrow on the steering wheel rotation sensor ring and the arrow on the sensor housing are misaligned and/or the straight ahead position of the sensor is not known, follow these steps to align the sensor prior to installing the sensor: 1 Orient the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2 Connect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 3 Connect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4 Carefully rotate the sensor clockwise until it stops. 5 Rotate the sensor counterclockwise 2-1/2 turns. 6 Using the scan tool, read the steering wheel rotation sensor position PID (SWA POS). The PID should read approximately 0 degrees. If not, repeat the procedure. 7 Disconnect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 8 Disconnect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 2. NOTE: Slight rotation of the steering wheel rotation sensor ring is allowed to align the 2 arrows. Make sure the sensor ring arrow is lined up with the steering wheel rotation sensor housing arrow as shown and position the sensor into the multi-function switch housing. 3. Connect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 steering wheel rotation sensor bolts. ^ Tighten to 1 Nm (9 inch lbs). 5. Install the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. ^ If the steering wheel rotation sensor was aligned using the scan tool, diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) will be present in the restrains control module (RCM). Using the scan tool, clear the DTCs in the RCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6044 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6045 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the stability/traction control switch electrical connector. 4. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch from the instrument panel center finish panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 TSB 07-17-2 09/03/07 ABS LAMP ON C1165/C1175 AND/OR C1235/C1236 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge/MKX vehicles built before 6/1/2007 (FWD only) may exhibit an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning lamp and/or a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning lamp illuminated with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1165/C1175 and/or C1235/C1236. This may be due to a faulty rear wheel speed sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTCs C1235/C1236 and/or C1165/C1175 are present. If so, continue on to Step 2. For all other codes follow normal Workshop Manual diagnostics. 2. With the ignition off, proceed with the replacement of the faulted wheel speed sensor. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-09. NOTE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HARNESS ROUTING BRACKETS WHEN PERFORMING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. 3. With a new wheel speed sensor installed, make sure to torque the retaining bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in). 4. Clear continuous DTCs. NOTE THE ABS SYSTEM CONFIRMS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT BASED ON SEVERAL WHEEL REVOLUTIONS ABOVE 24 KM/H (15 MPH). DRIVE VEHICLE FOR AT LEAST 75 FEET AT OR ABOVE 15 MPH. IF WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL INPUT IS MISSING THE ABS LIGHT WILL ILLUMINATE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071702A 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.5 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace One Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) 071702B 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.7 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace Both Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 6054 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 TSB 07-17-2 09/03/07 ABS LAMP ON C1165/C1175 AND/OR C1235/C1236 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge/MKX vehicles built before 6/1/2007 (FWD only) may exhibit an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning lamp and/or a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning lamp illuminated with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1165/C1175 and/or C1235/C1236. This may be due to a faulty rear wheel speed sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTCs C1235/C1236 and/or C1165/C1175 are present. If so, continue on to Step 2. For all other codes follow normal Workshop Manual diagnostics. 2. With the ignition off, proceed with the replacement of the faulted wheel speed sensor. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-09. NOTE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HARNESS ROUTING BRACKETS WHEN PERFORMING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. 3. With a new wheel speed sensor installed, make sure to torque the retaining bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in). 4. Clear continuous DTCs. NOTE THE ABS SYSTEM CONFIRMS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT BASED ON SEVERAL WHEEL REVOLUTIONS ABOVE 24 KM/H (15 MPH). DRIVE VEHICLE FOR AT LEAST 75 FEET AT OR ABOVE 15 MPH. IF WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL INPUT IS MISSING THE ABS LIGHT WILL ILLUMINATE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071702A 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.5 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace One Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) 071702B 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.7 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace Both Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 6060 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 6063 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 6064 View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front C150 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6067 C440 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6068 C160 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6069 C426 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the retainers and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the 6 pushpin fasteners. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 6072 ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The wheel speed sensor harness must be routed as shown or damage to the harness during vehicle jounce and rebound can occur. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 6073 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the harness routing brackets. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor harness from the brackets. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 6074 5. Disconnect the pushpin fasteners. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Master Cylinder WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or new installation, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. Disconnect the brake master cylinder outlet tubes. 2. Install short brake tubes with ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes without air bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows: 1 Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 2 Loosen the rearmost brake tube fittings until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the brake tube fitting. 3 Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6082 4 Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 6. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tubes. ^ Tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6083 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Material Brake System Bleeding Pressure WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if a new anti-lock brake system (ABS) hydraulic control unit (HCU) has been installed. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Carrying out the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Bleed the longest brake tube or hose first. Be sure the bleeder tank contains enough specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 2. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6084 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 4. Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave the bleeder screw open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows into the container, then tighten the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 7. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear disc brake caliper to the RH front disc brake caliper, ending with the LH front disc brake caliper. 8. Close the bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the cap. Manual WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6085 CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if a new anti-lock brake system (ABS) hydraulic control unit (HCU) has been installed. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Carrying out the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Install the master cylinder filler cap. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 3. Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 6. Tighten the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 7. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear disc brake caliper. 8. Place a box-end wrench on the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 9. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 10. Loosen the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 11. Tighten the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6086 12. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LH front disc brake caliper. Gravity WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Performing the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 3. Bleed the rear disc brake calipers. ^ Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Open the bleeder screw and leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows into the container. Repeat for the LH rear disc brake caliper. 4. Tighten the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screws to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 5. Bleed the front disc brake calipers. ^ Place a box-end wrench on the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Attach a rubber hose to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Open the bleeder screw and leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. Repeat for the LH front disc brake caliper. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screws to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal and Bracket Brake Pedal and Bracket CAUTION: Do not remove or loosen the fasteners that hold the 2 brake pedal bracket halves together. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the brake pedal bracket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6090 Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Always remove the stoplamp switch with the brake pedal secured to the brake booster push rod and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Do not press or pull on the brake pedal when removing the switch or damage to switch can occur. CAUTION: The stoplamp switch must be removed prior to removing the brake pedal and bracket, brake booster and associated mounting fasteners or damage to the switches can occur. Remove the stoplamp switch. 2. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to Dash Board. 3. Remove the brake booster push rod pin clip and pin, then disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal arm. 4. Remove the 4 brake pedal bracket nuts. To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs). 5. Lift the brake pedal and bracket off of the hangers and remove the brake pedal and bracket. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the hose aside. ^ Discard the 2 copper washers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6096 ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: The guide pin bolts are different sizes. The longer/bigger bolt is the upper guide pin bolt. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs). 4. Remove the brake caliper. 5. NOTE: During installation, make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6097 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear Brake Caliper Material Removal WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the brake hose aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6098 ^ Discard the 2 copper washers. 3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts and the brake caliper. ^ If a leaking or damaged caliper piston boot is found, install a new disc brake caliper. Installation 1. CAUTION: Make sure that the caliper guide pin boots are fully seated or damage to the caliper guide pin boots can occur. NOTE: Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper installation. Position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate and brake pads. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs). 3. Using 2 new copper washers, position the brake hose and install the brake caliper flow bolt. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 4. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 5. Bleed the brake system. 6. Test the brakes for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6099 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. ^ If required, remove the fluid until the brake master cylinder reservoir is 1/2 full. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons as this can damage the pistons and boots. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. ^ To install, tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs). 4. Remove the brake pads, brake pad shims and stainless steel shims. 5. Remove the brake pad slides. 6. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and the anchor plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6100 ^ To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6101 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Rear Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons, as this can damage the pistons and boots. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. ^ To install, tighten to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the 2 brake pads, shims and slide clips. Inspect the brake pads for wear or contamination. 4. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and the anchor plate. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 5. NOTE: Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6102 To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Test the brakes for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6103 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Support Plate Brake Caliper Support Plate Brake Caliper Support Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake disc shield. 2. Remove the 2 parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts, disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever and position the cable aside. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the 2 dust boot shield bolts and the dust shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 4. Remove the dust boot. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Front Brake Pads Minimum thickness............................................................................................................................... ............................................... 3.0 mm (0.118 inch) Maximum thickness variation (pad-to-pad)......................................................................................................................................... 2.0 mm (0.079 inch) Maximum taper wear (in any direction)............................................................................................................................................... 3.0 mm (0.118 inch) Rear Brake Pads Minimum thickness............................................................................................................................... ............................................... 3.0 mm (0.118 inch) Maximum thickness variation (pad-to-pad)......................................................................................................................................... 2.0 mm (0.079 inch) Maximum taper wear (in any direction)............................................................................................................................................... 3.0 mm (0.118 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Brake Pads Material Removal WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. ^ If required, remove the fluid until the brake master cylinder reservoir is 1/2 full. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6109 3. CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons as this can damage the pistons and boots. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 4. Remove the brake pads, brake pad shims and stainless steel shims. ^ Inspect the brake pads and shims for wear or contamination. 5. Remove the brake pad slides. Installation 1. CAUTION: Protect the caliper piston and boots when pushing the caliper piston into the bores. CAUTION: Make sure that the caliper guide pin boots are fully seated or damage to the caliper guide pin boots can occur. If installing new brake pads, using a suitable tool and a worn brake, compress the disc brake caliper pistons into the caliper. 2. Install the brake pad slides. 3. Apply a thin coating of the supplied grease to the shims and the shim contact area of the brake pads. 4. Install the stainless steel shims to the brake pads. 5. NOTE: The guide pin bolts are different sizes. The longer/bigger bolt is the upper guide pin bolt. Position the brake caliper and install the 2 guide pin bolts. ^ Tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs). 6. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 8. Test the brakes for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6110 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Brake Pads Material Removal WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6111 ^ If required, remove the fluid until the brake master cylinder reservoir is 1/2 full. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons, as this can damage the pistons and boots. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 4. CAUTION: Install new brake pads if they are worn past the specified thickness above the metal backing plates. Install new brake pads in complete axle sets. Remove the 2 brake pads, shims and slide clips. Inspect the brake pads and shims for wear, damage or contamination. ^ Discard the slide clips. Installation 1. CAUTION: Protect the caliper piston and boots when pushing the caliper piston into the bores. NOTE: Make sure the caliper piston boot is clean and free of foreign material. If installing new brake pads, using a suitable tool and a worn brake pad, compress the disc brake caliper pistons into the caliper. 2. Install the 2 brake pads, shims and new slide clips to the brake caliper anchor plate. 3. CAUTION: Make sure that the caliper guide pin boots are fully seated or damage to the caliper guide pin boots can occur. NOTE: Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper installation. Position the brake caliper on the anchor plate and install the 2 guide pin bolts. ^ Tighten to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs). 4. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 6. Test the brakes for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Front Brake Disc New disc thickness............................................................................................................................... ................................................... 28 mm (1.10 inch) Minimum thickness............................................. .................................................................................................................................... 26 mm (1.02 inch) Minimum thickness to machine.................................................................................................... ....................................................... 27.1 mm (1.07 inch) Rear Brake Disc New disc thickness............................................................................................................................... ................................................... 18 mm (0.70 inch) Minimum thickness............................................. .................................................................................................................................... 16 mm (0.63 inch) Minimum thickness to machine.................................................................................................... ....................................................... 17.1 mm (0.67 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures Brake Disc Machining Material NOTE: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. NOTE: Read the entire operating manual and view the video shipped with the lathe before installing, operating or repairing the lathe. NOTE: If the thickness of the brake disc is less than the minimum thickness to machine specification, install a new brake disc. This will make sure that the brake disc will be above minimum thickness after machining. NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs. NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within specifications. 1. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube from the brake caliper. Position the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket aside. 2. For vehicles with a 2-piece brake disc and hub assembly: 1 Mark the brake disc and the wheel stud for correct indexing during re-assembly. 2 Remove the brake disc from the hub. 3 CAUTION: Do not use an abrasive sanding disc since it will remove paint or other protective finishes from the wheel or metal from the mounting surfaces, adversely affecting corrosion protection and brake disc lateral runout. Remove corrosion from the wheel mounting surface, both disc mounting surfaces and hub mounting surface. 4 Align the match marks and install the brake disc on the hub. 3. Machine the brake disc using an on-vehicle brake lathe. 1 Install the hub adapter and silencer belt if necessary. 2 Install the cutting lathe. 3 If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. Total indicated reading (TIR) target is 0.000 mm (0.000 inch), maximum is 0.08 mm (0.003 inch). 4 Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector. 5 NOTE: The depth of cut should be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish. Machine the brake disc. 6 Remove the lathe and, if installed, the silencer belt. 7 Remove the hub adapter. 4. Remove the metal shavings. 5. For vehicles with a 2-piece brake disc and hub assembly: 1 Remove the brake disc from the hub. 2 Remove metal shavings from the hub, the brake disc mounting surfaces and from the ABS sensors. 3 Apply anti-seize lubricant to the hub mounting surface to prevent corrosion. 4 Align the match marks and install the brake disc on the hub. 6. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material properties are within guidelines. Install the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6117 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Disc Removal and Installation, Front Brake Disc Material Removal 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the brake disc. Installation 1. Clean and dry the brake disc-to-wheel hub mounting surface and apply a thin coat of anti-seize where indicated. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6118 2. NOTE: Make sure the brake disc is clean and free of any foreign material. Install the brake disc. 3. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the brake caliper anchor plate bolts. ^ Tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 4. Install the wheel and tire assembly. Disc Removal and Installation, Rear Brake Disc Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6119 Removal 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the brake disc. Installation 1. Clean and dry the brake disc-to-hub mounting surface and apply a thin coat of anti-seize lubricant where indicated. 2. Install the brake disc onto the wheel hub. 3. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 4. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 5. Test the brakes for normal operation. Shield Removal and Installation, Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6120 Brake Disc Shield Brake Disc Shield Removal 1. Remove the wheel bearing and wheel hub. 2. Index-mark the brake disc shield to the wheel knuckle, then align the new brake disc shield to the existing shield and transfer the index mark. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6121 3. Cut the brake disc shield and remove it from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the brake disc shield onto the wheel knuckle. 2. Align the index marks and install the brake disc shield onto the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the wheel bearing and wheel hub. Shield Removal and Installation, Rear Brake Disc Shield Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6122 Brake Disc Shield Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel hub. 2. Remove the parking brake shoe return spring bracket bolt and bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 3. Remove the brake disc shield. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Master Cylinder WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or new installation, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. Disconnect the brake master cylinder outlet tubes. 2. Install short brake tubes with ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes without air bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows: 1 Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 2 Loosen the rearmost brake tube fittings until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the brake tube fitting. 3 Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6128 4 Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 6. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tubes. ^ Tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6129 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Material Brake System Bleeding Pressure WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if a new anti-lock brake system (ABS) hydraulic control unit (HCU) has been installed. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Carrying out the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Bleed the longest brake tube or hose first. Be sure the bleeder tank contains enough specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 2. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6130 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 4. Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave the bleeder screw open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows into the container, then tighten the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 7. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear disc brake caliper to the RH front disc brake caliper, ending with the LH front disc brake caliper. 8. Close the bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter. 9. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid and install the cap. Manual WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6131 CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if a new anti-lock brake system (ABS) hydraulic control unit (HCU) has been installed. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Carrying out the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Install the master cylinder filler cap. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 3. Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 6. Tighten the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 7. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear disc brake caliper. 8. Place a box-end wrench on the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber hose to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 9. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 10. Loosen the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 11. Tighten the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder > Page 6132 12. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LH front disc brake caliper. Gravity WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or installation of a new component, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Performing the chassis brake bleeding procedure drives trapped air from the otherwise inaccessible lower section of the HCU valves into the upper sections (accessible by bleeding the brakes). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the system. NOTE: Add clean, specified brake fluid as necessary throughout the procedure. 1. Clean all dirt from the master cylinder filler cap, then remove the cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with an ABS, connect the vehicle communication module (VCM) and scan tool into the vehicle data link connector (DLC) under the dash and carry out the chassis brake bleeding procedure. 3. Bleed the rear disc brake calipers. ^ Place a box-end wrench on the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Attach a rubber hose to the RH rear disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Open the bleeder screw and leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows into the container. Repeat for the LH rear disc brake caliper. 4. Tighten the rear disc brake caliper bleeder screws to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 5. Bleed the front disc brake calipers. ^ Place a box-end wrench on the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. ^ Attach a rubber hose to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Open the bleeder screw and leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. Repeat for the LH front disc brake caliper. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screws to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the hose aside. ^ Discard the 2 copper washers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6137 ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 3. NOTE: The guide pin bolts are different sizes. The longer/bigger bolt is the upper guide pin bolt. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs). 4. Remove the brake caliper. 5. NOTE: During installation, make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6138 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear Brake Caliper Material Removal WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the brake hose aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6139 ^ Discard the 2 copper washers. 3. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts and the brake caliper. ^ If a leaking or damaged caliper piston boot is found, install a new disc brake caliper. Installation 1. CAUTION: Make sure that the caliper guide pin boots are fully seated or damage to the caliper guide pin boots can occur. NOTE: Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper installation. Position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate and brake pads. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs). 3. Using 2 new copper washers, position the brake hose and install the brake caliper flow bolt. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 4. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 5. Bleed the brake system. 6. Test the brakes for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6140 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. ^ If required, remove the fluid until the brake master cylinder reservoir is 1/2 full. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons as this can damage the pistons and boots. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. ^ To install, tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs). 4. Remove the brake pads, brake pad shims and stainless steel shims. 5. Remove the brake pad slides. 6. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and the anchor plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6141 ^ To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6142 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Rear Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not pry in the caliper sight hole to retract the pistons, as this can damage the pistons and boots. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. ^ To install, tighten to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the 2 brake pads, shims and slide clips. Inspect the brake pads for wear or contamination. 4. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts and the anchor plate. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 5. NOTE: Make sure that the brake caliper hose is not twisted during caliper installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6143 To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Test the brakes for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 6144 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Support Plate Brake Caliper Support Plate Brake Caliper Support Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake disc shield. 2. Remove the 2 parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts, disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever and position the cable aside. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the 2 dust boot shield bolts and the dust shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 inch lbs). 4. Remove the dust boot. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... PM-1-C Ford Specification .............................................. ....................................................................................................................................... WSS-M6C62-A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6151 C124 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6155 Removal and Installation WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube and the air cleaner assembly. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Remove the battery and battery tray. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the 6 brake tube fittings. ^ To install, tighten the brake master cylinder tubes to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs). ^ To install, tighten the remaining tubes to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU) bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 6. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and the HCU. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-HCU bolts and separate the HCU from the bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs). 8. NOTE: Make sure the HCU and ABS module are clean and free of any brake fluid or foreign material before separating the components. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder Tests Bypass Condition 1. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 2. Observe the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir while the brake pedal is slowly applied and released. If the brake fluid level drops when the brake pedal is applied and rises when the brake pedal is released, but the net brake fluid level remains unchanged, the brake master cylinder is bypassing. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Non-Pressure External Leaks A low brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by these non-pressure external leaks: Type 1: An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder filler cap due to incorrect position of the cap, cap gasket or cap gasket deterioration. Repair or install new components as necessary. Type 2: An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder mounting flange due to internal seal failure. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Type 3: An external leak may exist at the base of the brake master cylinder reservoir due to deteriorated reservoir mounting seals. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Compensator Port The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^ supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system due to brake lining wear. ^ allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released. The returning brake fluid creates a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir. This is a normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged. Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel. If an excessive amount of brake drag exists, continue with the test. If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake disc caliper or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary. 3. Check the brake stoplamp switch adjustment and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is not partially applied. 4. Loosen the nuts attaching the brake master cylinder to the power brake booster and pull the brake master cylinder away from the power brake booster. 5. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. If the brake drag disappears, the power brake booster is binding and a new one must be installed. If the brake drag continues, the brake master cylinder is binding and a new one must be installed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures Master Cylinder WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or new installation, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from getting into the system. Disconnect the brake master cylinder outlet tubes. 2. Install short brake tubes with ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes without air bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows: 1 Have an assistant pump the brake pedal and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 2 Loosen the rearmost brake tube fittings until a stream of brake fluid comes out. Have an assistant maintain pressure on the brake pedal while tightening the brake tube fitting. 3 Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. 4 Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 6. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tubes. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6161 ^ Tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6162 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Brake Master Cylinder Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 3 motor vehicle brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the air cleaner and air cleaner outlet tube. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Remove the battery and battery tray. For additional information, refer to Battery. 3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch electrical connector. 4. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6163 5. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings, plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder ports. ^ To install, tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs). 6. Remove the 2 brake master cylinder nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the brake master cylinder and reservoir. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the master cylinder and brake system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Brake Cable: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Parking Brake Cable: Customer Interest Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Brake Cable: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 6173 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Cable: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Parking Brake Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Cable: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 6179 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6180 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Parking Brake Cable Adjustment NOTE: Cable tension is adjusted in 2 locations, the first location is at the parking brake control, the second location is at the parking brake cable equalizer. The tension must be adjusted equally at both locations. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The dimension will vary depending on the amount of cable stretch. New cables require cycling the parking brake control 5-10 times to remove the cable slack. Adjust the parking brake control adjustment nut as shown. 3. Adjust the parking brake cable equalizer adjustment nut as shown. 4. Fully apply the parking brake pedal 3 times to verify correct operation of the parking brake system. ^ With the parking brake cable in the fully released position, brake drag should not be present. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH > Page 6183 Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH (Part 2) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Relieve the tension in the parking brake cable by loosening the equalizer adjustment nut. 3. Disconnect the LH parking brake cable from the equalizer. 4. Squeeze the tabs and disconnect the LH parking brake cable from the bracket. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the wheel speed sensor aside. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). All vehicles 6. Remove the 2 parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts and disconnect the cable from the lever. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the stabilizer bar link nut and position the stabilizer bar link aside. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 8. Remove the parking brake cable front bracket bolt, middle bracket bolt and the parking brake cable. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the parking brake cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH > Page 6184 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH > Page 6185 Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH (Part 2) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Relieve the tension in the parking brake cable by loosening the equalizer adjustment nut. 3. Disconnect the RH parking brake cable from the equalizer. 4. Squeeze the tabs and disconnect the RH parking brake cable from the bracket. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the wheel speed sensor aside. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). All vehicles 6. Remove the 2 parking brake cable-to-support plate bolts and disconnect the cable from the lever. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the stabilizer bar link nut and position the stabilizer bar link aside. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 8. Remove the 4 parking brake cable bracket bolts and the parking brake cable. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the parking brake cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH > Page 6186 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Front Parking Brake Cable - Front Parking Brake Cable - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the parking brake cable equalizer adjustment nut and disconnect the front cable from the equalizer. 3. Remove the LH rear footwell duct. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. 4. Remove the parking brake control adjustment nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH > Page 6187 5. Remove the front parking brake cable-to-control nut and remove the front parking brake cable from the control. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 6. Remove the front parking brake cable bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the 2 front parking brake cable floor plate bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 8. Remove the front parking brake cable. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the parking brake cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Parking Brake Control Parking Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the parking brake switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the parking brake control adjustment nut. 3. Remove the front parking brake cable-to-control nut and position the front cable aside. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 4. Remove the 3 parking brake control nuts and the parking brake control. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the parking brake cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Parking Brake Shoes Parking Brake Shoes Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear brake disc. 2. Remove the parking brake shoe return spring. 3. Remove the parking brake shoe. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Check the parking brake for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6197 C2015 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6198 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch screw and the switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6203 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Brake Booster The power brake actuation system includes a vacuum assisted brake booster, vacuum check valve, vacuum hose and aspirator. The vacuum hose delivers engine vacuum to the vacuum check valve. The vacuum check valve is a one-way valve that allows engine supplied vacuum to the booster, and closes when engine vacuum is removed. The brake booster utilizes engine vacuum to reduce the amount of effort required at the brake pedal to actuate the foundation brakes. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6204 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster 1. Inspect all vacuum hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connections must be capped. Hoses and their connections must be correctly secured and in good condition with no holes, cracks or collapsed areas. 2. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 3. With the engine OFF, place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. 4. NOTE: If the power brake booster is noisy when the brakes are applied, a new component must be installed. Apply and hold the brake pedal several times to exhaust all of the vacuum reserve from the system. 5. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 6. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the brake pedal will move downward slightly under constant foot pressure. If no movement occurs, the power brake booster system is not functioning. Turn the engine OFF. 7. Remove the vacuum hose from the power brake booster. 8. Place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. Start the engine. Manifold vacuum should be available from the vacuum booster hose. If manifold vacuum is not available, inspect all of the hoses and hose connections. Repair as necessary. 9. Connect the vacuum booster hose and run the engine at fast idle for 10 seconds. 10. Turn OFF the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. 11. Apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 Nm (66 ft. lbs) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as normal power-assisted brake operation for at least one brake pedal application. If the brake pedal feel is normal, the power brake booster is OK. If the brake pedal feels hard, continue with the test. 12. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after 10 minutes, install a new power brake booster. If the vacuum does leak off, install a new check valve and/or new vacuum booster hoses. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6205 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster Brake Booster Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Always remove the stop lamp switch with the brake pedal secured to the brake booster push rod and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Do not press or pull on the brake pedal when removing the switch or damage to switch can occur. CAUTION: The stop lamp switch must be removed prior to removing the brake pedal and bracket, brake booster and associated mounting fasteners or damage to the switch can occur. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6206 Remove the stop lamp switch. 2. CAUTION: The brake booster check valve must be disconnected from the brake booster (prior to removing the master cylinder) or the master cylinder seal may be drawn into the brake booster. Disconnect the brake booster check valve from the brake booster to deplete the residual vacuum in the brake booster. 3. Remove the brake master cylinder. 4. CAUTION: Make sure that the vacuum hose assembly is routed correctly so it does not make contact with surrounding components. Disconnect the manifold vacuum hose assembly from the brake booster. 5. Disconnect the vacuum hose and wire harness from the studs and position aside. 6. Remove the 2 pushpin fasteners and the lower instrument panel cover. 7. Remove the brake booster push rod pin and clip and disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal. 8. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs). 9. Remove the brake booster. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Check the brake booster for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Check Valve 1. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 2. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after 10 minutes, the check valve is OK. Otherwise, install a new check valve. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6214 C135 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6215 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. The ABS module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. CAUTION: Do not allow any brake fluid or foreign material to enter the mating side of the ABS module or damage to the solenoids can occur. 1. Remove the hydraulic control unit (HCU). 2. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs). 3. NOTE: Visually inspect the ABS module terminals for damage before installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 6220 C3037 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 6221 ABS Sensor Block: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6225 C124 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6232 C2015 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6233 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch screw and the switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6237 1. Remove the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Remove the 2 steering wheel rotation sensor bolts. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector and remove the steering wheel rotation sensor. Installation 1. If the arrow on the steering wheel rotation sensor ring and the arrow on the sensor housing are misaligned and/or the straight ahead position of the sensor is not known, follow these steps to align the sensor prior to installing the sensor: 1 Orient the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2 Connect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 3 Connect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 4 Carefully rotate the sensor clockwise until it stops. 5 Rotate the sensor counterclockwise 2-1/2 turns. 6 Using the scan tool, read the steering wheel rotation sensor position PID (SWA POS). The PID should read approximately 0 degrees. If not, repeat the procedure. 7 Disconnect the battery negative cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 8 Disconnect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 2. NOTE: Slight rotation of the steering wheel rotation sensor ring is allowed to align the 2 arrows. Make sure the sensor ring arrow is lined up with the steering wheel rotation sensor housing arrow as shown and position the sensor into the multi-function switch housing. 3. Connect the steering wheel rotation sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 steering wheel rotation sensor bolts. ^ Tighten to 1 Nm (9 inch lbs). 5. Install the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. ^ If the steering wheel rotation sensor was aligned using the scan tool, diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) will be present in the restrains control module (RCM). Using the scan tool, clear the DTCs in the RCM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6241 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6242 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel away from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the stability/traction control switch electrical connector. 4. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch from the instrument panel center finish panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 TSB 07-17-2 09/03/07 ABS LAMP ON C1165/C1175 AND/OR C1235/C1236 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge/MKX vehicles built before 6/1/2007 (FWD only) may exhibit an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning lamp and/or a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning lamp illuminated with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1165/C1175 and/or C1235/C1236. This may be due to a faulty rear wheel speed sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTCs C1235/C1236 and/or C1165/C1175 are present. If so, continue on to Step 2. For all other codes follow normal Workshop Manual diagnostics. 2. With the ignition off, proceed with the replacement of the faulted wheel speed sensor. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-09. NOTE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HARNESS ROUTING BRACKETS WHEN PERFORMING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. 3. With a new wheel speed sensor installed, make sure to torque the retaining bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in). 4. Clear continuous DTCs. NOTE THE ABS SYSTEM CONFIRMS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT BASED ON SEVERAL WHEEL REVOLUTIONS ABOVE 24 KM/H (15 MPH). DRIVE VEHICLE FOR AT LEAST 75 FEET AT OR ABOVE 15 MPH. IF WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL INPUT IS MISSING THE ABS LIGHT WILL ILLUMINATE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071702A 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.5 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace One Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) 071702B 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.7 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace Both Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 6251 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 TSB 07-17-2 09/03/07 ABS LAMP ON C1165/C1175 AND/OR C1235/C1236 FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge/MKX vehicles built before 6/1/2007 (FWD only) may exhibit an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning lamp and/or a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) warning lamp illuminated with diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1165/C1175 and/or C1235/C1236. This may be due to a faulty rear wheel speed sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify DTCs C1235/C1236 and/or C1165/C1175 are present. If so, continue on to Step 2. For all other codes follow normal Workshop Manual diagnostics. 2. With the ignition off, proceed with the replacement of the faulted wheel speed sensor. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-09. NOTE IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE HARNESS ROUTING BRACKETS WHEN PERFORMING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. 3. With a new wheel speed sensor installed, make sure to torque the retaining bolt to 7 N.m (62 lb-in). 4. Clear continuous DTCs. NOTE THE ABS SYSTEM CONFIRMS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT BASED ON SEVERAL WHEEL REVOLUTIONS ABOVE 24 KM/H (15 MPH). DRIVE VEHICLE FOR AT LEAST 75 FEET AT OR ABOVE 15 MPH. IF WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL INPUT IS MISSING THE ABS LIGHT WILL ILLUMINATE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071702A 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.5 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace One Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) 071702B 2007 Edge/MKX Built 0.7 Hr. Before 6/1/2007: Check Diagnostic Trouble Codes and Replace Both Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 07-17-2 > Sep > 07 > ABS/TCS - ABS/ESC Lamps ON/DTC's C1165/C1175/C1235/C1236 > Page 6257 Wheel Speed Sensors (Do Not Use With 12650D, 2219D, 2219D5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2C216 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 6260 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 6261 View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front C150 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6264 C440 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6265 C160 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6266 C426 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the retainers and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the 6 pushpin fasteners. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 6269 ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The wheel speed sensor harness must be routed as shown or damage to the harness during vehicle jounce and rebound can occur. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 6270 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the harness routing brackets. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor harness from the brackets. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 6271 5. Disconnect the pushpin fasteners. 6. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and the wheel speed sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation NOTE: When installing a new stability control sensor cluster, the sensor cluster must be calibrated. Follow the scan tool directions for the calibration procedures. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery. 2. NOTE: The sensor is located on the RH side of the vehicle, under the rear seat. Remove the rear seat. For additional information, refer to Seats. 3. Disconnect the stability control sensor cluster electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 stability control sensor cluster nuts and the stability control sensor cluster. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a suitable tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Starter Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Starter Relay > Page 6286 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Run/Start Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 6289 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 6290 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Starter Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 6291 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Cable: Service and Repair BATTERY CABLES Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6296 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and position the battery cable body ground terminal aside. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the nut and position the BJB cable terminal aside. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover. 5. Remove the nut and position the battery cable starter solenoid terminal aside. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 6. Remove the nut and position the battery cable starter motor terminal aside. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 7. Release the battery cable locator from the engine. 8. Remove the bolt and position the battery cable engine ground terminal aside. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 9. Release the battery cable from the top of the intake manifold. 10. Release the 3 battery cable locators from the LH valve cover. 11. Position the generator protective cover aside, remove the nut and position the generator B+ terminal aside. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 12. Remove the battery cables. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Generator Voltage................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................12Volt Rating...................................................................................................................78/143 amp (max) @ 620-2500 engine rpm @ normal engine temperature Generator Load at 2,000 rpm................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................90 amps No Load at 2,000 rpm........................................ .......................................................................................................................between 13.2 and 15.5 volts Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 6302 Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6305 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6306 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6307 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6308 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6309 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6310 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6311 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6312 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6313 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6314 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6315 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322 Alternator: Connector Views C102A C102B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6323 Alternator: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Rating...................................................................................................................78/143 amp (max) @ 620-2500 engine rpm @ normal engine temperature Generator pulley ratio.................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. .....2.66:1 Voltage regulator type.......................................................................................................... ................................................Electronic internal with generator Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6324 Alternator: Description and Operation GENERATOR The generator is belt-driven by the engine accessory drive system. The generator has an internal voltage regulator that is not replaced separately. The generator and voltage regulator are repaired as an assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6325 Alternator: Service and Repair GENERATOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the cooling fan. 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and position the accessory drive belt aside. 4. Position the generator protective cover aside, remove the nut and position the generator B+ terminal aside. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the generator electrical connector. - Detach the pin-type retainer and wiring harness. 6. Remove the generator stud nut. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Remove the generator stud. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. Remove the generator bolt and the generator. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a suitable tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6334 View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6335 Starter Motor: Diagrams C197A C197B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6336 Starter Motor: Service and Repair STARTER MOTOR Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6337 Removal and Installation WARNING: When carrying out maintenance on the starting system, be aware that heavy gauge leads are connected directly to the battery. Make sure protective caps are in place when maintenance is completed. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Disconnect the transmission shift cable and adjustment lock from the transmission manual control lever. 4. Disconnect the transmission shift cable rotating slide snap and position aside the transmission cable. 5. Remove the nut and the transmission manual control lever. - To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 lb-ft). 6. Remove the starter motor terminal cover. 7. Remove the starter motor solenoid battery cable nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 8. Remove the starter motor solenoid wire nut. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6338 9. Disconnect the wiring harness retainer from the starter motor stud bolt and position the wiring harness aside. 10. Remove the starter motor stud bolt, bolt and the starter. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Starter Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Starter Relay > Page 6343 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Run/Start Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 6346 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 6347 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Starter Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Run/Start Relay > Page 6348 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area C474 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6354 C2033 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6355 C3063 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6356 C3064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6357 C3323 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Transformer Capacitor 1 C174 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Transformer Capacitor 1 > Page 6362 C194 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6367 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6368 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6369 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6370 Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6371 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6372 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6373 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6376 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6377 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6378 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6379 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6380 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6381 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6382 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6383 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6384 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6385 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6386 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6387 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6388 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6389 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6390 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6391 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6392 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6395 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6396 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6397 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6398 Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6399 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6400 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6401 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Fuse Block: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6410 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6411 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6412 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6413 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6419 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6420 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6421 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6422 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6425 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6426 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6427 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6428 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6429 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6430 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6431 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6434 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6435 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6436 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6437 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6438 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6439 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6440 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6441 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6442 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6443 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6444 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6445 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6446 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6447 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6448 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6449 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6450 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6451 Fuse Block: Connector Views C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6452 C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6453 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6454 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6455 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6456 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6457 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6460 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6461 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6462 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6463 Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6464 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6465 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6466 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6471 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6472 Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Ultra Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6473 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6477 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110-C934 C110 C126 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6482 C134 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6483 C139 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6484 C139 (Part 2) C140 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6485 C192 C210 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6486 C211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6487 C212 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6488 C212 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6489 C213 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6490 C213 (Part 2) C214 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6491 C215 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6492 C215 (Part 2) C260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6493 C263 C264 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6494 C265 C300 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6495 C311 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6496 C311 (Part 2) C312 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6497 C313 C314 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6498 C315 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6499 C316 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6500 C327 C328 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6501 C405 C406 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6502 C510 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6503 C510 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6504 C610 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6505 C610 (Part 2) C700 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6506 C800 C913 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6507 C919 C922 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6508 C925 C934 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6509 C4345 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6510 C4346 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6511 C224 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6512 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 C126 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6513 C134 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6514 C139 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6515 C139 (Part 2) C140 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6516 C192 C210 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6517 C211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6518 C212 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6519 C212 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6520 C213 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6521 C213 (Part 2) C214 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6522 C215 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6523 C215 (Part 2) C260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6524 C263 C264 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6525 C265 C300 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6526 C311 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6527 C311 (Part 2) C312 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6528 C313 C314 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6529 C315 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6530 C316 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6531 C327 C328 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6532 C405 C406 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6533 C510 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6534 C510 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6535 C610 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6536 C610 (Part 2) C700 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6537 C800 C913 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6538 C919 C922 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6539 C925 C934 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6540 C4345 C4346 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6541 C224 C223 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6542 C2199 C2365 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6543 C2200 C4133 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6544 C3337 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality has been integrated into the SJB. - The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6548 configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB into the scan tool. 2. Remove the driver door scuff plate. 3. Disconnect the 6 electrical connectors. 4. Remove the harness pushpin from the SJB. 5. Remove the nut. 6. Lower the SJB (release the SJB from the 2 alignment holes). 7. Push the red lock upward and press the 2 black tangs inward to release the B+ connector from the SJB. 8. Remove the SJB. Installation 1. Install the B+ connector onto the SJB and push the red lock tab downward. 2. Position the 2 SJB alignment tabs into the 2 holes and install the nut. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Install the harness pushpin into the SJB. 4. Connect the 6 electrical connectors. 5. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the driver door scuff plate. 6. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D and B2477. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. - If the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure was not followed when a new SJB was installed, the remote keyless entry (RKE) function (from the integrated keyhead transmitter [IKT]) of the SJB must be programmed, or the IKT RKE functions will be inoperative. IKTs can be programmed to the new SJB by cycling each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. If a new instrument cluster was installed, the IKT keys must be programmed to the new instrument cluster in order to program both the RKE and passive anti-theft system (PATS) functions. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool to the new SJB. 7. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 8. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. Carry out the SJB on-demand self-test, clear DTCs, and then retrieve all DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6554 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6555 Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Ultra Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6556 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6560 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality has been integrated into the SJB. - The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6564 configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB into the scan tool. 2. Remove the driver door scuff plate. 3. Disconnect the 6 electrical connectors. 4. Remove the harness pushpin from the SJB. 5. Remove the nut. 6. Lower the SJB (release the SJB from the 2 alignment holes). 7. Push the red lock upward and press the 2 black tangs inward to release the B+ connector from the SJB. 8. Remove the SJB. Installation 1. Install the B+ connector onto the SJB and push the red lock tab downward. 2. Position the 2 SJB alignment tabs into the 2 holes and install the nut. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Install the harness pushpin into the SJB. 4. Connect the 6 electrical connectors. 5. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the driver door scuff plate. 6. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D and B2477. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. - If the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure was not followed when a new SJB was installed, the remote keyless entry (RKE) function (from the integrated keyhead transmitter [IKT]) of the SJB must be programmed, or the IKT RKE functions will be inoperative. IKTs can be programmed to the new SJB by cycling each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. If a new instrument cluster was installed, the IKT keys must be programmed to the new instrument cluster in order to program both the RKE and passive anti-theft system (PATS) functions. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool to the new SJB. 7. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 8. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. Carry out the SJB on-demand self-test, clear DTCs, and then retrieve all DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6569 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6570 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6571 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6572 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6573 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6574 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6575 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6578 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6579 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6580 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6581 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6582 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6583 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6586 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6587 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6588 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6589 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6590 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6591 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6592 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6597 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6598 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6599 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6600 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6601 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6602 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6603 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6606 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6607 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6608 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6609 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6610 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6611 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6614 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6615 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6616 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6617 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6618 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6619 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6620 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6629 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6630 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6631 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6632 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6638 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6639 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6640 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6641 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area C474 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6647 C2033 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6648 C3063 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6649 C3064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Cargo Area > Page 6650 C3323 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Transformer Capacitor 1 C174 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Transformer Capacitor 1 > Page 6655 C194 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6660 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6661 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6662 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6663 Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6664 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6665 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6666 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6669 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6670 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6671 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6672 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6673 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6674 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6675 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6676 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6677 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6678 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6679 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6680 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6681 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6682 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6683 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6684 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6685 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6688 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6689 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6690 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6691 Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6692 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6693 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6694 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Fuse Block: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6703 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6704 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6705 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6706 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6712 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6713 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6714 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6715 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6718 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6719 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6720 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6721 Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6722 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6723 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6724 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6727 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6728 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6729 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6730 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6731 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6732 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6733 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6734 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6735 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6736 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6737 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6738 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6739 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6740 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6741 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6742 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6743 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6744 Fuse Block: Connector Views C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6745 C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6746 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6747 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6748 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6749 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6750 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6753 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6754 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6755 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6756 Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6757 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6758 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6759 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6764 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6765 Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Ultra Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6766 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6770 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110-C934 C110 C126 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6775 C134 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6776 C139 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6777 C139 (Part 2) C140 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6778 C192 C210 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6779 C211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6780 C212 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6781 C212 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6782 C213 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6783 C213 (Part 2) C214 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6784 C215 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6785 C215 (Part 2) C260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6786 C263 C264 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6787 C265 C300 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6788 C311 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6789 C311 (Part 2) C312 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6790 C313 C314 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6791 C315 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6792 C316 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6793 C327 C328 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6794 C405 C406 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6795 C510 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6796 C510 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6797 C610 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6798 C610 (Part 2) C700 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6799 C800 C913 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6800 C919 C922 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6801 C925 C934 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6802 C4345 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6803 C4346 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6804 C224 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6805 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 C126 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6806 C134 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6807 C139 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6808 C139 (Part 2) C140 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6809 C192 C210 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6810 C211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6811 C212 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6812 C212 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6813 C213 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6814 C213 (Part 2) C214 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6815 C215 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6816 C215 (Part 2) C260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6817 C263 C264 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6818 C265 C300 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6819 C311 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6820 C311 (Part 2) C312 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6821 C313 C314 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6822 C315 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6823 C316 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6824 C327 C328 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6825 C405 C406 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6826 C510 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6827 C510 (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6828 C610 (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6829 C610 (Part 2) C700 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6830 C800 C913 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6831 C919 C922 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6832 C925 C934 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6833 C4345 C4346 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6834 C224 C223 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6835 C2199 C2365 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6836 C2200 C4133 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110-C934 > Page 6837 C3337 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality has been integrated into the SJB. - The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6841 configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB into the scan tool. 2. Remove the driver door scuff plate. 3. Disconnect the 6 electrical connectors. 4. Remove the harness pushpin from the SJB. 5. Remove the nut. 6. Lower the SJB (release the SJB from the 2 alignment holes). 7. Push the red lock upward and press the 2 black tangs inward to release the B+ connector from the SJB. 8. Remove the SJB. Installation 1. Install the B+ connector onto the SJB and push the red lock tab downward. 2. Position the 2 SJB alignment tabs into the 2 holes and install the nut. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Install the harness pushpin into the SJB. 4. Connect the 6 electrical connectors. 5. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the driver door scuff plate. 6. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D and B2477. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. - If the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure was not followed when a new SJB was installed, the remote keyless entry (RKE) function (from the integrated keyhead transmitter [IKT]) of the SJB must be programmed, or the IKT RKE functions will be inoperative. IKTs can be programmed to the new SJB by cycling each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. If a new instrument cluster was installed, the IKT keys must be programmed to the new instrument cluster in order to program both the RKE and passive anti-theft system (PATS) functions. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool to the new SJB. 7. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 8. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. Carry out the SJB on-demand self-test, clear DTCs, and then retrieve all DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6847 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6848 Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Ultra Micro ISO Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 6849 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6853 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality has been integrated into the SJB. - The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6857 configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB into the scan tool. 2. Remove the driver door scuff plate. 3. Disconnect the 6 electrical connectors. 4. Remove the harness pushpin from the SJB. 5. Remove the nut. 6. Lower the SJB (release the SJB from the 2 alignment holes). 7. Push the red lock upward and press the 2 black tangs inward to release the B+ connector from the SJB. 8. Remove the SJB. Installation 1. Install the B+ connector onto the SJB and push the red lock tab downward. 2. Position the 2 SJB alignment tabs into the 2 holes and install the nut. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Install the harness pushpin into the SJB. 4. Connect the 6 electrical connectors. 5. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the driver door scuff plate. 6. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and clears DTCs B106D and B2477. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB. - If the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure was not followed when a new SJB was installed, the remote keyless entry (RKE) function (from the integrated keyhead transmitter [IKT]) of the SJB must be programmed, or the IKT RKE functions will be inoperative. IKTs can be programmed to the new SJB by cycling each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. If a new instrument cluster was installed, the IKT keys must be programmed to the new instrument cluster in order to program both the RKE and passive anti-theft system (PATS) functions. Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool to the new SJB. 7. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 8. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. Carry out the SJB on-demand self-test, clear DTCs, and then retrieve all DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6862 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6863 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6864 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6865 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6866 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6867 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6868 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6871 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6872 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6873 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6874 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6875 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6876 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6879 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6880 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6881 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6882 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6883 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6884 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6885 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6890 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6891 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6892 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6893 Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6894 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6895 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6896 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6899 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6900 C2280B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6901 C2280C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6902 C2280D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6903 C2280E C2280F Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6904 C2280G Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6907 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6908 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6909 Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6910 Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6911 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6912 Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) / Power Distribution Box > Page 6913 Smart Junction Box (SJB) / Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6922 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6923 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6924 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6925 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set TSB 10-1-8 02/01/10 PCM - BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (BJB) - POSSIBLE MIL ON WITH MULTIPLE DTCS, NO CRANK/NO START, DRIVABILITY SYMPTOMS FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX This article supersedes TSB 7-16-5 to remove the production build date and TSB 7-17-9 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit concerns that results in no crank/start, buck/jerk, lack/loss of power and/or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. This could be caused by a poor fuse terminal fit, loose or unseated wire terminal connection at the Battery Junction Box (BJB) located near the battery under the hood. ACTION If loose and/or unseated wiring terminals for fuses and relays are found in the BJB, follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Disconnect the vehicle battery. 2. Open the BJB top cover. (Figure 1) 3. Check for loose fuse connections in the BJB at fuse positions 30, 31, 32, 33, and 34. If poor terminal fit is present, note those fuse cavities for Step 6. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6931 4. Remove all the mini fuses, relays and diodes (suggest taking a picture of the layout so install is easier). (Figure 2) a. Do not remove the cartridge fuses from the BJB. 5. Remove the light gray retainer that the devices were plugged through. This will expose the terminals within the plastic housing. (Figure 3) 6. Locate the terminal cavities identified in procedure Step 3 that require repair. The tuning forks will be off center in relation to the plastic cavities or open. 7. Insert a small flat blade screw driver/pick tool into the suspect tuning fork slot. The flat blade screw driver/pick tool width should be a maximum of 0.05" (1.25 mm) to provide access into the cavity. Tip dimensions were 0.04" x 0.04" (1 mm x 1 mm) with a 45 degree taper). 8. The small flat blade screw driver/pick tool should be inserted to the outside of the tuning fork leg between the tuning fork leg and the plastic wall of the housing cavity. (Figure 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6932 9. Pry the screw driver/pick tool against the plastic cavity wall and against the side of the tuning fork leg. This will move the tuning fork legs together, tuning fork legs should be close to touching. (Figure 5) 10. Next remove the BJB from the splash shield. (Figure 6) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6933 a. Tug on the underside wires to determine the unseated terminal location. (Figures 7 and 8) NOTE THIS MAY REQUIRE SOME LEVEL OF HARNESS REMOVAL FROM THE VEHICLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TO ADEQUATELY ACCESS THE LEADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BJB BLOCK. 11. Any circuits that do not offer any resistance during the tugging operation should be reseated using the Push-Click-Tug method. a. Push the terminal back into the cavity. b. Listen for an audible click to assure lock engagement. c. Tug on the lead to insure a proper seat occurred. 12. Once all the BJB circuits have been verified as seated, proceed to the next steps. 13. Install and lock the BJB block back into the splash shield. 14. Install the light gray retainer. 15. Reinstall all the mini fuses, relays and diodes back into their specific locations. a. Make sure all the relays are replaced in the proper orientation. 16. Close the BJB cover. 17. Reconnect the vehicle battery cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100108A 2007 Edge, MKX: Follow 0.6 Hr. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-1-8 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/No Crank/No Start/DTC's Set > Page 6934 The Service Procedure To Check For And Repair Loose/Unseated Wiring Terminals (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14290 X2 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 6944 Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 6945 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 6951 Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 6952 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6953 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-7-3 Date: 080414 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6954 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6955 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-7-3 Date: 080414 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6956 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6957 NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 6960 Ride Height Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 6961 Bushing Fastener Tightening Height Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 6962 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ride Height Bushing Fastener Tightening Height Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 6963 Alignment: Specifications Ride Height Bushing Fastener Tightening Height General Specifications General Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 6964 Ride Height Bushing Fastener Tightening Height Ball Joint Deflection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6965 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment Angles NOTE: When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when adjustments are made to the rear toe, the rear camber will also be adjusted (in the same direction as the toe adjustment). When making adjustments to the rear camber, the rear toe will also be adjusted (in the opposite direction of the camber adjustment). It will be necessary to check the rear camber whenever rear toe adjustments are made and to check the rear toe whenever rear camber adjustments are made. Front toe is adjusted through the use of adjustable tie-rod ends. Front camber is adjusted through the use of the upper strut plate. Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees. Front caster is not adjustable on the vehicle. Rear toe is adjusted through the use of adjustable toe link cams. Rear camber is adjusted through the use of a cam bolt that attaches the rear lower control arm to the rear subframe. Camber Negative and Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct affect on tire wear. Caster Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the ball joints when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. Toe Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6966 Positive Toe (Toe In) Negative Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability. Ride Height If there is a ride height concern, such as the front or rear of the vehicle being higher or lower than normal or an apparent lean, it should be corrected before aligning the vehicle. Any heavy items such as tool boxes, sample cases or any other items should be removed. If no unusual load is present, check for damaged components or nonstandard replacement suspension components. To measure ride height, the vehicle must be in a level, static ground position with full fluids and a full fuel tank. Front Ride Height (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6967 Front Ride Height (Part 2) Rear Ride Height Measurement Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Shimmy Shimmy, as observed by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and observed by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering is used to describe poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation, felt by the hands on the steering wheel, that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with hands off the steering wheel. ^ A vehicle-related drift/pull, on a flat road, will cause a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and require constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. ^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind, road crown). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 6968 Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Efforts may be said to be "flat on center." ^ Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. ^ In the diagnosis of a roadability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment - Front Alignment: Service and Repair Camber Adjustment - Front Camber Adjustment - Front NOTE: Front camber is adjusted through the use of the upper strut plate. Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees. 1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the camber. 2. Remove the 4 strut upper mounting plate nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs). 3. Using a suitable jack, raise the vehicle body enough to allow the front strut upper plate mounting studs to clear the frame. 4. NOTE: Rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees will change the camber +0.5 degrees. Rotate the upper mounting plate 180 degrees. 5. Recheck the front camber settings. 6. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment - Front > Page 6971 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment - Front Toe Adjustment - Front 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine OFF and, using a suitable steering wheel holding device, lock the steering wheel in the straight ahead position. 3. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the front toe. 4. Remove the steering gear bellows clamps. 5. Loosen the tie-rod jam nuts. 6. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the tie rod is rotated. Rotate the tie rods until the toe setting is within specifications. 7. Tighten the jam nuts to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamps. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment - Front > Page 6972 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment - Rear Toe Adjustment - Rear NOTE: When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when adjustments are made to the rear toe, the rear camber will also be adjusted (in the same direction as the toe adjustment). When making adjustments to the rear camber, the rear toe will also be adjusted (in the opposite direction of the camber adjustment). It will be necessary to check the rear camber whenever rear toe adjustments are made and to check the rear toe whenever rear camber adjustments are made. 1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the rear toe. 2. Loosen the toe link inboard bolt. 3. Rotate the toe link adjuster cam until the toe setting is within specifications. 4. CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the suspension must be at the bushing fastener tightening position. NOTE: Do not allow the toe link adjuster can to rotate while tightening the bolt. Tighten the toe link inboard bolt to 200 Nm (148 ft. lbs). 5. Recheck the rear toe and camber. ^ Adjust as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber Adjustment - Front > Page 6973 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber Adjustment - Rear Camber Adjustment - Rear CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the suspension must be at the bushing fastener tightening position. NOTE: When making rear alignment adjustments, it is important to know that when adjustments are made to the rear camber the rear toe will also be affected. Also when adjusting the rear toe, the rear camber will be affected. It will be necessary to check the rear toe whenever rear camber adjustments are made and to check the rear camber whenever rear toe adjustments are made. 1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the rear camber. 2. Loosen the lower arm cam bolt. 3. Rotate the camber adjustment bolt until the camber setting is within specifications. 4. CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners, the weight of the vehicle must be resting on the wheels and tires or incorrect clamp load and bushing damage may occure.. NOTE: Do not allow the camber cam adjuster to rotate while tightening the bolt. Tighten the lower arm cam bolt to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 5. Recheck the rear camber and toe. ^ Adjust as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6979 C1121 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 6982 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6986 C222 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6991 C222 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6996 6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. 8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. 10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Disassembly CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 6999 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. 4. Remove the sensor. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor can occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7000 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7001 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Disassembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7002 CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. 2. WARNING: The TPMS band is under tension. Always use safety goggles or a face shield and gloves when removing the TPMS band/strap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in this sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 inch) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers can damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7003 of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap is positioned in the lowest spot possible for correct sensor and cradle retention. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 inch) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7008 Removal CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7009 parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Remove the halfshaft nut, halfshaft hub seal and halfshaft washer. ^ Discard the nut, seal and washer. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the wheel speed sensor aside. 4. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 bolts and position the caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 5. Remove the brake disc. 6. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub. 7. Remove and discard the tie-rod end cotter pin and nut. 8. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the shock absorber lower nuts and flag bolts. ^ Discard the nuts and flag bolts. 10. Remove the lower ball joint bolt, nut and the wheel knuckle. ^ Discard the bolt and nut. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 2. Install the shock absorber lower nuts and flag bolts. ^ Tighten to 225 Nm (166 ft. lbs). 3. Position the tie-rod end and install the nut and cotter pin. ^ Tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). 4. Position the wheel speed sensor and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7010 5. Install the brake disc. 6. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 7. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 8. CAUTION: Do not tighten the halfshaft nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the halfshaft hub seal, washer and nut. ^ Tighten to 225 Nm (185 ft. lbs). 9. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 10. Check and if necessary, adjust the alignment. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Power Steering System Purging Special Tool(s) Material CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, premature power steering pump failure can result. The condition can occur on pre-delivery vehicles with evidence of aerated fluid or on vehicles that have had steering component repairs. 1. NOTE: A whine heard from the power steering pump can be caused by air in the system. The power steering purge procedure must be carried out prior to any component repair for which power steering noise complaints are accompanied by evidence of aerated fluid. Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap. Check the fluid. 2. Raise the front wheels off the floor. 3. Tightly insert the stopper of the vacuum pump into the reservoir. 4. Start the engine. 5. Install the vacuum pump, apply vacuum and maintain the maximum vacuum of 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg). 6. If equipped with Hydro-Boost(R), apply the brake pedal twice. 7. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than 3 to 5 seconds at a time. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop-to-stop 10 times. 8. Stop the engine. 9. Release the vacuum and remove the vacuum pump. 10. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill the reservoir. ^ Use approved transmission fluid. 11. Start the engine. 12. Install the vacuum pump. Apply and maintain the maximum vacuum of 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg). 13. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than 3 to 5 seconds at a time. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7015 Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop-to-stop 10 times. 14. Stop the engine, release the vacuum and remove the vacuum pump. 15. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill the reservoir as needed and install the reservoir cap. 16. Visually inspect the power steering system for leaks. 17. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill the reservoir as needed and visually inspect the power steering system for leaks. 18. Install the reservoir cap. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Motorcraft MERCON ATF Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ XT-2-QDX Ford Specification ................................................. ............................................................................................................................................ MERCON Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7019 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Power Steering Fluid Leak Test NOTE: This test should only be carried out if a leak in the system has not been detected during a thorough visual inspection. Refer to Inspection and Verification. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification 1. Check the power steering fluid level. If necessary, add the specified power steering fluid. 2. Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap and tightly install the evacuation cap to the power steering pump reservoir. 3. Install the hose from the fill adapter manifold tee to the evacuation cap on the power steering pump reservoir. 4. Install the vacuum pump to the evacuation cap. 5. Using the vacuum pump, apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg) of vacuum to the power steering system. 6. Observe the vacuum gauge for 30 seconds. If the vacuum gauge reading drops more than 3 kPa (0.88 in-Hg) a leak is present. 7. Remove the vacuum pump. 8. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for more than 3-5 seconds. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Start the engine. With the engine at idle, raise the power steering fluid temperature to 74-80°C (165-176°F) by rotating the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times. 9. Visually inspect the system for leaks. If a leak is evident, repair as necessary. If a leak is not evident, add the specified UV fluorescent tracer dye to the power steering fluid. Use 14.78 mL (1/2 oz) of dye solution for every 1.89 L (2 qt) of power steering fluid. 10. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops for more than 3-5 seconds. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Start the engine. With the engine at idle, raise the power steering fluid temperature to 74-80°C (165-176°F) by rotating the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times. 11. NOTE: On vehicles with rack and pinion steering gear, it may be necessary to remove the bellows boot clamp from the steering gear bellows boots to inspect for internal steering gear leaks. Using the special tool (UV lamp), inspect the system for traces of UV dye. Repair as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler Material Removal and Installation CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the power steering fluid from the power steering reservoir. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Release the clamps and disconnect the power steering hoses from the power steering fluid cooler. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7023 4. Remove the power steering fluid cooler-to-subframe bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 5. Remove the 2 power steering fluid cooler nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Material Removal and Installation CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the power steering fluid from the power steering fluid reservoir. 2. Remove the 2 power steering fluid reservoir nuts and lift the reservoir from the mounting studs. ^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 inch lbs). 3. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering return hose from the power steering fluid reservoir. 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering reservoir supply hose from the power steering pump. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7027 ^ Remove the reservoir. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7036 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7037 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7043 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7044 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Material Removal and Installation CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the power steering fluid from the power steering fluid reservoir. 3. Remove the 4 pushpin retainers and the RH splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose > Page 7047 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering fluid cooler hose from the return line. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the return line at the steering gear. 6. Remove the 2 power steering return hose bracket-to-subframe bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose > Page 7048 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose > Page 7049 Removal and Installation CAUTION: When repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the power steering fluid from the power steering fluid reservoir. 3. Remove the power steering pressure line banjo bolt and disconnect the line from the power steering gear. ^ Discard the 2 seals. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (44 ft. lbs). 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the steering gear. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the return line. 6. Remove the 3 power steering line bracket-to-steering gear bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 7. Remove the power steering pressure line banjo bolt and disconnect the line from the power steering pump. ^ Discard the 2 seals. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). 8. To install, reverse removal procedure. ^ Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7058 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7059 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7065 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7066 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7067 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7068 Removal and Installation CAUTION: While repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the power steering fluid from the power steering fluid reservoir. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Release the clamp and disconnect the power steering supply hose from the power steering pump. 4. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the power steering pressure line fitting banjo bolt and disconnect the line from the power steering pump. ^ Discard the 2 seals. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). 6. Remove the 3 power steering pump bolts and the power steering pump. ^ To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 7. CAUTION: New seals must be installed any time the power steering pressure line is disconnected from the power steering pump. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7073 C1121 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 7076 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SENSOR Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7080 C222 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7084 C222 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Depowering Procedure WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connector on a side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in side air curtain module deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the (SPDJB). 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 3. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7090 exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7091 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in safety canopy deployment, which may result in personal injury. - The safety belt pretensioners are pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in pretensioner or air bag deployment which may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories off. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7092 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. 9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the instrument panel (I/P). - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7093 10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the forward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the I/P. 12. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7094 14. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. MKX 16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH I/P finish panel. 17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the I/P. 18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7095 19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly. 20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket. 21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module. 22. CAUTION: Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the I/P and rest the module on the cross vehicle beam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7096 23. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag module. 25. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 26. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag module from the glove compartment opening. All vehicles 27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7097 29. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy module. 30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 31. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7098 32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB. 34. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation All vehicles 1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector to the seat cushion frame. 4. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7099 6. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. MKX 9. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7100 Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 10. NOTE: During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the hooks are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the I/P. Raise the rear of the passenger air bag module onto the 3 mounting studs. 11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts. 1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7101 13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly. 14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly. 15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the I/P. 16. NOTE: Make sure the RH I/P finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the RH I/P finish panel. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7102 17. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 18. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 19. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). All vehicles 20. Hook the glove compartment door to the I/P. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7103 21. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 22. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 25. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instructions may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will either: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair Steering Column Lock Module Steering Column Lock Module 1. Depower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 4. NOTE: The top of the instrument panel steering column cover is held in place by tabs that clip to the instrument panel. Remove the 2 instrument panel steering column cover screws. ^ Detach the instrument panel steering column cover by pulling straight outward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7107 5. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector and hose from the temperature sensor. ^ Remove the instrument panel steering column cover. 6. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passive anti-theft system (PATS) and ignition switch connectors. 8. NOTE: After cutting slots in the steering lock module bolts, clean all metal shavings and foreign material from the steering column. Using a suitable tool, cut slots into the heads of the 2 steering lock module bolts. 9. NOTE: The steering lock module bolts are designed to sheer off when tightened. Remove the 2 steering lock module bolts using a screwdriver. ^ Discard the steering lock module bolts. ^ To install, tighten the steering lock module bolts until the heads of the bolts shear off. 10. Remove the steering lock module clamp and the steering lock module assembly from the steering column. 11. NOTE: Align the locating tab on the steering lock module with the window of the steering column tube. Verify that the lock module operates correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 12. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Steering Gear: Customer Interest Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7116 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7117 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas TSB 07-25-14 12/24/07 POWER STEERING FLUID LEAKS FROM STEERING RACK AND PUMP ATTACHMENT JOINTS FORD: 2006-2008 Fusion 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007-2008 MKZ, MKX MERCURY: 2006-2008 Milan This article supersedes TSB 07-1-3 to update vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2006-2008 Fusion and Milan, 2006 Zephyr, 2007-2008 MKZ and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a small power steering fluid leak at the line attachment areas of the rack or the pump. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the banjo bolt and the two (2) sealing washers following Workshop Manual, Section 211-02 using the service kit. 2. One (1) kit is used for one (1) joint (either pump or gear). 3. Joint must be torqued with a hand torque wrench to: a. Fusion, Milan, Zephyr, and MKZ: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 41 lb-ft (55 N.m). b. Edge and MKX: (1) Pump 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). (2) Gear 35 lb-ft (47 N.m). NOTE THIS NEW BANJO BOLT HAS A HIGHER TORQUE RATING TO ACHIEVE A HIGHER CLAMP LOAD. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072514A 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.6 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7123 Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear Or Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514B 2006 Fusion, Milan, 0.7 Hr. Zephyr, 2007-2008 Fusion Milan 2.3L: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514C 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.6 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Power Steering Pump. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514D 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan 0.8 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514E 2007-2008 Fusion, Milan, 0.9 Hr. 3.0L, MKZ: Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514F 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.5 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers on The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, 3674A5) 072514G 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.6 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On The Steering Gear. Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 07-25-14 > Dec > 07 > Steering - Leaks From Steering Rack/Pump Areas > Page 7124 3674A5) 072514H 2007-2008 Edge, MKX: 0.7 Hr. Replace The Banjo Bolt And Sealing Washers On BOTH Steering Gear And The Power Steering Pump, Includes Time To Fill And Purge The P/S System (Do Not Use With 3719A 3674A5) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A705 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7125 Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection Steering Gear Grunt/Shudder Test 1. Start and run the vehicle to operating temperature. 2. Set engine idle speed to 1200 rpm. 3. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than 3 to 5 seconds at a time. Damage to the power steering pump will occur. Rotate the steering wheel to the RH stop, then turn the steering wheel 90 degrees back from that position. Slowly turn the steering wheel back and forth approximately 1/12 of a full turn. 4. Turn the steering wheel another 90 degrees. Slowly turn the steering wheel back and forth approximately 1/12 of a full turn. 5. Repeat the test with the power steering fluid at different temperatures. 6. If a light grunt is heard or a low (50-200 Hz) shudder is present, this is a normal steering system condition. 7. If a loud grunt is heard, or a strong shudder is felt, purge the power steering system. If a loud grunt or strong shudder still exists, check the power steering lines/hoses for restrictions or damage and repair as necessary. If the lines/hoses are OK, install a new steering gear. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7126 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Special Tool(s) Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7127 Removal CAUTION: When repairing the power steering system, care should be taken to prevent the entry of contaminants or premature failure of the power steering components can result. 1. Remove the stabilizer bar. 2. Remove the power steering pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt. ^ Discard the 2 seals. 3. Release the clamp and disconnect the return hose from the steering gear. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the steering gear heat shield. 5. Remove the 3 power steering pressure line-to-steering gear bracket bolts. 6. Remove and discard the 4 steering gear bolts. ^ Remove the steering gear. Installation 1. Position the steering gear and tighten the 4 steering gear bolts to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs) in the sequence shown. 2. CAUTION: New seals must be installed any time the power steering pressure line is disconnected from the power steering pump and/or the steering gear. Install the power steering pressure line-to-steering gear banjo bolt. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 3. Install the 3 power steering pressure line-to-steering gear bracket bolts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 4. Release the clamp and connect the return hose to the steering gear. 5. When installing a new steering gear, install a new steering gear turn tube heat wrap. 6. Install the steering gear heat shield and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs). 7. Install the stabilizer bar. 8. Fill the power steering system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 7136 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 7142 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel Switch, Left View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel Switch, Left > Page 7145 View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Switch, Left C2998 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Diagrams > Steering Wheel Switch, Left > Page 7148 C2999 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7149 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Removal and Installation 1. Position the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. ^ Remove the key. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 3. NOTE: Mark the steering wheel and column shaft for reference during installation. Remove the steering wheel nut. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 4. Disconnect the steering wheel switches electrical connector. 5. CAUTION: Do not remove the steering wheel by hitting the shaft with a hammer. Damage to the column can occur. Using a suitable puller, remove the steering wheel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7150 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Align the steering wheel using the reference mark. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod - Inner NOTE: Left side shown, right side similar. Tie Rod - Inner Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering gear. 2. Mark the pinion shaft and the steering gear housing for correct reference during installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7154 3. CAUTION: Position the steering gear in a soft-jaw vise or damage to the steering gear can occur. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut and remove the outer tie-rod end. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 4. NOTE: It is necessary to remove both bellows boots when removing the RH inner tie-rod end. Remove the 4 bellow clamps and the 2 steering gear bellows boots. 5. Using a suitable wrench, hold the piston shaft. 6. Using a suitable wrench, remove the inner tie-rod end. ^ To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 ft. lbs). 7. NOTE: Using a suitable wrench, hold the piston shaft while tightening the inner tie rod. NOTE: The new lock washer must be crimped after tightening the inner tie rod end. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection Lower ................................................................................................................................................... ......................................... 0-0.2 mm (0-0.08 inch) Upper ................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 inch) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7159 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection 1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings. Refer to Vehicle/Testing and Inspection. 2. Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position. 3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage. ^ If the ball joint or ball joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint. NOTE: Carry out Steps 4-6 to inspect the lower ball joints. 4. CAUTION: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire assembly or suspension components, while checking for relative movement. Suspension damage can occur. The use of tools or equipment will also create relative movement that may not exist when using hand force. Relative movement must be measured using hand force only. NOTE: To avoid lateral movement of the steering linkage and steering components, make sure to apply hand force only at the 12 o'clock and 6 o'clock positions of the wheel and tire assembly. Inspect the ball joints for relative movement by alternately pulling outward and pushing inward on the wheel and tire assembly, at the 12 o'clock and 6 o'clock positions, by hand. Note any relative movement between the wheel knuckle and both lower arms at the lower ball joints. ^ If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball joints are OK. Do not install new ball joints. ^ If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5. 5. NOTE: In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be aligned as close as possible with the center line of the lower ball joint. To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the lower arm and the wheel knuckle at the lower ball joint. 6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant alternately pulls outward and pushes inward on the wheel and tire assembly, at the 12 o'clock and 6 o'clock positions, by hand. ^ If the deflection exceeds the specification, install a new lower ball joint. ^ If the deflection meets the specification, continue with the procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Lower Arm Lower Arm Removal and Installation CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7164 parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link lower nut. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 3. Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut and bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 4. CAUTION: Do not tighten any suspension bushing fasteners until the installation procedure is complete and the weight of the vehicle is resting on the wheel and tire assemblies. Remove the lower arm-to-frame forward bolt and spacer. ^ Discard the bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the 2 lower arm-to-frame rearward bolts and remove the lower arm. ^ Discard the bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). 6. CAUTION: Do not tighten any suspension bushing fasteners until the installation procedure is complete and the weight of the vehicle is resting on the wheel and tire assemblies. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Check and if necessary, adjust the alignment. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7165 Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear Upper Arm Upper Arm Upper Arm Removal and Installation CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm. 3. Remove and discard the upper arm outboard bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 4. Carefully lower the lower arm and remove the jack. 5. Position the jackstand under the subframe. 6. NOTE: The upper arm inboard bolt cannot be removed without first lowering the subframe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7166 Remove and discard the 2 subframe bushing brace-to-body bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 7. Remove the subframe forward mounting nut. ^ To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 8. NOTE: The upper arm inboard bolt cannot be removed without first lowering the subframe. NOTE: The rear springs are under pressure. The jack must be lowered slowly while relieving the spring pressure. Remove the subframe rearward mounting nut and lower the jack. ^ To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 9. Remove and discard the upper arm inboard bolt and nut. ^ Remove the upper arm. ^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 10. CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Lower Arm Lower Arm Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7167 Lower Arm 1. Remove the spring. 2. Remove the cam adjuster nut, cam adjuster and cam bolt. ^ Discard the cam bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7171 Removal CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7172 parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Remove the halfshaft nut, halfshaft hub seal and halfshaft washer. ^ Discard the nut, seal and washer. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the wheel speed sensor aside. 4. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 bolts and position the caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 5. Remove the brake disc. 6. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub. 7. Remove and discard the tie-rod end cotter pin and nut. 8. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the shock absorber lower nuts and flag bolts. ^ Discard the nuts and flag bolts. 10. Remove the lower ball joint bolt, nut and the wheel knuckle. ^ Discard the bolt and nut. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint bolt and nut. ^ Tighten the nut to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 2. Install the shock absorber lower nuts and flag bolts. ^ Tighten to 225 Nm (166 ft. lbs). 3. Position the tie-rod end and install the nut and cotter pin. ^ Tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). 4. Position the wheel speed sensor and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7173 5. Install the brake disc. 6. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 7. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 8. CAUTION: Do not tighten the halfshaft nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the halfshaft hub seal, washer and nut. ^ Tighten to 225 Nm (185 ft. lbs). 9. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 10. Check and if necessary, adjust the alignment. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Knuckle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Rear Knuckle: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Knuckle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7182 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Knuckle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Rear Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Knuckle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7188 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7189 Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7190 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7191 Removal All vehicles CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the brake disc. 4. Disconnect the parking brake shoe retaining spring and remove the spring and brake shoe assembly. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the parking brake cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7192 6. Remove the nut and disconnect the stabilizer bar link and parking brake cable bracket from the wheel knuckle. ^ Discard the nut. 7. Remove the bolt, unclip the 2 retainers and position aside the wheel speed sensor. 8. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 9. Remove and discard the halfshaft nut. 10. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel bearing and wheel hub. All vehicles 11. Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7193 12. Remove and discard the lower shock bolt and nut. 13. Remove and discard the upper arm outboard bolt and nut. 14. Remove and discard the lower are outboard bolt and nut. 15. Remove and discard the toe link outboard bolt and nut. AWD vehicles 16. Position the halfshaft through the wheel knuckle opening and secure the halfshaft aside. All vehicles 17. Remove the 5 wheel knuckle bracket-to-frame bolts and the wheel knuckle. ^ Discard the bolts. Installation All vehicles CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 5 wheel knuckle bracket-to-frame bolts. ^ Tighten the bolts to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7194 AWD vehicles 2. Position the halfshaft into the wheel bearing and hub. All vehicles 3. Position the wheel knuckle onto the toe link and lower arm. 4. NOTE: Do not tighten the lower arm forward bolt at this time. Loosely install the lower arm forward bolt. 5. NOTE: Do not tighten the toe link forward bolt at this time. Loosely install the toe link forward bolt. 6. NOTE: Do not tighten the shock absorber lower bolt at this time. Loosely install the shock absorber lower bolt. 7. Using the jack, raise the suspension and install the upper arm outboard bolt and nut. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 8. If installing a new wheel knuckle, tighten the lower arm outboard bolt to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). ^ Loosen the bolt 180 degrees. ^ Tighten the bolt to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten the bolt an additional 90 degrees. 9. If installing the original wheel knuckle, tighten the lower arm outboard bolt to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten the bolt an additional 90 degrees. 10. Tighten the toe link outboard bolt to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 11. Tighten the shock absorber lower nut to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). AWD vehicles 12. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 13. Install the halfshaft nut. ^ Tighten to 225 Nm (166 ft. lbs). All vehicles 14. Install the brake hose bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7195 15. Position the wheel speed sensor, clip the 2 retainers to the upper arm and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 16. NOTE: The parking brake cable bracket is fastened to the wheel knuckle with the same bolt as the stabilizer bar link. Install the parking brake cable bracket and the stabilizer bar link to the wheel knuckle. ^ Tighten the bolt to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 17. Connect the parking brake cable and install the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 18. Install the parking brake shoe and retaining spring. 19. Install the brake disc. 20. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the anchor plate bolts. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 21. Install the wheel and tire assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle Alignment Link > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Knuckle Alignment Link: Service and Repair Toe Link Toe Link Removal and Installation CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove and discard the toe link inboard nut, cam adjuster and cam bolt. ^ To install, tighten the nut to 200 Nm (148 ft. lbs). 3. Remove and discard the toe link outboard bolt and nut then remove the toe link. ^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 4. CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Check and, if necessary, adjust the rear toe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7203 C222 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Spindle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spindle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Spindle: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Spindle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spindle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7212 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Spindle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spindle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Spindle: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Spindle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spindle: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7218 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Bar and Link Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7224 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7225 Removal and Installation CAUTION: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: If replacing only the stabilizer bar bushings, proceed to Step 23 of this procedure. All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the lower steering shaft coupler bolt and disconnect the coupler from the steering gear. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 3. Index-mark the relationship of the front subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. 4. Remove the RH fender splash shield. 5. Remove the 3 pushpin fasteners, the 7 screws and the front splash shield. 6. Remove the 3 RH front lower bumper-to-subframe nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 7. Remove the 3 LH front lower bumper-to-subframe nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). 8. Remove the power steering cooler hose bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7226 9. Loosen the Y-pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). 10. Remove the 2 nuts and separate the flex pipe from the Y-pipe assembly. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs). All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 11. Index-mark the driveshaft, remove the 4 bolts and position the driveshaft aside. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs). All vehicles 12. NOTE: Use the holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nuts. Remove the stabilizer link upper and lower nuts and the stabilizer links. ^ Discard the nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 13. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts (1 each side). ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7227 14. Using the special tool, separate the outer tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles. 15. NOTE: RH shown, LH similar. Remove the 2 lower ball joint bolts and nuts and separate the lower ball joints from the wheel knuckles. ^ Discard the bolts and nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 16. Remove the nut and the engine roll restrictor heat shield. ^ To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs). 17. Remove the engine roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 18. Using a suitable jack, support the subframe. ^ Support the subframe in the center rear area of the subframe. 19. NOTE: During installation, the subframe brackets are loosely installed with the support bracket bolts. Align the index marks made in Step 2, then tighten the rear subframe nuts prior to tightening the support bracket bolts. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets. ^ Discard the nuts and bolts. ^ To install, tighten the nuts to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). ^ To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs). 20. Remove and discard the 4 front subframe nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 21. Using the jack, lower the subframe approximately 76.2 mm (3 inch). 22. Remove the 4 bolts, 2 stabilizer bar brackets and bushings. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7228 ^ Discard the bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 ft. lbs). 23. Remove the stabilizer bar. 24. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 25. Check, and if necessary, adjust the alignment. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7229 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Bar and Link Stabilizer Bar and Link Removal and Installation CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link upper nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 3. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link lower nuts and remove the stabilizer bar links. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 4. Remove and discard the stabilizer bar bracket nuts and remove the stabilizer bar brackets and the stabilizer bar. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7230 5. Inspect the stabilizer bar bushings and install a new bushing(s) if necessary. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation Front Subframe: Description and Operation FRAME ASSEMBLY Front Subframe The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7235 Front Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Front Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7236 Subframe - Front (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7237 Subframe - Front (Part 2) CAUTION: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the front subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. 2. Remove the RH splash shield. 3. Remove the 3 pushpin fasteners, the 7 screws and the front splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7238 4. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the 3 power steering tube bracket bolts from the RH side of the subframe and position the power steering tube aside. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7239 7. NOTE: - Use the holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. - RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar link-to-control arm nuts (1 each side) and separate the stabilizer bar links from the lower control arms. Discard the nuts - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolts and separate the lower control arms from the knuckles. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 9. Loosen the Y-pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7240 10. Remove the 4 nuts and the Y-pipe assembly. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. NOTE: The steering gear is not removed with the front subframe and must be positioned aside. Position the steering gear aside using mechanic's wire. Remove the 4 bolts and position the steering rack aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten the steering gear bolts in the sequence shown. To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 12. Remove the 4 bolts and position the stabilizer bar aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7241 13. Remove the nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 14. Remove the 3 bolts from the roll restrictor bracket. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 15. Position the lift table under the subframe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7242 16. NOTE: - Align the front subframe index marks to the body index marks made during removal. - During installation, the subframe brackets are loosely installed with the support bracket bolts. Tighten the rear subframe nuts prior to tightening the support bracket bolts. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets. Discard the nuts and bolts. - To install, tighten the nuts to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 17. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). 18. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts and remove the subframe. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7243 19. Transfer the components as necessary. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation Rear Subframe: Description and Operation FRAME ASSEMBLY Rear Subframe The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the rear differential, if equipped. - provide a mounting surface for the sway bar. Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening concerns and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and body misalignment. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Rear REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Subframe - Rear Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7249 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Rear Subframe Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7250 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Rear Subframe (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7251 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Rear Subframe (Part 2) CAUTION: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. If equipped, remove the bolts from the drive shaft-to-rear drive unit flange. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 3. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the rear subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7252 4. Remove the muffler and tailpipe assembly. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH wheel speed sensor connectors. 6. NOTE: All wheel drive (AWD) shown, front wheel drive (FWD) similar. Remove the connector from the front of the subframe and position aside. 7. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the rear hub spindle-to-brake caliper. To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7253 8. Remove the 2 bolts (1 each side) from the brake hose bracket. 9. Position the brake calipers aside using mechanic's wire. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake lines. 10. Remove the 2 nuts (1 each side) from the parking brake cable bracket and upper stabilizer shaft. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 11. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the parking brake cable-to-backing plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7254 - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 12. Remove the rear shock-to-trailing link lower nuts and flag bolts. - Discard the nuts and flag bolts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 13. CAUTION: - The rear subframe must be secured to the lifting table. The rear subframe may become unstable and fall from the lifting table. - Position a jackstand under the front of the vehicle to keep the vehicle from becoming unstable on the hoist. Position the lifting table under the rear subframe. 14. Remove the 4 front (2 each side) bushing brace-to-body bolts. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7255 15. Remove the 2 front (1 each side) mounting nuts from the rear subframe. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 16. NOTE: The bolts are 2 different sizes, note the location of the bolts to make sure of correct installation. Remove the 10 bolts (5 each side) from the trailing links-to-vehicle body. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 17. NOTE: The rear springs are under pressure. The lifting table must be lowered slowly to relieve the spring pressure. Remove the 2 rear mounting nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7256 18. Remove the rear subframe. 19. Transfer the components as necessary. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7257 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Bushings - Rear Differential, Rear Subframe Bushings - Differential, Rear Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7258 Removal NOTE: There are 2 rear drive unit (RDU) bushings in the rear subframe, this procedure shows how to remove one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. 1. Remove the rear drive unit. 2. NOTE: - Make sure the 204-617/2 is positioned with the larger opening toward the bushing to act as the receiver cup. - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is pointed toward the rear subframe when removing the bushing. Assemble the special tools to the rear subframe and press out the bushing. Installation NOTE: There are 2 RDU bushings in the subframe, this procedure shows how to install one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 7259 1. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks on the special tool are aligned with the anti-rotation tabs on the RDU bushing. Install the RDU bushing into the special tool. 2. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks are correctly aligned on both special tools and the anti-rotation tabs are correctly seated in the special tool. Install the special tool onto the RDU bushing. 3. NOTE: - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is visible on the bottom and facing away from the subframe. The arrow must remain straight so that the bushings are correctly indexed into the subframe. - When installing the RDU bushing, 204-617/2 will fall away as the RDU bushing is installed into the subframe. The special tool does not control the depth of the bushing, continue to tighten the nut until the RDU bushing is fully seated into the subframe. Install the RDU bushing into the subframe. 4. Install the RDU. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement Spring Spring (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7264 Spring (Part 2) Removal and Installation All vehicles CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the brake disc. 4. Remove the nut and disconnect the stabilizer bar link and parking brake cable bracket from the wheel knuckle. ^ Discard the nut. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs). 5. Remove the bolt, unclip the 2 retainers from the upper arm and position aside the wheel speed sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). 6. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt and position the hose aside. ^ To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 inch lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7265 All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 7. Remove and discard the halfshaft nut. ^ To install, tighten to 275 (203 ft. lbs). 8. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the hub and bearing. All vehicles 9. Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm. 10. Remove and discard the lower shock nut and flag bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). 11. Remove and discard the upper arm outboard bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 12. Remove and discard the toe link outboard bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs). 13. Lower and remove the jackstand. AWD vehicles 14. Position the halfshaft through the wheel knuckle opening and secure the halfshaft aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7266 All vehicles 15. WARNING: The spring is under extreme compression, care must be taken at all times. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury. Position the jackstand under the lower arm. 16. Remove and discard the lower arm outboard bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). ^ Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 17. WARNING: The spring is under extreme compression, care must be taken at all times. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury. Pull outward on the wheel knuckle while lowering the jack stand and remove the spring. ^ Inspect the spring upper and lower seats, install new seats as necessary. 18. CAUTION: Before tightening any suspension bushing fasteners the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. NOTE: Use a suitable installation tool when installing the halfshaft into the wheel hub. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 19. If removed, position the spring lower seat into the lower arm aligning the recess in the seat with the projection on the lower arm. 20. On installation, position the spring onto the lower arm with the end of the spring 0-10 mm (0-0.39 inch) from the step on the spring seat. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7267 21. Check, and if necessary, align the vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7268 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly Disassembly WARNING: All vehicles are equipped with gas-pressurized shock absorbers which will extend unassisted. Do not apply heat or flame to the shock absorbers during removal or component servicing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: The spring is under extreme compression, care must be taken at all times. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The coil spring is coated with long-term corrosion protective paint. Do not damage the paint during component servicing. CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7269 2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Position the shock and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 3. Compress the spring enough to relieve the tension on the shock and spring assembly. 4. CAUTION: Do not use an impact wrench on the shock absorber rod nut. NOTE: Use the holding feature to prevent the shock absorber rod from turning while removing the nut. While holding the shock absorber rod, remove and discard the rod nut. 5. Remove the shock absorber assembly and spring lower seat. 6. Remove the dust boot and jounce bumper. 7. Remove the shock absorber upper mount and spring upper seat. 8. Carefully release the tension on the spring compressor and remove the spring. Assembly 1. Install the lower spring seat, jounce bumper and dust boot onto the shock absorber. 2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Position the shock and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 3. Install the spring, shock absorber upper mount and spring upper seat. 4. Align the arrow on the upper mount perpendicular to the center of the shock absorber lower mount. 5. Compress the spring enough to relieve the tension on the shock and spring assembly. 6. Position the end of spring within 0-10 mm (0-0.39 inch) of the upper spring mount. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7270 7. NOTE: Before tightening the shock absorber rod nut, position the end of the spring within 0-10 mm (0-0.39 inch) of the step on the lower spring mount. NOTE: Use the holding feature to prevent the shock absorber rod from turning while installing the nut. Install the shock absorber rod nut. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs). 8. Release the tension on the shock and spring assembly. 9. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 7279 Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 7280 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition TSB 08-7-3 04/14/08 PULL/DRIFT FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX This article supersedes TSB 07-7-6 to update the original TSB to add model years. No other changes made. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull concern that occurs even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment are within specifications, and the concern is not corrected by rotating the front tires left to right. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Verify that drift/pull is not being caused by concerns listed in Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 drift/pull diagnostics. If normal drift/pull WSM diagnostics/procedures do not resolve the concern then refer to the following service steps. NOTE THIS SERVICE PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE THE FRONT CROSS CAMBER (TOTAL/SPLIT) ALIGNMENT VALUE TO EXCEED THE SERVICE MANUAL SPECIFICATION OF 0.00 +/- 0.75 DEGREES. DO NOT EXCEED +/- 1.2 DEGREES OF CROSS CAMBER. For a Right Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the left strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 7286 Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the left front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) right front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the right wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. For a Left Drift/Pull 1. Inspect the right strut upper plate to verify which direction the arrow is pointing. (Figure 1) NOTE IF THE NOTCH IS VISIBLE IN THE ACCESS HOLE IN THE STRUT TOWER, THE PLATE HAS ALREADY BEEN ROTATED A POSITIVE 0.5 DEGREE. 2. If the arrow is pointing inboard, as seen through the access hole in Figure 1, no rotation is necessary (positive 0.5 degree camber already there). Continue with Step 4. 3. If the arrow is pointing outboard, increase positive camber approximately 0.5 degrees on the right front wheel by rotating the upper strut plate 180 degrees. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Camber Adjustment - Front. NOTE DISCONNECT THE FRONT STABILIZER BAR LINK AT THE LOWER CONTROL ARM SO THAT ENOUGH CLEARANCE CAN BE OBTAINED TO ROTATE THE UPPER STRUT MOUNT. REPLACE THE STABILIZER BAR LINK NUT ON REASSEMBLY. NOTE REPLACE THE FOUR (4) UPPER STRUT MOUNT NUTS. 4. Place vehicle on alignment rack. Remove and replace the two (2) left front shock absorber (strut) to wheel knuckle lower flag bolts and nuts but do not tighten. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 5. With full vehicle weight on the wheels allow the left wheel to increase negative camber and tighten both lower flag bolts and nuts to 166 lb-ft (225 N.m). The camber shift may vary between vehicles, but will typically be between a negative 0.2 and a negative 0.6 degrees of camber change. Refer to WSM, Section 204-01. 6. Reset front toe adjustment to proper specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00, Toe Adjustment - Front. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-7-3 > Apr > 08 > Steering/Suspension Vehicle Pull or Drift Condition > Page 7287 080703A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.4 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) 080703B 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.8 Hrs. Increase Positive Camber Following Service Procedure. Includes Inspect and Rotate Upper Strut Plate. (Do Not Use With 3001A, 3001A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding Sunroof / Moonroof Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding TSB 07-25-4 12/24/07 ROOF OPENING PANEL SLOW OR STICKING/BINDING OPERATION FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles equipped with a roof opening panel and built before 8/1/2007 may experience a roof opening panel operating slow or sticking. This may be caused by the roof opening panel guide tracks being out of specification. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove roof opening panel guide track mechanism following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-17. 2. Remove both ditch moldings and clip strips. (Figure 1) 3. Remove both side panel end caps. (Figure 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7293 4. Tape painted roof area next to panels to prevent damage to paint. (Figure 3) 5. Remove and discard both roof opening panel trims. CAUTION MAKE SURE THE CUTTING BLADES ARE CHANGED WHERE THE CUTTING DEPTH CHANGES TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE BODY OR GLASS. NOTE LUBRICATE THE URETHANE ADHESIVE WITH WATER TO AID THE SPECIAL TOOL WHEN CUTTING THE URETHANE ADHESIVE. a. Cut the urethane adhesive with a pneumatic knife and remove. (Figure 4) 6. Carefully mark the location of both idler tracks in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The new idler tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. Left hand shown, right hand similar. 7. Remove the six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws. (Figure 5) There is a special Replacement Screw available if a screw hole becomes stripped Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7294 during installation. For additional information, WSM, Section 501-17. 8. Completely loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws. The screws will be captured inside the track rail. In some cases it may be necessary to lift rails to completely remove screws from roof threads to allow idler track removal. (Figure 6) 9. Slide idler track rearward to disengage the idler track from the front clip. 10. Remove the idler track. 11. Remove the two (2) center screws from the idler track and install back into the roof opening module. Hand tighten the two (2) center screws. 12. Repeat Steps 6 through 10 for the opposite side idler track. 13. Trim urethane adhesive to 0.01" (0.5 mm) base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface. 14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening module surface. 15. Touch up scratches on roof opening module from cutting old panels off. Refer to WSM, Section 501-35 Restoring Corrosion Protection Following Repair. 16. Modify new idler tracks prior to installation. (Figure 7) a. Locate the screw head access in the new idler tracks. b. Measure and mark at the screw head access, 2 clearance slots on the inside edge of each new idler track, 1/2" (13 mm) wide and 3/16" (5 mm) deep. c. Cut slots using a small die grinder or equivalent. View shows after modification of a new idler track. (Figure 7) 17. Install the new idler tracks. a. Using slots, position new idler track into module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7295 18. Loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws and slide new idler track into proper position. Loosen screws only to allow idler track to slide, do not remove. 19. Install and tighten remaining six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 20. Tighten the two (2) center rear idler track to housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 21. Repeat Steps 16 through 19 for the opposite side idler track. 22. Install roof opening panel guide track mechanism following WSM, Section 501-17. NOTE DO NOT INSTALL ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIMS AT THIS TIME. 23. Test operation of roof opening panel and adjust as necessary. CAUTION WHEN INSTALLING URETHANE-INSTALLED PARTS, THE VEHICLE MUST NOT BE DRIVEN UNTIL THE URETHANE HAS CURED. ADEQUATE CURE TIME IS SPECIFIED ON THE DRIVE AWAY CHART FOR EACH URETHANE PRODUCT AS THE TEMPERATURES AND HUMIDITY VARY. INADEQUATE OR INCORRECT CURING CAN ADVERSELY AFFECT THE RETENTION OF THE TRIM PANEL . NOTE BE SURE TO USE THE SAME BRAND OF CURE-RATE PRODUCTS FOR THE ADHESIVE AND PRIMER. DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT BRANDS OF URETHANE AND PRIMER. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-17. 24. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification. (Figure 8) NOTE USE EITHER A HIGH-RATIO, ELECTRIC OR BATTERY-OPERATED CAULK GUN THAT WILL APPLY THE URETHANE WITH LESS EFFORT AND A CONTINUOUS BEAD. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7296 25. Apply a smooth continuous bead of urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. (Figure 9) 26. Insert the front of the trim panel into the front trim seal then rotate the rear of the side trim panel down to engage. Apply the side trim panel assembly to the roof module. (Figure 10) 27. Install both side panel end caps. 28. Install the clip strip and ditch moldings. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072504A 2007 Edge AWD, FWD, 6.0 Hrs. 2007 MKX AWD, FWD: Replace Roof Opening Panel Idler Tracks, Includes Time to Cut Slots in New Idler Tracks and Replace Roof Opening Panel Side Trim. Remove and Install ditch molding, Headliner, Pillar and Quarter Trim Panels, Roof Opening Panel Glass, Shade and Motor, Adjust Roof Panel Glass and Re-initialize Motor. (Do Not Use With 50282B, 51902A, 15790A, 04104A, 51916B, 31012A, 15790A, 14056D, 51916A, 50222A) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7297 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851070 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7303 4. Tape painted roof area next to panels to prevent damage to paint. (Figure 3) 5. Remove and discard both roof opening panel trims. CAUTION MAKE SURE THE CUTTING BLADES ARE CHANGED WHERE THE CUTTING DEPTH CHANGES TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE BODY OR GLASS. NOTE LUBRICATE THE URETHANE ADHESIVE WITH WATER TO AID THE SPECIAL TOOL WHEN CUTTING THE URETHANE ADHESIVE. a. Cut the urethane adhesive with a pneumatic knife and remove. (Figure 4) 6. Carefully mark the location of both idler tracks in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The new idler tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. Left hand shown, right hand similar. 7. Remove the six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws. (Figure 5) There is a special Replacement Screw available if a screw hole becomes stripped Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7304 during installation. For additional information, WSM, Section 501-17. 8. Completely loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws. The screws will be captured inside the track rail. In some cases it may be necessary to lift rails to completely remove screws from roof threads to allow idler track removal. (Figure 6) 9. Slide idler track rearward to disengage the idler track from the front clip. 10. Remove the idler track. 11. Remove the two (2) center screws from the idler track and install back into the roof opening module. Hand tighten the two (2) center screws. 12. Repeat Steps 6 through 10 for the opposite side idler track. 13. Trim urethane adhesive to 0.01" (0.5 mm) base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface. 14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening module surface. 15. Touch up scratches on roof opening module from cutting old panels off. Refer to WSM, Section 501-35 Restoring Corrosion Protection Following Repair. 16. Modify new idler tracks prior to installation. (Figure 7) a. Locate the screw head access in the new idler tracks. b. Measure and mark at the screw head access, 2 clearance slots on the inside edge of each new idler track, 1/2" (13 mm) wide and 3/16" (5 mm) deep. c. Cut slots using a small die grinder or equivalent. View shows after modification of a new idler track. (Figure 7) 17. Install the new idler tracks. a. Using slots, position new idler track into module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7305 18. Loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws and slide new idler track into proper position. Loosen screws only to allow idler track to slide, do not remove. 19. Install and tighten remaining six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 20. Tighten the two (2) center rear idler track to housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 21. Repeat Steps 16 through 19 for the opposite side idler track. 22. Install roof opening panel guide track mechanism following WSM, Section 501-17. NOTE DO NOT INSTALL ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIMS AT THIS TIME. 23. Test operation of roof opening panel and adjust as necessary. CAUTION WHEN INSTALLING URETHANE-INSTALLED PARTS, THE VEHICLE MUST NOT BE DRIVEN UNTIL THE URETHANE HAS CURED. ADEQUATE CURE TIME IS SPECIFIED ON THE DRIVE AWAY CHART FOR EACH URETHANE PRODUCT AS THE TEMPERATURES AND HUMIDITY VARY. INADEQUATE OR INCORRECT CURING CAN ADVERSELY AFFECT THE RETENTION OF THE TRIM PANEL . NOTE BE SURE TO USE THE SAME BRAND OF CURE-RATE PRODUCTS FOR THE ADHESIVE AND PRIMER. DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT BRANDS OF URETHANE AND PRIMER. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-17. 24. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification. (Figure 8) NOTE USE EITHER A HIGH-RATIO, ELECTRIC OR BATTERY-OPERATED CAULK GUN THAT WILL APPLY THE URETHANE WITH LESS EFFORT AND A CONTINUOUS BEAD. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7306 25. Apply a smooth continuous bead of urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. (Figure 9) 26. Insert the front of the trim panel into the front trim seal then rotate the rear of the side trim panel down to engage. Apply the side trim panel assembly to the roof module. (Figure 10) 27. Install both side panel end caps. 28. Install the clip strip and ditch moldings. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072504A 2007 Edge AWD, FWD, 6.0 Hrs. 2007 MKX AWD, FWD: Replace Roof Opening Panel Idler Tracks, Includes Time to Cut Slots in New Idler Tracks and Replace Roof Opening Panel Side Trim. Remove and Install ditch molding, Headliner, Pillar and Quarter Trim Panels, Roof Opening Panel Glass, Shade and Motor, Adjust Roof Panel Glass and Re-initialize Motor. (Do Not Use With 50282B, 51902A, 15790A, 04104A, 51916B, 31012A, 15790A, 14056D, 51916A, 50222A) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 7307 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851070 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Suspension Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly Removal and Installation CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7310 major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove and discard the 4 shock absorber upper mount nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs). 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the shock absorber lower nuts, flag bolts and the shock absorber and spring assembly. ^ Discard the nuts and flag bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 225 Nm (166 ft. lbs). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Check and if necessary, adjust the alignment. Rear Suspension Shock Absorber Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7311 CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. NOTE: The new shock absorber is shipped with a strap securing it in the compressed position. 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Trim Panel. 2. Remove and discard the shock absorber upper nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs). 3. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 4. Position a suitable jackstand under the lower arm. 5. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt, flagnut and shock absorber. ^ Discard the bolt and flagnut. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7312 6. CAUTION: Suspension bushing fasteners must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle resting on the wheel and tires. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7313 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly Disassembly WARNING: All vehicles are equipped with gas-pressurized shock absorbers which will extend unassisted. Do not apply heat or flame to the shock absorbers during removal or component servicing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: The spring is under extreme compression, care must be taken at all times. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The coil spring is coated with long-term corrosion protective paint. Do not damage the paint during component servicing. CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7314 2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Position the shock and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 3. Compress the spring enough to relieve the tension on the shock and spring assembly. 4. CAUTION: Do not use an impact wrench on the shock absorber rod nut. NOTE: Use the holding feature to prevent the shock absorber rod from turning while removing the nut. While holding the shock absorber rod, remove and discard the rod nut. 5. Remove the shock absorber assembly and spring lower seat. 6. Remove the dust boot and jounce bumper. 7. Remove the shock absorber upper mount and spring upper seat. 8. Carefully release the tension on the spring compressor and remove the spring. Assembly 1. Install the lower spring seat, jounce bumper and dust boot onto the shock absorber. 2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Position the shock and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 3. Install the spring, shock absorber upper mount and spring upper seat. 4. Align the arrow on the upper mount perpendicular to the center of the shock absorber lower mount. 5. Compress the spring enough to relieve the tension on the shock and spring assembly. 6. Position the end of spring within 0-10 mm (0-0.39 inch) of the upper spring mount. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7315 7. NOTE: Before tightening the shock absorber rod nut, position the end of the spring within 0-10 mm (0-0.39 inch) of the step on the lower spring mount. NOTE: Use the holding feature to prevent the shock absorber rod from turning while installing the nut. Install the shock absorber rod nut. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs). 8. Release the tension on the shock and spring assembly. 9. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7320 Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7321 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tool, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tool, press the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7322 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7323 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles Removal All vehicles CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the brake disc. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 4. Remove and discard the halfshaft nut. 5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the hub and bearing assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7324 All vehicles 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the wheel bearing and wheel hub. ^ Discard the bolts. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the wheel bearing and new wheel hub bolts. ^ Tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 2. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 3. Install the brake disc. AWD vehicles 4. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel bearing and wheel hub. 5. Install the halfshaft hub nut. ^ Tighten to 275 Nm (203 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut ........................................................................................................................... .............................................. 350 Nm (258 ft. lbs). Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7337 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7343 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: - Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just behind the front wheels. Position the jack so its lift area fits on the frame underneath the triangle. Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just in front of the rear wheels. Position the jack so its lift area fits on the frame underneath the triangle. LIFTING Lifting Points Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7348 CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the vehicle be lifted by the front control arms, front cross braces or rear control arms. Severe damage to the vehicle could result. - Do not allow the lift adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, front cross braces, stabilizer bar, or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the lift adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. 1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. 2. The front lifting points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just behind the front wheels. Position the hoist adapters directly under the frame rail with the triangle centered. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7349 3. The rear lifting points are identified by an upside down triangle on the rocker panel moulding just in front of the rear wheels. Position the hoist adapters directly under the frame rail with the triangle centered. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7354 6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. 8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. 10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Disassembly CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7357 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. 4. Remove the sensor. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor can occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7358 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7359 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Disassembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7360 CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. 2. WARNING: The TPMS band is under tension. Always use safety goggles or a face shield and gloves when removing the TPMS band/strap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in this sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 inch) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers can damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7361 of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap is positioned in the lowest spot possible for correct sensor and cradle retention. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 inch) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection TPMS Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. TPMS Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for this condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, perform this procedure to wake up the TPMS sensors. 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2 Adjust the air pressure in the LF tire (as necessary). 3 Activate the LF TPMS sensor, at least 2 times, using the tire pressure monitor activation tool. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5 If the TPMS indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures TPMS Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for these conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has received no signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7369 6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. 8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. 10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Disassembly CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7372 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. 4. Remove the sensor. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor can occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7373 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7374 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Disassembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7375 CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. 2. WARNING: The TPMS band is under tension. Always use safety goggles or a face shield and gloves when removing the TPMS band/strap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in this sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 inch) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers can damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7376 of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap is positioned in the lowest spot possible for correct sensor and cradle retention. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 inch) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds TSB 09-11-2 06/15/09 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEED BELOW 10 MPH (16 KM/H) FORD: 2007-2008 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 09-4-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Sport Trac, and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 1/28/2008 and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built prior to 8/18/2008 and equipped with 18 inch wheels may exhibit a noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace the wheel(s) that have the noise with updated service parts. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 7385 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft(R) Silicone Spray Lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) 4. Clean any excess lubricant off the wheel with a soft cloth. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091102A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 7386 MKX: Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning TSB 07-23-4 11/26/07 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEEDS BELOW 10 MPH (16KM/H) FORD: 2007 Edge 2007-2008 Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 07-19-6 to update the vehicle lines. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 8/17/2007 and 2007 Edge vehicles built prior to 8/24/2007 and equipped with 18" wheels may exhibit noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace wheel(s) with updated service parts for 18" Chrome (Bright) Clad Cast Aluminum wheel and Satin Clad Cast Aluminum wheel(s). Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 7391 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft Silicone Spray Lubricant and spray lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) NOTE NEW WHEELS WILL NOT REQUIRE LUBRICATION. 4. Clean any excess lubricate off the wheel with a soft cloth. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072304A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 7392 Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds TSB 09-11-2 06/15/09 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEED BELOW 10 MPH (16 KM/H) FORD: 2007-2008 Edge, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 09-4-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Sport Trac, and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 1/28/2008 and 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built prior to 8/18/2008 and equipped with 18 inch wheels may exhibit a noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace the wheel(s) that have the noise with updated service parts. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 7398 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft(R) Silicone Spray Lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) 4. Clean any excess lubricant off the wheel with a soft cloth. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091102A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-11-2 > Jun > 09 > Wheels/Tires - Popping/Snapping Noise At Low Speeds > Page 7399 MKX: Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 091102D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge, MKX: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning TSB 07-23-4 11/26/07 POPPING/SNAPPING NOISE - FRONT OR REAR 18 INCH WHEELS - TURNING AT SLOW SPEEDS BELOW 10 MPH (16KM/H) FORD: 2007 Edge 2007-2008 Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mountaineer This article supersedes TSB 07-19-6 to update the vehicle lines. ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Explorer, Explorer Sport Trac and Mountaineer vehicles built prior to 8/17/2007 and 2007 Edge vehicles built prior to 8/24/2007 and equipped with 18" wheels may exhibit noise coming from the front or rear wheel(s) while turning the steering wheel at speeds lower than 10 MPH (16 Km/h). The noise may be coming from the chrome cladding that attaches to the rim. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF THE SOURCE OF NOISE IS NOT FROM THE WHEEL, FOLLOW NORMAL WORKSHOP MANUAL PROCEDURES. 1. Verify the noise is coming from the wheel(s). 2. Replace wheel(s) with updated service parts for 18" Chrome (Bright) Clad Cast Aluminum wheel and Satin Clad Cast Aluminum wheel(s). Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 7404 3. Lubricate the remaining wheels at the outboard wheel flange, between the cladding and the wheel inter[ace. Use Motorcraft Silicone Spray Lubricant and spray lubricant with an extension nozzle. (Figures 1 and 2) NOTE NEW WHEELS WILL NOT REQUIRE LUBRICATION. 4. Clean any excess lubricate off the wheel with a soft cloth. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072304A 2007-2008 Explorer, 0.9 Hr. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace One Wheel and Lubricate Remaining Three Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS), And Balance Wheel Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304B 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.1 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Two Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Two Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304C 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.4 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 07-23-4 > Nov > 07 > Wheels/Tires - Popping Noise From Wheels When Turning > Page 7405 Replace Three Wheels and Lubricate Remaining Wheel. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, Balance And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) 072304D 2007-2008 Explorer, 1.6 Hrs. Explorer Sport Trac, Mountaineer, 2007 Edge: Replace Four Wheels. Includes Test Drive, Transfer TPMS, And Balance Wheel Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 68 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7410 Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, the wheel bearing must be replaced. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7411 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tool, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tool, press the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7412 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7413 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles Removal All vehicles CAUTION: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 anchor plate bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. ^ Support the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the brake disc. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 4. Remove and discard the halfshaft nut. 5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the hub and bearing assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7414 All vehicles 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the wheel bearing and wheel hub. ^ Discard the bolts. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the wheel bearing and new wheel hub bolts. ^ Tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs). 2. Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the 2 bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs). 3. Install the brake disc. AWD vehicles 4. Using a suitable installation tool, install the halfshaft into the wheel bearing and wheel hub. 5. Install the halfshaft hub nut. ^ Tighten to 275 Nm (203 ft. lbs). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut ........................................................................................................................... .............................................. 350 Nm (258 ft. lbs). Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7427 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area Dust Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area TSB 10-2-9 02/15/10 NOISE FROM REAR WHEEL HUB BEARING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 12/4/2008 FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX This article supersedes TSB 09-26-5 to update the Parts List. ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 12/4/2008 may exhibit a growl or howl type noise coming from the left and/or right rear wheel area. This could be the result of a faulty rear wheel hub bearing assembly. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If Workshop Manual (WSM) diagnostics identify a faulty rear wheel hub bearing, it will be necessary to replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly along with a new rear wheel hub bearing assembly. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 204-02, for rear wheel hub bearing and trailing arm/knuckle replacement. Only replace the rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly and rear bearing hub on the side with the concern. Failing to install a new rear suspension trailing arm/knuckle assembly when installing a new rear bearing hub assembly will result in premature bearing noise/wear. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.3 Hrs. FWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 1.5 Hrs. AWD: Replace ONE Rear Wheel Hub Bearing And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assembly 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.4 Hrs. FWD: Replace BOTH Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Dust Cover: > 10-2-9 > Feb > 10 > Drivetrain - Growl/Howl From Rear Hub Area > Page 7433 Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies 100209B 2007-2009 Edge, MKX 2.8 Hrs. AWD: Replace BOTH Rear Wheel Hub Bearings And Trailing Arm Knuckle Assemblies DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1104 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel lug nuts ............................................................................................................................................................. 135 Nm (100 ft. lbs) in a star pattern Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Studs Wheel Studs Removal 1. Remove the wheel hub. 2. Using a press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel bearing and hub assembly. Installation 1. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. 2. Using a press, install a new wheel stud. 3. Install the wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7439 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Studs Wheel Studs Removal 1. Remove the wheel bearing and wheel hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. ^ Discard the wheel stud. Installation 1. Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made by the original wheel stud. 2. Using a suitable press, install the wheel stud. 3. Install the wheel bearing and wheel hub. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver View 151-29 (Front HVAC) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 7446 View 151-29 (Front HVAC) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 7447 View 151-29 (Front HVAC) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 7448 View 151-29 (Front HVAC) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator C2278 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 7451 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Temperature Blend Door Actuator C2091 C2092 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 7452 C2363 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - DEFROST/PANEL/FLOOR DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: - The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the driver side of the instrument panel. - It is not required to install the new defrost/panel/floor mode door linkage parts included in the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator service part kit if only the mode door actuator requires replacement and the linkage parts are not broken or binding. Mode door actuator and linkage 1. Remove the 3 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws. 2. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 4. Manually operate, and inspect the defrost/panel/floor mode door linkage for incorrect placement or damage. Mode door actuator linkage only 5. Remove the mode door linkage. 1 Depress the tab and remove the panel door lever. 2 Remove the floor/defrost door intermediate lever screw and floor/defrost door intermediate lever. 3 Pull straight outward to remove the floor/defrost door lever. Mode door actuator and linkage 6. NOTE: When installing the mode door actuator, make sure that the panel door lever and floor/defrost intermediate lever are correctly aligned with the mode door actuator cam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7455 To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7456 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - AIR INLET DOOR Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7457 Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator Linkage Removal and Installation NOTE: It is not required to install the new air inlet door linkage parts included in the air inlet mode door actuator service part kit if only the mode door actuator requires replacement and the linkage parts are not broken or binding. Air inlet mode door actuator and linkage 1. Disconnect the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment. 2. Remove the glove compartment. 3. Remove the 3 air inlet mode door actuator screws. 4. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector. 5. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. 6. Manually operate and inspect the air inlet mode door and air inlet mode door linkage for incorrect placement or damage. Air inlet mode door linkage only 7. Remove the air inlet mode door intermediate lever screw. 8. Remove the air inlet mode door intermediate lever. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7458 9. Working through the air inlet duct grille opening, depress the clip and detach the air inlet mode door lever from the air inlet mode door. Air inlet mode door actuator and linkage 10. NOTE: The air inlet mode door must be fully seated in the correct position during installation. If the air inlet mode door is not fully seated, excessive noise will result when the climate control system is operated. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7459 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - LH Removal and Installation NOTE: It is not required to install the new LH temperature blend door linkage parts included in the LH temperature blend door actuator service part kit if only the temperature blend door actuator requires replacement and the linkage parts are not broken or binding. LH temperature blend door actuator and linkage 1. Remove the 2 lower steering column opening cover bolts. 2. Detach the lower steering column opening cover. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor aspirator hose and electrical connector. 4. Position the instrument panel wire harness away from the LH temperature blend door actuator. 5. Remove the 3 LH temperature blend door actuator screws. 6. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 7. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator. 8. Manually operate, and inspect the LH temperature blend door linkage for incorrect placement, binding or damage. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7460 LH temperature blend door linkage only 9. Detach the 2 retaining tabs and remove the LH temperature blend door linkage. LH temperature blend door actuator and linkage 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7461 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH, Dual-Zone EATC TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - RH, DUAL-ZONE EATC Removal and Installation NOTE: It is not required to install the new RH temperature blend door linkage parts included in the RH temperature blend door actuator service part kit if only the temperature blend door actuator requires replacement and the linkage parts are not broken or binding. RH temperature blend door actuator and linkage 1. Disconnect the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment. 2. Remove the glove compartment. 3. Remove the RH lower instrument panel insulator. 4. Remove the RH lower floor console trim panel. 5. Remove the 3 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. 6. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 7. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 7462 8. Manually operate, and inspect the RH temperature blend door linkage for incorrect placement, binding or damage. RH temperature blend door actuator linkage only 9. Detach the 2 retaining tabs and remove the RH temperature blend door linkage. All vehicles 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7471 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7472 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7478 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7479 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Duct Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Inlet Duct AIR INLET DUCT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the cabin air filter cover and the cabin air filter (if equipped) or air inlet screen (if equipped). 4. Remove the 5 fresh air inlet duct screws. 5. Detach the 4 fresh air inlet duct clips and remove the fresh air inlet duct. 6. Remove the 7 air inlet duct screws. 7. Remove the air inlet duct. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Duct > Page 7482 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Duct > Page 7483 Air Duct: Service and Repair Footwell Duct - Rear FOOTWELL DUCT - REAR Removal and Installation LH rear footwell duct only 1. Remove the LH front seat. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Remove the LH front door sill plate. 4. Remove the driver floor carpet pin-type retainers and position the carpet away from the LH rear footwell duct. 5. Remove the 5 LH rear footwell duct pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 7 floor console support bracket bolts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Inlet Duct > Page 7484 7. NOTE: The floor console support bracket will have to be repositioned to remove the LH rear footwell duct. Remove the LH rear footwell duct. RH rear footwell duct only 8. Remove the RH floor console side finish panel. 9. Remove the RH front seat. 10. Remove the RH front door sill plate. 11. Remove the passenger front floor carpet pin-type retainers and position the carpet away from the RH rear footwell duct. 12. Remove the 5 RH rear footwell duct pin-type retainers. 13. Remove the RH rear footwell duct. Both rear footwell ducts 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7493 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7494 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7500 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7501 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Driver and Passenger Side Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver and Passenger Side REGISTER - DRIVER AND PASSENGER SIDE Removal and Installation NOTE: Passenger side register shown, driver side similar. 1. CAUTION: Do not pry on the outer register trim bezel. The clips on the outer register trim bezel break if pried on to remove the register. Working through the register vein openings, insert a suitable hook shaped pick behind each of the 4 register clips while gently pulling the register rearward with the hook to disengage the clip. 2. Remove the driver or passenger side instrument panel register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Driver and Passenger Side > Page 7504 Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center REGISTER - CENTER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the 8 center register screws. 3. Remove the center registers. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7516 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7517 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7518 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7519 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7520 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7521 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7522 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7523 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7524 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7525 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7526 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7527 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7528 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7529 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7530 C288 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7531 Blower Motor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH lower instrument panel insulator. 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the 3 blower motor screws. 4. Remove the blower motor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7535 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7536 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7540 C2185 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7541 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR The blower motor switch varies the blower motor ground circuit resistance by adding or bypassing series resistance in the blower motor resistor. Increased resistance will lower the blower motor speed, and lowered resistance will increase blower motor speed. When the blower motor is in the HI position, the blower motor resistor is bypassed. The blower motor resistor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7542 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR Removal and Installation 1. For additional information, refer to Blower Motor Speed Control. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7546 C271 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7547 Blower Motor Switch: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH The blower motor switch is mounted in the EMTC module and controls blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the blower motor resistor in all modes except OFF. The blower motor switch knob is removable and can be separately replaced. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Removal and Installation 1. Detach the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment. 2. Remove the glove compartment. 3. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. 5. Remove the blower motor speed control. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control > Page 7550 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the climate control module. 2. Pull to remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control > Page 7551 4. Release the 2 retaining tabs with the index finger on each hand, while depressing the blower motor switch shaft with the thumbs to remove the blower motor switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations Air Inlet Duct Cabin Air Filter A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles.EMTC vehicles are not equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with a screen in place of the filter to prevent any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air filter or screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access cover. A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter, but only a screen or a filter should be used, never both. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 7555 Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation Air Distribution There are 2 sources of air available to the air distribution system. Outside air - Recirculated air Recirculated air is always used when the climate control assembly is set to the MAX A/C mode on vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) and can be selected in any mode except DEFROST. Vehicles equipped with dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) use recirculated air only when the RECIRC function is selected in any mode other than DEFROST, or when required by the HVAC module in the AUTOMATIC mode. RECIRC is a timed function when selected while operating in FLOOR or FLOOR/DEFROST mode, and will automatically default back to fresh air inlet in 5 minutes if operating with A/C ON at an ambient temperature below (50°F). When operating with A/C OFF, the RECIRC function will always default back to fresh air inlet in5minutes regardless of ambient temperature. Air distribution within the vehicle is determined by the airftow mode selected, or by the dual-zone RAYC system in the AUTOMATIC mode. The air distribution mode on vehicles equipped with dual-zone ~ATC can be ovemdden by the driver if desired. Airflow mode control doors are used to direct airflow within the heater core and evaporator core housing. Electric mode door actuators are used to position these airaow mode doors. Vehicles equipped with dual-zone EA.TQ use 2 separate temperature blend doors. This allows individual temperature settings to be selected for the RH and LH air outlets. The airfow mode doors are not partitioned for separate RH and LH airflow positions. Therefore, the airflow mode will always remain similar for the RH and LH sides of the vehicle regardless of the temperatures selected. Air enters the passenger compartment from the following outlets: Instrument panel registers - Floor duct outlets - Windshield defroster - Side window demisters - Rear footwell duct - Center console registers Passenger compartment air is exhausted from the vehicle through open windows or body air vents. Cabin Air Filter A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles.EMTC vehicles are not equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with a screen in place of the filter to prevent any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air filter or screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access cover. A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter, but only a screen or a filter should be used, never both. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 7556 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter A cabin air filter is available as standard equipment on dual-zone EATC vehicles.EMTC vehicles are not equipped from the factory with a cabin air filter, but are equipped with a screen in place of the filter to prevent any large foreign material from entering the heater core and evaporator core housing. The cabin air filter or screen can be accessed by removing the glove compartment and removing the cabin air filter access cover. A cabin air filter can be installed as a dealer accessory on vehicles not originally equipped with a filter, but only a screen or a filter should be used, never both. Air Inlet Duct Removal and Installation 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, 2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the cabin air filter cover and the cabin air filter (if equipped) or air inlet screen (if equipped) 4. Remove the 5 fresh air inlet duct screws. 5. Detach the 4 fresh air inlet duct clips and remove the fresh air inlet duct. 6. Remove the 7 air inlet duct screws. 7. Remove the air inlet duct. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7560 C233 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7561 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 lower steering column opening cover bolts. 2. Detach the lower steering column opening cover. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor aspirator hose. 4. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor electrical connector. 5. Release the 2 in-vehicle temperature sensor clips and remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 6. NOTE: The in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly can be accessed from below the driver side of the instrument panel. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams C100 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7569 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR) NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WACF) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7570 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7571 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation A/C CONDENSER NOTE: The A/C condenser for this vehicle is produced from the factory with a receiver/drier desiccant bag installed in the integrated receiver/drier. This receiver/drier desiccant bag may become contaminated with moisture if the A/C condenser is not installed for an extended period of time. Since it cannot be determined how much time has elapsed between production and installation of the unit as a service part, the receiver/drier desiccant bag must be removed and replaced with the separate receiver/drier desiccant bag, which is supplied together with the A/C condenser service part kit. The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled. The receiver/drier is incorporated onto the LH side of the A/C condenser. The receiver/drier desiccant bag is a separate component and can be separately removed and installed with the A/C condenser removed from the vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7575 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER CORE Removal and Installation NOTE: - The A/C condenser for this vehicle is produced from the factory with a receiver/drier desiccant bag installed in the integrated receiver/drier. This receiver/drier desiccant bag may become contaminated with moisture if the A/C condenser is not installed for an extended period of time. Since it cannot be determined how much time has elapsed between production and installation of the unit as a service part, the receiver/drier desiccant bag must be removed and replaced with the separate receiver/drier desiccant bag, which is supplied together with the A/C condenser service part kit. - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7576 seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL position it on a hoist. 3. Drain the engine coolant. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. 5. Remove the cooling fan. 6. Release the upper radiator hose clamp at the radiator and disconnect the hose. 7. Release the 2 radiator bracket clips from the radiator support and position the radiator rearward. 8. Release the 2 condenser lines from the clips at the radiator. 9. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting bolts and disconnect the fittings. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 10. Remove the 2 condenser bolts. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 11. NOTE: The condenser core must be removed from above the vehicle. Remove the condenser core. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 13. Fill the engine cooling system. 14. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7581 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7582 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7583 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7584 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7585 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7586 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7587 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7588 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7589 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7590 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7591 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7592 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7593 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7594 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7595 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7596 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7597 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Control Components Control Assembly: Description and Operation Control Components CONTROL COMPONENTS ELECTRONIC MANUAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL The electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) components are used to select the following: - Air inlet source (outside or recirculated) - Blower motor speed - Discharge air temperature (temperature blend) - Discharge air location (defrost, panel, floor) - A/C compressor operation Control System Inputs The EMTC system has 2 system control inputs. EMTC Module (Climate Control Module) The EMTC module integrates the temperature control, airflow mode selection, A/C request button, recirculated air request button and rear defog switch into a single unit. The temperature control selector setting determines air temperature. Movement of the temperature display from COOL (blue) to WARM (red) causes a corresponding movement of the temperature blend door and determines the discharge air temperature that the air distribution system will maintain. The temperature control selector is an integral part of the EMTC module and cannot be installed separately. The temperature selector knob is removable and can be separately replaced. The airflow mode setting determines air discharge location. Movement of the airflow mode selector causes a corresponding movement of the airflow mode doors and determines the air discharge location. The airflow mode selector is an integral part of the EMTC module and cannot be installed separately. The airflow mode selector knob is removable and can be separately replaced. The A/C request button determines A/C compressor operation, except when the airflow mode selector is in the OFF, MAX A/C or DEFROST mode. The A/C request button is an integral part of the EMTC module and cannot be installed separately. The recirculated air request button can select recirculated air in any mode except DEFROST, and fresh air in any mode except MAX A/C or OFF. The recirculated air request button is an integral part of the EMTC module and cannot be installed separately. The rear defog button signals activation of the heated backlight. The rear defog button is an integral part of the EMTC module and cannot be installed separately. Control System Outputs The EMTC system has 4 system outputs. Temperature Blend Door Actuator The temperature blend door actuator moves the temperature blend door on command from the EMTC module. The temperature blend door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the EMTC module from the contact wiper indicates the position of the temperature blend door. The EMTC module drives the actuator motor in whichever direction is necessary to make the actuator contact wiper voltage agree with the expected EMTC module contact wiper voltage value. Airflow Mode Door Actuator The airflow mode door actuator uses a cam and lever assembly to position the airflow mode doors on command from the EMTC module. The mode door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the EMTC module to monitor the position of the airflow mode doors. The potentiometer circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the EMTC module from the contact wiper indicates the position of the airflow mode doors. Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator The air inlet mode door actuator moves the air inlet door between the fresh and RECIRC positions on command from the EMTC module. The air inlet mode door actuator is driven to, and will automatically stop at, the full RECIRC or full fresh air inlet position and does not require a potentiometer circuit to monitor its position. ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL The dual-zone electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module analyzes input from the following major sources: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Control Components > Page 7600 - Temperature, airflow mode, blower, A/C and RECIRC selection (made by the vehicle occupants) - In-vehicle temperature sensor - Ambient temperature sensor - Solar radiation sensor - Evaporator temperature sensor - Vehicle speed - Engine coolant temperature Using these inputs, the dual-zone EATC module determines the correct conditions for the following outputs: - A/C compressor operation - Blower speed - Temperature blend door position - Airflow mode door position - Air inlet door position Control System Inputs The dual-zone EATC system has 4 control system inputs. EATC Module (Climate Control Module) The dual-zone EATC module provides an interface for the vehicle occupants to control the climate control system, or automatically controls the climate control system in the AUTO mode. The dual-zone EATC module has a vacuum fluorescent display for displaying set temperature, airflow direction, blower speed and diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). An on-board diagnostic (OBD) feature is incorporated to supply the technician with DTCs. These DTCs help direct the technician to the inoperative component. In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor The in-vehicle temperature sensor contains a thermistor, which measures the in-vehicle air temperature and sends that reading to the dual-zone EATC module. An aspirator hose is connected between the heater core and evaporator core housing and the in-vehicle temperature sensor. The aspirator hose uses airflow through the heater core and evaporator core housing to create a venturi-type suction to draw in-vehicle air through the in-vehicle temperature sensor (across the thermistor). Solar Radiation Sensor (Sunload Sensor) The solar radiation sensor supplies information to the dual-zone EATC module indicating sunload. Ambient Temperature Sensor The ambient temperature sensor signal is received by the dual-zone EATC module and indicates the outside air temperature. The ambient temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator on the radiator support bolster. The ambient temperature sensor signal is not the sole factor considered by the dual-zone EATC module for the outside air temperature display. Therefore, the ambient temperature PID monitored with a scan tool may not exactly match the dual-zone EATC module display. Control System Outputs The EATC system has 4 control system outputs. Blower Motor Speed Control The blower motor speed control controls the blower motor speed by converting low power signals from the dual-zone EATC module to a high current, variable ground feed for the blower motor. A delay function is used to provide a gradual increase or decrease in blower motor speed under all conditions. Temperature Blend Door Actuators The dual-zone EATC system uses 2 temperature blend door actuators to control 2 separate temperature blend doors. The temperature blend doors independently vary the LH side and RH side temperature settings, as desired. The temperature blend door actuators each contain a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the EATC module from the contact wiper indicates the position of the temperature blend door. The EATC module drives the actuator motor in whichever direction is necessary to make the actuator contact wiper voltage agree with the expected EATC module contact wiper voltage value. Airflow Mode Door Actuator The airflow mode door actuator uses a cam and lever assembly to position the airflow mode doors on command from the dual-zone EATC module. The mode door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the dual-zone EATC module to monitor the position of the airflow mode doors. The potentiometer circuit consists of a 5-volt reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground connected to the other. A signal return circuit is connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal returned to the dual-zone EATC module from the contact wiper indicates the position of the airflow mode doors. Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator The air inlet mode door actuator moves the air inlet door between the fresh and RECIRC positions on command from the dual-zone EATC module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Control Components > Page 7601 The air inlet mode door actuator is driven to, and will automatically stop at, the full RECIRC or full fresh air inlet position and does not require a potentiometer circuit to monitor its position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Control Components > Page 7602 Control Assembly: Description and Operation Heating and Ventilation HEATING AND VENTILATION The heating and ventilation system has the following features: - Controls the temperature and, during A/C operation, reduces the relative humidity of the air inside the vehicle. - Delivers heated or cooled air to maintain the vehicle interior temperature and comfort level. - Cooling or heating can be adjusted to maintain the desired temperature. - Uses a reheat method to provide conditioned air to the passenger compartment. - All airflow from the blower motor passes through the A/C evaporator core. - Temperature blending is controlled by the temperature blend door(s), which regulate(s) the amount of air that flows through and around the heater core, where it is then mixed and distributed. Heater Core The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core. Blower Motor The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the heater core and evaporator core housing where it is mixed and distributed. Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing The heater core and evaporator core housing directs airflow from the blower motor through the evaporator core and heater core. All airflow from the blower motor passes through the evaporator core. The airflow is then directed through or around the heater core by the temperature blend door(s). Vehicles equipped with dual-zone electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) use a partitioned heater core and evaporator core housing with 2 electric actuator-positioned temperature blend doors. This allows for separate temperatures to be selected for the driver and passenger sides of the passenger compartment. Manual systems use a single electric actuator-positioned temperature blend door to direct airflow through or around the heater core. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7607 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module C228A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7610 C228B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7611 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Manual Climate Control Module C2357A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7612 C2357B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7613 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the 4 climate control module screws. 3. Remove the climate control module. 4. NOTE: Be sure the climate control module spacers are correctly positioned before installing the climate control module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7622 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7623 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7629 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 7630 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7631 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation EVAPORATOR CORE NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin type and is located in the heater core and evaporator core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-29 (Front HVAC) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7635 C296 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporator Temperature Sensor Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR The evaporator temperature sensor contains a thermistor which receives a reference voltage from the dual-zone EATC or EMTC module. The thermistor then varies the resistance to the reference voltage based on the evaporator fin temperature. The resulting voltage is returned to the dual-zone EATC or EMTC module where it is interpreted as an evaporator fin temperature reading. The dual-zone EATC module or EMTC module maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by switching off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster when the evaporator temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels, and by switching on the A/C request when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. The evaporator temperature sensor electrical connector is located outside of the heater core and evaporator core housing near the accelerator pedal, with the sensor pigtail leading into the housing to the sensor probe which is inserted between the evaporator core fins. The evaporator temperature sensor is not available as a separate component. To install a new evaporator temperature sensor, a new heater core and evaporator core housing must be installed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporator Temperature Sensor > Page 7638 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improve defrost/demist performance, and reduce A/C clutch cycling. NOTE: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Expansion Valve: Description and Operation THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV) NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. The thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the center rear of the engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7642 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE Removal and Installation NOTE: - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts. 4. Remove the TXV. - Discard the O-ring seals. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 6. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7646 Removal and Installation NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be pressure leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Remove the 6 floor duct screws and the floor duct. 3. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal. 4. Remove the heater tube bracket screw and the heater tube bracket. 5. Remove the 5 fresh air inlet duct screws and the fresh air inlet duct. 6. Disconnect the wire harness from the plenum chamber. 7. Remove the 7 lower facing plenum chamber screws. 8. Orient the heater core and evaporator core housing with the plenum chamber upright. 9. Remove the upper facing plenum chamber screw. 10. Remove the 2 plenum chamber clips and remove the plenum chamber being careful not to allow the evaporator core to become dislodged from the installed position. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the heater core by the inlet and/or outlet tube to remove. Handling the heater core by the tubes may damage the joints and lead to failure of the heater core. Remove the heater core. 1 Grasp the heater core by the core-side of the heater tube connections and partially remove it from the plenum chamber. 2 Grasp the heater core by the top of the core and remove it from the plenum chamber. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7647 12. NOTE: It is not necessary to carry out this step if the evaporator core has not become dislodged from the installed position during this procedure. If the evaporator core has been moved at any point during heater core removal, remove the evaporator core, verify that the drain seal is installed in the correct position and install the evaporator core in the correct position. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 7652 NOTE: - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. - The compressor-to-condenser discharge line consists of 2 separately serviceable lines. If only one line is to be removed, only carry out the steps qualified for that line. Both compressor-to-condenser discharge lines 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 3. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Condenser side compressor-to-condenser discharge line 4. Remove the front bumper cover. 5. Drain the engine coolant. 6. Release the upper radiator hose clamp and disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator. 7. Remove the engine cooling fan. 8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector. 10. Detach the 2 radiator brackets from the core support and position the radiator rearward. 11. Remove the condenser inlet fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 12. Detach the compressor-to-condenser discharge line-to-radiator clip. 13. Remove the condenser side compressor-to-condenser discharge line. Compressor side compressor-to-condenser discharge line 14. Remove the drive belt from the A/C compressor pulley. 15. Disconnect the clutch field coil electrical connector. 16. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line bracket nut. 17. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 18. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. Both compressor-to-condenser discharge lines 19. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 20. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 7653 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Evaporator Line CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 7654 Removal and Installation NOTE: - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. - The condenser-to-evaporator line consists of 2 separately serviceable lines. If only one line is to be removed, only carry out the steps qualified for that line. Both condenser-to-evaporator lines 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the condenser-to-evaporator line spring lock coupling. - Discard the O-ring seals. Condenser-side condenser-to-evaporator line 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Drain the engine coolant. 5. Release the upper radiator hose clamp at the radiator and disconnect the hose. 6. Remove the engine cooling fan. 7. Remove the condenser-to-evaporator line bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Release the 2 radiator bracket clips from the radiator support and position the radiator rearward. 9. Remove the condenser outlet fitting bolt and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 10. Detach the condenser-to-evaporator line radiator clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 7655 11. Remove the condenser-side condenser-to-evaporator line. Evaporator-side condenser-to-evaporator line 12. Remove evaporator outlet line. 13. Remove the 3 coolant reservoir bolts and position the coolant reservoir aside. 14. Remove the 2 power steering reservoir nuts and position the reservoir aside. 15. Detach the 2 wire harness retainers at the RH shock tower. 16. Remove the ground bolt at the RH shock tower. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 7656 17. Disconnect the RH front wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 18. Detach the 2 condenser-to-evaporator line clips. 19. Remove the evaporator-side condenser-to-evaporator line. Both condenser-to-evaporator lines 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 21. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 7657 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line EVAPORATOR OUTLET LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the ground strap nut at the RH shock tower. 3. Remove the evaporator outlet line bracket stud bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Disconnect the evaporator outlet line spring lock coupling. - Discard the O-ring seals. 5. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 7658 8. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair HEATER CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7662 Removal and Installation NOTE: - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. - The O-ring seals used on this vehicle are not interchangeable with all similarly sized O-ring seals used on other Ford products. Use only the O-ring seals specified for this vehicle in the Ford master parts catalog. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the instrument panel. 4. Remove the 3 driver side carpet pin-type retainers and position the driver side front carpet aside. 5. Remove the 4 LH rear footwell duct pin-type retainers and the LH rear footwell duct. 6. Remove the 2 passenger front carpet pin-type retainers and position the passenger front carpet aside enough to access the 2 front pin-type retainers on the RH rear footwell duct. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7663 7. Remove the 2 front pin-type retainers on the RH rear footwell duct and detach the RH rear footwell duct from the heater core and evaporator core housing. 8. Release the 2 heater hose clamps at the heater core and disconnect the heater hoses. 9. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and detach the A/C lines from the TXV. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 10. CAUTION: The retaining clips on the plastic evaporator drain tube elbow will break if the elbow is removed from inside the vehicle. If the evaporator drain tube elbow must be removed, the retaining clips must be detached from below the vehicle. If the plastic evaporator drain tube elbow does not need to be removed, only detach the evaporator drain tube from the elbow. Disconnect the evaporator drain tube from the elbow at the floorpan. 11. Remove the 5 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 12. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals lubricated in clean PAG oil. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 14. Fill the engine coolant level. 15. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation RECEIVER/DRIER NOTE: - The A/C condenser for this vehicle is produced from the factory with a receiver/drier desiccant bag installed in the integrated receiver/drier. This receiver/drier desiccant bag may become contaminated with moisture if the A/C condenser is not installed for an extended period of time. Since it cannot be determined how much time has elapsed between production and installation of the unit as a service part, the receiver/drier desiccant bag must be removed and replaced with the separate receiver/drier desiccant bag, which is supplied together with the A/C condenser service part kit. - Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. The receiver/drier is integral to the A/C condenser. It stores high-pressure liquid refrigerant after it leaves the condenser core. A receiver/drier desiccant bag installed inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from the refrigerant. The receiver/drier desiccant bag is a separate component and can be separately removed and installed with the A/C condenser removed from the vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7667 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair DESICCANT BAG Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier desiccant bag is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier desiccant bag. 1. Remove the A/C condenser core. 2. Remove the receiver/drier plug. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. Using a suitable tool. Grasp and remove the receiver/drier desiccant bag. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seal on the new receiver/drier plug with clean PAG oil. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant and Capacity Capacity................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................0.55 kg (19 oz) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7672 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant and Capacity R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada).........................................................................................................WSH-M17B19-A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7673 Refrigerant: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DYE A fluorescent refrigerant system dye "wafer" is added to the receiver/drier desiccant bag to assist in refrigerant system leak diagnosis using a Rotunda approved ultraviolet blacklight. This fluorescent dye "wafer" will dissolve after about 30 minutes of continued A/C operation. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has been removed from the system. Additional refrigerant system dye should only be added if more than 50% of the refrigerant system lubricant capacity has been lost due to a fitting separation, hose rupture, etc. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant Lubricant and Capacity Capacity................................................................................................................................................ ...............................................................118 ml (4 oz) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7678 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Refrigerant Lubricant and Capacity PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D....................................................................................................................WSH-M1C231-B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7682 C1260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM will not allow the clutch to engage. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 7685 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System. Also, refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 7686 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 7687 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE (ACP) TRANSDUCER SENSOR A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Typical ACP Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7692 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7693 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7697 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR) NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WACF) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7698 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7699 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7704 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module C228A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7707 C228B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7708 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Manual Climate Control Module C2357A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module > Page 7709 C2357B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7710 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the 4 climate control module screws. 3. Remove the climate control module. 4. NOTE: Be sure the climate control module spacers are correctly positioned before installing the climate control module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7718 C271 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7719 Blower Motor Switch: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH The blower motor switch is mounted in the EMTC module and controls blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the blower motor resistor in all modes except OFF. The blower motor switch knob is removable and can be separately replaced. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Speed Control BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Removal and Installation 1. Detach the glove compartment damper from the glove compartment. 2. Remove the glove compartment. 3. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. 5. Remove the blower motor speed control. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control > Page 7722 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the climate control module. 2. Pull to remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch nut. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Speed Control > Page 7723 4. Release the 2 retaining tabs with the index finger on each hand, while depressing the blower motor switch shaft with the thumbs to remove the blower motor switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7727 C233 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7728 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 lower steering column opening cover bolts. 2. Detach the lower steering column opening cover. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor aspirator hose. 4. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor electrical connector. 5. Release the 2 in-vehicle temperature sensor clips and remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 6. NOTE: The in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly can be accessed from below the driver side of the instrument panel. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor hose and venturi assembly. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-29 (Front HVAC) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7732 C296 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporator Temperature Sensor Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR The evaporator temperature sensor contains a thermistor which receives a reference voltage from the dual-zone EATC or EMTC module. The thermistor then varies the resistance to the reference voltage based on the evaporator fin temperature. The resulting voltage is returned to the dual-zone EATC or EMTC module where it is interpreted as an evaporator fin temperature reading. The dual-zone EATC module or EMTC module maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by switching off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster when the evaporator temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels, and by switching on the A/C request when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. The evaporator temperature sensor electrical connector is located outside of the heater core and evaporator core housing near the accelerator pedal, with the sensor pigtail leading into the housing to the sensor probe which is inserted between the evaporator core fins. The evaporator temperature sensor is not available as a separate component. To install a new evaporator temperature sensor, a new heater core and evaporator core housing must be installed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporator Temperature Sensor > Page 7735 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improve defrost/demist performance, and reduce A/C clutch cycling. NOTE: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7739 C1260 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM will not allow the clutch to engage. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 7742 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System. Also, refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 7743 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Pressure Transducer > Page 7744 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE (ACP) TRANSDUCER SENSOR A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Typical ACP Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation SERVICE GAUGE PORT VALVES The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the compressor suction line. The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component. - Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports. - A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core can be installed if the seal leaks excessively. - The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and possibly violate vehicle safety standards. NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in various combinations depending on the impact event. NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate workshop manual procedures prior to carrying out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being installed. When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out. Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system 2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry out the OCS System Reset procedure as instructed in the workshop manual. Refer to the appropriate workshop manual for OCS system removal and installation procedure. When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module (OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following procedures for the specified system: - For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install new OCS system rails. - For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared. - NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM. For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed. All vehicles 3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred, repair or install new mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. 4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed. 5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System. 6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components: Steering column (deployable column if equipped) Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points Instrument panel braces and brackets Instrument panel and mounting points Seats and seat mounting points Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 7753 SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors 7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new components as needed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 7754 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After A Collision SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION 1. WARNING: All safety belt assemblies (including retractors, belt tension sensor [BTS] if equipped, buckles, shoulder belt height adjusters [if equipped], child safety seat tether attachments and attaching hardware) should be inspected after every collision. All new belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. Failure to follow these instructions could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity. Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See: Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Depowering Procedure WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connector on a side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in side air curtain module deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the (SPDJB). 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 3. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7760 exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7761 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in safety canopy deployment, which may result in personal injury. - The safety belt pretensioners are pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in pretensioner or air bag deployment which may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories off. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7762 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. 9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the instrument panel (I/P). - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7763 10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the forward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the I/P. 12. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7764 14. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. MKX 16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH I/P finish panel. 17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the I/P. 18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7765 19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly. 20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket. 21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module. 22. CAUTION: Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the I/P and rest the module on the cross vehicle beam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7766 23. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag module. 25. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 26. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag module from the glove compartment opening. All vehicles 27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7767 29. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy module. 30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 31. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7768 32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB. 34. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation All vehicles 1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector to the seat cushion frame. 4. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7769 6. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. MKX 9. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7770 Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 10. NOTE: During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the hooks are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the I/P. Raise the rear of the passenger air bag module onto the 3 mounting studs. 11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts. 1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7771 13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly. 14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly. 15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the I/P. 16. NOTE: Make sure the RH I/P finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the RH I/P finish panel. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7772 17. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 18. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 19. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). All vehicles 20. Hook the glove compartment door to the I/P. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7773 21. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 22. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 25. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instructions may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will either: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7778 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7779 Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7780 View 151-13 (Right Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7781 Air Bag: Locations Side Air Curtain Bag Module View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7782 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Air Bag Module Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module C256A C256B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 7785 Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module C3321 C3329 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 7786 Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Curtain Bag Module C9018 C9019 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7789 2. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 3. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons can occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7790 1. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons can occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 2. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 3. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7791 Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door face down. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7792 accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Open and lower the glove compartment door. - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. 3. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross-car beam bracket. 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the LH side deployment door clips. Then release the foreward-most clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). 5. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 6. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. 7. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7793 1. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 2. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 3. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. 5. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7794 Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module SAFETY CANOPY MODULE Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7795 Part 2 Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury from an accidental deployment, always carry or place a live safety canopy module with the safety canopy and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment. - Anytime the safety canopy has deployed, the headliner, and all A-, B-, C- and D-pillar upper trim panels and attaching hardware must be installed new along with any other damaged components and hardware. Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy deployment. - Vehicles equipped with safety canopy modules require a specific headliner. When installing a new headliner on a vehicle equipped with safety canopy modules, make sure a headliner for safety canopy modules is being used. The word AIRBAG will appear on the headliner Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7796 where it meets each B-pillar trim panel. Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment. - Before installing a safety canopy module, inspect the roof line for any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural integrity. All damaged fasteners must be installed new and any foreign material removed. Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy deployment. - Inspect the safety canopy before installation. If the safety canopy is damaged or the cover has separated and the canopy material has been exposed, a new safety canopy module must be installed. Do not attempt to repair the safety canopy module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment. - To reduce the risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the safety canopy module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment. - Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of the safety canopy module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the safety canopy module from deploying correctly. Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment. - Never probe the electrical connector on a safety canopy module. Doing so may result in safety canopy deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. - The safety canopy must be installed in the vehicle using new torque-prevailing type J-nuts (W709759, 11 per side). The use of this J-nut is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy deployment. NOTE: - The air bag warning indictor illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. CAUTION: Do not pull the safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the safety canopy module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector. 4. NOTE: Note the pin-type retainer on the safety canopy module front tether cord to the A-pillar sheet metal for installation. Remove the anchor bolt, then detach the pin-type retainer and the front tether cord anchor from the A-pillar. 5. Remove the safety canopy module front tether cord routing pin-type retainer from the A-pillar sheet metal. 6. Detach the 2 safety canopy module front tether cord A-pillar trim bracket routing pin-type retainers from the A-pillar trim bracket. 7. Remove the safety canopy module A-pillar trim bracket bolt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7797 8. Remove the safety canopy module front door opening bolt. 9. NOTE: Note the position and the routing of the safety canopy module rear tether cord and routing clip pin-type retainer for installation. Detach the safety canopy module rear tether cord routing clip pin-type retainer from the upper D-pillar sheet metal. 10. NOTE: Note the position of the safety canopy module rear tether anchor bracket hook and pin-type retainer in the D-pillar sheet metal. Remove the bolt, then detach the pin-type retainer and remove the safety canopy module rear tether anchor bracket from the D-pillar sheet metal. 11. Remove the safety canopy module rear door opening bolt. 12. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the C-pillar. 13. Remove the safety canopy module D-pillar bolt. 14. Remove the 2 safety canopy module rear bolts. 15. Remove the safety canopy module bolt near the B-pillar. 16. Remove the safety canopy module B-pillar pin-type retainer. 17. Move the safety canopy module forward to release the rear bracket hook from the sheet metal and remove the safety canopy module. Installation WARNING: - Before installing a safety canopy module, inspect the roof line for any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural integrity. All new fasteners must be installed if they are damaged and any foreign material removed. Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy deployment. - Inspect the safety canopy before installation. If the safety canopy is damaged or the cover has separated and the canopy material has been exposed, a new safety canopy module must be installed. Do not attempt to repair the safety canopy module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment. - Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of the safety canopy module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the safety canopy module from deploying correctly. Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy module deployment. - The safety canopy must be installed in the vehicle using new torque-prevailing type J-nuts (W709759, 11 per side). The use of this J-nut is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury in the event of a safety canopy deployment. 1. Remove the 4 front J-nuts and install new. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7798 2. Remove the 7 rear J-nuts and install new. 3. Position the safety canopy module by moving it rearward, installing the rear bracket hook in the sheet metal. 4. Install the safety canopy module B-pillar pin-type retainer. 5. Install the front tether cord anchor pin-type retainer. 6. Install the safety canopy module front tether cord routing pin-type retainer to the A-pillar sheet metal. 7. Attach the 2 safety canopy module front tether cord A-pillar trim bracket routing pin-type retainers to the A-pillar trim bracket. 8. Install the safety canopy module rear tether anchor bracket to the D-pillar sheet metal and attach the pin-type retainer. 9. Attach the safety canopy module rear tether cord routing clip pin-type retainer to the upper D-pillar sheet metal. 10. NOTE: Make sure all safety canopy module bolt holes line up with all J-nuts. Install the safety canopy module D-pillar bolt. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 11. Install the safety canopy module A-pillar trim bracket bolt. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. Install the safety canopy module bolt near the B-pillar. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 13. Install the 2 safety canopy module rear bolts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 14. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the C-pillar. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 15. Install the safety canopy module rear door opening bolt. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 16. Install the safety canopy module rear tether cord anchor bracket bolt. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 17. Install the safety canopy module front door opening bolt. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 18. Install the safety canopy module front tether cord anchor bolt. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7799 19. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 20. Install the headliner. 21. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7803 View 151-13 (Right Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7804 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams C310A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7805 C310B (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7806 C310B (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7807 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) operation. If a vehicle equipped with an SRS system has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, a new RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM is restored to its original condition. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7808 personal injury. CAUTION: - Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. If installing a new restraints control module (RCM), carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module installation (PMI). 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the floor console. 4. Disconnect the selector lever cable from the ball stud located on the shifter and remove the cable from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the inner floor console support bracket. 6. Remove the bolts from the inner floor console bracket support-to-instrument panel. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the front inner floor console support bracket. 8. Remove the inner floor console support bracket. 9. Press to release the locking tab and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7809 10. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 11. Remove the 3 bolts and the RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag RCM retaining bolts is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personal injury. Install the restraints control module (RCM) and the 3 bolts. Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 2. Make sure the large RCM connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. CAUTION: Placing the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical wiring connector into the RCM on an angle, may cause bad electrical connections and damaged components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - CAUTION: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the restraints control module (RCM), before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may cause component or connector damage. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7810 4. Connect the large RCM electrical connector. - Using the connector position assurance lever, pivot it toward the RCM, drawing the connector into the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Install the inner floor console support bracket. 7. Install the 4 bolts (2 each side) to the inner floor console support bracket. - Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 8. Install the screws to the inner floor console bracket support-to-floor instrument panel. - Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 9. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing. 10. NOTE: When installing the selector lever cable, make sure that the selector lever cable locking tabs are locked in place and the cable end is snapped onto the ball stud. Press the selector lever cable into the bracket and listen for the cable to click in place. Pull back on the selector lever cable to make sure that it is locked into the bracket. Also make sure that the selector lever cable end is correctly installed onto the ball stud. Pull back on the selector lever cable end to make sure that the cable end is correctly installed. Connect the selector lever cable end to the floor shifter. 11. Attach the electrical connectors to the front inner floor console support bracket. 12. Install the floor console. 13. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 14. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete programmable module installation (PMI). 15. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7811 Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is part of the hazard switch/traction control switch assembly. 1. Depower the system. 2. Pull out to release the 8 retaining clips and detach the instrument panel (I/P) center trim panel. 3. Disconnect the passenger air bag deactivation indicator electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7815 4. Release the 4 locking tabs (2 upper and 2 lower) on the passenger air bag deactivation indicator and remove it from the I/P center finish panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7819 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams C218A C218B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7823 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair CLOCKSPRING Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7824 operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Tilt the steering wheel in the downward position and lock the tilt handle. 3. Remove the driver air bag module. 4. CAUTION: Vehicles with absolute steering angle sensor and/or adaptive headlamps, do not allow the clockspring rotor to turn from the straight-ahead position after the steering wheel is removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Remove the steering wheel. 5. Tape the clockspring rotor to the steering column shaft to prevent the clockspring rotor from moving out of center. 6. Release the 2 tabs and position the upper steering column shroud upward. 7. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud. 8. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector. 9. Remove the tape from the clockspring rotor to the steering column shaft. Do not allow the clockspring rotor to move from center after tape is removed. 10. CAUTION: Vehicles with absolute steering angle sensor and/or adaptive headlamps, do not allow the clockspring rotor to turn from the straight-ahead position after the steering wheel is removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Vehicles with absolute steering angle sensor and/or adaptive headlamps, after the clockspring has been removed make sure the arrow on the absolute steering angle sensor ring is lined up with the arrow on the absolute steering angle sensor housing as shown. Remove the 2 clockspring screws and remove the clockspring. Installation Vehicle repairs reusing the same clockspring Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7825 1. WARNING: Incorrect centralization may result in premature component failure. If in doubt when centralizing the clockspring, repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. if the vehicle's clockspring has rotated out of center, follow these steps to center the clockspring. 1. Hold the clockspring outer housing stationary. 2. CAUTION: Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and can be broken from its internal connection. While turning the rotor counterclockwise, carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length and for a slight resistance. Stop turning at this point. 3. Turn the clockspring clockwise (approximately 2.25 turns) until the clockspring rotor wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position. Clockspring is now centered. Do not allow the rotor to turn from this position. All vehicles 2. NOTE: Slight rotation of the absolute steering angle sensor ring is allowed to align the 2 arrows. Make sure the sensor ring arrow is lined up with the absolute steering angle sensor housing arrow as shown. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7826 3. CAUTION: If the clockspring is left unattended by the technician between centralizing the clockspring and installing it to the multi-function switch housing, the centralizing procedure must be repeated. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Vehicles with absolute steering angle sensor and/or adaptive headlamps, slight rotation of the clockspring rotor might be needed to seat the clockspring 3 locator pins into the absolute steering angle sensor and or adaptive headlamps sensor ring. Very slight rotation is possible on a new clockspring with the sealing key installed. - Make sure the clockspring is fully seated into the multi-function switch housing before installing the clockspring screws. Install the clockspring and the 2 screws. 4. Connect the clockspring electrical connector. 5. Install the lower steering column shroud and the 3 screws. 6. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud. 7. CAUTION: If not installing a new clockspring, and the vehicle is left unattended by the technician between the installation of the clockspring to the multi-function switch housing and installing the steering wheel, the centralizing procedure can be repeated at this time with the clockspring being installed in the multi-function switch housing. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Install the steering wheel. If a new clockspring is being installed, and after the steering wheel installation, remove the clockspring sealing key. 8. Install the driver air bag module. 9. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Locations Front Impact Sensor View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7831 View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7832 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7833 View 151-13 (Right Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7834 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7835 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor C1465 C1466 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7838 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor C3209 C3211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7839 C3248 C3249 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged SRS components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The tightening torque of the front impact severity sensor retaining nuts is critical for correct system operation. Failure to Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7842 follow tightening instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure the hood latch bracket and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note position of the 2 locator tabs on sensor for installation. Remove the bolt and the front impact severity sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7843 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - B-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the front seat forward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7844 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the front door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 5 retaining clips. 4. Remove the rear door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 2 retaining clips. 5. Detach the 2 retainers and remove the lower B-Pillar trim panel. 6. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 7. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow tightening instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note the position of the side impact sensor locating tabs for installation. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7845 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - C-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Fold down the rear seat backrest. 2. Depower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 7846 3. Position aside the quarter trim panel. - Pull out on the quarter trim panel at the C-pillar to release the retaining clip to access the C-pillar side impact sensor. 4. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow tightening instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Note the position of the 2 side impact sensor locating tabs for installation. - Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7850 C3159 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE - MANUAL SEAT TRACK Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) module electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the OCS module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 6. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Testing and Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 7853 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 7854 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Module - Power Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE - POWER SEAT TRACK Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a restraints control module (RCM) fault. - The restraints control module (RCM) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Center and raise the front passenger seat to its highest position. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front passenger seat. 4. Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) module electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 screws and the OCS module. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Install the front passenger seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 7855 8. Repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 9. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure. See: Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 7860 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 7861 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 7862 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 C3324 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 7865 C3325 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 7866 C3330 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 7867 C3331 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7868 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) SYSTEM The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is standard equipment on all front passenger seats. For diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - MANUAL SEAT TRACK Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s) 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt anchor. 2. Depower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 3. Remove the front passenger seat. 4. Remove the manual seat track. 5. NOTE: After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat track. Mark the position of both seat track rails. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 6. Remove the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7871 7. NOTE: Outboard front cross brace screws shown, inboard similar. On the side with the affected OCS I-bolt(s), remove the 2 front cross brace screws. 8. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), disengage the seat adjuster handle spring and position it aside. 9. Separate the seat adjuster handle from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s). 10. NOTE: Outboard rear cross brace screws shown, inboard similar. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the 2 rear cross brace screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7872 11. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s). 12. Remove the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s) from the seat track rail. 13. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown. 14. NOTE: Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and retaining clip for installation. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt. 15. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7873 Installation All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 1. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring seal. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clips in the OCS weight sensor groove underneath the O-ring seal. 3. Unclamp the side plate with the installed OCS weight sensor bolt from the bench or table. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7874 4. NOTE: Slight rotational adjustment of the OCS weight sensors bolts may be necessary to install the OCS weight sensor bolts and side plate to the seat track rail. Install the side plate and OCS weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail. 5. NOTE: When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight sensor nuts must be installed. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail. Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft). 6. Install the seat adjuster handle to the seat track rail. 7. Engage the seat adjuster handle spring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7875 8. Install the 2 rear cross brace screws. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Install the 2 front cross brace screws. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 10. Install the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 11. Install the manual seat track. 12. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 13. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7876 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - POWER SEAT TRACK Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7877 Part 2 Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - If any occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt nuts are removed, new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts must be installed. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7878 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt anchor. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the passenger front seat. 4. Remove the power seat track. 5. NOTE: - Inboard seat track rail shown, outboard similar. - After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat track. Mark the position of both seat track rails. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 6. Remove the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 7. Remove the front retainer and the outboard seat track riser cover shield. 8. Remove the 2 retainers and the OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 9. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the nut from the seat track front cross brace. 10. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor(s). 11. NOTE: Outboard side shown, inboard similar. Separate the front seat track motor cable from the affected seat track rail. Then remove the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts from the seat track rail. 12. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7879 the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown. 13. NOTE: Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and retaining clip for installation. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt. 14. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. Installation All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 1. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring seal. Install the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip. 3. Remove the clamp and the side plate from the bench or table. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 7880 4. NOTE: Slight rotational adjustment of the front seat track motor cable and OCS weight sensor bolts may be necessary to install the OCS weight sensor bolts and side plate to the seat track rail. Install the front seat track motor cable to the seat track rail. Then install the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail. 5. NOTE: When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight sensor nuts must be installed. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail. Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Outboard side shown, inboard similar. Install the nut to the seat track front cross brace. Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 7. Install the 2 retainers and the OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. 8. Install the front retainer and the outboard seat track riser cover shield. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 9. Install the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 10. Install the power seat track. 11. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 12. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair SEAT POSITION SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Raise the driver seat and then position it to the middle of the track. 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the driver seat. 4. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. Power seats Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7884 5. Detach the wire harness routing pin-type retainer from the seat position sensor bracket. All seats 6. Push apart then inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. 7. Slide the seat position sensor rearward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the seat position sensor. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Side Air Bag: Description and Operation SEAT SIDE AIR BAGS The driver and passenger seat side air bags are attached to the seat backrest frame. If a seat side air bag deployment has occurred or for more information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7888 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair SIDE AIR BAG MODULE Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface may contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Side air bag modules with damaged covers must be installed new. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new side air bag module and bolts must be installed. The side air bag module bracket on the seat back Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7889 frame should be inspected and installed new if necessary. - When installing a new side air bag after deployment. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the affected seat and backrest fully up and forward. 2. Depower the system. 3. Release the seat backrest trim cover rear panel lower J-clip. Then, release the 2 seat backrest trim cover rear panel side J-clips. 4. NOTE: The reinforcement board and seat backrest trim cover rear panel can be positioned aside with the reinforcement board still inside the seat backrest trim cover rear panel. Detach the 2 pin-type retainers and position aside the seat backrest trim cover rear panel and reinforcement board. 5. Through the rear of the seat remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then, separate the side air bag module from the seat backrest. 6. CAUTION: Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the side air bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and the side air bag module. Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7890 1. CAUTION: - Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the electrical connector into the side air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the side air bag module electrical connector fully into the side air bag module and seat the locking button. 2. CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame. Damage to wire harness may occur. NOTE: When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed. Position the side air bag module in the seat backrest and install the 2 new bolts. Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. Position the seat backrest trim cover rear panel and attach the 2 pin-type retainers. 4. Attach the 2 seat backrest cover rear side J-clips. Then attach the seat backrest cover rear lower J-clip. 5. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7895 View 151-13 (Right Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7896 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams C310A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7897 C310B (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7898 C310B (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7899 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) operation. If a vehicle equipped with an SRS system has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, a new RCM must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM is restored to its original condition. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7900 personal injury. CAUTION: - Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), always make sure the correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. If installing a new restraints control module (RCM), carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module installation (PMI). 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the floor console. 4. Disconnect the selector lever cable from the ball stud located on the shifter and remove the cable from the retaining clips. 5. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the inner floor console support bracket. 6. Remove the bolts from the inner floor console bracket support-to-instrument panel. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the front inner floor console support bracket. 8. Remove the inner floor console support bracket. 9. Press to release the locking tab and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7901 10. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 11. Remove the 3 bolts and the RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag RCM retaining bolts is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personal injury. Install the restraints control module (RCM) and the 3 bolts. Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 2. Make sure the large RCM connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. CAUTION: Placing the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical wiring connector into the RCM on an angle, may cause bad electrical connections and damaged components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - CAUTION: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the restraints control module (RCM), before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may cause component or connector damage. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7902 4. Connect the large RCM electrical connector. - Using the connector position assurance lever, pivot it toward the RCM, drawing the connector into the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Install the inner floor console support bracket. 7. Install the 4 bolts (2 each side) to the inner floor console support bracket. - Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 8. Install the screws to the inner floor console bracket support-to-floor instrument panel. - Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 9. Install the selector lever cable in the selector lever housing. 10. NOTE: When installing the selector lever cable, make sure that the selector lever cable locking tabs are locked in place and the cable end is snapped onto the ball stud. Press the selector lever cable into the bracket and listen for the cable to click in place. Pull back on the selector lever cable to make sure that it is locked into the bracket. Also make sure that the selector lever cable end is correctly installed onto the ball stud. Pull back on the selector lever cable end to make sure that the cable end is correctly installed. Connect the selector lever cable end to the floor shifter. 11. Attach the electrical connectors to the front inner floor console support bracket. 12. Install the floor console. 13. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 14. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete programmable module installation (PMI). 15. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7903 Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7907 C3159 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE - MANUAL SEAT TRACK Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) module electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the OCS module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 6. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 7910 and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 7911 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Module - Power Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE - POWER SEAT TRACK Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a restraints control module (RCM) fault. - The restraints control module (RCM) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Center and raise the front passenger seat to its highest position. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front passenger seat. 4. Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) module electrical connector. 5. Remove the 2 screws and the OCS module. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Install the front passenger seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Module - Manual Seat Track > Page 7912 8. Repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 9. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Depowering Procedure WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connector on a side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in side air curtain module deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the (SPDJB). 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 3. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7918 exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7919 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in safety canopy deployment, which may result in personal injury. - The safety belt pretensioners are pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in pretensioner or air bag deployment which may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories off. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7920 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. 9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the instrument panel (I/P). - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7921 10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the forward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the I/P. 12. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7922 14. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. MKX 16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH I/P finish panel. 17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the I/P. 18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7923 19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly. 20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket. 21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module. 22. CAUTION: Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the I/P and rest the module on the cross vehicle beam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7924 23. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag module. 25. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 26. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag module from the glove compartment opening. All vehicles 27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7925 29. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy module. 30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 31. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7926 32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB. 34. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation All vehicles 1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector to the seat cushion frame. 4. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7927 6. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. MKX 9. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7928 Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 10. NOTE: During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the hooks are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the I/P. Raise the rear of the passenger air bag module onto the 3 mounting studs. 11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts. 1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7929 13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly. 14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly. 15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the I/P. 16. NOTE: Make sure the RH I/P finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the RH I/P finish panel. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7930 17. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 18. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 19. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). All vehicles 20. Hook the glove compartment door to the I/P. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7931 21. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 22. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 25. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instructions may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will either: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Child Safety Seat Tether Anchors WARNING: The child safety seat tether anchor/bolt MUST be securely tightened to specification. Otherwise, the child safety seat may not be correctly secured and the child could be injured if the vehicle is involved in a collision or stops suddenly. If the child safety seat tether anchors were in use during a collision, inspect and install new anchors as necessary. Return the vehicle structure to its original production configuration. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) The lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system is a standardized and uniform attachment system for installing child safety seats in passenger vehicles. LATCH-equipped child safety seats have 2 lower attachments that connect to the vehicle portion of the LATCH system. The vehicle portion of the system consists of 2 attachment points (6-mm wires) welded to the 60 percent and the 40 percent rear seat backrest frame. The attachment points protrude from the biteline between the seat cushion and seat backrest. If a child safety seat was in use during a collision, inspect the vehicle portion of the system for damage. If any of the attachment points (6-mm wires) are damaged, install a new seat backrest frame. Refer to Seats. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT EXTENSION ASSEMBLY In certain cases, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. About 20 cm (8 in) can be added to the belt length by using a safety belt extension. Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer parts department. Safety belt extensions are only available with black webbing. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use an extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation REAR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE The 40 percent and or 60 percent rear safety belt buckles are serviced with the 40 percent and or 60 percent rear seat backrest frame assembly. The LH rear safety belt buckle is serviced with the rear center safety belt retractor assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER Removal and Installation WARNING: - All safety belt assemblies (including retractors, belt tension sensors [BTS] if equipped, buckles, shoulder belt height adjusters [if equipped], child safety seat tether attachments and attaching hardware) should be inspected after any collision. All new belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. The automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child safety seat is functioning correctly, in addition to other checks for correct safety belt system function. A new belt and retractor assembly must be installed if the safety belt assembly's ALR feature, or any other safety belt function, is not operating correctly when inspected according to the functional inspection procedures. Failure to install a new belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7944 - The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in serious personal injury. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Position the seat all the way up and back. 3. NOTE: Note the position of the safety belt buckle pretensioner anti-rotation locator tab for installation. From the rear of the seat, remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner nut. Vehicles with a manual driver seat, remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner bolt. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Position the safety belt buckle pretensioner towards the front of the vehicle to access the electrical connectors. Seats with power 5. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner cover. All seats 6. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 1. Disconnect the safety belt buckle pretensioner buckle switch electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 3. Cut the tie strap and remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedures. 8. Repower the SRS. 9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7945 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear SAFETY BELT BUCKLE - REAR 1. The 40 percent and or 60 percent rear safety belt buckles are serviced with the 40 percent and or 60 percent rear seat backrest frames respectfully. The LH rear safety belt buckle is serviced with the rear center safety belt retractor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 7950 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver C3065 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 7953 C3066 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER Removal and Installation WARNING: All safety belt assemblies (including retractors, belt tension sensors [BTS] if equipped, buckles, shoulder belt height adjusters [if equipped], child safety seat tether attachments and attaching hardware) should be inspected after any collision. All new belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. The automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child safety seat is functioning correctly, in addition to other checks for correct safety belt system function. A new belt and retractor assembly must be installed if the safety belt assembly's ALR feature, or any other safety belt function, is not operating correctly when inspected according to the functional inspection procedures. Failure to install a new belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. 1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Set the safety belt shoulder height adjuster to the lowest level. 3. Remove safety belt shoulder height adjuster bolt. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: The safety belt shoulder height adjuster must be oriented horizontally to allow the T-tab through the sheet metal mounting hole. Rotate and remove the height adjuster. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7957 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime The warning indicator and chime are reminders to fasten the safety belt. The system operates as follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition key is turned to the RUN or START position, the indicator will illuminate for 1 to 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4 to 8 seconds. - If the safety belt is buckled while the indicator is on and the chime is sounding, the indicator and warning chime turn off. - If the safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON position, neither the indicator nor the chime will turn on. Belt-Minder(R) The Belt-Minder(R) feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides an additional reminder that the driver's and/or front passenger's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. To activate or deactivate the Belt-Minder(R) feature, refer to Seat Belt Systems or the Owner's Literature. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Dual Locking Mode Retractors WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at all outboard seating positions (except driver, which has no automatic locking retractor [ALR] feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for child seats is still functioning correctly, in addition to other checks for correct safety belt system function. A new belt and retractor assembly must be installed if the safety belt assembly's ALR feature, or any other safety belt function, is not operating correctly when checked according to the procedures. Failure to install a new belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. NOTE: When installing a new dual locking mode retractor, the retractor should be checked to make sure it is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode after installation in the stowed position. All outboard continuous-loop, 3-point retractor systems, except the driver position, are equipped with the dual locking mode system. The emergency locking retractor (ELR) mode will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering, or an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph). The ELR mode helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. The ELR mode is continuously in operation at all seating positions. The ALR portion of this system does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position or when a tight belt fit is desired. The ALR mode is disengaged when the webbing is free to move in or out of the retractor. The ALR mode is automatically engaged when the webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then allowed to retract. As the webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking sound is made, indicating that the retractor is in ALR mode. The ALR mode is automatically disengaged when most of the webbing is retracted back onto the spool. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front or rear passenger seating positions where dual locking mode retractors are provided. Energy Management Retractor This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. The energy management retractor feature is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on an occupant's chest. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor - Front Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Front SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR - FRONT Removal and Installation WARNING: All safety belt assemblies (including retractors, belt tension sensors [BTS] if equipped, buckles, shoulder belt height adjusters [if equipped], child safety seat tether attachments and attaching hardware) should be inspected after any collision. All new belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor - Front > Page 7966 The automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child safety seat is functioning correctly, in addition to other checks for correct safety belt system function. A new belt and retractor assembly must be installed if the safety belt assembly's ALR feature, or any other safety belt function, is not operating correctly when inspected according to the functional inspection procedures. Failure to install a new belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. 1. Position the front seat forward. 2. Remove the front door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 5 retaining clips. 3. Remove the rear door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 2 retaining clips. 4. Detach the 2 clips and remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. 5. NOTE: Inspect the front safety belt retractor D-ring cover for damage. If the front safety belt retractor D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the front safety belt retractor D-ring cover. 6. Remove the bolt and the front safety belt retractor D-ring. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. Remove the front safety belt retractor anchor nut cover from the seat. 8. NOTE: Note the position of the front safety belt retractor anchor and the anti-rotation pin on the seat for installation. Remove the nut and the front safety belt retractor anchor. To install, tighten to 47 Nm (34 lb-ft). 9. NOTE: Note the position of the front safety belt retractor locator T-tab in the B-pillar sheet metal for installation. Remove the bolt and the front safety belt retractor. To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor - Front > Page 7967 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR - REAR, CENTER Removal and Installation WARNING: All safety belt assemblies (including retractors, belt tension sensors [BTS] if equipped, buckles, shoulder belt height adjusters [if equipped], child safety seat tether attachments and attaching hardware) should be inspected after any collision. All new belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. The automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child safety seat is functioning correctly, in addition to other checks for correct safety belt system function. A new belt and retractor assembly must be installed if the safety belt assembly's ALR feature, or any other safety belt function, is not operating correctly when inspected according to the functional inspection procedures. Failure to install a new belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. 1. Remove the rear 60 percent seat backrest trim cover. 2. Remove the rear seat backrest foam pad. 3. Remove the rear center safety belt retractor nut. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 4. Detach the pin-type retainer on the rear center safety belt retractor sleeve from the seat backrest frame. 5. Route the safety belt retractor anchor and belt buckle out of the rear seat backrest frame and remove the rear center safety belt retractor. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor - Front > Page 7968 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR - REAR Removal and Installation WARNING: All safety belt assemblies (including retractors, belt tension sensors [BTS] if equipped, buckles, shoulder belt height adjusters [if equipped], child safety seat tether attachments and attaching hardware) should be inspected after any collision. All new belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. The automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child safety seat is functioning correctly, in addition to other checks for correct safety belt system function. A new belt and retractor assembly must be installed if the safety belt assembly's ALR feature, or any other safety belt function, is not operating correctly when inspected according to the functional inspection procedures. Failure to install a new belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. 1. Release and slide the rear safety belt retractor anchor bolt cover up the belt, then remove the rear safety belt retractor anchor bolt. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor - Front > Page 7969 2. Position aside the quarter trim panel. - Pull out on the quarter trim panel at the C-pillar to release the retaining clip to access the safety belt retractor. 3. NOTE: Inspect the rear safety belt retractor D-ring cover for damage. If the rear safety belt retractor D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the rear safety belt retractor D-ring cover. 4. Remove the bolt and rear safety belt retractor D-ring. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove the bolt and rear safety belt retractor. - Lift up to release the locator T-tab from the C-pillar sheet metal. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Driver C3201 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Driver > Page 7974 C3202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7975 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt when deployed. The pretensioner works in conjunction with the front air bag system. When the front air bags deploy, the pretensioners deploy, causing the buckle to move downward, removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the front air bags and safety belt pretensioners, a new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and pretensioners, safety belt retractors, and height adjusters), must be installed. For safety belt buckle pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems. For safety belt buckle pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7976 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER Removal and Installation WARNING: - All safety belt assemblies (including retractors, belt tension sensors [BTS] if equipped, buckles, shoulder belt height adjusters [if equipped], child safety seat tether attachments and attaching hardware) should be inspected after any collision. All new belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and new assemblies installed if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. The automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature of the safety belt retractor must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the ALR feature for a child safety seat is functioning correctly, in addition to other checks for correct safety belt system function. A new belt and retractor assembly must be installed if the safety belt assembly's ALR feature, or any other safety belt function, is not operating correctly when inspected according to the functional inspection procedures. Failure to install a new belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of serious personal injury in collisions. - The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7977 handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in serious personal injury. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Position the seat all the way up and back. 3. NOTE: Note the position of the safety belt buckle pretensioner anti-rotation locator tab for installation. From the rear of the seat, remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner nut. Vehicles with a manual driver seat, remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner bolt. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Position the safety belt buckle pretensioner towards the front of the vehicle to access the electrical connectors. Seats with power 5. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner cover. All seats 6. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 1. Disconnect the safety belt buckle pretensioner buckle switch electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 3. Cut the tie strap and remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedures. 8. Repower the SRS. 9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7981 C356 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7986 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Locations Front Impact Sensor View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7991 View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7992 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7993 View 151-13 (Right Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7994 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7995 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Diagrams Front Impact Sensor C1465 C1466 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7998 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor C3209 C3211 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Impact Sensor > Page 7999 C3248 C3249 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged SRS components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The tightening torque of the front impact severity sensor retaining nuts is critical for correct system operation. Failure to Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 8002 follow tightening instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure the hood latch bracket and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note position of the 2 locator tabs on sensor for installation. Remove the bolt and the front impact severity sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 8003 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - B-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - B-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the front seat forward. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 8004 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the front door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 5 retaining clips. 4. Remove the rear door scuff plate. - Pull up to release the 2 retaining clips. 5. Detach the 2 retainers and remove the lower B-Pillar trim panel. 6. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 7. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow tightening instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note the position of the side impact sensor locating tabs for installation. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 8005 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - C-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - C-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Install and correctly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Fold down the rear seat backrest. 2. Depower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 8006 3. Position aside the quarter trim panel. - Pull out on the quarter trim panel at the C-pillar to release the retaining clip to access the C-pillar side impact sensor. 4. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side impact sensor retaining bolt is critical for correct system operation. Failure to follow tightening instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Note the position of the 2 side impact sensor locating tabs for installation. - Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 8011 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver C3065 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 8014 C3066 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 8019 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 8020 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)1 > Page 8021 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 C3324 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 8024 C3325 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 8025 C3330 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) 1 > Page 8026 C3331 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8027 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) SYSTEM The occupant classification sensor (OCS) system is standard equipment on all front passenger seats. For diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - MANUAL SEAT TRACK Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s) 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt anchor. 2. Depower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 3. Remove the front passenger seat. 4. Remove the manual seat track. 5. NOTE: After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat track. Mark the position of both seat track rails. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 6. Remove the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8030 7. NOTE: Outboard front cross brace screws shown, inboard similar. On the side with the affected OCS I-bolt(s), remove the 2 front cross brace screws. 8. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), disengage the seat adjuster handle spring and position it aside. 9. Separate the seat adjuster handle from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s). 10. NOTE: Outboard rear cross brace screws shown, inboard similar. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the 2 rear cross brace screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8031 11. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s). 12. Remove the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolt(s) from the seat track rail. 13. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown. 14. NOTE: Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and retaining clip for installation. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt. 15. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8032 Installation All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 1. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring seal. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clips in the OCS weight sensor groove underneath the O-ring seal. 3. Unclamp the side plate with the installed OCS weight sensor bolt from the bench or table. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8033 4. NOTE: Slight rotational adjustment of the OCS weight sensors bolts may be necessary to install the OCS weight sensor bolts and side plate to the seat track rail. Install the side plate and OCS weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail. 5. NOTE: When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight sensor nuts must be installed. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail. Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft). 6. Install the seat adjuster handle to the seat track rail. 7. Engage the seat adjuster handle spring. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8034 8. Install the 2 rear cross brace screws. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Install the 2 front cross brace screws. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 10. Install the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 11. Install the manual seat track. 12. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 13. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8035 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Power Seat Track OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - POWER SEAT TRACK Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8036 Part 2 Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - If any occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt nuts are removed, new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts must be installed. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8037 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt anchor. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the passenger front seat. 4. Remove the power seat track. 5. NOTE: - Inboard seat track rail shown, outboard similar. - After marking the seat track rails, do not change the position of the seat track. Mark the position of both seat track rails. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 6. Remove the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 7. Remove the front retainer and the outboard seat track riser cover shield. 8. Remove the 2 retainers and the OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 9. On the side with the affected OCS weight sensor bolt(s), remove the nut from the seat track front cross brace. 10. Remove and discard the 2 OCS weight sensor bolt nuts from the affected side of the seat track rail with the OCS weight sensor(s). 11. NOTE: Outboard side shown, inboard similar. Separate the front seat track motor cable from the affected seat track rail. Then remove the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts from the seat track rail. 12. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8038 the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Using a suitable tool, clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the spring washer on the affected OCS weight sensor bolt as shown. 13. NOTE: Note the position of the OCS weight sensor bolt, spring washer and retaining clip for installation. Remove and discard the retaining clip from the affected OCS weight sensor bolt. 14. Release the clamp and remove the OCS weight sensor bolt and spring washer from the side plate. Installation All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 1. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the side plate with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolts to the bench or table. Tighten only enough to compress the spring washer. Overtightening may damage the side plate or OCS weight sensor bolts. Position the spring washer and OCS weight sensor bolt in the side plate. Then clamp the side plate to a bench or table to compress the OCS weight sensor bolt spring washer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip is seated fully in the OCS weight sensor bolt groove underneath the OCS weight sensor O-ring seal. Install the OCS weight sensor bolt retaining clip. 3. Remove the clamp and the side plate from the bench or table. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Manual Seat Track > Page 8039 4. NOTE: Slight rotational adjustment of the front seat track motor cable and OCS weight sensor bolts may be necessary to install the OCS weight sensor bolts and side plate to the seat track rail. Install the front seat track motor cable to the seat track rail. Then install the side plate with the OCS weight sensor bolts to the seat track rail. 5. NOTE: When installing the side plate to the seat track rail, 2 new OCS weight sensor nuts must be installed. Install the 2 new OCS weight sensor bolt nuts to the seat track rail. Tighten to 33 Nm (24 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Outboard side shown, inboard similar. Install the nut to the seat track front cross brace. Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). Outboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 7. Install the 2 retainers and the OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. 8. Install the front retainer and the outboard seat track riser cover shield. Inboard OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 9. Install the nut and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). All OCS weight sensor bolt(s) 10. Install the power seat track. 11. Install the passenger seat and repower the supplemental restraints system (SRS). Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 12. Carry out the appropriate procedure after installation of an OCS system component. - If installing the original OCS system component, carry out the Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics - If installing a new OCS system component, carry out the System Reset procedure and prove out the SRS. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair/Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair SEAT POSITION SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Raise the driver seat and then position it to the middle of the track. 2. Depower the system. 3. Remove the driver seat. 4. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. Power seats Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8043 5. Detach the wire harness routing pin-type retainer from the seat position sensor bracket. All seats 6. Push apart then inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. 7. Slide the seat position sensor rearward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the seat position sensor. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8047 C356 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8053 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8054 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8059 C2086 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA Removal and Installation MKX 1. Remove the instrument cluster. All vehicles 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. NOTE: For vehicles without THX(R) audio, the vehicle will have an upper storage bin, rather than an instrument panel speaker. Remove the instrument panel speaker. 4. Release the clip and remove the GPS antenna. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM ANTENNA CABLE - AM/FM Antenna Cable-to-antenna Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 8068 Upper Antenna Cable-to-Lower Antenna Cable Removal and Installation NOTE: Not all steps need to be carried out if only the upper or lower antenna cable is being removed. 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Lower the glove compartment completely. 3. Remove the RH cowl side trim panel. 4. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. 5. Remove the dome lamp. 6. Loosen the AM/FM antenna base bolt and disconnect the antenna cable from the antenna. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 7. Remove the RH sun visor. 8. NOTE: Lower the headliner, as necessary. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable bolt and the antenna cable. Disconnect the upper antenna cable from the lower antenna cable. - To install, tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 8069 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio ANTENNA CABLE - SATELLITE RADIO Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Remove the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable from the satellite radio receiver. 5. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable from the satellite radio antenna, and remove the cable. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) TRANSCEIVER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud. 2. Position the upper steering column shroud aside. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the PATS transceiver. 4. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be programmed into the instrument cluster again. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams C252 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams C127 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Diagrams C500 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8084 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD CODE PROGRAMMING Programming a Personal Code and Keypad Association to Memory Seats and Mirrors (If Equipped) NOTE: - If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad inactivity, after pressing the UNLOCK control on the integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT), or after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position. - The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad. 3. Enter the new 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other. 4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the personal entry code: Pressing the 1/2 button recalls driver 1 settings - Pressing the 3/4 button recalls driver 2 settings - Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting 5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. Erasing the Personal Codes NOTE: If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad inactivity, after pressing the UNLOCK control on the IKT, or after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release. 3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds. 4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code will work. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8085 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the upper access plug. 2. Using a long, flat blade screwdriver, or suitable tool through the upper access hole, release the rear keyless entry keypad retaining clip and position the keyless entry keypad aside. 3. Remove the keyless entry keypad. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection AUTOLOCK AND HORN CHIRP PROGRAMMING Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: - The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. - The autolock feature of the smart junction box (SJB) can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. - When programming the autolock feature using the door lock control switch method the following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning, make sure the ignition key is in the OFF position and all vehicle doors are closed. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control 3 times. 3. Turn the ignition key from the ON to the OFF position. 4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. The horn chirps once to indicate that programming mode is entered. 6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock button on the door lock control switch then the lock button. The horn chirps once if the autolocks are disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a long chirp) if the autolocks are enabled. 7. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The horn chirps once to signal that the programming is complete. Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Keyless Entry Keypad NOTE: - The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. - The autolock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and close all vehicle doors. 2. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 3. Press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 4. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn chirps once if the autolocks are disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a honk) if the autolocks are enabled. Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Instrument Cluster Message Center NOTE: - The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. - The autolock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the SETUP button on the message center switch until AUTOLOCK OFF is displayed. 3. Press the RESET button to select ON or OFF. If the autolocks are enabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. If the autolocks are disabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: - The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autolock feature. - The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. - When programming the auto-unlock feature using the door lock control switch method the following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning, make sure the ignition key is in the OFF position and all vehicle doors are closed. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control 3 times. 3. Turn the ignition key from the ON to the OFF position. 4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. The horn chirps once to indicate that programming mode is entered. 6. To enable/disable the auto-unlock feature, press the lock button on the door lock control switch then the unlock button. The horn chirps once if auto-unlock is disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a long chirp) if auto-unlock is enabled. 7. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The horn chirps once to signal that the programming is complete. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8089 Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Keyless Entry Keypad NOTE: - The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autolock feature. - The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and close all vehicle doors. 2. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 3. Press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button. While still holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button a second time. 4. Release the 3/4 button. The horn chirps once if auto-unlock is disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a honk) if auto-unlock is enabled. Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Instrument Cluster Message Center NOTE: - The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autolock feature. - The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the SETUP button on the message center switch until AUTOUNLOCK OFF is displayed. 3. Press the RESET button to select ON or OFF. If auto-unlock is enabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. If auto-unlock is disabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Memory Activation Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Remote Memory Activation REMOTE MEMORY ACTIVATION 1. Position the driver seat and mirrors to the desired position. 2. Press the set button on the driver door panel. 3. Within 5 seconds press the 1 or 2 button on the driver door panel to associate with the driver 1 or driver 2 position. 4. Press the set button again. 5. Within 5 seconds press a button on the associated integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT). 6. Within 5 seconds press the 1 or 2 button on the driver door panel to associate with the driver 1 or driver 2 position. 7. If a second memory setting is desired, repeat the procedure with the second IKT. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Memory Activation > Page 8092 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Remote Memory Deactivation REMOTE MEMORY DEACTIVATION 1. Press the set button on the driver door panel. 2. Within 5 seconds press any button on the integrated key that you wish to deactivate and then press the set button on the driver door panel. 3. If a second memory setting is desired to be deactivated, repeat the procedure with the second integrated key. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8097 C4014 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8098 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. 1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the 2 nuts and the parking aid module. - Disconnect the parking aid module electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 (Rear End - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left C4009 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 8104 C4011 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 8105 C4010 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 8106 C4012 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8107 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the parking aid sensor(s) electrical connector(s). 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams C3268 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 8114 C253 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 8115 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER The message center is a fixed format vacuum fluorescent display, integrated into the instrument cluster. The message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The message center displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle systems. The message center informs the driver of vehicle operations and notifies the driver of potential vehicle problems by displaying a warning message pertaining to the system in which a fault has been detected. The message center provides the following features: - Information displays - Setup displays - System check messages - System warning messages The message center information can be selected through a set of 3 buttons: - INFO - SETUP - RESET Message Center Configuration The message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock, auto-unlock and easy entry/easy exit (if equipped), or to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as the compass. On configurable items such as autolock, auto-unlock or easy entry/easy exit the message center indicates the appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK OFF. If the driver selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK AID ON . Compass Display The message center provides a compass display and uses directional information sent from a compass module, located on the underside of the inside rear view mirror. Information Displays The information displays are non-timed modes. The selected mode remains on until the driver presses a message center button to change the mode or it is overridden by another mode. The information (INFO button) display modes are: Odometer - Compass - Trip odometer A or B - Distance to empty (DTE) - Average fuel economy - Average speed - Trip elapsed drive time 1 or 2 Setup Displays The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. The setup display modes are: System check - Units English/metric - Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped) - Autolock on/off (if equipped) - Auto-unlock on/off (if equipped) - Power liftgate on/off (if equipped) - Easy entry/easy exit seat on/off (if equipped) - Reverse parking aid on/off (if equipped) - Language System Check The system check provides a check of all the monitored systems on the vehicle. The system check scrolls through each of the monitored systems and provides a visual indication to report out the status of each system. The message center displays OK for approximately 2 seconds if the system check does not detect a fault in the system and displays a warning message for approximately 2 seconds if the system check detects a fault in the system. Press the RESET button to scroll through the system check messages. The systems monitored during the system check are: Door ajar - Engine temperature Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 8116 - TPMS - Oil pressure - Brake fluid level - Washer fluid level - Fuel level - Distance to empty (DTE) System Warning Messages The system warning messages alert the operator to possible problems or malfunctions in the vehicle operating systems. The message center displays the last selected feature if there are no additional warning messages. Once a warning message has been displayed, the message must be acknowledged to allow full functionality of the message center. Press the RESET to acknowledge and clear the warning message. The warning messages are divided into 3 basic categories: Cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected. - Reappears 10 minutes from pressing the RESET button. - Reappears if the condition clears then reoccurs within the same ignition cycle ON-OFF cycle. The warning messages that cannot be reset are: DRIVER DOOR AJAR - PASSENGER DOOR AJAR - REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR - REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR - PARK BRAKE ENGAGED - PLEASE CLOSE DOOR - PRESS RESET TO CLEAR The warning messages that reoccur after 10 minutes are: LOW FUEL LEVEL - CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM - LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL The warning messages that display whenever the ignition switch is turned from the OFF position to the ON position are: WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW - LIFTGATE AJAR - LOW TIRE PRESSURE - CHECK RPA (if equipped) - CHECK COMPASS MODE (if equipped) - COMPASS NO RESPONSE (if equipped) - COMPASS DATA ERROR - TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT - TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT - POWER LIFTGATE OFF - PARK ASSIST OFF Service Procedure Displays The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair procedures related to the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). The displayed warning messages are as follows: TRAIN MODE: TRAIN xx TIRE - TIRE TRAINING MODE COMPETE - TIRE NOT TRAINED - REPAIR The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair procedures related to the compass display. The displayed warning messages are as follows: RESET FOR ZONE - SETUP ZONE XX - RESET FOR CAL - CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE - CALIBRATION COMPLETE The message center displays the IKT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM warning message to indicate a problem programming the integrated key transmitter (IKT). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test: - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs for the instrument cluster. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts. For all other module DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The message center is an integral part of the instrument cluster that receives and acts upon much of the same information that is input and used to operate the instrument cluster gauges, indicators, and warning indicators. The message center, located in the center of the instrument cluster is a vacuum fluorescent 2-line display. The message center electronic functions use both hardwired, and the controller area network (CAN) circuitry to transmit and receive information. Whenever conditions are present that require a warning message, the message center replaces the last selected display with the new warning display. Once the message is reset or cleared, the message center returns to the last selected display. If multiple warnings are present, the message center displays each warning for approximately 4 seconds. Warning messages are also generally associated with other observable instrument cluster indications. For example, when the LH front door is opened, the message center displays the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR along with the door ajar warning indicator. This allows the message center to be a more informative supplement to the instrument cluster gauges and indicators. It is very important to understand: - where the input (command) originates. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8119 - all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate. - which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message. - if the module that received the input (message) controls the output of the feature, or if it outputs a message over the CAN to another module. - which module controls the output of the feature. Instrument Cluster Messages NOTE: Whenever a message is suspected as missing, confirmed by a missing message DTC, it is important to look for other symptoms that may also be present in the instrument cluster and throughout the vehicle. Once a DTC is set in the instrument cluster it may be helpful to review the complete message list available in Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to see what other modules also rely on the same message and run the self-test for those modules. If the message is missing from other modules, the same DTC may also be set in those modules. Confirmation of missing messages common to multiple modules may indicate that the originating module is the source of the concern or the communication network may be experiencing some problems. The instrument cluster uses input messages from other modules to control the gauges, informational indicators, warning indicators and message center displays over the communication networks. If a required message is missing or invalid for less than 5 seconds, the gauge or indicator that requires the message remains at the last commanded state based upon the last known good message. For example, if the message is missing the O/D off status for less than 5 seconds and the O/D off indicator was ON (O/D cancelled), the indicator remains in the ON state until the next good message is received. If the message remains missing or invalid for greater than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets a U-code DTC and the output becomes a default action for the indicator or gauge. Each indicator or gauge utilizes a different default strategy depending on the nature of the indication. Refer Instrument Cluster for further descriptions of the default action specific to each indicator or gauge. If the messaged input to the cluster returns at any time, the normal function of the gauge or indicator resumes. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8120 B1209 / U2013 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8121 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8122 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8123 Symptom Chart (Part 3) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8124 Symptom Chart (Part 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8125 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The Message Center Is Not Operating Correctly PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER IS NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY A1-A2 Normal Operation The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+ voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster ground is received through circuit GD133 (BK). The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit RMC27 (WH/BN). Possible Causes - Message center switch - Instrument cluster Test B: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly PINPOINT TEST B: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8126 B1-B2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8127 B3-B5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8128 B6 Normal Operation The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+ voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster ground is received through circuit GD133 (BK). The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit RMC27 (WH/BN). DTC B1209 - is an on-demand DTC that sets if the instrument cluster detects any of the message center switch buttons stuck during the self-test. Possible Causes - Circuitry - Message center switch - Instrument cluster Test C: The Compass Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST C: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE C1-C2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8129 C2-C3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8130 C4-C5 Normal Operation The compass sensor module receives voltage from the smart junction box (SJB) through circuit CBP31 (BU/OG) and is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the instrument cluster through the compass communication data plus circuit VMC31 (YE/GN) and compass communication data minus circuit VMC30 (BU/GY). DTC U2013 - is a continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets if the instrument cluster is missing the compass data from the compass module. Possible Causes - Fuse - Circuitry - Compass module - Instrument cluster Test D: The Compass Is Inaccurate PINPOINT TEST D: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8131 D1-D3 Normal Operation The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the instrument cluster through the compass communication data plus circuit VMC31 (YE/GN) and compass communication data minus circuit VMC30 (BU/GY). The magnetic fields generated by the earths north and south poles are divided into zones that differ from each other with respect to how the magnetic fields appear. The magnetic north can change by up to 4 degrees between zones and become noticeable across multiple zones. The compass zone must be set to the correct zone for the compass to read accurately. Factors within the vehicle may affect the ability of the compass module to accurately read the magnetic north. Calibrating the compass allows the compass module to compensate for vehicle factors that influence the accuracy of the compass. NOTE: Outside factors such as bridges, steel structures, tall buildings and power lines also affect compass accuracy. Possible Causes - Vehicle magnetization - Zone setting - Calibration - Compass module Test E: The WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Warning Is Inoperative/Always On PINPOINT TEST E: THE WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW WARNING IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8132 E1-E4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8133 E4-E7 Normal Operation The instrument cluster provides a reference voltage to the washer fluid switch through circuit CMC20 (VT). The washer fluid switch is grounded through circuit GD123 (BK/GY). When the washer fluid is low, the washer fluid switch closes to ground, pulling the reference voltage low. When the instrument cluster detects the washer fluid input pulled low, it displays the WASHER FLUID LOW warning. Possible Causes - Circuitry - Washer fluid level switch - Instrument cluster Test F: The CHECK PARK ASSIST/PARK ASSIST OFF Warning Is Inoperative Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8134 PINPOINT TEST F: THE CHECK PARK ASSIST/PARK ASSIST OFF WARNING IS INOPERATIVE F1-F2 Normal Operation The parking aid on/off status is sent from the parking aid module to the instrument cluster over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) communication bus lines. When the RESET button is pressed, the instrument cluster sends a query to the parking aid module, requesting a system status. The parking aid module responds to the instrument cluster with the status of the system, either on or off. If the return status message is missing or corrupted, the instrument cluster does not display the brackets around either the ON or OFF selection. Possible Causes - Communication network - Parking aid system Test G: The POWER LIFTGATE OFF Message Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST G: THE POWER LIFTGATE OFF MESSAGE IS INOPERATIVE G1-G2 Normal Operation The power liftgate on/off status is sent from the power liftgate module to the instrument cluster over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) communication bus lines. When the RESET button is pressed, the instrument cluster sends a query to the power liftgate module, requesting a system status. The power liftgate module responds to the instrument cluster with the status of the system, either on or off. If the return Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8135 status message is missing or corrupted, the instrument cluster does not display the brackets around either the ON or OFF selection. Possible Causes - Communication network - Power liftgate system Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8136 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8137 MKX Removal and Installation MKX 1. NOTE: The transmission selector lever bezel is held in place by 4 tabs that are located in the shifter assembly. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8138 2. Open the floor console compartment door and pull the floor console finish panel straight up to release the retainer clips and remove the finish panel. 3. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the storage compartment assembly. All vehicles 4. Pull the instrument panel center finish panel straight out to release the retainer clips and remove the instrument panel center finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Press the 4 retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8139 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams C3312 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8144 Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair AUDIO INPUT JACK Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. 2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Diagrams C949 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8148 DVD Player: Service and Repair DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD) PLAYER Removal NOTE: Programmable module installation (PMI) only needs to be carried out if the DVD player is being replaced. 1. Upload the DVD player configuration to the scan tool. 2. NOTE: Open the DVD player display. Remove the 4 screws. 3. Remove the DVD player. - Pull down on the sides of the DVD player to disengage the clips from the bracket. - Using a suitable tool, push the rear most U-hook forward and release the U-hooks. - Hang the DVD player on the J-hooks and disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the DVD player from the J-hooks. Installation 1. Hang the DVD player on the J-hooks. 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the DVD player from the J-hooks. 4. NOTE: Tilt the DVD player, as necessary, to align it correctly. Align the left side guide pin with the left side locating hole. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8149 5. Lift up the right side of the DVD player and engage the U-hooks. 6. Install the 4 screws. 7. Push on the left and right sides of the DVD player to engage the clips. 8. Download the DVD player configuration from the scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Description and Operation Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER The universal transmitter is an integral part of the LH sun visor and provides a convenient way to substitute up to 3 hand-held transmitters with a single built-in device. The universal transmitter can learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters. The universal transmitter: - operates garage doors, gates and home/office lighting and security systems. - learns and transmits the radio frequency of up to 3 hand-held transmitters from any of the systems mentioned above. - is powered by the vehicle battery and charging system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION NOTE: The universal transmitter system is only available as an option on the MKX. The feature is not available on the Edge. 1. Verify the customer concern. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8155 Symptom Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8156 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Pinpoint Tests PINPOINT TEST A: THE UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER IS INOPERATIVE A1 A2-A4 Normal Operation The universal transmitter receives voltage on circuit CLN09 (YE/GN) and is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). Possible Causes Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8157 - Circuitry - Universal transmitter - Receiver unit Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8158 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Universal Transmitter Programming UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING WARNING: A garage door opening system that cannot stop or reverse itself after detecting an object in its path does not meet current federal safety standards. To decrease the risk of serious injury or death, do not use this universal transmitter with a door opening system that lacks stop and reverse features as required by federal standards. This includes any garage door opening system manufactured before April 1, 1982. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Verify the hand-held transmitter is operative. 2. Prepare for programming the universal transmitter by erasing all 3 channels by holding down the 2 outside buttons until the red indicator begins to flash (20-30 seconds). Release both buttons. 3. Select 1 of the 3 universal transmitter channels to be programmed by pressing the desired button. 4. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter 25-51 mm (1-2 in) from the front surface of the universal transmitter so that the red indicator can still be seen. 5. NOTE: For Canadian vehicles only, during programming, the hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after 2 seconds, which may not be long enough to program the universal transmitter. If programming this type of hand-held transmitter, continue to hold the button on the universal transmitter while pressing the hand-held transmitter button every 2 seconds. Use both hands to press the hand-held transmitter button and the desired button on the universal transmitter. Do not release either button. 6. Hold down both buttons until the red indicator on the universal transmitter flashes, first slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons when the rapid flashing begins. The universal transmitter has successfully learned the new frequency signal and can be used in place of the hand-held transmitter(s). 7. To operate, simply press the appropriate button on the universal transmitter. The red indicator is on while the signal is being transmitted. 8. To program additional hand-held transmitters repeat Steps 3-6. Training a Garage Door Opener Equipped With "Rolling Codes" 1. Program the hand-held transmitter to the universal transmitter. 2. Train the garage door opener receiver to recognize the universal transmitter. 1. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener receiver. 2. Locate the training button on the garage door opener receiver. Location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener manufacturer. Refer to the garage door opener instruction manual. 3. Press the training button on the garage door opener receiver for 1-2 seconds. 4. Press the programmed universal transmitter button for as long as the universal transmitter red indicator flashes (1-2 seconds). Release the button and press the button to confirm that the universal transmitter is trained to the receiver. 5. The garage door opener should recognize the universal transmitter. Erasing Channels ERASING CHANNELS 1. NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be reprogrammed using the procedures for programming. To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the two outside buttons until the red indicator begins to flash (20-30 seconds). Release both buttons. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8159 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA Removal and Installation MKX 1. Remove the instrument cluster. All vehicles 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. NOTE: For vehicles without THX(R) audio, the vehicle will have an upper storage bin, rather than an instrument panel speaker. Remove the instrument panel speaker. 4. Release the clip and remove the GPS antenna. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8168 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams C3299A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8169 C3299B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8170 C3299C C3299D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8174 C503 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Pioneer Navigation Radio - Seek Inop Navigation System: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Pioneer Navigation Radio - Seek Inop TSB 06-25-3 11/30/06 PIONEER NAVIGATION RADIO - SEEK FUNCTION INOPERATIVE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2006-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2007 Fusion, Mustang 2006-2007 Explorer 2007 Edge, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, F-150 LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ, Mark LT, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2006-2007 Montego 2007 Milan 2006-2007 Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2006-2007 vehicles equipped with a Pioneer Navigation Radio may appear to have a defective seek function. It may be reported that the radio Seek function is inoperative, Seek will not stop (keeps scrolling through stations) or the radio exhibits Poor FM reception. This may be due to a misunderstanding of how the operation of the PTY (Program Type) feature functions. The PTY feature filters out radio stations that do not fit a selected category of radio programming like: Top 40, Classical, and News. The result is a "continuous seek" condition if the feature is activated and no stations are found under the selected category. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to identify the PTY (Program Type) setting. SERVICE PROCEDURE To confirm the PTY (Program Type) setting use the following steps: 1. Under MEDIA, select the FM tab. (If you do not see an RDS and PTY button, push the SHOW OPTIONS buttons). 2. Verify RDS and PTY are enabled by the buttons being illuminated. If the text, above the SET PTY button says anything other than ALL, the unit is filtering for radio stations that transmit RDS text and are categorized as the selected Program Type, like: Top 40, Classical, and News. (See Figure 1) 3. To change the setting, either press the SET PTY button and select ALL. Or disable the PTY feature by pushing the PTY button. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Pioneer Navigation Radio - Seek Inop > Page 8179 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18806 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Navigation System: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8182 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8183 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8184 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8185 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8186 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8187 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8188 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8189 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8190 Navigation System: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8191 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8192 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8193 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8194 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8195 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8196 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8197 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8198 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8199 Navigation System: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 130-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8200 130-2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8201 130-3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8202 130-5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8203 130-6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8204 130-7 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8205 130-8 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8206 130-9 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8207 130-10 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8208 130-11 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8209 130-12 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8210 130-13 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8211 130-14 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8212 130-15 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8213 130-16 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer C4208 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer > Page 8219 Amplifier: Diagrams THX Amplifier C4348A C4348B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer > Page 8220 C4348C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8221 Amplifier: Service and Repair AUDIO AMPLIFIER - THX(R) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the subwoofer speaker. 2. Disconnect the THX(R) amplifier electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws, the nut, and the THX(R) amplifier. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Pioneer Navigation Radio - Seek Inop Radio/Stereo: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Pioneer Navigation Radio - Seek Inop TSB 06-25-3 11/30/06 PIONEER NAVIGATION RADIO - SEEK FUNCTION INOPERATIVE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2006-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2007 Fusion, Mustang 2006-2007 Explorer 2007 Edge, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, F-150 LINCOLN: 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ, Mark LT, MKX, Navigator MERCURY: 2006-2007 Montego 2007 Milan 2006-2007 Mountaineer ISSUE Some 2006-2007 vehicles equipped with a Pioneer Navigation Radio may appear to have a defective seek function. It may be reported that the radio Seek function is inoperative, Seek will not stop (keeps scrolling through stations) or the radio exhibits Poor FM reception. This may be due to a misunderstanding of how the operation of the PTY (Program Type) feature functions. The PTY feature filters out radio stations that do not fit a selected category of radio programming like: Top 40, Classical, and News. The result is a "continuous seek" condition if the feature is activated and no stations are found under the selected category. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to identify the PTY (Program Type) setting. SERVICE PROCEDURE To confirm the PTY (Program Type) setting use the following steps: 1. Under MEDIA, select the FM tab. (If you do not see an RDS and PTY button, push the SHOW OPTIONS buttons). 2. Verify RDS and PTY are enabled by the buttons being illuminated. If the text, above the SET PTY button says anything other than ALL, the unit is filtering for radio stations that transmit RDS text and are categorized as the selected Program Type, like: Top 40, Classical, and News. (See Figure 1) 3. To change the setting, either press the SET PTY button and select ALL. Or disable the PTY feature by pushing the PTY button. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Pioneer Navigation Radio - Seek Inop > Page 8226 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18806 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8227 C4344 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8228 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 2. Remove the 2 nuts and the satellite radio receiver. - Disconnect the satellite radio antenna connector and the electrical connector. - To install, tighten the nuts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair Remote Control: Service and Repair STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8232 MKX Removal and Installation MKX 1. Remove the driver air bag module. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the steering wheel controls bezel. All vehicles 3. Remove the steering wheel controls by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker Speaker: Diagrams Speaker C536 C570A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8237 C570B C702 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8238 C612A C612B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8239 C628 C802 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8240 Speaker: Diagrams Tweeter C569 C613 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8241 C4337 C4338 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8242 C2359 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8243 C4212 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker DOOR SPEAKER Front Or Rear Door Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 8246 Front Door Tweeter Removal and Installation All speakers 1. Remove the door trim panel. Front door tweeter speaker 2. Remove the 2 screws and the front door tweeter speaker from the door trim panel. Front or rear door speaker 3. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). All speakers 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 8247 Speaker: Service and Repair Subwoofer Speaker SUBWOOFER SPEAKER Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 8248 MKX Removal and Installation 1. Remove the quarter panel trim panel. 2. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - To install, tighten the bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 8249 Speaker: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Speaker INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the instrument panel speaker cover. 3. Remove the 4 screws and the instrument panel speaker. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8255 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8256 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8260 C2086 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8264 C4014 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8265 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. 1. Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the 2 nuts and the parking aid module. - Disconnect the parking aid module electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams C127 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 (Rear End - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left C4009 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 8275 C4011 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 8276 C4010 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 8277 C4012 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8278 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the parking aid sensor(s) electrical connector(s). 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor(s). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8284 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8285 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8286 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8287 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8288 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8289 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8290 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8291 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8292 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8293 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8294 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8297 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8298 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8299 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8300 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8301 C439 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8302 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8303 95-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8308 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8309 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8310 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8311 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8312 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8313 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8314 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8315 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8316 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8317 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8318 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8319 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8320 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8321 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8322 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8323 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8324 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8325 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8326 95-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): 9 (20A) (trailer tow parking lamps) - 24 (15A) (trailer tow LH stop/turn relay) - 46 (15A) (trailer tow RH stop/turn relay) - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relays - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8329 Symptom Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8330 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Test X: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All PINPOINT TEST X: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL X1 Normal Operation The trailer tow connectors receive ground through circuit RAT08 (WH) for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer Test Y: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Turn/Stoplamp PINPOINT TEST Y: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER TURN/STOPLAMP Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8331 Y1-Y2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8332 Y3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8333 Y4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8334 Y5-Y6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8335 Y6 Continued Normal Operation The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 24 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and BJB fuse 46 (15A) supplies voltage to the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Joint connector - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - BJB - Trailer Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8336 Z1-Z3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8337 Z3-Z4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8338 Z4 Continued Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8339 Z5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8340 Z6 Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 9 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Joint connector - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - BJB - Trailer Tests AA: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8341 AA1-AA2 Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8342 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 8347 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 8348 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 8351 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 8352 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 8353 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 8354 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 8355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8360 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8361 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8362 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8363 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8364 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8365 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8366 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8367 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8368 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8369 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8370 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8371 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8372 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8373 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8374 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8375 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8376 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8377 C439 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8378 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8379 95-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) Body Control Module: Service and Repair Driver Seat Module (DSM) DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 8387 Removal and Installation CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the DSM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the DSM into the scan tool. 2. NOTE: If the driver seat can be moved to a high enough position, the DSM screws can be removed without removing the driver seat. If necessary, remove the driver seat. 3. Remove the 2 screws. 4. Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors and remove the DSM. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 8388 5. NOTE: Make sure to download the DSM configuration information from the scan tool into the new DSM. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Module (DSM) > Page 8389 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the Original Module is NOT Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair BUMPER - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8395 Part 2 BUMPER COVER - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 bolts from the top of the radiator grille. 3. Remove the 4 scrivets from the top of the radiator grille. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8396 4. Remove the 3 lower pin-type retainers. 5. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws (3 each side). 6. Remove the 4 lower screws (2 each side). 7. Disconnect the side marker lamp electrical connectors, if equipped. 8. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors, if equipped. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8397 9. Remove the front bumper cover. - Pull the corner of the bumper cover from the bracket. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Front Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Bumper - Front BUMPER - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Front > Page 8402 Part 2 BUMPER - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the 6 front bumper bolts (3 each side). - To install, tighten to 67 Nm (49 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 4 upper and lower bumper-to-radiator support bolts (2 each side). - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Remove the front bumper. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Front > Page 8403 Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Bumper - Front, Lower BUMPER - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Front > Page 8404 Part 2 BUMPER - FRONT, LOWER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the 2 nuts from the power steering cooler pipe-to-lower front bumper. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 3. Remove the 6 bumper-to-radiator support nuts (3 each side) and remove the lower front bumper. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair BUMPER - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR Rear Bumper Without Trailer Hitch (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8409 Rear Bumper Without Trailer Hitch (Part 2) Rear Bumper With Trailer Hitch (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8410 Rear Bumper With Trailer Hitch (Part 2) BUMPER COVER - REAR Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: MKX shown, Edge similar. Remove the scrivets from the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the 10 screws (5 each side) from the rear splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8411 3. Remove the rear bumper cover-to-body brace screw. 4. Disconnect the trailer hitch and parking aid system wiring harness, if equipped. 5. Disconnect the retainers from the rear bumper cover-to-body brace. 6. Remove the rear bumper cover. - Remove the bumper cover from the bumper cover bracket. - Remove the bumper cover. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair BUMPER - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR Rear Bumper Without Trailer Hitch (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8415 Rear Bumper Without Trailer Hitch (Part 2) Rear Bumper With Trailer Hitch (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8416 Rear Bumper With Trailer Hitch (Part 2) BUMPER - REAR Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. Edge only 2. Remove the 6 bumper mounting nuts (3 each side). - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-in). MKX only 3. Remove the 2 underbody heat shields. - Remove the 6 screws (3 each side). - Remove the 2 pushpin retainers (1 each side). - Disconnect the wiring harness from the heat shield. 4. Remove the 4 inside rear bumper bolts (2 each side) and the 2 nuts (1 each side) - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8417 5. Remove the 2 rear center bumper bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). All vehicles 6. Remove the rear bumper. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8422 Part 2 Removal and Installation Upper and lower cowl grille panel 1. NOTE: The upper cowl panel grille must be removed before the lower cowl panel grille can be removed. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. Upper cowl panel grille 2. Remove the RH cowl side outer panel. 3. Remove the LH cowl side outer panel. 4. Remove the 2 scrivets from the RH upper cowl panel grille. 5. Remove the 2 bolts from the RH upper cowl grille panel and remove the RH upper cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Remove the 2 scrivets from the LH upper cowl grille panel. 7. Remove the 2 bolts from the LH upper cowl grille panel and remove the LH upper cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Lower cowl panel grille 8. Remove the wiper arm and wiper pivot shaft assembly. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 bolts. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Remove the 2 bolts from the upper left lower cowl grille panel extension and remove the panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 10. Remove the 4 bolts from the upper right lower cowl panel extension and remove the panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 11. Disconnect the wiring harness from the retainer on the left front of the lower cowl grille panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8423 12. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the powertrain control module (PCM). 13. Remove the evaporative purge valve and bracket from the center of the lower cowl panel grille and set aside. 14. Remove the 5 bolts and 3 nuts from inside the lower cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 15. Remove the bolt from the lower cowl panel-to-front of dash - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 16. Remove the lower cowl grille panel and PCM from the vehicle. Upper and lower cowl grille panel 17. CAUTION: Incorrect installation of the lower/upper cowl panel grille may cause damage to the windshield. Make sure the cowl panel grille clips are located under the windshield prior to installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Transfer the components as necessary. - Adjust the pivot arms. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the plug from the rear of the door. 2. Loosen the exterior door handle reinforcement screw and remove the exterior door handle bezel. 3. NOTE: Pull the exterior door handle strap outward and to the rear to release it from the exterior door handle reinforcement. Remove the exterior door handle strap. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 8432 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement DOOR HANDLE REINFORCEMENT Exterior Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 8433 Exterior Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exterior door handle. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove the door window regulator and motor assembly. 4. If equipped, disconnect the upper lock cylinder actuating rod. 5. Disconnect the lower exterior door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Remove the exterior door handle reinforcement. 1. If equipped, disconnect the keyless entry keypad wiring harness retainer. 2. Release the exterior door handle reinforcement locking clips from the door window regulator and motor assembly. 3. Remove the exterior door handle reinforcement. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 8434 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Disconnect the interior door handle from the door window regulator and motor assembly. 3. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Remove the interior door handle. Disconnect the interior door handle actuating cable from the interior door handle. - Remove the interior door handle. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Latch: Service and Repair DOOR LATCH Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8441 Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the door window regulator and motor assembly. 3. Disconnect the interior door handle actuating cable. 4. If equipped, disconnect the door lock cylinder actuating rod. 5. Disconnect the door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8442 Release the door latch rear locking clip. 7. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Release the door latch front locking clip. 1. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 2. Release the door latch front locking clip. 8. Remove the door latch with the door lock actuating rod. 9. If necessary, disconnect the door lock actuating rod. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the door latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR TRIM PANEL-FRONT Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the front door handle bezel. - Remove the screw cover. - Remove the screw. - Remove the front door handle bezel. Disconnect the electrical connectors, if equipped. MKX only 2. Remove the screw cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8446 All vehicles 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the 6 front door trim panel screws. 5. Disengage the bottom of the door trim panel from the door. - Pull outward to disengage the push nuts from the retainers. 6. Lift the top of the door trim panel edge upward and out of the beltline moulding. 7. Pull the lock rod through the lock rod grommet. 8. Remove the front door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits tightly. 1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts. 2. NOTE: A hammer and wood block may be necessary for large adjustments. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side-to-side or up and down as necessary. 3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts. - Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 4. Check the adjustment of the door. - Repeat the procedure as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8454 2. Remove the front door window glass inner weatherstrip. 3. Remove the front door glass top run. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure the top run is fully seated before reinstalling the front door window glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - FRONT DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: - LH shown, RH similar. - For MKX only, the front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the front door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8458 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plugs and lower the window until the glass clamp bolts can be accessed through the 2 access holes. Tape the glass in position. 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolts are loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolts. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. If equipped, remove trim and disconnect the power mirror electrical connector. - Remove the wiring harness pushpins from the door. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8459 8. Disconnect the electrical connector at the A-pillar. 9. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 10. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 11. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 12. Remove the 3 door latch screws. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 13. Remove the access plug from the latch side of door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 14. Remove the outside door handle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8460 15. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 16. If equipped, remove the keypad. 17. Remove the 10 door module bolts and remove the front door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 18. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - MKX Only, if installing a new front window motor, it must be initialized. If installing the original front window motor it must be de-initialized, then initialized. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - FRONT DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: - LH shown, RH similar. - For MKX only, the front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the front door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8464 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plugs and lower the window until the glass clamp bolts can be accessed through the 2 access holes. Tape the glass in position. 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolts are loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolts. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. If equipped, remove trim and disconnect the power mirror electrical connector. - Remove the wiring harness pushpins from the door. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8465 8. Disconnect the electrical connector at the A-pillar. 9. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 10. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 11. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 12. Remove the 3 door latch screws. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 13. Remove the access plug from the latch side of door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 14. Remove the outside door handle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8466 15. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 16. If equipped, remove the keypad. 17. Remove the 10 door module bolts and remove the front door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 18. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - MKX Only, if installing a new front window motor, it must be initialized. If installing the original front window motor it must be de-initialized, then initialized. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the plug from the rear of the door. 2. Loosen the exterior door handle reinforcement screw and remove the exterior door handle bezel. 3. NOTE: Pull the exterior door handle strap outward and to the rear to release it from the exterior door handle reinforcement. Remove the exterior door handle strap. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 8473 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement DOOR HANDLE REINFORCEMENT Exterior Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 8474 Exterior Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exterior door handle. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove the door window regulator and motor assembly. 4. If equipped, disconnect the upper lock cylinder actuating rod. 5. Disconnect the lower exterior door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Remove the exterior door handle reinforcement. 1. If equipped, disconnect the keyless entry keypad wiring harness retainer. 2. Release the exterior door handle reinforcement locking clips from the door window regulator and motor assembly. 3. Remove the exterior door handle reinforcement. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 8475 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Disconnect the interior door handle from the door window regulator and motor assembly. 3. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Remove the interior door handle. Disconnect the interior door handle actuating cable from the interior door handle. - Remove the interior door handle. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair DOOR LATCH Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8482 Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the door window regulator and motor assembly. 3. Disconnect the interior door handle actuating cable. 4. If equipped, disconnect the door lock cylinder actuating rod. 5. Disconnect the door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8483 Release the door latch rear locking clip. 7. NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar. Release the door latch front locking clip. 1. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 2. Release the door latch front locking clip. 8. Remove the door latch with the door lock actuating rod. 9. If necessary, disconnect the door lock actuating rod. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the door latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR TRIM PANEL - REAR Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the rear door handle bezel. - Remove the screw cover. - Remove the screw. - Remove the rear door handle bezel. Disconnect the electrical connector, if equipped. MKX only 2. Remove the screw cover. All vehicles 3. Remove the screw. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8487 4. Remove the 6 trim panel screws. 5. Disengage the bottom of the door trim panel from the door. - Pull outward to disengage the push nuts from the retainers. 6. Lift the top of the door trim panel edge upward and out of the beltline moulding. 7. Pull the lock rod through the lock rod grommet. 8. Remove the rear door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits tightly. 1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts. 2. NOTE: A hammer and wood block may be necessary for large adjustments. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side-to-side or up and down as necessary. 3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts. - Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 4. Check the adjustment of the door. - Repeat the procedure as necessary. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8495 Part 2 DOOR GLASS RUN AND BRACKET - REAR Removal and Installation NOTE: The bracket is removed with the rear door glass. 1. Remove the rear door glass. 2. Remove the rear door glass top run. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8499 Part 2 WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - REAR DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the rear door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plug and lower the window until the glass clamp bolt can be accessed through the access hole. Tape the glass in position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8500 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolt is loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolt. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector at the B-pillar. 8. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 9. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 10. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 11. Remove the 3 door latch screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8501 - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 12. Remove the access plug from the latch side of the door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 13. Remove the outside door handle. 14. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 15. If equipped, remove the door keypad. 16. Remove the 9 door module bolts and remove the rear door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8505 Part 2 WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - REAR DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the rear door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plug and lower the window until the glass clamp bolt can be accessed through the access hole. Tape the glass in position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8506 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolt is loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolt. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector at the B-pillar. 8. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 9. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 10. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 11. Remove the 3 door latch screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8507 - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 12. Remove the access plug from the latch side of the door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 13. Remove the outside door handle. 14. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 15. If equipped, remove the door keypad. 16. Remove the 9 door module bolts and remove the rear door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Description and Operation Hood Latch: Description and Operation HOOD LATCH The hood latch components consist of the following: - Hood latch release handle and cable - Hood latch Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8512 Hood Latch: Service and Repair HOOD LATCH Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts. Remove the 2 hood latch bolts and position the hood latch aside. To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 2. Disconnect the hood latch release cable and remove the hood latch. 3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Lubricate the hood latch after installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the hood latch. 2. Disconnect the hood latch release cable locator from the radiator grille opening panel reinforcement. 3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable locator from the LH inner fender. 4. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the dash panel into the passenger compartment. Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly. 1. Remove the hood latch release handle screw. 2. Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams C127 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair WINDOW GLASS - LIFTGATE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Material Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8524 Removal WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses and heavy gloves when cutting glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the liftgate window wiper arm and motor. 2. Remove the liftgate spoiler. 3. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window defrost electrical connectors. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the existing urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool while cutting. Using the special tool, place the flat side of the knife against the liftgate window glass. Start cutting the adhesive away from the liftgate window glass at the top and work toward the corners. 6. Using the special tool, distance the liftgate window glass from the body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8525 7. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the liftgate window glass. 8. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld. Installation CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the windshield. NOTE: For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation information. 1. Dry fit the liftgate window glass to the existing urethane adhesive bead on the body pinch weld. 2. For a uniform fit, use the 2 liftgate window glass alignment pins to align the liftgate window glass in the opening. 3. Remove the liftgate window glass. 4. NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld, see the manufacturer's recommendations. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm (0.03 in) to 2 mm (0.07 in) base of original equipment urethane on the pinch weld. 5. If installing the original liftgate window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive. 6. Clean the inside of the liftgate window glass surface with glass cleaner. 7. CAUTION: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. NOTE: Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area. If installing a new liftgate window glass, apply urethane glass primer according to the manufacturer's instructions. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 9. NOTE: Use either a high ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at the bottom of the liftgate window glass opening near the center. 10. NOTE: Before the urethane has set, partially lower the windows to prevent the glass from being pushed out of position when a door is closed. Install the liftgate window glass on the vehicle using the alignment pins. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8526 11. CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the rear window glass. After the urethane has cured, check the liftgate window glass seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 12. Connect the 2 liftgate window defrost electrical connectors. 13. Install the liftgate trim panel. 14. Install the liftgate spoiler. 15. Install the liftgate window wiper arm and motor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B TSB 08-14-5 07/21/08 POWER LIFT GATE INOPERATIVE - ALL FUNCTIONAL SWITCHES, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY, WITH POWER LIFT GATE TRUNK MODULE DTC B117B FORD: 2008 Taurus X 2007-2008 Edge, Expedition Ford: 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX, Navigator ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Expedition, Navigator Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X and 2009 Flex may exhibit an inoperative power lift gate from remote keyless entry, inside switches or the outside lift gate handle with a power lift gate/trunk module (LTM) with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B117B and PID UCH_OUT set to Active. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check power lift gate operation from all buttons. 2. If the power lift gate is inoperative, then check the LTM for DTC B117B and for PID UCH_Out set to "Active". NOTE THE PID UCH_OUT IS SET TO "INACTIVE" OR ANY OTHER DTC ARE RETRIEVED, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE, PERFORM NORMAL DIAGNOSTICS PER THE WORK SHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-03. 3. If both the DTC B117B and the PID UCH_Out equal "Active" are present, then clear the LTM memory and proceed to Step 4. 4. Reprogram the LTM module to the latest calibration using IDS release 55.13 Patch 28 and higher or 56.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 5. Initialize LTM per Work Shop Manual Section 501-03. 6. Check the operation of the power lift gate. Check for any DTCs. If lift gate operation passes from all switches and there are NO DTCs in the LTM, return the vehicle to the customer. 7. If any DTCs are present after retesting or lift gate is inoperative, from any switches, perform Work Shop Manual diagnosis per Section 501-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081405A 2007-2008 Expedition, 0.5 Hr. Navigator, Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X, 2009 Flex: Reprogram The LTM, Includes Time To Check DTCs And, Lift Gate Operation, Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B > Page 8535 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B TSB 08-14-5 07/21/08 POWER LIFT GATE INOPERATIVE - ALL FUNCTIONAL SWITCHES, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY, WITH POWER LIFT GATE TRUNK MODULE DTC B117B FORD: 2008 Taurus X 2007-2008 Edge, Expedition Ford: 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX, Navigator ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Expedition, Navigator Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X and 2009 Flex may exhibit an inoperative power lift gate from remote keyless entry, inside switches or the outside lift gate handle with a power lift gate/trunk module (LTM) with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B117B and PID UCH_OUT set to Active. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check power lift gate operation from all buttons. 2. If the power lift gate is inoperative, then check the LTM for DTC B117B and for PID UCH_Out set to "Active". NOTE THE PID UCH_OUT IS SET TO "INACTIVE" OR ANY OTHER DTC ARE RETRIEVED, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE, PERFORM NORMAL DIAGNOSTICS PER THE WORK SHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-03. 3. If both the DTC B117B and the PID UCH_Out equal "Active" are present, then clear the LTM memory and proceed to Step 4. 4. Reprogram the LTM module to the latest calibration using IDS release 55.13 Patch 28 and higher or 56.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 5. Initialize LTM per Work Shop Manual Section 501-03. 6. Check the operation of the power lift gate. Check for any DTCs. If lift gate operation passes from all switches and there are NO DTCs in the LTM, return the vehicle to the customer. 7. If any DTCs are present after retesting or lift gate is inoperative, from any switches, perform Work Shop Manual diagnosis per Section 501-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081405A 2007-2008 Expedition, 0.5 Hr. Navigator, Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X, 2009 Flex: Reprogram The LTM, Includes Time To Check DTCs And, Lift Gate Operation, Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B > Page 8541 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8542 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8543 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams C4174A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8544 C4174B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8545 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair POWER LIFTGATE MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the power liftgate motor assembly. 2. Remove the power liftgate module. - Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the 3 bolts. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair PINCH STRIP SWITCH Removal and Installation NOTE: Left side shown, right side similar. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the pinch strip electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8549 3. Remove the pinch strip. - Remove the pin-type retainers. - Remove the grommet and route the harness out of the vehicle. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair LIFTGATE TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8553 1. Remove the power liftgate rod-to-liftgate cover and nut, if equipped - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Remove the liftgate lower trim panel. - Remove the 4 screws. - Remove the liftgate lower trim panel. 3. Remove the liftgate upper trim panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch - Manual Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch - Manual LIFTGATE LATCH - MANUAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 3 liftgate latch screws. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. Remove the liftgate latch. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the liftgate latch after installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch - Manual > Page 8558 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch - Power LIFTGATE LATCH - POWER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate release switch moulding bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 3. Position the liftgate release switch molding aside. 4. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connector. 5. Remove the 3 liftgate latch screws. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 6. Remove the liftgate latch. 7. NOTE: Lubricate the liftgate latch after installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Cinching Motor C4188 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Cinching Motor > Page 8563 C4223 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Motor Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Service and Repair Power Liftgate Motor POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the power liftgate rod assembly. 2. Disconnect the power liftgate motor electrical connectors. 3. Remove the power liftgate motor retaining bolts and remove the power liftgate motor assembly. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Position the back end of the rear quarter trim out enough to access the top power liftgate motor retaining bolt. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Motor > Page 8566 Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Service and Repair Power Liftgate Rod POWER LIFTGATE ROD Material Material Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Motor > Page 8567 1. Remove the LH quarter trim panel access cover. 2. Unclip the power liftgate rod from the motor assembly. - Squeeze the clip as shown to release and position the rod assembly upward. 3. Remove the cover and the power liftgate rod-to-liftgate retaining nut. - To install, apply Threadlock 262 to the threads of the fastener and tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 3 power liftgate rod mounting bracket nuts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8572 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8573 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch C4353 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8576 C4333 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8577 C4216 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8578 C2269 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch - Manual Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Manual LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - MANUAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 5 liftgate release switch moulding nuts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. Depress the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch - Manual > Page 8581 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Power LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - POWER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 liftgate release switch moulding bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. Depress the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8586 Part 2 Removal and Installation Upper and lower cowl grille panel 1. NOTE: The upper cowl panel grille must be removed before the lower cowl panel grille can be removed. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. Upper cowl panel grille 2. Remove the RH cowl side outer panel. 3. Remove the LH cowl side outer panel. 4. Remove the 2 scrivets from the RH upper cowl panel grille. 5. Remove the 2 bolts from the RH upper cowl grille panel and remove the RH upper cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Remove the 2 scrivets from the LH upper cowl grille panel. 7. Remove the 2 bolts from the LH upper cowl grille panel and remove the LH upper cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Lower cowl panel grille 8. Remove the wiper arm and wiper pivot shaft assembly. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 bolts. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Remove the 2 bolts from the upper left lower cowl grille panel extension and remove the panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 10. Remove the 4 bolts from the upper right lower cowl panel extension and remove the panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 11. Disconnect the wiring harness from the retainer on the left front of the lower cowl grille panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8587 12. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the powertrain control module (PCM). 13. Remove the evaporative purge valve and bracket from the center of the lower cowl panel grille and set aside. 14. Remove the 5 bolts and 3 nuts from inside the lower cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 15. Remove the bolt from the lower cowl panel-to-front of dash - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 16. Remove the lower cowl grille panel and PCM from the vehicle. Upper and lower cowl grille panel 17. CAUTION: Incorrect installation of the lower/upper cowl panel grille may cause damage to the windshield. Make sure the cowl panel grille clips are located under the windshield prior to installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Transfer the components as necessary. - Adjust the pivot arms. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair FRONT END BODY PANELS - EXPLODED VIEW FENDER SPLASH SHIELD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the fender splash shield screws. 2. Remove the fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Description and Operation Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation Frame Assembly Front Subframe The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Rear Subframe The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the rear differential, if equipped. - provide a mounting surface for the sway bar. Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening concerns and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and body misalignment. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation Front Subframe: Description and Operation FRAME ASSEMBLY Front Subframe The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8601 Front Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Front Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8602 Subframe - Front (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8603 Subframe - Front (Part 2) CAUTION: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the front subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. 2. Remove the RH splash shield. 3. Remove the 3 pushpin fasteners, the 7 screws and the front splash shield. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8604 4. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Remove the 3 power steering tube bracket bolts from the RH side of the subframe and position the power steering tube aside. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8605 7. NOTE: - Use the holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. - RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar link-to-control arm nuts (1 each side) and separate the stabilizer bar links from the lower control arms. Discard the nuts - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolts and separate the lower control arms from the knuckles. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 9. Loosen the Y-pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8606 10. Remove the 4 nuts and the Y-pipe assembly. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. NOTE: The steering gear is not removed with the front subframe and must be positioned aside. Position the steering gear aside using mechanic's wire. Remove the 4 bolts and position the steering rack aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten the steering gear bolts in the sequence shown. To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 12. Remove the 4 bolts and position the stabilizer bar aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8607 13. Remove the nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 14. Remove the 3 bolts from the roll restrictor bracket. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 15. Position the lift table under the subframe. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8608 16. NOTE: - Align the front subframe index marks to the body index marks made during removal. - During installation, the subframe brackets are loosely installed with the support bracket bolts. Tighten the rear subframe nuts prior to tightening the support bracket bolts. Remove the 2 nuts, 4 bolts and the subframe support brackets. Discard the nuts and bolts. - To install, tighten the nuts to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 17. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). 18. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts and remove the subframe. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8609 19. Transfer the components as necessary. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Description and Operation Rear Subframe: Description and Operation FRAME ASSEMBLY Rear Subframe The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the rear differential, if equipped. - provide a mounting surface for the sway bar. Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening concerns and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and body misalignment. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Rear REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Subframe - Rear Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8615 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Rear Subframe Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8616 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Rear Subframe (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8617 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Rear Subframe (Part 2) CAUTION: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. If equipped, remove the bolts from the drive shaft-to-rear drive unit flange. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 3. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the rear subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8618 4. Remove the muffler and tailpipe assembly. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH wheel speed sensor connectors. 6. NOTE: All wheel drive (AWD) shown, front wheel drive (FWD) similar. Remove the connector from the front of the subframe and position aside. 7. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the rear hub spindle-to-brake caliper. To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8619 8. Remove the 2 bolts (1 each side) from the brake hose bracket. 9. Position the brake calipers aside using mechanic's wire. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake lines. 10. Remove the 2 nuts (1 each side) from the parking brake cable bracket and upper stabilizer shaft. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 11. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the parking brake cable-to-backing plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8620 - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 12. Remove the rear shock-to-trailing link lower nuts and flag bolts. - Discard the nuts and flag bolts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 13. CAUTION: - The rear subframe must be secured to the lifting table. The rear subframe may become unstable and fall from the lifting table. - Position a jackstand under the front of the vehicle to keep the vehicle from becoming unstable on the hoist. Position the lifting table under the rear subframe. 14. Remove the 4 front (2 each side) bushing brace-to-body bolts. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8621 15. Remove the 2 front (1 each side) mounting nuts from the rear subframe. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 16. NOTE: The bolts are 2 different sizes, note the location of the bolts to make sure of correct installation. Remove the 10 bolts (5 each side) from the trailing links-to-vehicle body. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 17. NOTE: The rear springs are under pressure. The lifting table must be lowered slowly to relieve the spring pressure. Remove the 2 rear mounting nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8622 18. Remove the rear subframe. 19. Transfer the components as necessary. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8623 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Bushings - Rear Differential, Rear Subframe Bushings - Differential, Rear Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8624 Removal NOTE: There are 2 rear drive unit (RDU) bushings in the rear subframe, this procedure shows how to remove one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. 1. Remove the rear drive unit. 2. NOTE: - Make sure the 204-617/2 is positioned with the larger opening toward the bushing to act as the receiver cup. - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is pointed toward the rear subframe when removing the bushing. Assemble the special tools to the rear subframe and press out the bushing. Installation NOTE: There are 2 RDU bushings in the subframe, this procedure shows how to install one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 8625 1. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks on the special tool are aligned with the anti-rotation tabs on the RDU bushing. Install the RDU bushing into the special tool. 2. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks are correctly aligned on both special tools and the anti-rotation tabs are correctly seated in the special tool. Install the special tool onto the RDU bushing. 3. NOTE: - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is visible on the bottom and facing away from the subframe. The arrow must remain straight so that the bushings are correctly indexed into the subframe. - When installing the RDU bushing, 204-617/2 will fall away as the RDU bushing is installed into the subframe. The special tool does not control the depth of the bushing, continue to tighten the nut until the RDU bushing is fully seated into the subframe. Install the RDU bushing into the subframe. 4. Install the RDU. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair RADIATOR GRILLE Edge Radiator Grille Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8629 MKX Radiator Grille Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the isolator-to-bumper cover bolts. 3. Remove the isolator-to-radiator grille reinforcement screws. 4. Remove the isolator. - Release the isolator from the clips on the bumper cover. 5. Remove the radiator grille and radiator grille reinforcement. - Release the radiator grille reinforcement from the clips on the bumper cover. 6. Remove the radiator grille-to-radiator grille reinforcement nuts and remove the radiator grille. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Diagrams C930 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console - Floor Console: Service and Repair Console - Floor CONSOLE - FLOOR Edge Floor Console Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console - Floor > Page 8636 MKX Floor Console Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Position the gear shift lever to NEUTRAL. 2. NOTE: The seats must be in the full raised position to access the bolts. Position the seats forward and remove the 2 rear bolts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 3. Remove the 2 console side panels. 4. NOTE: The seats must be in the full raised position to access the bolts. Position the seats rearward and remove the 2 side panels and 2 center bolts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. Remove the console finish panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console - Floor > Page 8637 MKX only 6. Remove the storage bin. - Remove the 2 scrivets. - Disconnect the power point electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 console front side bolts. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). All vehicles 8. Remove the 2 console-to-instrument panel bolts. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 9. Disconnect the floor console electrical connector from the lower right front wiring harness. 10. Remove the floor console. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Console - Floor > Page 8638 Console: Service and Repair Console - Overhead CONSOLE - OVERHEAD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the overhead console. - Pull downward on the overhead console. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Depowering Procedure WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connector on a side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in side air curtain module deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the (SPDJB). 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 3. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8644 exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8645 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in safety canopy deployment, which may result in personal injury. - The safety belt pretensioners are pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in pretensioner or air bag deployment which may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories off. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8646 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. 9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the instrument panel (I/P). - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8647 10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the forward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the I/P. 12. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8648 14. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. MKX 16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH I/P finish panel. 17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the I/P. 18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8649 19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly. 20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket. 21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module. 22. CAUTION: Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the I/P and rest the module on the cross vehicle beam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8650 23. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag module. 25. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 26. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag module from the glove compartment opening. All vehicles 27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8651 29. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy module. 30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 31. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8652 32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB. 34. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation All vehicles 1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector to the seat cushion frame. 4. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8653 6. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. MKX 9. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8654 Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 10. NOTE: During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the hooks are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the I/P. Raise the rear of the passenger air bag module onto the 3 mounting studs. 11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts. 1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8655 13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly. 14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly. 15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the I/P. 16. NOTE: Make sure the RH I/P finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the RH I/P finish panel. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8656 17. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 18. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 19. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). All vehicles 20. Hook the glove compartment door to the I/P. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 8657 21. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 22. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 25. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instructions may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will either: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair HEADLINER Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8661 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the digital versatile disc (DVD) player, if equipped. 3. Remove the A-pillar trim panels. See: Trim Panel 4. Remove the B-pillar trim panels. 5. Remove the C-pillar trim panels. 6. Remove the D-pillar trim panels. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the inside rear view mirror and compass, if equipped. 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the wiring harness on the LH A-pillar and remove the harness from the A-pillar. 9. Remove the overhead console, if equipped. 10. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 11. Remove the sun visors. - Remove the sun visor screws. - Remove the sun visor. Disconnect the electrical connector, if equipped. 12. Disconnect the rear washer fluid hose connector on the RH A-pillar. 13. Remove the 2 garment hangers. - Remove the screw. - Remove the garment hanger. 14. Position the liftgate weatherstrip aside. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8662 15. Disconnect the rear washer fluid hose connector on the RH D-pillar. 16. Remove the headliner rear pushpin. 17. Lower the headliner and disconnect the electrical connectors on the LH D-pillar. 18. CAUTION: To avoid bending or crimping the headliner, an assistant is required for this step. Remove the headliner through the liftgate opening. 19. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel Trim Panel: Service and Repair A-Pillar Trim Panel INTERIOR TRIM - EXPLODED VIEW Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8667 Part 2 A-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel is held in place by a clip that is snapped to the back of the panel. A new clip must be installed when installing the existing trim panel. 1. NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel is held in place by a tether that is snapped to the back of the panel. Remove the A-pillar trim panel and disconnect the tether. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8668 Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel INTERIOR TRIM - EXPLODED VIEW Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8669 Part 2 B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation 1. Position the front seats in the full forward position. 2. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover and remove the safety belt bolt. To install, tighten to 54 Nm (40 lb-ft). 3. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel. 4. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 5. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. 6. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 7. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel assist handle, if equipped. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8670 - Remove the bolt covers. - Remove the bolts. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. - Remove the screw cover. - Remove the screw. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8671 Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel INTERIOR TRIM - EXPLODED VIEW Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8672 Part 2 C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover and remove the safety belt bolt. To install, tighten to 54 Nm (40 lb-ft). 2. Remove the screw cover. 3. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Position the quarter trim panel aside to allow C-pillar trim panel removal. 5. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. - Pull outward and downward to remove the panel. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8673 Trim Panel: Service and Repair D-Pillar Trim Panel INTERIOR TRIM - EXPLODED VIEW Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8674 Part 2 D-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel. - Disengage the trim panel from the retainers. - Disconnect the speaker wire connector from the trim panel, if equipped. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8675 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Quarter Trim Panel INTERIOR TRIM - EXPLODED VIEW Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8676 Part 2 QUARTER TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation LH side with power liftgate 1. Remove the cover and the switch from the LH quarter trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the power liftgate rod-to-liftgate cover and nut. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). All vehicles 3. Remove the rear cargo load area. - Remove the foam blocks from the spare tire well. 4. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt lower anchor bolt cover for damage. If the safety belt lower anchor bolt cover does not remain in place, install a Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 8677 new cover. Remove the safety belt lower anchor bolt cover and remove the safety belt lower anchor bolt. To install, tighten to 54 Nm (40 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Make sure the pushpin retainers are removed with the quarter trim panel. Remove the RH or LH quarter trim panel. Disconnect the electrical connectors, if equipped. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. Remove the exterior door handle. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove the door window regulator and motor assembly. 4. Disconnect the door lock cylinder actuating rod. 5. Using a suitable tool, release the retaining tab and remove the front door lock cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Diagrams C500 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8687 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD CODE PROGRAMMING Programming a Personal Code and Keypad Association to Memory Seats and Mirrors (If Equipped) NOTE: - If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad inactivity, after pressing the UNLOCK control on the integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT), or after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position. - The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad. 3. Enter the new 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other. 4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the personal entry code: Pressing the 1/2 button recalls driver 1 settings - Pressing the 3/4 button recalls driver 2 settings - Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting 5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. Erasing the Personal Codes NOTE: If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad inactivity, after pressing the UNLOCK control on the IKT, or after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release. 3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button on the keypad for 2 seconds. 4. All personal codes are now erased and only the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code will work. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8688 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the upper access plug. 2. Using a long, flat blade screwdriver, or suitable tool through the upper access hole, release the rear keyless entry keypad retaining clip and position the keyless entry keypad aside. 3. Remove the keyless entry keypad. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection AUTOLOCK AND HORN CHIRP PROGRAMMING Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: - The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. - The autolock feature of the smart junction box (SJB) can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. - When programming the autolock feature using the door lock control switch method the following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning, make sure the ignition key is in the OFF position and all vehicle doors are closed. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control 3 times. 3. Turn the ignition key from the ON to the OFF position. 4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. The horn chirps once to indicate that programming mode is entered. 6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock button on the door lock control switch then the lock button. The horn chirps once if the autolocks are disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a long chirp) if the autolocks are enabled. 7. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The horn chirps once to signal that the programming is complete. Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Keyless Entry Keypad NOTE: - The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. - The autolock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and close all vehicle doors. 2. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 3. Press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 4. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn chirps once if the autolocks are disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a honk) if the autolocks are enabled. Programming the Autolock Feature Using the Instrument Cluster Message Center NOTE: - The autolock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. - The autolock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the SETUP button on the message center switch until AUTOLOCK OFF is displayed. 3. Press the RESET button to select ON or OFF. If the autolocks are enabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. If the autolocks are disabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Door Lock Control Switch NOTE: - The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autolock feature. - The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. - When programming the auto-unlock feature using the door lock control switch method the following steps must be carried out within 30 seconds or the procedure will need to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait 30 seconds between programming sessions. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning, make sure the ignition key is in the OFF position and all vehicle doors are closed. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the unlock button on the door lock control 3 times. 3. Turn the ignition key from the ON to the OFF position. 4. Press the unlock button on the door lock control switch 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. The horn chirps once to indicate that programming mode is entered. 6. To enable/disable the auto-unlock feature, press the lock button on the door lock control switch then the unlock button. The horn chirps once if auto-unlock is disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a long chirp) if auto-unlock is enabled. 7. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The horn chirps once to signal that the programming is complete. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8692 Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Keyless Entry Keypad NOTE: - The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autolock feature. - The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and close all vehicle doors. 2. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 3. Press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button. While still holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button a second time. 4. Release the 3/4 button. The horn chirps once if auto-unlock is disabled or twice (one short chirp followed by a honk) if auto-unlock is enabled. Programming the Auto-Unlock Feature Using the Instrument Cluster Message Center NOTE: - The auto-unlock feature can be activated or deactivated independently of the autolock feature. - The auto-unlock feature of the SJB can also be configured ON or OFF with the scan tool. 1. Turn the ignition key from the OFF to the ON position. 2. Press the SETUP button on the message center switch until AUTOUNLOCK OFF is displayed. 3. Press the RESET button to select ON or OFF. If auto-unlock is enabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. If auto-unlock is disabled, the message center will have brackets around the display. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Memory Activation Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Remote Memory Activation REMOTE MEMORY ACTIVATION 1. Position the driver seat and mirrors to the desired position. 2. Press the set button on the driver door panel. 3. Within 5 seconds press the 1 or 2 button on the driver door panel to associate with the driver 1 or driver 2 position. 4. Press the set button again. 5. Within 5 seconds press a button on the associated integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT). 6. Within 5 seconds press the 1 or 2 button on the driver door panel to associate with the driver 1 or driver 2 position. 7. If a second memory setting is desired, repeat the procedure with the second IKT. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Memory Activation > Page 8695 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Remote Memory Deactivation REMOTE MEMORY DEACTIVATION 1. Press the set button on the driver door panel. 2. Within 5 seconds press any button on the integrated key that you wish to deactivate and then press the set button on the driver door panel. 3. If a second memory setting is desired to be deactivated, repeat the procedure with the second integrated key. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Right Rear View 151-24 (Right Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Right Rear > Page 8701 View 151-23 (Left Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Right Rear > Page 8702 View 151-22 (Passenger Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Right Rear > Page 8703 View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front C525 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8706 C704 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8707 C603 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8708 C804 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 8713 View 151-22 (Passenger Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side C505 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8716 C605 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8717 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8718 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8719 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Open the cover, remove the screw and position the interior front door handle finish panel aside. 2. Disconnect the door lock control switch electrical connector. 3. Release the locking clips and remove the door lock control switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8724 Heated Mirror Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8725 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8730 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams C3299A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8731 C3299B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8732 C3299C C3299D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8736 C503 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRRORS - EXPLODED VIEW EXTERIOR MIRROR MOTOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exterior rear view mirror glass. 2. Remove the 3 exterior rear view mirror motor screws. 3. Disconnect the exterior rear view mirror motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the exterior rear view mirror motor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8743 C527 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8744 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8745 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8746 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door control switch bezel. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Depress the 2 locking tabs. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes PAINT CODES Vehicle Certification Label Exterior Paint Code Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8752 Exterior Paint Exterior paint codes may be listed as a 2-part code. The first set of characters identify the primary body color. The second set of characters (if applicable) identify the vehicle accent or 2-tone body color. All colors are base coat/clear coat. Exterior Color Codes G2 - Redfire - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - G5 - Alloy Gray - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - GW - Orange Crush - Ford Edge - HJ - Pewter Metallic - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - ND - Dune Pearl - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - NH - Light Sage - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - PG - Dark Amethyst - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - PH - Creme Brulee - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - PV - White Chocolate (tri-coat) - Lincoln MKX - UA - Ebony - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX Interior Trim Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8753 Interior Trim Interior trim codes are listed as a 2-part code. The first character identifies the interior trim type. The second character identifies the interior trim color. Interior Trim Type 1 - Milliken cloth bucket seats, manual adjust - Ford Edge - 2 - Milliken cloth bucket seats, power driver side - Ford Edge - 3 - Fury leather bucket seats, power driver side - Ford Edge - A - Soho leather bucket seats, power driver and passenger side - Lincoln MKX - B - Soho perforated leather bucket seats, power driver and passenger side - Lincoln MKX - C - Luxury perforated leather bucket seats - Lincoln MKX Interior Trim Color C - Camel Tan - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX - G - Graystone - Lincoln MKX - L - Medium Light Stone - Ford Edge - W - Charcoal Black - Ford Edge, Lincoln MKX Tape/Paint Stripe Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8754 Tape/Paint Stripe Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8755 Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location PAINT CODE STICKER LOCATION Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Locator The VC label is located on the left-hand door jamb. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8760 Heated Mirror Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8761 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8765 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams C3299A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8766 C3299B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8767 C3299C C3299D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Seat Control Module: Description and Operation DRIVER SEAT MODULE - MEMORY SEAT The power driver seat, power outside rear view mirrors and power adjustable pedals are controlled by the driver seat module (DSM) only when the vehicle is equipped with the programmable/recall memory option. The DSM is located on the driver seat track. This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat to 2 programmable positions. - A power driver seat position can be stored at any time. The driver must move the seat to the desired position using the driver seat switch assembly. The driver must then depress the memory SET switch which activates the memory SET switch light emitting diode (LED). Within 5 seconds (before the LED goes out), the driver must select a memory position. Memory 1 is selected by depressing memory switch 1. Memory 2 is selected by depressing memory switch 2. - If no memory switch input is received within the 5-second time limit, the operation is aborted and the memory seat position switch (set switch) LED is turned OFF. This also occurs if one of the following inputs is received during the 5-second programming limit: Driver seat control switch - Memory seat position switch (set switch) - Power adjustable pedal switch A programmed seat position can only be recalled when the transmission selector is in PARK or NEUTRAL with the ignition switch in the RUN position. A position may be programmed at any time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8774 Power Seat Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8775 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B TSB 08-14-5 07/21/08 POWER LIFT GATE INOPERATIVE - ALL FUNCTIONAL SWITCHES, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY, WITH POWER LIFT GATE TRUNK MODULE DTC B117B FORD: 2008 Taurus X 2007-2008 Edge, Expedition Ford: 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX, Navigator ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Expedition, Navigator Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X and 2009 Flex may exhibit an inoperative power lift gate from remote keyless entry, inside switches or the outside lift gate handle with a power lift gate/trunk module (LTM) with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B117B and PID UCH_OUT set to Active. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check power lift gate operation from all buttons. 2. If the power lift gate is inoperative, then check the LTM for DTC B117B and for PID UCH_Out set to "Active". NOTE THE PID UCH_OUT IS SET TO "INACTIVE" OR ANY OTHER DTC ARE RETRIEVED, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE, PERFORM NORMAL DIAGNOSTICS PER THE WORK SHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-03. 3. If both the DTC B117B and the PID UCH_Out equal "Active" are present, then clear the LTM memory and proceed to Step 4. 4. Reprogram the LTM module to the latest calibration using IDS release 55.13 Patch 28 and higher or 56.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 5. Initialize LTM per Work Shop Manual Section 501-03. 6. Check the operation of the power lift gate. Check for any DTCs. If lift gate operation passes from all switches and there are NO DTCs in the LTM, return the vehicle to the customer. 7. If any DTCs are present after retesting or lift gate is inoperative, from any switches, perform Work Shop Manual diagnosis per Section 501-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081405A 2007-2008 Expedition, 0.5 Hr. Navigator, Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X, 2009 Flex: Reprogram The LTM, Includes Time To Check DTCs And, Lift Gate Operation, Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B > Page 8784 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B TSB 08-14-5 07/21/08 POWER LIFT GATE INOPERATIVE - ALL FUNCTIONAL SWITCHES, REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY, WITH POWER LIFT GATE TRUNK MODULE DTC B117B FORD: 2008 Taurus X 2007-2008 Edge, Expedition Ford: 2009 Flex LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX, Navigator ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Expedition, Navigator Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X and 2009 Flex may exhibit an inoperative power lift gate from remote keyless entry, inside switches or the outside lift gate handle with a power lift gate/trunk module (LTM) with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B117B and PID UCH_OUT set to Active. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check power lift gate operation from all buttons. 2. If the power lift gate is inoperative, then check the LTM for DTC B117B and for PID UCH_Out set to "Active". NOTE THE PID UCH_OUT IS SET TO "INACTIVE" OR ANY OTHER DTC ARE RETRIEVED, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE, PERFORM NORMAL DIAGNOSTICS PER THE WORK SHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-03. 3. If both the DTC B117B and the PID UCH_Out equal "Active" are present, then clear the LTM memory and proceed to Step 4. 4. Reprogram the LTM module to the latest calibration using IDS release 55.13 Patch 28 and higher or 56.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 5. Initialize LTM per Work Shop Manual Section 501-03. 6. Check the operation of the power lift gate. Check for any DTCs. If lift gate operation passes from all switches and there are NO DTCs in the LTM, return the vehicle to the customer. 7. If any DTCs are present after retesting or lift gate is inoperative, from any switches, perform Work Shop Manual diagnosis per Section 501-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081405A 2007-2008 Expedition, 0.5 Hr. Navigator, Edge, MKX, 2008 Taurus X, 2009 Flex: Reprogram The LTM, Includes Time To Check DTCs And, Lift Gate Operation, Authorization Decal Not Required (Do Not Use With 12650D, Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 08-14-5 > Jul > 08 > Body - Power Liftgate Inoperative/DTC B117B > Page 8790 12651D, 12651D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE RECAL 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8791 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8792 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams C4174A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8793 C4174B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8794 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair POWER LIFTGATE MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the power liftgate motor assembly. 2. Remove the power liftgate module. - Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the 3 bolts. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Heated Seat Module View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 8799 View 151-20 (Rear Seats) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 8800 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 8801 Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 8802 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 8803 Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 8804 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module C329 C3162 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 8807 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Module, Passenger Side C3036A C3036B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 8808 C3036C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 8809 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module C3322 C3326 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 8810 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module C3327 C3328 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Controlled Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Climate Controlled Seat Module CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT MODULE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - When installing a new climate control seat module (CCSM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Before removing the climate control seat module (CCSM), carry out the appropriate steps in the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure. 2. Position the front passenger seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 3. Depower the SRS. 4. Remove the front passenger seat. 5. Remove the CCSM. - Disconnect the 3 electrical connectors. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the CCSM. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 8. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. 9. Install the CCSM software data. Carry out the appropriate steps in the PMI procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Controlled Seat Module > Page 8813 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Heated Seat Module Front HEATED SEAT MODULE - FRONT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Position the front passenger seat to access the heated seat module. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. From under the front of the front passenger seat, remove the heated seat module. - Vehicles with power seat track, remove the 2 screws and lower the bracket (if equipped). - Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector. - Remove the screw and heated seat module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Rear HEATED SEAT MODULE - REAR SEAT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the second row 60 percent seat front riser-to-floor nut and bolt. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 2. Pivot the front of the 60 percent seat cushion upward. 3. Remove the screw, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the heated seat module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair Luggage Rack: Service and Repair ROOF RACK Removal and Installation NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8818 1. Remove the rear roof rack bolt cover. - Lift upward on the rear of the bolt cover and then pull rearward. 2. Remove the front roof rack bolt cover. - Lift upward on the front of the bolt cover and then pull forward. 3. Remove the 2 front roof rack bolts. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the 2 rear roof rack bolts. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8819 5. NOTE: The roof rack side rail has a tab located at the front of the ditch moulding and it is installed under the windshield moulding. When installing the roof rack side rail, start at the front of the vehicle and work toward the rear. Remove the roof rack side rail. Start at the rear of the roof rack side rail working toward the front of the vehicle. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - The 4 roof rack bolts are installed in a specific order starting with the front bolt and working toward the rear of the vehicle. The bolts must be installed in that order to make sure the roof rack side rail is correctly aligned. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8824 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8825 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8826 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8827 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8828 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8829 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8830 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8831 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8832 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Front and rear shade assembly 1. Move the glass to the fully CLOSED position. 2. Remove the headliner. Front shade assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8833 3. NOTE: The shade is under spring tension. Depress the tabs and slide the guide bar (leading edge of shade) forward to release it from the mechanism guide shoes and allow the shade to retract completely. 4. Remove the 2 front sunshade carrier outer screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 2 front sunshade carrier center screws and the front sunshade assembly. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Rear shade assembly 6. Open the rear shade to the half open position. 7. NOTE: - Front guide shown, rear similar. - The shade is under spring tension. Depress the tabs and slide the guide bar (leading edge of shade) forward to release it from the mechanism guide shoes and allow the shade to retract completely. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8834 8. Remove the 2 rear sunshade carrier-to-housing screws and the rear sunshade assembly. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Front and rear shade assembly 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-28 (Roof - With Panoramic Vista Roof) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8838 C920 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR - SHADES Removal and Installation CAUTION: The roof opening panel shade motor contains ceramic magnets that may fail at any time if cracked. Any roof opening panel shade motor that has been dropped onto a hard surface during removal or installation should be replaced with a new motor. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: During installation, it may be necessary to rotate the motor clockwise or counterclockwise for the gear teeth to set into the drive cable correctly. Remove the 3 motor screws and the motor assembly. To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8841 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor Block and Drive Tube Assembly - Shades ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR BLOCK AND DRIVE TUBE ASSEMBLY - SHADES Removal NOTE: There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole becomes stripped during installation. 1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. 2. Remove the front and rear shade assemblies. 3. Remove the roof opening panel shade motor. 4. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass motor. 5. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms and shade mechanisms rearward. 6. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws. 7. NOTE: Make note of all the cable wrap locations, they must be reinstalled at the exact same locations. Cut cable wraps to the shade motor block and drive tube assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8842 8. NOTE: - LH shown, RH similar. - Carefully mark the location of each guide track in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The guide tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. Remove the LH and RH rear 12 front guide track-to-housing screws. 9. NOTE: - Carefully mark the location of each shade track in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The shade tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. - LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH 6 rear shade track-to-housing screws. 10. CAUTION: Support the sliding glass motor block and drive tube assembly. NOTE: Protect the vehicle interior from cable grease. With the rear of the front guide tracks lowered, carefully pull the front shade guide feet out of the rear of the front guide tracks to release the cable. Remove the shade tracks and the motor block and tube assembly as one unit. 11. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH rear shade track-to-drive tube bracket screws and pull the motor block tube out of the shade track. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8843 12. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH rear shade track stop screws. 13. NOTE: If installing a new LH or RH rear shade track, use the cable supplied with the replacement unit. Pull the shade cables through the front of the shade track assemblies. Installation 1. NOTE: If installing a new LH or RH rear shade track, use the cable supplied with the replacement unit. Feed the shade cables through the front of the shade track assemblies. 2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the LH and RH rear shade track stop screws. 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Push the shade motor block tubes into the rear of the shade track assemblies and install the LH and RH rear shade track-to-drive tube bracket screws. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. NOTE: - Protect the vehicle interior from cable grease. - Make sure the front drive tubes are seated fully into the front guide tracks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8844 Holding the shade tracks and the motor block and tube assembly as one unit, insert the front shade cables into the mechanisms. Move the mechanisms fully into the front guide tracks. 5. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the center rear shade track-to-housing screws but do not tighten at this time. 6. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the LH and RH 12 front guide track-to-housing screws. Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 7. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the remaining 4 rear shade track-to-housing screws. Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8845 8. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. NOTE: - Be careful not to overtighten cable wraps during assembly to prevent crimping the cable sheath. - The cable wraps must be reinstalled at the exact same locations. Install new cable wraps to the shade motor block and drive tube assembly. 10. NOTE: Do not install the headliner at this time. Install the front and rear shade assemblies but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization at this time. Shades. 11. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms forward until they are flush against the track hard-stops. 12. NOTE: Do not install the headliner at this time. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. 13. Carefully move the front and rear shades rearward to the fully OPEN position by pushing at the edges closest to the tracks. 14. Install the roof opening panel shade motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. 15. With the roof opening sliding glass panel still removed, initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). 16. NOTE: - Press the glass open switch to move the mechanisms rearward to allow installation of the sliding glass panel. - It will be necessary to carry out the initialization procedure again after the glass panel is installed. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8846 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor Block and Drive Tube Assembly - Sliding Front Panel ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR BLOCK AND DRIVE TUBE ASSEMBLY - SLIDING FRONT PANEL Removal NOTE: There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole becomes stripped during installation. 1. Remove the roof opening sliding glass panel. 2. Remove the front and rear shade assemblies. 3. Remove the roof opening panel shade motor. 4. Remove the roof opening sliding glass panel motor. 5. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms and shade mechanisms rearward. 6. NOTE: Make note of all the cable wrap locations, they must be reinstalled at the exact same locations. Cut cable wraps to the motor block and drive tube assembly and wiring harness. 7. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the front drive tube bracket-to-guide track screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8847 8. NOTE: Carefully mark the location of each guide track in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The guide tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH rear 12 front track-to-housing screws. 9. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws. 10. NOTE: - Carefully mark the location of each shade track in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The shade tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. - LH shown, RH similar. - Support the shade track and shade motor block and tube assembly. Remove the LH and RH 6 rear shade track-to-housing screws. 11. NOTE: Protect the vehicle interior from cable grease. Carefully pull the sliding glass front drive tube brackets out of the guide tracks. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8848 12. NOTE: - It is only necessary to pull the mechanisms halfway out of the guide tracks to disengage the cables. If the mechanisms are completely removed from the track, they will need to be reassembled first. - LH shown, RH similar. With the rear of the front guide tracks lowered, carefully pull the front sliding glass mechanisms halfway out of the guide tracks to disconnect the drive cables and remove the motor block and tube assembly. Installation 1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Insert the drive cables into the sliding glass mechanisms and insert the mechanisms completely into the guide tracks. 2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the center rear shade track-to-housing screws but do not tighten at this time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8849 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the LH and RH 12 front guide track-to-housing screws. Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the front drive tube bracket-to-guide track screws. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the remaining 4 rear shade track-to-housing screws. Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten all shade track-to-housing screws to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 6. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8850 Install the LH and RH rear drive tube bracket-to-housing screws. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 7. NOTE: - Be careful not to overtighten cable wraps during assembly to prevent crimping the cable sheath. - The cable wraps must be reinstalled at the exact same locations. Install new cable wraps to the shade motor block and drive tube assembly. 8. NOTE: Do not install the headliner at this time. Install the front and rear shade assemblies but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization at this time. 9. Manually move the sliding front glass mechanisms forward until they are flush against the track hard-stops. 10. NOTE: Do not install the headliner at this time. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. 11. Carefully move the front and rear shades rearward to the fully OPEN position by pushing at the edges closest to the tracks. 12. Install the roof opening panel shade motor but do not carry out the initialization at this time. 13. With the roof opening sliding glass panel still removed, initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). 14. NOTE: - Press the glass open switch to move the mechanisms rearward to allow installation of the sliding glass panel. - It will be necessary to carry out the initialization procedure again after the glass panel is installed. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Motor - Shades > Page 8851 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor - Sliding Front Panel ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR - SLIDING FRONT PANEL Removal and Installation CAUTION: The roof opening panel sliding glass motor contains ceramic magnets that may fail at any time if cracked. Any roof opening panel sliding glass motor that has been dropped onto a hard surface during removal or installation should be replaced with a new motor. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: During installation, it may be necessary to rotate the motor clockwise or counterclockwise for the gear teeth to set into the drive cable correctly, Remove the 3 motor screws and the motor assembly. To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-28 (Roof - With Panoramic Vista Roof) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8855 C912 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8856 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the overhead console. 2. Disengage the clips and remove the switch from the overhead console. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding TSB 07-25-4 12/24/07 ROOF OPENING PANEL SLOW OR STICKING/BINDING OPERATION FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles equipped with a roof opening panel and built before 8/1/2007 may experience a roof opening panel operating slow or sticking. This may be caused by the roof opening panel guide tracks being out of specification. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove roof opening panel guide track mechanism following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-17. 2. Remove both ditch moldings and clip strips. (Figure 1) 3. Remove both side panel end caps. (Figure 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8865 4. Tape painted roof area next to panels to prevent damage to paint. (Figure 3) 5. Remove and discard both roof opening panel trims. CAUTION MAKE SURE THE CUTTING BLADES ARE CHANGED WHERE THE CUTTING DEPTH CHANGES TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE BODY OR GLASS. NOTE LUBRICATE THE URETHANE ADHESIVE WITH WATER TO AID THE SPECIAL TOOL WHEN CUTTING THE URETHANE ADHESIVE. a. Cut the urethane adhesive with a pneumatic knife and remove. (Figure 4) 6. Carefully mark the location of both idler tracks in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The new idler tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. Left hand shown, right hand similar. 7. Remove the six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws. (Figure 5) There is a special Replacement Screw available if a screw hole becomes stripped Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8866 during installation. For additional information, WSM, Section 501-17. 8. Completely loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws. The screws will be captured inside the track rail. In some cases it may be necessary to lift rails to completely remove screws from roof threads to allow idler track removal. (Figure 6) 9. Slide idler track rearward to disengage the idler track from the front clip. 10. Remove the idler track. 11. Remove the two (2) center screws from the idler track and install back into the roof opening module. Hand tighten the two (2) center screws. 12. Repeat Steps 6 through 10 for the opposite side idler track. 13. Trim urethane adhesive to 0.01" (0.5 mm) base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface. 14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening module surface. 15. Touch up scratches on roof opening module from cutting old panels off. Refer to WSM, Section 501-35 Restoring Corrosion Protection Following Repair. 16. Modify new idler tracks prior to installation. (Figure 7) a. Locate the screw head access in the new idler tracks. b. Measure and mark at the screw head access, 2 clearance slots on the inside edge of each new idler track, 1/2" (13 mm) wide and 3/16" (5 mm) deep. c. Cut slots using a small die grinder or equivalent. View shows after modification of a new idler track. (Figure 7) 17. Install the new idler tracks. a. Using slots, position new idler track into module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8867 18. Loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws and slide new idler track into proper position. Loosen screws only to allow idler track to slide, do not remove. 19. Install and tighten remaining six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 20. Tighten the two (2) center rear idler track to housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 21. Repeat Steps 16 through 19 for the opposite side idler track. 22. Install roof opening panel guide track mechanism following WSM, Section 501-17. NOTE DO NOT INSTALL ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIMS AT THIS TIME. 23. Test operation of roof opening panel and adjust as necessary. CAUTION WHEN INSTALLING URETHANE-INSTALLED PARTS, THE VEHICLE MUST NOT BE DRIVEN UNTIL THE URETHANE HAS CURED. ADEQUATE CURE TIME IS SPECIFIED ON THE DRIVE AWAY CHART FOR EACH URETHANE PRODUCT AS THE TEMPERATURES AND HUMIDITY VARY. INADEQUATE OR INCORRECT CURING CAN ADVERSELY AFFECT THE RETENTION OF THE TRIM PANEL . NOTE BE SURE TO USE THE SAME BRAND OF CURE-RATE PRODUCTS FOR THE ADHESIVE AND PRIMER. DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT BRANDS OF URETHANE AND PRIMER. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-17. 24. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification. (Figure 8) NOTE USE EITHER A HIGH-RATIO, ELECTRIC OR BATTERY-OPERATED CAULK GUN THAT WILL APPLY THE URETHANE WITH LESS EFFORT AND A CONTINUOUS BEAD. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8868 25. Apply a smooth continuous bead of urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. (Figure 9) 26. Insert the front of the trim panel into the front trim seal then rotate the rear of the side trim panel down to engage. Apply the side trim panel assembly to the roof module. (Figure 10) 27. Install both side panel end caps. 28. Install the clip strip and ditch moldings. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072504A 2007 Edge AWD, FWD, 6.0 Hrs. 2007 MKX AWD, FWD: Replace Roof Opening Panel Idler Tracks, Includes Time to Cut Slots in New Idler Tracks and Replace Roof Opening Panel Side Trim. Remove and Install ditch molding, Headliner, Pillar and Quarter Trim Panels, Roof Opening Panel Glass, Shade and Motor, Adjust Roof Panel Glass and Re-initialize Motor. (Do Not Use With 50282B, 51902A, 15790A, 04104A, 51916B, 31012A, 15790A, 14056D, 51916A, 50222A) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8869 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851070 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding Sunroof / Moonroof Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding TSB 07-25-4 12/24/07 ROOF OPENING PANEL SLOW OR STICKING/BINDING OPERATION FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Edge and MKX vehicles equipped with a roof opening panel and built before 8/1/2007 may experience a roof opening panel operating slow or sticking. This may be caused by the roof opening panel guide tracks being out of specification. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove roof opening panel guide track mechanism following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-17. 2. Remove both ditch moldings and clip strips. (Figure 1) 3. Remove both side panel end caps. (Figure 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8875 4. Tape painted roof area next to panels to prevent damage to paint. (Figure 3) 5. Remove and discard both roof opening panel trims. CAUTION MAKE SURE THE CUTTING BLADES ARE CHANGED WHERE THE CUTTING DEPTH CHANGES TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE BODY OR GLASS. NOTE LUBRICATE THE URETHANE ADHESIVE WITH WATER TO AID THE SPECIAL TOOL WHEN CUTTING THE URETHANE ADHESIVE. a. Cut the urethane adhesive with a pneumatic knife and remove. (Figure 4) 6. Carefully mark the location of both idler tracks in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The new idler tracks must be installed in exactly the same position. Left hand shown, right hand similar. 7. Remove the six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws. (Figure 5) There is a special Replacement Screw available if a screw hole becomes stripped Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8876 during installation. For additional information, WSM, Section 501-17. 8. Completely loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws. The screws will be captured inside the track rail. In some cases it may be necessary to lift rails to completely remove screws from roof threads to allow idler track removal. (Figure 6) 9. Slide idler track rearward to disengage the idler track from the front clip. 10. Remove the idler track. 11. Remove the two (2) center screws from the idler track and install back into the roof opening module. Hand tighten the two (2) center screws. 12. Repeat Steps 6 through 10 for the opposite side idler track. 13. Trim urethane adhesive to 0.01" (0.5 mm) base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface. 14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening module surface. 15. Touch up scratches on roof opening module from cutting old panels off. Refer to WSM, Section 501-35 Restoring Corrosion Protection Following Repair. 16. Modify new idler tracks prior to installation. (Figure 7) a. Locate the screw head access in the new idler tracks. b. Measure and mark at the screw head access, 2 clearance slots on the inside edge of each new idler track, 1/2" (13 mm) wide and 3/16" (5 mm) deep. c. Cut slots using a small die grinder or equivalent. View shows after modification of a new idler track. (Figure 7) 17. Install the new idler tracks. a. Using slots, position new idler track into module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8877 18. Loosen the two (2) center rear idler track-to-housing screws and slide new idler track into proper position. Loosen screws only to allow idler track to slide, do not remove. 19. Install and tighten remaining six (6) rear idler track-to-housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 20. Tighten the two (2) center rear idler track to housing screws to 35 lb-in (4 N.m). 21. Repeat Steps 16 through 19 for the opposite side idler track. 22. Install roof opening panel guide track mechanism following WSM, Section 501-17. NOTE DO NOT INSTALL ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIMS AT THIS TIME. 23. Test operation of roof opening panel and adjust as necessary. CAUTION WHEN INSTALLING URETHANE-INSTALLED PARTS, THE VEHICLE MUST NOT BE DRIVEN UNTIL THE URETHANE HAS CURED. ADEQUATE CURE TIME IS SPECIFIED ON THE DRIVE AWAY CHART FOR EACH URETHANE PRODUCT AS THE TEMPERATURES AND HUMIDITY VARY. INADEQUATE OR INCORRECT CURING CAN ADVERSELY AFFECT THE RETENTION OF THE TRIM PANEL . NOTE BE SURE TO USE THE SAME BRAND OF CURE-RATE PRODUCTS FOR THE ADHESIVE AND PRIMER. DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT BRANDS OF URETHANE AND PRIMER. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-17. 24. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification. (Figure 8) NOTE USE EITHER A HIGH-RATIO, ELECTRIC OR BATTERY-OPERATED CAULK GUN THAT WILL APPLY THE URETHANE WITH LESS EFFORT AND A CONTINUOUS BEAD. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8878 25. Apply a smooth continuous bead of urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. (Figure 9) 26. Insert the front of the trim panel into the front trim seal then rotate the rear of the side trim panel down to engage. Apply the side trim panel assembly to the roof module. (Figure 10) 27. Install both side panel end caps. 28. Install the clip strip and ditch moldings. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072504A 2007 Edge AWD, FWD, 6.0 Hrs. 2007 MKX AWD, FWD: Replace Roof Opening Panel Idler Tracks, Includes Time to Cut Slots in New Idler Tracks and Replace Roof Opening Panel Side Trim. Remove and Install ditch molding, Headliner, Pillar and Quarter Trim Panels, Roof Opening Panel Glass, Shade and Motor, Adjust Roof Panel Glass and Re-initialize Motor. (Do Not Use With 50282B, 51902A, 15790A, 04104A, 51916B, 31012A, 15790A, 14056D, 51916A, 50222A) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Track: > 07-25-4 > Dec > 07 > Body - Sunroof Slow Operation/Sticking/Binding > Page 8879 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851070 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8882 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8883 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8884 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8885 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8886 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8887 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8888 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8889 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8890 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL SHADE TRACK AND MECHANISM Removal and Installation NOTE: This procedure is for the rear shade track only. To service the front shade track, refer to Roof Opening Panel Guide Track and Mechanism. 1. The shade track and mechanisms are removed as an assembly with the shade motor block and drive tube assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8891 Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Guide Track and Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8892 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8893 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8894 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8895 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8896 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8897 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8898 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8899 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8900 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL GUIDE TRACK AND MECHANISM Removal NOTE: There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole becomes stripped during installation. 1. Remove the roof opening panel blind. 2. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. 3. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8901 Remove the air deflector-to-track screw and air deflector arm capture plate on the affected track. 4. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the air deflector catcher bracket outer screw on the affected track. 5. Remove the front shade assembly. 6. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass motor. 7. Move the sliding glass mechanism to the full forward position on the affected track. 8. Remove the front drive tube bracket-to-guide-track screw. 9. NOTE: Carefully mark the location of the guide track in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The new guide track must be installed in exactly the same position. Remove the 8 front track-to-housing screws. 10. CAUTION: Protect the vehicle interior from grease when cable assembly is withdrawn from the drive tube. Drop the front of the guide track down while sliding the entire track and mechanism assembly forward and down. The drive cable will slowly withdraw from the drive tube until the entire assembly is free. Installation 1. CAUTION: Protect the vehicle interior from grease when cable assembly is inserted into the drive tube. While holding the track and mechanism assembly, slowly insert the sliding glass drive cable into the drive tube. Insert the shade cable into the Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8902 track and make sure the front drive tube bracket is fully seated into the track assembly. 2. Install the 8 front track-to-housing screws. - Align the track to the marks previously made. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Install the front drive tube bracket-to-guide-track screw. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the air deflector catcher bracket outer screw on the affected track. Tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Install the air deflector-to-track screw and air deflector arm capture plate on the affected track. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8903 - NOTE: If the nut plate(s) becomes stripped during installation, a new nut plate can be installed. Tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 6. Attach the bottom of the concertina blind to the guide track in the most forward position. 7. NOTE: Do not install the headliner at this time. Install the front shade assembly but do not carry out the roof opening panel motor initialization. 8. Re-time the roof opening panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8904 Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Idler Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8905 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8906 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8907 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8908 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8909 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8910 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8911 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8912 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8913 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL IDLER TRACK MECHANISM Removal and Installation 1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. 2. Remove the roof opening panel side trim. 3. Carefully slide the idler link forward and out of the front of the track. 4. CAUTION: Make sure the idler mechanism guide shoes are compressed and aligned correctly during installation. The guide shoes Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8914 cannot be serviced separately. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8915 Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Idler Track and Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8916 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8917 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8918 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8919 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8920 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8921 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8922 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8923 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8924 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL IDLER TRACK AND MECHANISM Removal and Installation NOTE: There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole becomes stripped during installation. 1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. 2. Remove the roof opening panel side trim. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Shade Track and Mechanism > Page 8925 3. CAUTION: Carefully mark the location of the idler track in 3 places before removing any fasteners. The new idler track must be installed in exactly the same position. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the 6 rear idler track-to-housing screws. To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 4. Completely loosen the 2 center rear idler track-to-housing screws. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 5. Slide track rearward to disengage front clip and remove assembly. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8929 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8930 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8931 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8932 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8933 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8934 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8935 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8936 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8937 Front Guide Track Mechanism AIR DEFLECTOR Removal and Installation NOTE: There may be a special service replacement fastener available if a screw hole becomes stripped during installation. 1. Position the roof opening panel glass to the full OPEN position. 2. Remove the 2 air deflector-to-track screws and air deflector arm capture plate. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8938 - NOTE: If the nut plate(s) becomes stripped during installation, a new nut plate can be installed. To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. Remove the 6 air deflector catcher bracket screws. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 4. Remove the air deflector assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Customer Interest Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel TSB 07-16-11 08/20/07 ROOF OPENING PANEL SQUEAK/RATTLE FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles equipped with a roof opening panel may exhibit a rattle or squeak from the rear glass area. This may be caused by the delamination of the rear trim ring hook and loop (Velcro) adhesive. Inspect the rear trim ring and if loose, determine if the loop tape has delaminated from the plastic trim ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If delamination of the hook and loop has occurred, use the following procedure to correct the concern. If no delamination has occurred, follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04 diagnostics. 1. Remove rear trim ring per WSM, Section 501-17. 2. Inspect all loop tape locations for delamination. (Figure 1) 3. Remove all delaminated loop tape from module. (Figure 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 8947 4. Clean trim ring attachment surface with a Isopropyl Alcohol or Rubbing Alcohol (IPA) wipe (Figure 3). 5. Allow surface to dry. 6. Apply Motorcraft(R) Instant Gel Adhesive to trim ring surface. (Figures 4 and 5) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 8948 Apply loop pad to trim ring. (Figure 6) 8. Allow adhesive to dry per Motorcraft® Instant Gel Adhesive recommendation. 9. Reinstall trim ring to vehicle per WSM, Section 501-17. 10. Clean roof opening panel glass with Motorcraft(R) Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner or equivalent. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071611A 2007 Edge/MKX With Roof 0.4 Hr. Opening Panel: Reapply Loop And Pad To Trim Ring, Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Ring, Clean Glass DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7050036 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel TSB 07-16-11 08/20/07 ROOF OPENING PANEL SQUEAK/RATTLE FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles equipped with a roof opening panel may exhibit a rattle or squeak from the rear glass area. This may be caused by the delamination of the rear trim ring hook and loop (Velcro) adhesive. Inspect the rear trim ring and if loose, determine if the loop tape has delaminated from the plastic trim ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If delamination of the hook and loop has occurred, use the following procedure to correct the concern. If no delamination has occurred, follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04 diagnostics. 1. Remove rear trim ring per WSM, Section 501-17. 2. Inspect all loop tape locations for delamination. (Figure 1) 3. Remove all delaminated loop tape from module. (Figure 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 8954 4. Clean trim ring attachment surface with a Isopropyl Alcohol or Rubbing Alcohol (IPA) wipe (Figure 3). 5. Allow surface to dry. 6. Apply Motorcraft(R) Instant Gel Adhesive to trim ring surface. (Figures 4 and 5) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 8955 Apply loop pad to trim ring. (Figure 6) 8. Allow adhesive to dry per Motorcraft® Instant Gel Adhesive recommendation. 9. Reinstall trim ring to vehicle per WSM, Section 501-17. 10. Clean roof opening panel glass with Motorcraft(R) Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner or equivalent. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071611A 2007 Edge/MKX With Roof 0.4 Hr. Opening Panel: Reapply Loop And Pad To Trim Ring, Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Ring, Clean Glass DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7050036 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8958 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8959 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8960 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8961 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8962 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8963 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8964 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8965 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8966 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIM - FIXED GLASS, INTERIOR Removal and Installation 1. Position the sunshade(s) to the fully OPEN position. 2. Carefully bend/pry the trim ring from its hook-and-loop tape pads. 3. NOTE: A piece of paper may assist in keeping the hook-and-loop tape from sticking while aligning the trim ring. Once the trim ring is in position (front and rear locating pins lined up), remove the paper and press the trim firmly in place. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8967 Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Trim - Front ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8968 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8969 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8970 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8971 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8972 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8973 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8974 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8975 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8976 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIM - FRONT Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8977 Special Tool(s) Material Material Removal 1. Position the roof opening sliding glass panel to the fully OPEN position. 2. Remove the antenna. 3. NOTE: A new roof opening panel front trim seal is supplied with the new front trim panel. Remove the roof opening panel front trim seal. 4. CAUTION: Make sure the cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to avoid damage to the body, trim panels or windshield moulding. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting the urethane adhesive. Using the special tool, place the flat side of the knife against the roof module. Refer to the adhesive path illustration and begin cutting at the center of the front trim panel and work through towards the opposite corners. 5. Rotate the trim panel up and forward to clear the side trim panel. Cut off or bend the 2 steel alignment tabs if necessary. 6. Remove the front trim panel assembly and discard. Installation CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed parts, the vehicle must not be driven until the urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of the trim panel. NOTE: For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation information. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8978 1. NOTE: Avoid scratching the painted surfaces. For minor scratches or exposed metal, see the manufacturer's recommendations. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive and pads leaving no more than 0.5 mm (0.01 in) base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface. 2. NOTE: Make sure the water channel is free from any foreign material. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening panel module. Clean residual adhesive tape from the housing using a suitable cleaner. 3. CAUTION: Be sure to use the same brand of cure-rate products for the adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification. 4. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. 5. CAUTION: Make sure the windshield moulding does not get pinched under the front trim panel. The windshield moulding should be pulled over the top of the leading edge of the trim panel during installation. NOTE: Position front trim panel to best overall appearance. Apply the front trim panel assembly to the roof module. Work the trim panel down using only vertical pressure. 6. Install the antenna. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8979 Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Trim - Side ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8980 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8981 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8982 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8983 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8984 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8985 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8986 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8987 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8988 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL TRIM - SIDE Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8989 Special Tool(s) Material Material Removal 1. Remove the ditch mouldings and clip strip. 2. Remove the end cap. 3. NOTE: If installing a new roof opening panel side trim panel, the trim panel seal is supplied with the new trim panel. Remove the roof opening panel side trim seal. 4. CAUTION: Make sure the cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to avoid damage to the body or glass panel seals. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting the urethane adhesive. Using the special tool, place the flat side of the knife against the roof module. - Distance the side trim panel from the roof module as needed. - Position the sliding glass panel as required for necessary access. Refer to the adhesive path illustration and begin cutting at the rear corner of the side trim panel and work forward through all urethane and rubber net pads. 5. Rotate the rear of the side trim panel upward to unlatch from the front trim assembly. Remove the side trim panel. Installation CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed parts, the vehicle must not be driven until the urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of the trim panel. NOTE: For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation information. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Trim - Fixed Glass, Interior > Page 8990 1. NOTE: Avoid scratching the painted surfaces. For minor scratches or exposed metal, see the manufacturer's recommendations. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving no more than 0.5 mm (0.01 in) base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface. 2. NOTE: Make sure the water channel is free from any foreign material. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening panel module. 3. CAUTION: Be sure to use the same brand of cure-rate products for the adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the Materials Chart in this procedure. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification. 4. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. 5. NOTE: Position side trim panel to best overall appearance. Insert the front of the trim panel into the front trim seal then rotate the rear of the side trim panel down to engage. Apply the side trim panel assembly to the roof module. 6. Install the end cap. 7. Work the glass panel down using only vertical pressure. 8. Install the ditch mouldings and clip strip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Customer Interest Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel TSB 07-16-11 08/20/07 ROOF OPENING PANEL SQUEAK/RATTLE FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles equipped with a roof opening panel may exhibit a rattle or squeak from the rear glass area. This may be caused by the delamination of the rear trim ring hook and loop (Velcro) adhesive. Inspect the rear trim ring and if loose, determine if the loop tape has delaminated from the plastic trim ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If delamination of the hook and loop has occurred, use the following procedure to correct the concern. If no delamination has occurred, follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04 diagnostics. 1. Remove rear trim ring per WSM, Section 501-17. 2. Inspect all loop tape locations for delamination. (Figure 1) 3. Remove all delaminated loop tape from module. (Figure 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 8999 4. Clean trim ring attachment surface with a Isopropyl Alcohol or Rubbing Alcohol (IPA) wipe (Figure 3). 5. Allow surface to dry. 6. Apply Motorcraft(R) Instant Gel Adhesive to trim ring surface. (Figures 4 and 5) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 9000 Apply loop pad to trim ring. (Figure 6) 8. Allow adhesive to dry per Motorcraft® Instant Gel Adhesive recommendation. 9. Reinstall trim ring to vehicle per WSM, Section 501-17. 10. Clean roof opening panel glass with Motorcraft(R) Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner or equivalent. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071611A 2007 Edge/MKX With Roof 0.4 Hr. Opening Panel: Reapply Loop And Pad To Trim Ring, Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Ring, Clean Glass DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7050036 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel TSB 07-16-11 08/20/07 ROOF OPENING PANEL SQUEAK/RATTLE FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some 2007 Ford Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles equipped with a roof opening panel may exhibit a rattle or squeak from the rear glass area. This may be caused by the delamination of the rear trim ring hook and loop (Velcro) adhesive. Inspect the rear trim ring and if loose, determine if the loop tape has delaminated from the plastic trim ring. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If delamination of the hook and loop has occurred, use the following procedure to correct the concern. If no delamination has occurred, follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04 diagnostics. 1. Remove rear trim ring per WSM, Section 501-17. 2. Inspect all loop tape locations for delamination. (Figure 1) 3. Remove all delaminated loop tape from module. (Figure 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 9006 4. Clean trim ring attachment surface with a Isopropyl Alcohol or Rubbing Alcohol (IPA) wipe (Figure 3). 5. Allow surface to dry. 6. Apply Motorcraft(R) Instant Gel Adhesive to trim ring surface. (Figures 4 and 5) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: > 07-16-11 > Aug > 07 > Body - Rattle/Squeak From Roof Opening Panel > Page 9007 Apply loop pad to trim ring. (Figure 6) 8. Allow adhesive to dry per Motorcraft® Instant Gel Adhesive recommendation. 9. Reinstall trim ring to vehicle per WSM, Section 501-17. 10. Clean roof opening panel glass with Motorcraft(R) Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner or equivalent. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071611A 2007 Edge/MKX With Roof 0.4 Hr. Opening Panel: Reapply Loop And Pad To Trim Ring, Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Ring, Clean Glass DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7050036 24 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9010 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9011 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9012 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9013 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9014 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9015 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9016 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9017 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9018 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL GLASS - FRONT SLIDING Removal and Installation 1. Open the roof opening panel to the VENT position. 2. Detach the top of the concertina blind from the moving glass frame. 3. Reposition the sliding glass panel to any position rearward of VENT position. 4. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass front screws. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9019 5. Remove the 2 roof opening panel glass rear screws. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: It is possible for the idler mechanism to move freely once the glass panel is removed. Do not move the idler rearward or it may disengage from the idler track. Carefully remove the roof opening panel glass. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9020 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass - Rear Fixed ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9021 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9022 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9023 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9024 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9025 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9026 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9027 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9028 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9029 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL GLASS - REAR FIXED Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9030 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Material Material Removal WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting the hands, wear safety glasses and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Remove the rear fixed glass interior trim ring. 4. CAUTION: Make sure the cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to avoid damage to the body and trim panels. NOTE: Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9031 - Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting the urethane adhesive. Using the special tool, place the flat side of the knife against the rear glass. - Using the special tool 164-R2459 (or equivalent), distance the roof opening panel fixed glass from the roof module as needed. Refer to the adhesive path illustration and cut as follows: 1. CAUTION: Use caution when cutting to prevent damage to the fixed glass front trim seal. From the inside of the vehicle, start at the front and work towards the front corners. 2. CAUTION: Use caution when cutting to prevent damage to the side trim seals. Continue working along the side and towards the rear corners. 3. Continue around the inside rear adhesive path. 4. CAUTION: Use caution when cutting along the side to prevent damage to the side trim seals. From the inside of the vehicle, work along the side of the glass. 5. From the inside of the vehicle, work from the center towards the rear corners. 5. Remove the fixed glass panel assembly. 6. NOTE: Make sure the water channel is free from any foreign material. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the roof opening panel module. Installation CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until the urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of the glass panel. NOTE: For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation information. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9032 1. NOTE: Avoid scratching the painted surfaces. For minor scratches or exposed metal, see the manufacturer's recommendations. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1-2 mm (0.04-0.08 in) base of original equipment urethane along the roof opening module surface. 2. Clean the inside of the glass surface with glass cleaner. 3. CAUTION: Be sure to use the same brand of cure-rate products for the adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the Materials Chart in this procedure. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to the specification. 4. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. 5. CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until the urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as the temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect the retention of the glass panel. Apply the fixed glass panel assembly to the roof module. Work the glass panel down using only vertical pressure. 6. Install the rear fixed glass interior trim ring. 7. Install the headliner. 8. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9033 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Blind ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9034 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9035 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9036 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9037 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9038 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9039 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9040 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9041 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass - Front Sliding > Page 9042 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND Removal and Installation 1. Open the roof opening panel to the VENT position. 2. Detach the top of the concertina blind from the moving glass frame. 3. Open the roof opening panel to the fully OPEN position. 4. Detach the bottom of the concertina blind from the guide track and remove the blind. - To install, the blind should be attached to the guide track in the most forward position. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9046 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9047 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9048 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9049 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9050 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9051 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9052 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9053 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9054 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL SEAL - PRIMARY Removal 1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. 2. Carefully peel off the primary seal. - Clean residual adhesive tape from the housing using a suitable cleaner. Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9055 Primary Seal Alignment 1. NOTE: - The primary seal seam is placed at the rear centerline. - Make sure the primary seal lip is facing outward. Install the primary seal. Refer to the primary seal alignment figure. 2. NOTE: When the roof opening sliding glass panel is in the VENT position, the roof opening panel primary seal should contact the leading edge of the sliding glass. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR WIRING HARNESS Removal and Installation 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors to the roof opening panel sliding glass motor, shade motor and main harness. 3. NOTE: Make note of all the cable wrap locations attaching the harness to the drive tubes, they must be reinstalled at the exact same locations. Remove the cable wraps and the wiring harness. 4. NOTE: Be careful not to overtighten cable wraps during assembly to prevent crimping the cable sheath. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9064 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams C3299A Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9065 C3299B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9066 C3299C C3299D Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9070 C503 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Seat Control Module: Description and Operation DRIVER SEAT MODULE - MEMORY SEAT The power driver seat, power outside rear view mirrors and power adjustable pedals are controlled by the driver seat module (DSM) only when the vehicle is equipped with the programmable/recall memory option. The DSM is located on the driver seat track. This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat to 2 programmable positions. - A power driver seat position can be stored at any time. The driver must move the seat to the desired position using the driver seat switch assembly. The driver must then depress the memory SET switch which activates the memory SET switch light emitting diode (LED). Within 5 seconds (before the LED goes out), the driver must select a memory position. Memory 1 is selected by depressing memory switch 1. Memory 2 is selected by depressing memory switch 2. - If no memory switch input is received within the 5-second time limit, the operation is aborted and the memory seat position switch (set switch) LED is turned OFF. This also occurs if one of the following inputs is received during the 5-second programming limit: Driver seat control switch - Memory seat position switch (set switch) - Power adjustable pedal switch A programmed seat position can only be recalled when the transmission selector is in PARK or NEUTRAL with the ignition switch in the RUN position. A position may be programmed at any time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9078 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9079 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9080 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9081 Power Seat Motor: Locations View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9082 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9083 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9084 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9085 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9086 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9087 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9088 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9089 View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 9090 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor C332 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9093 C3074 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9094 C3075 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9095 C363 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9096 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams C332 C3074 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9097 C3075 C363 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9098 C382 C362 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9099 C338 C368 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor > Page 9100 C3215 C3216 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Recliner Motor Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Seat Recliner Motor SEAT RECLINER MOTOR Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. If equipped with power lumbar, release the tension on the power lumbar cable before removing the seat from the vehicle. 2. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 3. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 4. Remove the front seat. 5. Remove the cushion side shield in the following sequence. 1. NOTE: Release the tension on the manual lumbar cable before removing the manual lumbar handle. If equipped with manual lumbar, release the 2 clips on the back of the manual lumbar handle then pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 2. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 3. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer. 4. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 5. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. - Remove the cushion side shield. 6. Remove the recliner side shield in the following sequence. 1. Remove the recliner side shield screws. 2. Pull out and remove the recliner side shield. 7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 9103 8. NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Release the LH and RH backrest trim cover tether from the backrest frame. 9. Pull out at the bottom and detach the 2 lower hard back panel pin-type retainers. 10. Slide the hard back panel out of the backrest trim cover. 11. Push the backrest foam pad away from the backrest frame. 12. Remove the recliner motor in the following sequence. 1. Remove the clip from the torque shaft on the recliner motor side. 2. Slide the torque shaft out of the recliner and recliner motor. 3. Remove the recliner motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. Disconnect and remove the recliner motor. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 14. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat only 15. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Recliner Motor > Page 9104 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Power-Fold Seat Motor - Rear Seat POWER-FOLD SEAT MOTOR - REAR SEAT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the affected 40 percent or 60 percent seat. 2. Remove 2 screws and the outboard lower side shield. 3. Remove the power fold motor in the following sequence. 1. Remove the 2 screws from the power fold motor. 2. Slide the cable housing out of the recliner. 3. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable. 4. Remove the power fold motor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9108 Power Seat Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9109 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear Power Seat Solenoid: Locations Left Rear View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 9114 View 151-20 (Rear Seats) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 9115 View 151-15 (Right Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear C3317 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear > Page 9118 C3334 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9123 Power Seat Switch: Locations Power Seat Switch View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9124 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear C4351 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9127 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Power Seat Switch C352 C3016 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9128 C355 C3026 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 9131 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 9132 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Seat Switch, 8- or 10-Way Power Seats Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 9133 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Memory Set Switch MEMORY SET SWITCH Memory SET Switch Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch > Page 9136 Memory SET Switch, MKX Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the driver door trim panel. Edge vehicles 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the front of the door trim panel. MK-vehicles 3. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the back of the door trim panel. All vehicles 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch > Page 9137 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch-Front Seat Control Switch - Front Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation Warning: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. ALL SEATS 1. If possible, position the seat all the way up and center the seat in the front door opening. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair 3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat in the following sequence. 1. Carefully pull up and out to remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover from the cushion side shield. 2. Remove the safety belt anchor nut. To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat. 4. Remove the seat control switch in the following sequence. 1. Pull out and remove the seat control switch knob(s). 2. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 3. If equipped with manual lumbar, pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retailer. 6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 7. Release the cushion side shield clips and separate the seat control switch. 8. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair PASSENGER SEAT 7. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Refer to See: Relays and Modules/Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems/Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Back: Removal and Replacement SEAT BACKREST - FRONT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the cushion side shield in the following sequence. 1. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 2. If equipped with manual height adjust, pull and remove the manual height adjust handle. 3. NOTE: Release the tension on the manual lumbar cable before removing the manual lumbar handle. If equipped with manual lumbar, release the 2 clips on the back of the manual lumbar handle then pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. If equipped with power seat track, slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer. 6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. - If equipped with manual seat tracks, remove the cushion side shield. 7. If equipped with power seat tracks, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. - Remove the cushion side shield. 5. Remove the screws and the recliner side shield. Seats with manual lumbar 6. Remove the manual lumbar cable from the manual lumbar adjuster in the following sequence. 1. Remove the manual lumbar adjuster bracket screw. 2. Separate the manual lumbar adjuster from the bracket. 3. Remove the manual lumbar cable from the manual lumbar adjuster. Passenger seat with fold flat backrest Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9142 7. Separate the recliner cable casing and Z-fitting from the LH fold flat recliner. 8. Separate the recliner cable casing and Z-fitting from the RH fold flat recliner. All seats 9. Disconnect the following electrical connectors, release any retainers and route out the wire harness for following components: - Side air bag module (if equipped). - Power lumbar motor (if equipped). - Power recline motor (if equipped). - Thermal electric device (TED) (if equipped). - Backrest heater mat (if equipped). 10. Remove the 4 recliner-to-seat track bolts and remove the backrest assembly. - If equipped, route out the manual lumbar cable. Installation All seats 1. Position the backrest assembly to the seat track and install the 4 recliner-to-seat track bolts. - Route the manual lumbar cable (if equipped). - Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 2. Route the wire harnesses, connect the electrical connectors and attach the retainers for the following parts. For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing-Front Passenger Cushion. See: Locations The side air bag module. - The power lumbar motor (if equipped). - The power recline motor (if equipped). - The thermal electric device (TED) (if equipped). - The backrest heater mat (if equipped). Passenger seat with fold flat backrest Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9143 3. Install the Z-fitting to the RH fold flat recliner and attach the recliner cable casing. 4. Install the Z-fitting to the LH fold flat recliner and attach the recliner cable casing. 5. Adjust the fold flat recliner cable in the following sequence. 1. Release the fold flat recliner cable locking clip, allowing the cable to self-adjust. 2. Position the backrest upright, locking the recliners in place. 3. Apply force to the backrest, verifying the recliners are locked in place. 4. Lock the locking clip back in place. Seats with manual lumbar 6. Install the manual lumbar adjuster in the following sequence. 1. Install the manual lumbar cable to the manual lumbar adjuster. 2. Position the manual lumbar adjuster to the bracket. 3. Install the manual lumbar adjuster bracket screw. All seats 7. Position the recliner side shield and install the screws. 8. Install the cushion side shield in the following sequence. 1. Position the side shield to the seat and connect the seat control switch electrical connector (if equipped). 2. Slide the cushion side shield rearward to engage the cushion side shield retainer to the seat track bracket. 3. If equipped with power seat track, slide the cushion side shield down in the rear to engage the retainer. 4. Install the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Install the manual lumbar handle (if equipped). 6. Install the manual height adjust handle (if equipped). 7. Position the clip on the manual recline handle and install the manual recline handle (if equipped). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9144 9. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 10. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9145 Seat Back: Overhaul Seat Backrest - Front, Without Fold Flat SEAT BACKREST - FRONT, WITHOUT FOLD FLAT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9146 Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9147 Part 2 Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Side air bag modules with damaged covers must be replaced. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9148 All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the front seat backrest. 5. Release the backrest trim cover J-clips. 6. NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Release the LH and RH backrest trim cover tether from the backrest frame. 7. Pull out at the bottom and detach the 2 lower hard back panel pin-type retainers. 8. Slide the hard back panel out of the backrest trim cover. 9. Remove the head restraint. 1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 10. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 11. CAUTION: When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9149 NOTE: When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed. Remove the side air bag module. 1. Remove the 2 side air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 2. Remove the side air bag module with wire harness. - Detach any side air bag module wire harness retainers. 12. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. NOTE: A new heater mat will come attached on a new foam pad. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence. 1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad. - If equipped with climate controlled seat, on assembly make sure the climate control seat manifold is in place before snapping the backrest trim cover wire back into the backrest foam pad clips. 3. Remove the backrest trim cover. 13. Separate the backrest frame from the backrest foam pad. - If equipped with climate controlled seats, on assembly make sure there is no air gap between the backrest thermal electric device (TED) and the backrest foam pad. Seats with climate control 14. Remove the backrest climate control seat manifold from the backrest foam pad. 15. Separate the wire harness pin-type retainer from the backrest frame, remove the screw, release the 3 clips and remove the TED. Seats with power lumbar 16. Remove the power lumbar assembly in the following sequence. 1. Disconnect the power lumbar motor. 2. Release the power lumbar assembly clip at the top of the backrest frame. 3. Slide the lumbar wire frame up and out at the bottom of the backrest frame. 4. Remove the power lumbar assembly. Seats with manual lumbar 17. Release the manual lumbar hooks from the backrest frame, route out the manual lumbar cable and remove the manual lumbar assembly. Seats with power recline 18. CAUTION: The recliners are synchronized. Avoid rotating the recliner shaft until fully installed. Remove the power recline motor in the following sequence. 1. Remove the clip from the torque shaft on the power recline motor side. 2. Slide out and remove the torque shaft. 3. Remove the power recline motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. Disconnect and remove the power recline motor. 19. NOTE: - Manual recliners are only serviced with the backrest frame. Do not remove the bolts retaining the manual recliners to the backrest frame. - To install a new power recliner, using the torque shaft, rotate both recliners to their front or rear stop. Remove the 4 bolts and the inboard and outboard power recliners. To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). All seats 20. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. 21. Install the front seat backrest. 22. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9150 Passenger seat 23. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Seat Backrest - Front, With Fold Flat SEAT BACKREST - FRONT, WITH FOLD FLAT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9151 Front Seat Backrest, Manual Recline With Fold Flat (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9152 Front Seat Backrest, Manual Recline With Fold Flat (Part 2) Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Side air bag modules with damaged covers must be replaced. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Only the front passenger seat can come equipped with optional fold-flat backrest. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the front seat backrest. 5. Remove the LH and RH outer fold flat recliner covers. - Pull to release the clips. - Slide up to disengage the retainer and remove. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9153 6. Remove the 4 fold flat recliner-to-fold flat backrest frame bolts. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). - If necessary, remove the fold flat recliner cable. 7. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip. 8. NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Release the LH and RH backrest trim cover tether from the backrest frame. 9. Pull out at the bottom and detach the 2 lower hard back panel pin-type retainers. 10. Slide the hard back panel out of the backrest trim cover. 11. Remove the head restraint. 1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 12. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 13. CAUTION: When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame. NOTE: When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9154 Remove the side air bag module. Remove the 2 side air bag module bolts. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). - Remove the side air bag module with wire harness. Detach any side air bag module wire harness retainers. 14. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. NOTE: A new heater mat will come attached on a new foam pad. Remove the backrest trim cover. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad. Separate the hook-and-loop strips. - Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad. - If equipped, feed out the backrest heater mat wire harness from the opening in the side of the backrest trim cover. - Remove the backrest trim cover. 15. Separate the backrest frame from the backrest foam pad. 16. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. 17. Install the front seat backrest. 18. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 19. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Seat Backrest - Rear, 60 Percent SEAT BACKREST - REAR, 60 PERCENT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9155 Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9156 Part 2 Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: Never remove the recliner-to-backrest frame bolts or the recliner-to-floor anchor assembly bolts. If these bolts are removed, and a specially designed fixture is not used for reassembly, the recliner will bind and the seat back can fail in a crash. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle occupant. All seats 1. Remove the 60 percent seat. 2. Remove the 60 percent cushion. 3. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. Remove the bolt and separate the safety belt retractor belt and buckle anchor from the riser. To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9157 4. Remove the head restraint. 1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide. 5. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 6. Remove the armrest bracket trim cover pin-type retainer and the armrest bracket trim cover. - Cycle the armrest up and down to aid trim cover removal. 7. Remove the armrest bolt. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 8. Remove the armrest. - With the armrest upright, tip the outboard side of the armrest to disengage the stop from the backrest frame channel. 9. Remove the pin-type retainer in the armrest pocket, attaching the backrest trim cover to the backrest. 10. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel. - Repeat for the other child safety seat tether anchor bezel. 11. Remove the safety belt bezel screw cover, the screw and the safety belt bezel. - During assembly, make sure the safety belt bezel clips in place. 12. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip. - Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped). 13. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the zipper. 14. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers holding the backrest trim cover around each of the 2 lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame. 15. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket. 16. Pull back the backrest trim cover over the armrest bracket and backrest frame latching wire for the armrest. 17. Remove the screw at the top and the pin-type retainer at the bottom of the armrest filler panel. 18. Lift the armrest filler panel over the armrest pivot bracket and slide out to the outboard side of the seat. - During assembly, make sure the armrest filler panel clips in place around the backrest trim cover J-clip, at the inboard side. 19. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip from the backrest frame in the armrest pocket. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9158 20. From the back, invert the backrest trim cover up and over the backrest frame and remove the backrest trim cover and backrest foam pad. 21. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. NOTE: If a new heater mat or foam pad with heat are needed, the parts will already be assembled from the factory. There is no need to remove the heater mat from the foam pad. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence. 1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad. - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad. 3. Remove the backrest trim cover. - Feed the safety belt retractor belt and safety belt buckle through the backrest trim cover and backrest foam pad. 22. Remove the backrest foam pad. 23. Release the retainers and remove the back panel. 24. Remove the safety belt retractor nut, pin-type retainer under the safety belt and the safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 25. Remove 2 screws and the outboard upper side shield. 26. Remove 2 screws and the inboard upper side shield. 27. Remove 2 screws and the outboard lower side shield. 28. Remove 2 screws and the inboard lower side shield. 29. Separate the recliner cable casing at both ends from the recliners. 30. Remove the recliner cable in the following sequence. 1. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at one end. 2. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at the other end. - Remove the recliner cable. Seats with power fold 31. Remove the power fold motor in the following sequence. 1. Remove the 2 screws from the power fold motor. 2. Slide the cable casing out of the recliner. 3. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable. 4. Remove the power fold motor. Seats with heat 32. Disconnect the electrical connector, remove the screw and the heated seat module. All seats 33. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. - Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. - Make sure the LATCH is accessible to the occupant. Seat Backrest - Rear, 40 Percent SEAT BACKREST - REAR, 40 PERCENT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9159 Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9160 Part 2 Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: Never remove the recliner-to-backrest frame bolts or the recliner-to-floor anchor assembly bolts. If these bolts are removed, and a specially designed fixture is not used for reassembly, the recliner will bind and the seat back can fail in a crash. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle occupant. All seats 1. Remove the 40 percent seat. 2. Remove the 40 percent cushion. 3. Remove the head restraint. 1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide. 4. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 5. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel. 6. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9161 - Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped). 7. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the zipper. 8. Remove the pin-type retainer holding the backrest trim cover around the lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame. 9. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket. 10. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. Release the hook-and-loop strips and invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad. 11. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad and remove the backrest trim cover. 12. Remove the backrest foam pad. 13. Release the retainers and remove the back panel. 14. Remove 2 screws and the outboard upper side shield. 15. Remove 2 screws and the inboard upper side shield. 16. Remove 2 screws and the outboard lower side shield. 17. Remove 2 screws and the inboard lower side shield. 18. Separate the recliner cable casing at both ends from the recliners. 19. Remove the recliner cable in the following sequence. 1. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at one end. 2. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable at the other end. - Remove the recliner cable. Seats with power fold 20. Remove the power fold motor in the following sequence. 1. Remove the 2 screws from the power fold motor. 2. Slide the cable casing out of the recliner. 3. Turn the cable end so the tab aligns with the slot in the lever and separate the cable. 4. Remove the power fold motor. All seats 21. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. - Make sure the LATCH is accessible to the occupant. - Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover Without Fold Flat SEAT BACKREST COVER - FRONT, WITHOUT FOLD FLAT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Side air bag modules with damaged covers must be replaced. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - If a side air bag deployment took place a new seat back trim cover and side air bag module must be installed. The seat back frame should be installed new if necessary. - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Release the backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9166 5. NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Release the LH and RH backrest trim cover tether from the backrest frame. 6. Pull out at the bottom and detach the 2 lower hard back panel pin-type retainers. 7. Slide the hard back panel out of the backrest trim cover. 8. Remove the head restraint. 1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 9. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 10. CAUTION: When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame. NOTE: When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed. Through the rear of the seat, remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then separate the side air bag module from the seat backrest. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9167 11. CAUTION: - Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur. - Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the electrical connector into the side air bag module. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the side air bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and the side air bag module. 12. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence. 1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad. - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad. - If equipped with climate controlled seat (CCS), on assembly make sure the CCS manifold is in place before snapping the backrest trim cover wire back into the backrest foam pad clips. 3. Remove the backrest trim cover. - When installing the backrest trim cover, tuck the hook-and-loop strips into the backrest foam pad trenches last to get the best trim cover appearance. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 14. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 15. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. With Fold Flat SEAT BACKREST COVER - FRONT, WITH FOLD FLAT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9168 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Side air bag modules with damaged covers must be replaced. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Only the front passenger seat can come equipped with optional fold-flat backrest. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the LH and RH outer fold flat recliner covers in the following sequence. 1. Pull to release the clips. 2. Slide up to disengage the retainer and remove. Seats with heat 5. From under the seat, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector, release any pin-type retainers and route out the wire harness. All seats 6. From under the seat, disconnect the side air bag electrical connector, release any pin-type retainers and route out the wire harness. 7. Remove the 4 fold flat recliner-to-fold flat backrest frame bolts and remove the backrest. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 8. Release the backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9169 9. NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Release the LH and RH backrest trim cover tether from the backrest frame. 10. Pull out at the bottom and detach the 2 hard back panel pin-type retainers from the backrest frame. 11. Slide the hard back panel out of the backrest trim cover. 12. Remove the head restraint. 1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 13. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 14. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. Separate the backrest trim cover-to-backrest foam pad hook-and-loop strips. 15. CAUTION: When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame. NOTE: When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed. Through the rear of the seat, remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then separate the side air bag module from the seat backrest. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9170 16. CAUTION: - Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur. - Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the electrical connector into the side air bag module. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the side air bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and the side air bag module. 17. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. Remove the backrest trim cover in the following sequence. 1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad. - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad. 3. If equipped, feed out the backrest heater mat and side air bag module wire harness from the opening in the side of the backrest trim cover. 4. Remove the backrest trim cover. 18. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing at installation, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing-Front Passenger Cushion. See: Locations 19. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat only 20. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. 40 Percent SEAT BACKREST COVER - REAR, 40 PERCENT Removal and Installation NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9171 1. Remove the 40 percent seat. 2. Remove the 40 percent cushion. 3. Remove the head restraint. 1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide. 4. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 5. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel. 6. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip. - Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped). 7. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the zipper. 8. Remove the pin-type retainer holding the backrest trim cover around the lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame. 9. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket. 10. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. Release the hook-and-loop strips and invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad. 11. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad and remove the backrest trim cover. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 60 Percent SEAT BACKREST COVER - REAR, 60 PERCENT Removal and Installation NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. 1. Remove the 60 percent seat. 2. Remove the 60 percent cushion. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9172 3. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. Remove the bolt and separate the safety belt retractor belt and buckle anchor from the riser. To install, tighten to 65 Nm (48 lb-ft). 4. Remove the head restraint. 1. Push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 3. Remove the safety belt comfort guide. 5. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 6. Remove the armrest bracket trim cover pin-type retainer and the armrest bracket trim cover. 1 Cycle the armrest up and down to aid trim cover removal. 7. Remove the armrest bolt. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 8. Remove the armrest. - With the armrest upright, tip the outboard side of the armrest to disengage the stop from the backrest frame channel. 9. Remove the pin-type retainer in the armrest pocket, attaching the backrest trim cover to the backrest. 10. Release the tabs and remove the child safety seat tether anchor bezel. - Repeat for the other child safety seat tether anchor bezel. 11. Remove the safety belt bezel screw cover, the screw and the safety belt bezel. - During assembly, make sure the safety belt bezel clips in place. 12. Release the backrest trim cover lower J-clip. - Pull the heated seat electrical connector through the backrest trim cover opening (if equipped). 13. At the rear inboard side of the backrest, access the zipper tucked up behind the back panel and unzip the zipper. 14. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers holding the backrest trim cover around each of the 2 lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) and attaching to the lower rear of the backrest frame. 15. Remove the pin-type retainer from inside the safety belt comfort guide pocket. 16. Pull back the backrest trim cover over the armrest bracket and backrest frame latching wire for the armrest. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9173 17. Remove the screw at the top and the pin-type retainer at the bottom of the armrest filler panel. 18. Lift the armrest filler panel over the armrest pivot bracket and slide out to the outboard side of the seat. - During assembly, make sure the armrest filler panel clips in place around the backrest trim cover J-clip, at the inboard side. 19. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip from the backrest frame in the armrest pocket. 20. From the back, invert the backrest trim cover up and over the backrest frame and remove the backrest trim cover and backrest foam pad. 21. CAUTION: Use care when separating the backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the backrest foam pad. Remove the backrest trim cover from the backrest foam pad in the following sequence. 1. Invert the backrest trim cover in an inside out fashion to the wire in the backrest trim cover attached to the clips in the backrest foam pad. - Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 2. Separate the backrest trim cover wire from the clips in the backrest foam pad. 3. Remove the backrest trim cover. - Feed the safety belt retractor belt and safety belt buckle through the backrest trim cover and backrest foam pad. 22. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. - Make sure the LATCH is accessible to the occupant. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9174 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Cover Front SEAT CUSHION COVER - FRONT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the front seat cushion. 5. Release the cushion trim cover retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion trim cover and cushion foam pad. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad. NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence. 1. Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 2. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad. - For vehicles with climate controlled seats (CCS), on assembly make sure the CCS manifold is in place before snapping the cushion trim cover wire retainer back into the cushion foam pad. 3. Remove the cushion trim cover. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Install the front seat cushion. - For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing-Front Passenger Cushion. See: Locations 9. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 10. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. 40 Percent SEAT CUSHION COVER - REAR, 40 PERCENT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover > Page 9175 Removal and Installation NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. 1. Remove the 40 percent seat. 2. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and cushion trim cover. 3. CAUTION: Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence. 1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if equipped). 2. Release the hook-and-loop strips. 3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove the cushion trim cover. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 60 Percent SEAT CUSHION COVER - REAR, 60 PERCENT Removal and Installation NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. 1. Remove the 60 percent seat. 2. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and cushion trim cover. 3. CAUTION: Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence. 1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if equipped). 2. Release the hook-and-loop strips. 3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove the cushion trim cover. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion - Front SEAT CUSHION - FRONT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Release all wire harness and connector retainers to the cushion frame. Passenger seat with fold flat backrest 5. Separate the fold flat recliner cable holders from the bottom of the cushion frame. Seats with climate control 6. Disconnect the cushion thermal electric device (TED). Passenger seat with manual track and heat 7. Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector and separate the pin-type retainers from the cushion frame. Seats with heat 8. Disconnect the 2 heated seat electrical connectors and separate the pin-type retainers from the cushion frame. All seats 9. Remove the 4 cushion frame-to-seat track bolts and the cushion assembly. Installation Passenger seat with fold flat backrest Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9180 1. Make sure the fold flat recliner cable is routed correctly between the power seat track cross tube and cushion frame. All seats 2. Position the cushion assembly and install the 4 cushion frame-to-seat track bolts. - With power seat track, make sure the cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets are aligned correctly with the tabs seated in the cushion frame (if equipped). - Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All passenger seats 3. For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing-Front Passenger Cushion. See: Locations Passenger seat with fold flat backrest 4. Attach the 2 fold flat recliner cable holders to the bottom of the cushion frame. Seats with heat 5. Route the heated seat wire harness, connect the 2 heated seat electrical connectors and attach the pin-type retainers to the cushion frame. Passenger seat with manual track and heat 6. Connect the heated seat module electrical connector and attach the pin-type retainers to the cushion frame. Seats with climate control 7. Connect the cushion TED. All seats 8. Attach any remaining wire harness and connector retainers to the cushion frame. 9. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 10. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Seat Cushion - Rear, 40 Percent SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 40 PERCENT Removal and Installation All seats 1. Remove the 40 percent seat. Seats equipped with heat 2. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. Separate the 2 heated seat electrical connectors from the backrest assembly. All seats 3. Release the tab and remove the outboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover. 4. Release the tab and remove the inboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover. 5. Remove the 2 cushion frame pivot bracket bolts and the cushion assembly. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Seat Cushion - Rear, 60 Percent SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 60 PERCENT Removal and Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9181 All seats 1. Remove the 60 percent seat. Seats equipped with heat 2. Disconnect the 2 heater mat electrical connectors. Separate the 2 heater mat electrical connectors from the backrest assembly. All seats 3. Release the tab and remove the outboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover. 4. Release the tab and remove the inboard cushion frame pivot bracket cover. 5. Remove the 2 cushion frame pivot bracket bolts and the cushion assembly. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9182 Seat Cushion: Overhaul Seat Cushion - Front SEAT CUSHION - FRONT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9183 Seat Cushion With Power Seat Track (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9184 Seat Cushion With Power Seat Track (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9185 Driver Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9186 Driver Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9187 Passenger Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track (Part 1) Passenger Seat Cushion With Manual Seat Track (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9188 Passenger Power Seat Track (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9189 Passenger Power Seat Track (Part 2) Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connector on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9190 NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt anchor. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the front seat cushion. 5. Release the cushion trim cover retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion trim cover and cushion foam pad. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad. NOTE: A new heater mat will come assembled on a new foam pad. Remove the cushion trim cover from the cushion foam pad in the following sequence. 1. Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 2. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad. - For vehicles with climate controlled seat, on assembly make sure the climate control seat manifold is in place before snapping the cushion trim cover wire retainer back into the cushion foam pad. Seats with climate control 7. Remove the cushion climate control seat manifold from the cushion foam pad. 8. Remove the 3 cushion thermal electric device (TED)-to-cushion frame screws. 9. Remove the cushion TED-to-climate control seat cushion adapter screw and remove the TED. 10. Release the clips and remove the cushion TED adapter from the cushion frame. Heated seats 11. Remove the screw and the heated seat module. All seats 12. Release the retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion support. All seats 13. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. 14. Install the front seat cushion. - For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing-Front Passenger Cushion. See: Locations 15. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 16. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Seat Cushion - Rear, 40 Percent SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 40 PERCENT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9191 Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the 40 percent seat. 2. Remove the 40 percent seat cushion. 3. Remove the 2 kneeling assembly-to-cushion frame bolts. Remove the kneeling assembly. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and cushion trim cover. 5. CAUTION: Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence. 1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if equipped). 2. Release the hook-and-loop strips. 3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove the cushion trim cover. 6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Seat Cushion - Rear, 60 Percent Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9192 SEAT CUSHION - REAR, 60 PERCENT Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the 60 percent seat. 2. Remove the 60 percent seat cushion. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the kneeling assembly. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Release all the cushion trim cover-to-cushion frame retainers and remove the cushion foam pad and cushion trim cover. 5. CAUTION: Use care when separating the cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips, or the hook-and-loop strips can be torn from the cushion foam pad. Remove the cushion trim cover in the following sequence. 1. Feed the heater mat wire harness and electrical connectors back through the cushion trim cover (if equipped). 2. Release the hook-and-loop strips. 3. Separate the cushion trim cover wire retainer from the clips in the cushion foam pad and remove the cushion trim cover. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 9193 6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9198 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9199 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9200 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9201 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9202 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9203 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9204 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9205 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9206 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9207 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9208 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9209 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9210 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9211 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9212 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9213 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9214 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9215 Seat Heater: Connector Views C3283 C3284 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9216 C3167 C3169 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9217 Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 119-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9218 119-2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9219 119-5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9220 119-6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9221 119-7 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9222 119-8 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9223 119-9 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device SEAT BACKREST THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - The backrest thermo-electric device (TED) filter is detachable from the TED assembly housing and can be replaced without TED removal. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Release the backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device > Page 9226 5. NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar. Release the LH and RH backrest trim cover tether from the backrest frame. 6. Pull out at the bottom and detach the 2 lower hard back panel pin-type retainers. 7. Slide the hard back panel out of the backrest trim cover. 8. Remove the head restraint. 1. Using an appropriate tool, push in the hole, lift up on the head restraint and release one side of the head restraint. 2. Push the release button and remove the head restraint. 9. CAUTION: Always install a new slave head restraint guide. Pull out and remove the master and slave head restraint guides. 10. CAUTION: When installing, make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the backrest frame. NOTE: When installing the side air bag module, new bolts must be installed. Through the rear of the seat remove and discard the 2 side air bag module bolts. Then separate the side air bag module from the seat backrest. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device > Page 9227 11. CAUTION: - Do not pull the side air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur. - Do not install the side air bag module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button can occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The side air bag module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the side air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the side air bag module. Do not force the electrical connector into the side air bag module. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the side air bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and the side air bag module. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the side air bag module electrical connector. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector and the side air bag module. 12. Separate the backrest frame from the backrest foam pad. 13. Remove the screw, release the 3 clips, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the backrest thermal electric device (TED). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 15. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 16. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Thermo-Electric Device > Page 9228 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Thermo-Electric Device SEAT CUSHION THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - The cushion thermo-electric device (TED) filter is detachable from the TED assembly housing from underneath the seat cushion. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the front seat cushion. 5. Release the cushion trim cover retainers from the cushion frame and remove the cushion trim cover and cushion foam pad. 6. Remove the 3 cushion thermal electric device (TED)-to-cushion frame screws. 7. Remove the cushion TED-to-climate control seat cushion adapter screw and remove the TED. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing-Front Passenger Cushion. See: Locations 9. Install the front seat cushion assembly. 10. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 11. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Heated Seat Module View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 9233 View 151-20 (Rear Seats) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 9234 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 9235 Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 9236 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 9237 Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seat Module > Page 9238 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Heated Seat Module C329 C3162 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 9241 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Module, Passenger Side C3036A C3036B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 9242 C3036C Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 9243 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Backrest Module C3322 C3326 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Module > Page 9244 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Climate Controlled Seat Cushion Module C3327 C3328 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Controlled Seat Module Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Climate Controlled Seat Module CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT MODULE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - When installing a new climate control seat module (CCSM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Before removing the climate control seat module (CCSM), carry out the appropriate steps in the programmable module installation (PMI) procedure. 2. Position the front passenger seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 3. Depower the SRS. 4. Remove the front passenger seat. 5. Remove the CCSM. - Disconnect the 3 electrical connectors. - Remove the 2 screws. - Remove the CCSM. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 8. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. 9. Install the CCSM software data. Carry out the appropriate steps in the PMI procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Controlled Seat Module > Page 9247 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Heated Seat Module Front HEATED SEAT MODULE - FRONT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Position the front passenger seat to access the heated seat module. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. From under the front of the front passenger seat, remove the heated seat module. - Vehicles with power seat track, remove the 2 screws and lower the bracket (if equipped). - Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector. - Remove the screw and heated seat module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Rear HEATED SEAT MODULE - REAR SEAT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the second row 60 percent seat front riser-to-floor nut and bolt. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 2. Pivot the front of the 60 percent seat cushion upward. 3. Remove the screw, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the heated seat module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear View 151-23 (Left Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 9252 View 151-24 (Right Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear C722 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear > Page 9255 C822 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Front SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - FRONT Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. If possible, position the seat all the way up and center the seat in the front door opening. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the seat control switch in the following sequence. 1. Remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover. 2. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 3. If equipped with manual lumbar, pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer. 6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 7. Release the cushion side shield clips and separate the seat control switch. 8. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Rear SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - REAR SEAT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch > Page 9258 Seat Control Switch Without Power Liftgate Seat Control Switch With Power Liftgate Removal and Installation Vehicles without power liftgate 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. Vehicles with power liftgate 2. Pull out and remove the power liftgate strut cover in the quarter trim panel. All vehicles 3. Remove the seat control switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Squeeze the tab at the top and bottom of the seat control switch and remove from the quarter trim panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch > Page 9259 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat HEATED SEAT SWITCH - REAR SEAT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door handle bezel on the side of the affected switch in the following sequence. 1. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw cover. 2. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw. 3. Separate the rear door handle bezel from the door trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the clips and remove the heated seat switch from the back side of the rear door handle bezel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat Track Special Tool(s) Removal WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - To install a new occupant classification module or an occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt, refer to the appropriate procedure in Air Bag Systems. All seats 1. Position the seat to access all the seat track-to-floor bolts and the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Remove the front seat backrest. 5. Separate the seat wire harness main feed electrical connector(s) from the seat track brackets. 6. Disconnect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and safety belt buckle switch electrical connectors. Separate any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track and safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 7. Disconnect all the seat track motor electrical connectors and separate any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track (if equipped). Driver seat 8. Disconnect the seat track position sensor and separate any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track. 9. Disconnect the driver seat module (DSM) electrical connectors and separate any retainers holding the wire harness to the seat track (if equipped). Passenger seat with manual seat track 10. NOTE: Rear inboard occupant classification sensor (OCS) weight sensor bolt protection bracket shown, others similar. Separate the wire harness from the OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets, remove the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screws and remove the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9263 Passenger seat with power seat track 11. Remove the cushion side shield in the following sequence. 1. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 2. NOTE: Release the tension on the manual lumbar cable before removing the manual lumbar handle. If equipped with manual lumbar, release the 2 clips on the back of the manual lumbar handle then pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 3. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 4. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer. 5. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 6. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. - Remove the cushion side shield. 12. Separate the wire harness from the outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket, remove the 2 outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screws and remove the outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. 13. Separate the wire harness from the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket, remove the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screw and the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. Passenger seat 14. Mark the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connectors so that they can be reconnected in their same location at installation. 15. Disconnect the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connectors and detach any wire harness retainers to the seat track. 16. Disconnect the occupant classification module and detach any wire harness retainers to the seat track. Passenger seat with power seat track 17. Disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector and detach any wire harness retainers to the seat track (if equipped). 18. Disconnect the climate control seat module (CCSM) electrical connectors and detach any wire harness retainers to the seat track (if equipped). All seats 19. Separate any retainers holding the seat wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track. 20. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts and remove the seat track. All passenger seats 21. To install a new occupant classification module or an OCS weight sensor bolt, refer to the appropriate procedure in Air Bag Systems. Installation Power seat tracks 1. Position the cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets to the power seat track rear cross tube. - Make sure the locator tabs of the cushion frame-to-seat track rear brackets are aligned correctly to the cushion frame. Passenger seat with fold flat backrest 2. Make sure the fold flat recliner cable is routed correctly between the power seat track cross tube and cushion frame. All seat tracks 3. Install the 4 cushion frame-to-seat track bolts. - Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All passenger seats 4. For correct front passenger seat cushion wire harness routing, refer to Seat Wire Harness Routing-Front Passenger Cushion. See: Locations 5. Connect the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt electrical connectors, as marked during removal and attach any retainers holding the wire harness to the seat Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9264 track. 6. Connect the occupant classification module and attach any wire harness retainers to the seat track. Passenger seat with power seat track 7. Position the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket to the seat track, install the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screw and attach the wire harness to the inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. Tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 8. Position the outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket to the seat track, install the 2 outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screws and attach the wire harness to the outboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket. Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 9. Install the cushion side shield in the following sequence. 1. Position the side shield to the seat and connect the seat control switch electrical connector. 2. Slide the cushion side shield rearward to engage the cushion side shield retainer to the seat track bracket. 3. Slide the cushion side shield down in the rear to engage the retainer. 4. Install the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Install the manual lumbar handle (if equipped). 6. Position the clip on the manual recline handle and install the manual recline handle (if equipped). 10. Connect the heated seat module electrical connector and attach any retainers holding the wire harness to the seat track (if equipped). 11. Connect the CCSM electrical connectors and attach any retainers holding the wire harness to the seat track (if equipped). Passenger seat with manual seat track 12. NOTE: Rear inboard OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket shown, others similar. Position each of the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets, install the 4 OCS weight sensor bolt protection bracket screws and attach the wire harness to the OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets. Tighten the front OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Tighten the rear OCS weight sensor bolt protection brackets to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). Driver seat 13. Connect the DSM electrical connectors and attach any retainers holding the wire harness to the seat track (if equipped). 14. Connect the seat track position sensor and attach any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track. All seats 15. Connect all the seat track motor electrical connectors and attach any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track (if equipped). 16. Connect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and safety belt buckle switch electrical connectors. Attach any retainers holding the wire harness or electrical connectors to the seat track. 17. Attach the seat wire harness main feed in electrical connector(s) to the seat track brackets. 18. Install the front seat backrest. 19. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat with existing seat track 20. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Passenger seat with new seat track, OCS module or OCS weight sensor bolt 21. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset and prove out the SRS. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams C127 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 9274 View 151-22 (Passenger Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side C505 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 9277 C605 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9278 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9279 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9280 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Open the cover, remove the screw and position the interior front door handle finish panel aside. 2. Disconnect the door lock control switch electrical connector. 3. Release the locking clips and remove the door lock control switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9284 C527 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9285 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9286 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9287 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door control switch bezel. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Depress the 2 locking tabs. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9292 Power Seat Switch: Locations Power Seat Switch View 151-18 (Driver Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9293 View 151-19 (Passenger Seat) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear C4351 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9296 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Power Seat Switch C352 C3016 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Seat Release Switch, Rear > Page 9297 C355 C3026 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 9300 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 9301 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Seat Switch, 8- or 10-Way Power Seats Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Seat Switch, 6-Way Power Seat > Page 9302 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Memory Set Switch MEMORY SET SWITCH Memory SET Switch Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch > Page 9305 Memory SET Switch, MKX Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the driver door trim panel. Edge vehicles 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the front of the door trim panel. MK-vehicles 3. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the 4 tabs and remove the memory SET switch through the back of the door trim panel. All vehicles 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Memory Set Switch > Page 9306 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch-Front Seat Control Switch - Front Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation Warning: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. ALL SEATS 1. If possible, position the seat all the way up and center the seat in the front door opening. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair 3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat in the following sequence. 1. Carefully pull up and out to remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover from the cushion side shield. 2. Remove the safety belt anchor nut. To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Separate the safety belt retractor belt anchor from the seat. 4. Remove the seat control switch in the following sequence. 1. Pull out and remove the seat control switch knob(s). 2. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 3. If equipped with manual lumbar, pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retailer. 6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 7. Release the cushion side shield clips and separate the seat control switch. 8. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair PASSENGER SEAT 7. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Refer to See: Relays and Modules/Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems/Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair PINCH STRIP SWITCH Removal and Installation NOTE: Left side shown, right side similar. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the pinch strip electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9310 3. Remove the pinch strip. - Remove the pin-type retainers. - Remove the grommet and route the harness out of the vehicle. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear View 151-23 (Left Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left Rear > Page 9315 View 151-24 (Right Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear C722 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Rear > Page 9318 C822 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch Front SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - FRONT Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an airbag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. If possible, position the seat all the way up and center the seat in the front door opening. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 3. Remove the seat control switch in the following sequence. 1. Remove the safety belt retractor belt anchor nut cover. 2. If equipped with manual recline, release the clip and remove the manual recline handle. 3. If equipped with manual lumbar, pull and remove the manual lumbar handle. 4. Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 5. Slide the cushion side shield up in the rear to release the retainer. 6. Slide the cushion side shield forward to disengage the retainer. 7. Release the cushion side shield clips and separate the seat control switch. 8. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 6. Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Zero Seat Weight Test and prove out the SRS. Rear SEAT CONTROL SWITCH - REAR SEAT Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch > Page 9321 Seat Control Switch Without Power Liftgate Seat Control Switch With Power Liftgate Removal and Installation Vehicles without power liftgate 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. Vehicles with power liftgate 2. Pull out and remove the power liftgate strut cover in the quarter trim panel. All vehicles 3. Remove the seat control switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Squeeze the tab at the top and bottom of the seat control switch and remove from the quarter trim panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Control Switch > Page 9322 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Rear Seat HEATED SEAT SWITCH - REAR SEAT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door handle bezel on the side of the affected switch in the following sequence. 1. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw cover. 2. Remove the rear door handle bezel screw. 3. Separate the rear door handle bezel from the door trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the clips and remove the heated seat switch from the back side of the rear door handle bezel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9326 C503 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-28 (Roof - With Panoramic Vista Roof) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9330 C912 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9331 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the overhead console. 2. Disengage the clips and remove the switch from the overhead console. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 9336 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 9337 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch C4353 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 9340 C4333 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 9341 C4216 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > License Lamps/Liftgate Release Switch > Page 9342 C2269 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch - Manual Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Manual LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - MANUAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 5 liftgate release switch moulding nuts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. Depress the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch - Manual > Page 9345 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Power LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - POWER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate release switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 liftgate release switch moulding bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. Depress the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Sound Deadeners and Insulators WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: - Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to burn. - After repairs, corrosion protection must be restored to the are a AFTER the mastic material is applied. Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur. NOTE: - The following illustration serves as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations. Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration. - To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be replaced with the correct service replacement component. Floor Pan Interior View 1. Whenever replacement of an existing mastic insulator is carried out, the surface must be thoroughly cleaned to make sure correct adhesion will occur. The surface should be 10°C (50°F) or greater before applying the mastic. The use of a heat gun to warm the metal surface will aid in adhesion. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 09-6-3 > Apr > 09 > Body - Liftgate Spoiler Gasket Slippage Spoiler: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Spoiler Gasket Slippage TSB 09-6-3 REAR LIFTGATE SPOILER - FOAM GASKET SLIDING OUT FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience the foam gasket sliding out from under the rear lifigate spoiler. To repair this concern it will be necessary to replace the foam gasket. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear spoiler following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-08. 2. Apply masking tape along the edge of the spoiler next the original foam gasket material to protect the sur[ace finish of the spoiler from scratches. 3. Use 3MTM General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner to help soften the old foam gasket material making it easier to remove with a wood or plastic putty knife. NOTE CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRAPE THROUGH THE MASKING TAPE DAMAGING THE SPOILER SURFACE FINISH. 4. Once all the foam gasket material is clean from the sur[ace of the spoiler, proceed to remove protective masking tape. 5. Remove all remaining glue residue on the surface of the spoiler, using 3M(TM) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. NOTE TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SURFACE FINISH OF THE SPOILER. 6. Apply 3MTM Automotive Adhesion Promoter along the entire sur[ace where the gaskets will be positioned. (Figure 1) NOTE TAKE CARE NOT TO ALLOW ANY 3M(TM) AUTOMOTIVE ADHESION PROMOTER TO COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE PAINTED SURFACE. IF IT DOES, WIPE IT OFF IMMEDIATELY. 7. Allow 3MTM Automotive Adhesion Promoter to cure for a minimum of 60 seconds. If the appearance or touch of the 3MTM Automotive Adhesion Promoter is still wet allow for additional time to cure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 09-6-3 > Apr > 09 > Body - Liftgate Spoiler Gasket Slippage > Page 9358 8. Apply foam strip along surface taking care that it is close to the rearward edge but not past it. (Figure 2) 9. Apply even pressure along entire foam strip, starting at one end and proceeding to the opposite end. Make sure to per[orm this action twice to ensure there is no air trapped between the gasket and spoiler. (Figure 2) 10. Install spoiler following (WSM), Section 501-08. Parts Block NOTE OBTAIN THE FOLLOWING PARTS LOCALLY WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090603A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: 0.8 Hr. Replace Foam Gasket, Includes Time to Remove And Install Spoiler (Do Not Use With P49D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7044210 33 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 09-6-3 > Apr > 09 > Body - Liftgate Spoiler Gasket Slippage Spoiler: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Spoiler Gasket Slippage TSB 09-6-3 REAR LIFTGATE SPOILER - FOAM GASKET SLIDING OUT FORD: 2007-2009 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2009 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2009 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience the foam gasket sliding out from under the rear lifigate spoiler. To repair this concern it will be necessary to replace the foam gasket. ACTION Follow Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear spoiler following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-08. 2. Apply masking tape along the edge of the spoiler next the original foam gasket material to protect the sur[ace finish of the spoiler from scratches. 3. Use 3MTM General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner to help soften the old foam gasket material making it easier to remove with a wood or plastic putty knife. NOTE CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRAPE THROUGH THE MASKING TAPE DAMAGING THE SPOILER SURFACE FINISH. 4. Once all the foam gasket material is clean from the sur[ace of the spoiler, proceed to remove protective masking tape. 5. Remove all remaining glue residue on the surface of the spoiler, using 3M(TM) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. NOTE TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE SURFACE FINISH OF THE SPOILER. 6. Apply 3MTM Automotive Adhesion Promoter along the entire sur[ace where the gaskets will be positioned. (Figure 1) NOTE TAKE CARE NOT TO ALLOW ANY 3M(TM) AUTOMOTIVE ADHESION PROMOTER TO COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE PAINTED SURFACE. IF IT DOES, WIPE IT OFF IMMEDIATELY. 7. Allow 3MTM Automotive Adhesion Promoter to cure for a minimum of 60 seconds. If the appearance or touch of the 3MTM Automotive Adhesion Promoter is still wet allow for additional time to cure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 09-6-3 > Apr > 09 > Body - Liftgate Spoiler Gasket Slippage > Page 9364 8. Apply foam strip along surface taking care that it is close to the rearward edge but not past it. (Figure 2) 9. Apply even pressure along entire foam strip, starting at one end and proceeding to the opposite end. Make sure to per[orm this action twice to ensure there is no air trapped between the gasket and spoiler. (Figure 2) 10. Install spoiler following (WSM), Section 501-08. Parts Block NOTE OBTAIN THE FOLLOWING PARTS LOCALLY WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090603A 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: 0.8 Hr. Replace Foam Gasket, Includes Time to Remove And Install Spoiler (Do Not Use With P49D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7044210 33 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9365 Spoiler: Service and Repair SPOILER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector and the rear windshield washer hose from the rear spoiler. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9366 3. Remove the 4 rear spoiler nuts. - Remove the 2 nut covers. - Remove the 4 nuts. 4. Place a piece of tape on the liftgate to protect the paint. 5. NOTE: There are 4 pin type retainers on the bottom of the spoiler. When removing the spoiler it is difficult to access the retainers to release them from the liftgate. It may be necessary to pry upward on the rear spoiler to release it from the retainers. Do not pry on the window. Remove the rear spoiler. Place a pry bar between the liftgate and the spoiler. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Replace any retainers broken during removal. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9372 Part 2 Removal and Installation Upper and lower cowl grille panel 1. NOTE: The upper cowl panel grille must be removed before the lower cowl panel grille can be removed. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. Upper cowl panel grille 2. Remove the RH cowl side outer panel. 3. Remove the LH cowl side outer panel. 4. Remove the 2 scrivets from the RH upper cowl panel grille. 5. Remove the 2 bolts from the RH upper cowl grille panel and remove the RH upper cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Remove the 2 scrivets from the LH upper cowl grille panel. 7. Remove the 2 bolts from the LH upper cowl grille panel and remove the LH upper cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Lower cowl panel grille 8. Remove the wiper arm and wiper pivot shaft assembly. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the 2 bolts. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Remove the 2 bolts from the upper left lower cowl grille panel extension and remove the panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 10. Remove the 4 bolts from the upper right lower cowl panel extension and remove the panel. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 11. Disconnect the wiring harness from the retainer on the left front of the lower cowl grille panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9373 12. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the powertrain control module (PCM). 13. Remove the evaporative purge valve and bracket from the center of the lower cowl panel grille and set aside. 14. Remove the 5 bolts and 3 nuts from inside the lower cowl grille panel. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 15. Remove the bolt from the lower cowl panel-to-front of dash - To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 16. Remove the lower cowl grille panel and PCM from the vehicle. Upper and lower cowl grille panel 17. CAUTION: Incorrect installation of the lower/upper cowl panel grille may cause damage to the windshield. Make sure the cowl panel grille clips are located under the windshield prior to installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Transfer the components as necessary. - Adjust the pivot arms. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9378 2. Remove the front door window glass inner weatherstrip. 3. Remove the front door glass top run. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure the top run is fully seated before reinstalling the front door window glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9382 Part 2 DOOR GLASS RUN AND BRACKET - REAR Removal and Installation NOTE: The bracket is removed with the rear door glass. 1. Remove the rear door glass. 2. Remove the rear door glass top run. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL - EXPLODED VIEW Exterior Trim, Seals, Fixed Glass And End Caps Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9386 Air Deflector Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9387 Sliding Glass, Blinds And Primary Seal Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9388 Idler Track And Mechanism Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9389 Front And Rear Sunshade Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9390 Rear Trim Ring Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9391 Roof Opening Panel Motor(s) And Electrical Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9392 Motor Block And Drive Tube Assembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9393 Guide Tracks And Mechanisms Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9394 Front Guide Track Mechanism ROOF OPENING PANEL SEAL - PRIMARY Removal 1. Remove the roof opening panel sliding glass. 2. Carefully peel off the primary seal. - Clean residual adhesive tape from the housing using a suitable cleaner. Installation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9395 Primary Seal Alignment 1. NOTE: - The primary seal seam is placed at the rear centerline. - Make sure the primary seal lip is facing outward. Install the primary seal. Refer to the primary seal alignment figure. 2. NOTE: When the roof opening sliding glass panel is in the VENT position, the roof opening panel primary seal should contact the leading edge of the sliding glass. Install the roof opening panel sliding glass. Initialize the roof opening panel motor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9400 C2064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 9403 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS) Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS) BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH Edge MKX Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9410 Removal and Installation MKX 1. Remove the driver air bag module. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the steering wheel control bezel. All vehicles 3. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9415 C2064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 9418 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Switch (BPS) Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH (BPS) BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH Edge MKX Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9425 Removal and Installation MKX 1. Remove the driver air bag module. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the steering wheel control bezel. All vehicles 3. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is part of the hazard switch/traction control switch assembly. 1. Depower the system. 2. Pull out to release the 8 retaining clips and detach the instrument panel (I/P) center trim panel. 3. Disconnect the passenger air bag deactivation indicator electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9430 4. Release the 4 locking tabs (2 upper and 2 lower) on the passenger air bag deactivation indicator and remove it from the I/P center finish panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the system. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams C4186 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9438 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9439 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9440 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9441 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9442 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9443 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9444 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9445 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9446 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9447 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9448 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9449 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9450 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9451 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9452 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9453 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9454 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9455 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 44-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9456 44-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Diagrams C909 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vehicle Demagnetizing Compass: Service and Repair Vehicle Demagnetizing VEHICLE DEMAGNETIZING CAUTION: During demagnetizing, the demagnetizer coil is pulled towards the vehicle. Place a cloth over the vehicle roof to protect the vehicle surface if contact occurs. Make sure the cloth covers the front third and the entire width of the roof. NOTE: - The demagnetizing process requires the use of a demagnetizing coil commonly used by television repair technicians to demagnetize television tubes. - To demagnetize, use a constant circular motion over the vehicle roof. Do not turn off the demagnetizer while sweeping the vehicle roof to prevent remagnetizing ferrous materials contained in the vehicle. - During the demagnetizing process, make sure the phenolic surface of the tool (the side opposite the handle) is closest to the vehicle surface. 1. Demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof. 1 Turn on the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle. 2 Holding the demagnetizer no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) from the vehicle roof and starting on the passenger side, demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield using a constant circular motion. Keep the circle radius within 30 cm (12 in) while sweeping across the entire surface of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield. Continue the circular motion 4 times. 3 After the fourth pass and without stopping, move the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle. 4 Turn the demagnetizer off. 2. Carry out the Compass Zone Adjustment procedure. See: Compass Zone Adjustment 3. Carry out the Compass Calibration Adjustment procedure. See: Compass Calibration Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vehicle Demagnetizing > Page 9462 Compass: Service and Repair Compass Zone Adjustment COMPASS ZONE ADJUSTMENT 1. Start the engine. 2. NOTE: The top of the message center must be blank. Do not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. Press the message center switch INFO button repeatedly until the compass and the odometer are displayed in the message center. 3. Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location. 4. Press and hold the RESET button until RESET FOR ZONE is displayed in the message center. 5. Release the RESET button and slowly press the RESET button down again. 6. Press the SETUP button repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed. 7. Press and release the RESET button to exit the zone setting mode and lock your individual zone. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vehicle Demagnetizing > Page 9463 Compass: Service and Repair Compass Calibration COMPASS CALIBRATION 1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential electrical accessories (rear window defrost, heater, A/C, map lamps, wipers, etc.) and make sure all doors are closed. Start the vehicle. 2. Press the RESET button until RESET FOR CAL is displayed in the message center display. 3. NOTE: This will take up to 3 circles to complete calibration Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle at no more than 5 km/h (3 mph) until CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETE in the message center. 4. The compass is now calibrated. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Depowering Procedure WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connector on a side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in side air curtain module deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the (SPDJB). 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 3. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9469 exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9470 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in safety canopy deployment, which may result in personal injury. - The safety belt pretensioners are pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in pretensioner or air bag deployment which may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories off. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9471 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. 9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the instrument panel (I/P). - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9472 10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the forward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the I/P. 12. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9473 14. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. MKX 16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH I/P finish panel. 17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the I/P. 18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9474 19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly. 20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket. 21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module. 22. CAUTION: Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the I/P and rest the module on the cross vehicle beam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9475 23. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag module. 25. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 26. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag module from the glove compartment opening. All vehicles 27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9476 29. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy module. 30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 31. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9477 32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB. 34. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation All vehicles 1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector to the seat cushion frame. 4. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9478 6. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. MKX 9. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9479 Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 10. NOTE: During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the hooks are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the I/P. Raise the rear of the passenger air bag module onto the 3 mounting studs. 11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts. 1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9480 13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly. 14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly. 15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the I/P. 16. NOTE: Make sure the RH I/P finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the RH I/P finish panel. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9481 17. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 18. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 19. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). All vehicles 20. Hook the glove compartment door to the I/P. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9482 21. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 22. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 25. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instructions may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will either: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch assembly. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Release the 4 tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9489 C479 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 9493 C253 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 9494 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER The message center is a fixed format vacuum fluorescent display, integrated into the instrument cluster. The message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The message center displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle systems. The message center informs the driver of vehicle operations and notifies the driver of potential vehicle problems by displaying a warning message pertaining to the system in which a fault has been detected. The message center provides the following features: - Information displays - Setup displays - System check messages - System warning messages The message center information can be selected through a set of 3 buttons: - INFO - SETUP - RESET Message Center Configuration The message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock, auto-unlock and easy entry/easy exit (if equipped), or to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as the compass. On configurable items such as autolock, auto-unlock or easy entry/easy exit the message center indicates the appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK OFF. If the driver selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK AID ON . Compass Display The message center provides a compass display and uses directional information sent from a compass module, located on the underside of the inside rear view mirror. Information Displays The information displays are non-timed modes. The selected mode remains on until the driver presses a message center button to change the mode or it is overridden by another mode. The information (INFO button) display modes are: Odometer - Compass - Trip odometer A or B - Distance to empty (DTE) - Average fuel economy - Average speed - Trip elapsed drive time 1 or 2 Setup Displays The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. The setup display modes are: System check - Units English/metric - Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped) - Autolock on/off (if equipped) - Auto-unlock on/off (if equipped) - Power liftgate on/off (if equipped) - Easy entry/easy exit seat on/off (if equipped) - Reverse parking aid on/off (if equipped) - Language System Check The system check provides a check of all the monitored systems on the vehicle. The system check scrolls through each of the monitored systems and provides a visual indication to report out the status of each system. The message center displays OK for approximately 2 seconds if the system check does not detect a fault in the system and displays a warning message for approximately 2 seconds if the system check detects a fault in the system. Press the RESET button to scroll through the system check messages. The systems monitored during the system check are: Door ajar - Engine temperature Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 9495 - TPMS - Oil pressure - Brake fluid level - Washer fluid level - Fuel level - Distance to empty (DTE) System Warning Messages The system warning messages alert the operator to possible problems or malfunctions in the vehicle operating systems. The message center displays the last selected feature if there are no additional warning messages. Once a warning message has been displayed, the message must be acknowledged to allow full functionality of the message center. Press the RESET to acknowledge and clear the warning message. The warning messages are divided into 3 basic categories: Cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected. - Reappears 10 minutes from pressing the RESET button. - Reappears if the condition clears then reoccurs within the same ignition cycle ON-OFF cycle. The warning messages that cannot be reset are: DRIVER DOOR AJAR - PASSENGER DOOR AJAR - REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR - REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR - PARK BRAKE ENGAGED - PLEASE CLOSE DOOR - PRESS RESET TO CLEAR The warning messages that reoccur after 10 minutes are: LOW FUEL LEVEL - CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM - LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL The warning messages that display whenever the ignition switch is turned from the OFF position to the ON position are: WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW - LIFTGATE AJAR - LOW TIRE PRESSURE - CHECK RPA (if equipped) - CHECK COMPASS MODE (if equipped) - COMPASS NO RESPONSE (if equipped) - COMPASS DATA ERROR - TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT - TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT - POWER LIFTGATE OFF - PARK ASSIST OFF Service Procedure Displays The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair procedures related to the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). The displayed warning messages are as follows: TRAIN MODE: TRAIN xx TIRE - TIRE TRAINING MODE COMPETE - TIRE NOT TRAINED - REPAIR The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair procedures related to the compass display. The displayed warning messages are as follows: RESET FOR ZONE - SETUP ZONE XX - RESET FOR CAL - CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE - CALIBRATION COMPLETE The message center displays the IKT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM warning message to indicate a problem programming the integrated key transmitter (IKT). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test: - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs for the instrument cluster. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts. For all other module DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The message center is an integral part of the instrument cluster that receives and acts upon much of the same information that is input and used to operate the instrument cluster gauges, indicators, and warning indicators. The message center, located in the center of the instrument cluster is a vacuum fluorescent 2-line display. The message center electronic functions use both hardwired, and the controller area network (CAN) circuitry to transmit and receive information. Whenever conditions are present that require a warning message, the message center replaces the last selected display with the new warning display. Once the message is reset or cleared, the message center returns to the last selected display. If multiple warnings are present, the message center displays each warning for approximately 4 seconds. Warning messages are also generally associated with other observable instrument cluster indications. For example, when the LH front door is opened, the message center displays the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR along with the door ajar warning indicator. This allows the message center to be a more informative supplement to the instrument cluster gauges and indicators. It is very important to understand: - where the input (command) originates. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9498 - all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate. - which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message. - if the module that received the input (message) controls the output of the feature, or if it outputs a message over the CAN to another module. - which module controls the output of the feature. Instrument Cluster Messages NOTE: Whenever a message is suspected as missing, confirmed by a missing message DTC, it is important to look for other symptoms that may also be present in the instrument cluster and throughout the vehicle. Once a DTC is set in the instrument cluster it may be helpful to review the complete message list available in Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to see what other modules also rely on the same message and run the self-test for those modules. If the message is missing from other modules, the same DTC may also be set in those modules. Confirmation of missing messages common to multiple modules may indicate that the originating module is the source of the concern or the communication network may be experiencing some problems. The instrument cluster uses input messages from other modules to control the gauges, informational indicators, warning indicators and message center displays over the communication networks. If a required message is missing or invalid for less than 5 seconds, the gauge or indicator that requires the message remains at the last commanded state based upon the last known good message. For example, if the message is missing the O/D off status for less than 5 seconds and the O/D off indicator was ON (O/D cancelled), the indicator remains in the ON state until the next good message is received. If the message remains missing or invalid for greater than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets a U-code DTC and the output becomes a default action for the indicator or gauge. Each indicator or gauge utilizes a different default strategy depending on the nature of the indication. Refer Instrument Cluster for further descriptions of the default action specific to each indicator or gauge. If the messaged input to the cluster returns at any time, the normal function of the gauge or indicator resumes. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9499 B1209 / U2013 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9500 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9501 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9502 Symptom Chart (Part 3) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9503 Symptom Chart (Part 4) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9504 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The Message Center Is Not Operating Correctly PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER IS NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY A1-A2 Normal Operation The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+ voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster ground is received through circuit GD133 (BK). The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit RMC27 (WH/BN). Possible Causes - Message center switch - Instrument cluster Test B: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly PINPOINT TEST B: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9505 B1-B2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9506 B3-B5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9507 B6 Normal Operation The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+ voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster ground is received through circuit GD133 (BK). The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit RMC27 (WH/BN). DTC B1209 - is an on-demand DTC that sets if the instrument cluster detects any of the message center switch buttons stuck during the self-test. Possible Causes - Circuitry - Message center switch - Instrument cluster Test C: The Compass Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST C: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE C1-C2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9508 C2-C3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9509 C4-C5 Normal Operation The compass sensor module receives voltage from the smart junction box (SJB) through circuit CBP31 (BU/OG) and is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the instrument cluster through the compass communication data plus circuit VMC31 (YE/GN) and compass communication data minus circuit VMC30 (BU/GY). DTC U2013 - is a continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets if the instrument cluster is missing the compass data from the compass module. Possible Causes - Fuse - Circuitry - Compass module - Instrument cluster Test D: The Compass Is Inaccurate PINPOINT TEST D: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9510 D1-D3 Normal Operation The compass sensor module communicates the vehicle direction to the instrument cluster through the compass communication data plus circuit VMC31 (YE/GN) and compass communication data minus circuit VMC30 (BU/GY). The magnetic fields generated by the earths north and south poles are divided into zones that differ from each other with respect to how the magnetic fields appear. The magnetic north can change by up to 4 degrees between zones and become noticeable across multiple zones. The compass zone must be set to the correct zone for the compass to read accurately. Factors within the vehicle may affect the ability of the compass module to accurately read the magnetic north. Calibrating the compass allows the compass module to compensate for vehicle factors that influence the accuracy of the compass. NOTE: Outside factors such as bridges, steel structures, tall buildings and power lines also affect compass accuracy. Possible Causes - Vehicle magnetization - Zone setting - Calibration - Compass module Test E: The WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Warning Is Inoperative/Always On PINPOINT TEST E: THE WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW WARNING IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9511 E1-E4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9512 E4-E7 Normal Operation The instrument cluster provides a reference voltage to the washer fluid switch through circuit CMC20 (VT). The washer fluid switch is grounded through circuit GD123 (BK/GY). When the washer fluid is low, the washer fluid switch closes to ground, pulling the reference voltage low. When the instrument cluster detects the washer fluid input pulled low, it displays the WASHER FLUID LOW warning. Possible Causes - Circuitry - Washer fluid level switch - Instrument cluster Test F: The CHECK PARK ASSIST/PARK ASSIST OFF Warning Is Inoperative Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9513 PINPOINT TEST F: THE CHECK PARK ASSIST/PARK ASSIST OFF WARNING IS INOPERATIVE F1-F2 Normal Operation The parking aid on/off status is sent from the parking aid module to the instrument cluster over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) communication bus lines. When the RESET button is pressed, the instrument cluster sends a query to the parking aid module, requesting a system status. The parking aid module responds to the instrument cluster with the status of the system, either on or off. If the return status message is missing or corrupted, the instrument cluster does not display the brackets around either the ON or OFF selection. Possible Causes - Communication network - Parking aid system Test G: The POWER LIFTGATE OFF Message Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST G: THE POWER LIFTGATE OFF MESSAGE IS INOPERATIVE G1-G2 Normal Operation The power liftgate on/off status is sent from the power liftgate module to the instrument cluster over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) communication bus lines. When the RESET button is pressed, the instrument cluster sends a query to the power liftgate module, requesting a system status. The power liftgate module responds to the instrument cluster with the status of the system, either on or off. If the return Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9514 status message is missing or corrupted, the instrument cluster does not display the brackets around either the ON or OFF selection. Possible Causes - Communication network - Power liftgate system Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9515 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9516 MKX Removal and Installation MKX 1. NOTE: The transmission selector lever bezel is held in place by 4 tabs that are located in the shifter assembly. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9517 2. Open the floor console compartment door and pull the floor console finish panel straight up to release the retainer clips and remove the finish panel. 3. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the storage compartment assembly. All vehicles 4. Pull the instrument panel center finish panel straight out to release the retainer clips and remove the instrument panel center finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Press the 4 retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9518 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed correctly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9526 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9527 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9528 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9529 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9530 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9531 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9532 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9533 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9534 Fuel Gauge: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9535 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9536 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9537 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9538 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9539 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9540 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9541 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9542 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 9551 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 9557 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9560 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module C463 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9563 C434 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9564 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9565 Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE AND RESERVOIR The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9568 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9569 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9570 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9571 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9572 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9573 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9574 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9575 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9576 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9577 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9578 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Depowering Procedure WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connector on a side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in side air curtain module deployment. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the (SPDJB). 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 3. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 4. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9584 exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the RCM and occupant classification sensor (OCS) module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9585 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the safety canopy module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in safety canopy deployment, which may result in personal injury. - The safety belt pretensioners are pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in pretensioner or air bag deployment which may result in serious personal injury. - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraints system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraints system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. Turn all vehicle accessories off. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located in the LH lower kick panel, remove the lower kick panel fuse cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The front impact severity sensors are located on the radiator support under the front bumper cover. The first row side impact sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. The second row side impact sensors are located on the C-pillars. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9586 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. NOTE: Repeat this step for both locking pins. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool through the access hole on the backside of the steering wheel, position the tool against the spring clip and push in, disengaging the clip from the locking pin. With the spring clip disengaged from the locking pin, gently pull back on that side of the driver air bag module to release it from the steering wheel. 8. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver air bag module electrical connectors out by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking buttons on the driver air bag module electrical connectors. With the locking buttons released, remove the electrical connectors and the driver air bag module. 9. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Then unhook the glove compartment door from the instrument panel (I/P). - If equipped, detach the glove compartment door dampener. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9587 10. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts from the cross vehicle beam bracket. 11. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. Through the glove compartment opening, release the 4 LH side deployment door clips. Then release the forward-most 5 clips and separate the deployment door and passenger air bag module from the I/P. 12. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9588 14. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector and remove the passenger air bag module. MKX 16. Pull straight out to release the 5 retaining clips and remove the RH I/P finish panel. 17. Remove the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket from the front of the I/P. 18. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the LH duct assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9589 19. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the screw and the RH duct assembly. 20. Remove the 4 bolts and the passenger air bag module support bracket. 21. Remove the 3 nuts from the passenger air bag module. 22. CAUTION: Do not allow the passenger air bag module to hang from the wiring harness. Damage to the wiring harness and connectors may occur. Lower the rear of the passenger air bag module off the 3 mounting studs. Move the passenger air bag module rearward to release the 7 hooks from the I/P and rest the module on the cross vehicle beam. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9590 23. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the LH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the LH locking button released, remove the LH electrical connector from the passenger air bag module. 25. Using a small screwdriver as shown, lift up and release the locking button on the RH passenger air bag module electrical connector. 26. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger air bag module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the RH locking button released, remove the RH electrical connector. Remove the passenger air bag module from the glove compartment opening. All vehicles 27. From under the rear of the front passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 28. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9591 29. CAUTION: Do not pull the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the passenger safety canopy module. 30. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 31. CAUTION: Do not pull the driver safety canopy module electrical connector out by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. With the locking button released, remove the electrical connector from the driver safety canopy module. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9592 32. From under the rear of the driver seat, detach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector from the seat cushion frame. Then slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 33. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB. 34. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation All vehicles 1. Remove RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. Then attach the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector to the seat cushion frame. 4. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the driver safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the driver safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9593 6. CAUTION: - Do not install the safety canopy module electrical connector by the locking button. Damage to the locking button may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector locking button must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The safety canopy module electrical connector is unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the safety canopy module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the safety canopy module. Do not force the electrical connector into the safety canopy module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking button released, install the passenger safety canopy module electrical connector fully into the passenger safety canopy module and seat the locking button. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. MKX 9. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9594 Position the passenger air bag module on the cross vehicle beam. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 10. NOTE: During the passenger air bag module installation, make sure all 7 of the hooks are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module 7 hooks into the I/P. Raise the rear of the passenger air bag module onto the 3 mounting studs. 11. Install the 3 passenger air bag module nuts. - Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 12. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the passenger air bag module bracket and passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and the 4 bolts. 1. Install the passenger air bag module support bracket and 2 bolts to the cross vehicle beam. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the inboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Install the outboard passenger air bag module support bracket-to-passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9595 13. Install the screw and the RH duct assembly. 14. Install the screw and the LH duct assembly. 15. Install the screw for the LH duct assembly bracket in the front of the I/P. 16. NOTE: Make sure the RH I/P finish panel 5 retaining clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the RH I/P finish panel. Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9596 17. CAUTION: - Do not install the passenger air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. With the locking buttons released, install the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors fully into the passenger air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 18. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment doors. Damage to the air bag module may occur. NOTE: During air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated in the I/P. Install the passenger air bag module deployment door rear-most clips into the I/P first. Then install the side deployment door clips working around to the forward-most clips seating each of them fully into the I/P. 19. NOTE: To avoid a squeak or rattle condition, install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts in this order. Install the passenger air bag module 2 bolts. 1. Install the inboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 2. Install the outboard passenger air bag module bolt. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). All vehicles 20. Hook the glove compartment door to the I/P. Close the glove compartment door. - If equipped, attach the glove compartment door dampener. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 9597 21. CAUTION: - Do not install the driver air bag module electrical connectors by the locking buttons. Damage to the locking buttons may occur. - The driver air bag module electrical connector locking buttons must be in the released position when the connector is being installed or connector damage may occur. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. With the locking buttons released, install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module and seat the locking buttons. 22. NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when both wire clips are seated in the driver air bag module. Align the driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 2 driver air bag module locking pins to the steering wheel wire clips. When the 2 locking pins are seated in place, there should be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. 23. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 24. Install RCM fuse 46 (7.5A) to the SPDJB and install the lower kick panel fuse cover. 25. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Failure to follow this instructions may result in serious personal injury. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will either: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection TPMS Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. TPMS Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for this condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, perform this procedure to wake up the TPMS sensors. 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2 Adjust the air pressure in the LF tire (as necessary). 3 Activate the LF TPMS sensor, at least 2 times, using the tire pressure monitor activation tool. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5 If the TPMS indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures TPMS Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for these conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has received no signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator for this vehicle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to an Oil Change Reminder Lamp. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-5 (Engine, Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 9613 C103 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 9614 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cooling fan assembly. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply thread sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads prior to installation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9619 C198 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams C3268 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9626 C2015 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9627 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch screw and the switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime The warning indicator and chime are reminders to fasten the safety belt. The system operates as follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition key is turned to the RUN or START position, the indicator will illuminate for 1 to 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4 to 8 seconds. - If the safety belt is buckled while the indicator is on and the chime is sounding, the indicator and warning chime turn off. - If the safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON position, neither the indicator nor the chime will turn on. Belt-Minder(R) The Belt-Minder(R) feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides an additional reminder that the driver's and/or front passenger's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. To activate or deactivate the Belt-Minder(R) feature, refer to Seat Belt Systems or the Owner's Literature. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch assembly. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Release the 4 tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9638 C479 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 9647 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge TSB 08-1-7 01/21/08 INACCURATE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR - VEHICLE BUILT BEFORE 11/1/2007 FORD: 2007-2008 Edge LINCOLN: 2007-2008 MKX ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Edge and MKX vehicles built before 11/1/2007, may experience an inaccurate low fuel gauge indicator. This condition may be caused by a stuck float arm on the fuel delivery module. The fuel delivery module float arm could get hung up on the fuel tank baffle plate. This failure mode will only occur when the fuel tank is at or near empty fuel level. When the fuel tank is refilled to a full level, the fuel gauge will continue to read a low fuel fill level. For all other fuel gauge related concerns, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-01. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. To make this repair it will be necessary to remove the fuel pump module from the fuel tank. Follow WSM, Section 310-01. 2. Once the fuel delivery module is removed from the fuel tank, access the fuel tank baffle through the fuel tank fuel delivery opening. (Figure 1) 3. Move the baffle plate with a wooden object or by hand towards the front of the vehicle to prevent interference between the baffle and the float arm. The fuel tank baffle plate is a metal plate that is easy to move by hand or using a tool with no consequent damage to the baffle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge Sender: > 08-1-7 > Jan > 08 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge > Page 9653 4. The fuel delivery module float arm should have a clearance of 1 5/32" (29.63 mm) in the empty tank position (bottom) and 13/16" (20.73 mm) in the full tank position (up). (Figure 2) 5. Install the fuel delivery module following WSM, Section 310-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080107A 2007-2008 Edge/MKX: 1.7 Hrs. Reposition the Fuel Tank Baffle Plate. Includes Time to Remove Rear Seat and Fuel Delivery Module. (Do Not Use With 9350E, 63100B,63100B, 9275A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9002 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9656 View 151-14 (Left Rear) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module C463 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9659 C434 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9660 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9661 Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. FUEL PUMP (FP) MODULE AND RESERVOIR The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module FUEL PUMP MODULE Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9664 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9665 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9666 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel causing personal injury or a fire hazard. All vehicles Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9667 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel pump (FP) module access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 9. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank supply tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9668 11. CAUTION: Place absorbent pads on the floor pan in the immediate area in case of fuel spills. Carefully remove the fuel pump (FP) module from the vehicle to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Using the special tool, remove the FP module lock ring retainer. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 12. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the FP module and/or float arm. Carefully lift the FP module out of the fuel tank enough to access and disconnect the fuel tank crossover tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. All vehicles 13. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module will have residual fuel remaining internally, drain into a suitable container. Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank. 14. CAUTION: - Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel pump (FP) module flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. - Make sure to install a new fuel pump (FP) module O-ring seal. Install a new lock ring if it is bent, damaged or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. Remove the FP module O-ring seal. 15. NOTE: Make sure the alignment tab on the fuel pump (FP) module and the fuel tank meet before tightening the FP module lock ring. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9669 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9670 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicle (Part 2) All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 1) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9671 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicle (Part 2) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9672 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9673 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert a suitable fuel drain tube into the fuel tank filler pipe until it reaches the fuel tank inlet spout. 5. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module and fuel level sensor will be below the fuel level in the tank when the tank is full. Make sure to drain 1/8 of the fuel capacity through the filler pipe prior to removing the fuel level sensor or fuel spillage will occur. Attach the fuel storage tanker to the fuel drain tube and remove any residual fuel remaining in the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. Remove the rear seat. 7. Position the carpet and/or any insulation covering the fuel level sensor access cover aside. 8. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel level sensor access cover. 9. Disconnect the fuel level sensor electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module > Page 9674 10. CAUTION: Place absorbant pads in the general work area in case of fuel spillage. Release the lock tab, rotate the fuel level sensor counterclockwise approximately 1/4 turn and lift upward. 11. CAUTION: - The fuel level sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm. - Carefully remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank to avoid fuel spillage inside the vehicle. Carefully lift and remove the fuel level sensor from the fuel tank. 12. CAUTION: Inspect the mating surfaces of the fuel level sensor flange and the fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new fuel level sensor or fuel tank if the O-ring seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal. - Upon installation, properly seat and press down firmly on the fuel level sensor, rotate it clockwise until the lock arrow on the sensor aligns with the notch on the tank. Torque should not exceed 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9678 C198 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 (Left Front) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9682 C2015 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9683 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch screw and the switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection TPMS Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. TPMS Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for this condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, perform this procedure to wake up the TPMS sensors. 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2 Adjust the air pressure in the LF tire (as necessary). 3 Activate the LF TPMS sensor, at least 2 times, using the tire pressure monitor activation tool. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5 If the TPMS indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures TPMS Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for these conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has received no signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9691 6. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. 8. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. 10. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Disassembly CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 9694 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor can occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. 4. Remove the sensor. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor can occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 9695 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 9696 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Disassembly Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 9697 CAUTION: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. 2. WARNING: The TPMS band is under tension. Always use safety goggles or a face shield and gloves when removing the TPMS band/strap. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in this sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 inch) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the hinge end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers can damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 9698 of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap is positioned in the lowest spot possible for correct sensor and cradle retention. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 inch) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 inch lbs). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap can be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9706 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams C286 C287 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9707 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair LIGHT SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the light sensor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9712 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9713 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9718 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9719 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9720 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9721 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9722 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9723 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9724 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9725 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9726 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9727 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9728 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9729 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9730 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9731 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9732 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9733 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9734 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9735 Brake Lamp: Connector Views C415 C412 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9736 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 90-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9737 90-2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9738 90-4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9739 90-5 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. - Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9742 B1485-B2047 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9743 Symptom Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9744 Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test H: All the Stoplamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST H: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE H1 H1-H2 Normal Operation The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage through circuit SBB71 (WH/RD) from the battery junction box (BJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9745 - Stoplamp switch Test I: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST I: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE I1-I2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9746 I3-I6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9747 I7-I9 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9748 I9-I10 Normal Operation When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also routed to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. Ground for the LH and RH rear stoplamps is provided through circuits GD149 (BK/GY) and GD151 (BK/GN), respectively. Ground for the high mounted stoplamp is provided through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). DTC B2044 Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to Ground - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2045 Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2046 Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to Ground - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2047 Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relay (if equipped) - High mounted stoplamp - SJB Test J: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9749 J1-J7 Normal Operation When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp and the PCM through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay. DTC B1485 Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit. DTC B2045 Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2047 Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9750 This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Stoplamp switch - PCM - SJB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9751 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 9760 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 9766 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9767 View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9768 C2064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9769 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9770 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOPLAMP SWITCH Removal 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. NOTE: The stoplamp switch will be difficult to remove if the switch plunger is not depressed. A slight rearward force should be adequate to depress the plunger. With a light force (approximately 1-4 N [1-3 lb]), pull rearward on the brake pedal, rotate the stoplamp switch 45 degrees clockwise and remove the stoplamp switch. Installation CAUTION: It is very important to not press, pull or touch the brake pedal assembly during the installation of the stoplamp switch. Failure to follow these instructions may damage the stoplamp switch. 1. Without movement to the brake pedal assembly, install the stoplamp switch and rotate 45 degrees counterclockwise. 2. Connect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams C926 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams C904 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9781 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9782 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9783 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9784 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9785 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9786 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9787 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9788 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9789 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9790 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9791 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9792 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9793 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9794 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9795 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9796 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9797 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9798 Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views C4352 C923 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9799 C918 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9800 Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 89-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9801 89-2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9802 89-3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9803 89-4 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool release software. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication with the SJB, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the interior lighting system. The interior lighting system illuminates the courtesy lamps to enhance visibility of the interior while a vehicle door is open or ajar, and the vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h (9 mph). The SJB controls all interior lighting functions and timing by monitoring inputs from the door ajar switches and vehicle speed. Interior Lighting Delay The interior lighting delay feature provides temporary illumination of the courtesy lamps after the doors are opened and then closed. The interior Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9806 lighting delay feature keeps the courtesy lamps on for a period of 25 seconds after all the doors are closed. If during the 25 second delay time the SJB detects that the ignition has been turned out of OFF, or if the vehicle is locked using the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter or the keypad, the courtesy lamp illumination is discontinued. Illuminated Entry The illuminated entry requests the courtesy lamps to be illuminated (when the ignition is OFF) and either the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed, or the vehicle is unlocked using the keypad. The illuminated entry requests the courtesy lamps off after 25 seconds have elapsed, the ignition is switched out of OFF, the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed, or the vehicle is locked using the keypad or door lock cylinder. Illuminated Exit The illuminated exit requests the courtesy lamps to be illuminated for 25 seconds when all doors are closed and the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder. The illuminated exit requests the courtesy lamps to be deactivated when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder, 25 seconds have elapsed or a door or liftgate is opened. Theater Lighting The theater lighting option ramps-up the courtesy lamps over 0.7 second when courtesy lamp activation is requested. The theater lighting feature ramps-down the courtesy lamps over 1.7 seconds when interior lighting deactivation is requested by any feature other than the panic alarm or battery saver. Interior Lamp Arbitrator The SJB chooses between the interior lighting, interior mode, interior lighting delay, illuminated entry, illuminated exit and battery saver to determine which feature has precedence of activating and deactivating the interior lamps. The features are prioritized as follows: Perimeter alarm/panic alarm - Demand lighting - Battery saver - Interior lighting - Interior light delay - Illuminated entry - Illuminated exit Battery Saver The SJB provides automatic shut-off of the demand lamps (cargo lamp, vanity lamps, map lamps and cargo lamp) and courtesy lamps after a time-out period in order to save battery voltage. A timer in the SJB is started when the ignition is turned to the OFF position, and all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass are closed. When the time-out period for the lamps has elapsed, the voltage is automatically shut off to the lamps by the SJB. While the SJB has voltage disabled, if the ignition is turned to any position other than OFF, any door becomes ajar, or the UNLOCK button of the RKE transmitter is pressed, a valid keypad code is entered, an unlock request from the cylinder is received, or the dome lamp switch is turned on, the SJB restores voltage and starts the timer again. NOTE: Time out is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). The battery saver time-outs are as follows: Courtesy lamps, if the dome lamp is on or the liftgate is open = 10 minutes - Courtesy lamps, if the dome lamp is on or the liftgate is open = 10 minutes - Demand lamps = 10 minutes Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit will then reset after an ignition cycle or customer demand of the function (switching the component on, 30-minute battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal until a successful on-demand self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the circuit function will return. Each circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC Operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then DTC B106F sets along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and a new module must be installed. The SJB FET protected output circuits for the interior lighting system are for the puddle lamps and courtesy lamp output circuits. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9807 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions B2A3A-B2077 B2718-B2721 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9808 Courtesy Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart (Part 1) Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9809 Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST A: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE A1-A2 A2-A3 Normal Operation Power is supplied to the courtesy lamps through the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 9 (15A), and SJB fuse 25 (10A) for the demand lamps. When any door is opened, the ajar switch opens, signaling the SJB. The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). Ground is supplied through circuit GD133 (BK) for the courtesy lamps, and circuit GD126 (BK/WH) for the cargo lamp. DTC B2A35 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the interior lighting circuit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9810 DTC B2A36 - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground from the interior lighting circuit. Possible Causes - Fuse - Circuitry - SJB Test B: An Individual Courtesy Lamp Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST B: AN INDIVIDUAL COURTESY LAMP IS INOPERATIVE B1 B1-B2 Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) provides voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). The courtesy lamps are grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). The cargo lamp is also on the courtesy lamp circuit. Circuit VLN33 (GY/VT) provides voltage to the cargo lamp, and the lamp is grounded through circuit GD126 (BK/WH). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9811 Possible Causes - Circuitry - Interior lamp Test C: The Courtesy Lamps Stay On Continuously PINPOINT TEST C: THE COURTESY LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY C1-C3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9812 C3-C8 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9813 C8-C10 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9814 C10-C13 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9815 C13-C15 Normal Operation When any door or the liftgate is opened, the ajar switch or the power liftgate module opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). DTC B1320 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the LH front door ajar circuit. DTC B1328 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the RH front door ajar circuit. DTC B1336 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the RH rear door ajar circuit. DTC B1572 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the LH rear door ajar circuit. DTC B1688 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground from the dimmer switch circuit. DTC B2077 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the liftgate ajar circuit. DTC B2A35 - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the courtesy lamp output circuit. DTC B2718 - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the power liftgate module detects a short to voltage from the liftgate ajar input circuit to the SJB. DTC B2721 - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the power liftgate module detects an open from the liftgate ajar input circuit to the SJB. Possible Causes - Circuitry Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9816 - Ajar switch - Liftgate ajar switch - Dimmer switch - Power liftgate module - SJB Test D: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With One Door Open PINPOINT TEST D: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN D1-D4 Normal Operation When any door is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). Possible Causes - Circuitry - Ajar switch - SJB Test E: The Demand Lamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST E: THE DEMAND LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9817 E1-E3 Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the demand lamps on circuit CLN09 (YE/GN). The demand lamps are grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). Possible Causes - Fuse - Circuitry - SJB Test F: An Individual Demand Lamp Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST F: AN INDIVIDUAL DEMAND LAMP IS INOPERATIVE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9818 F1-F2 Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the demand lamps on circuit CLN09 (YE/GN). The demand lamps are grounded through circuit GD133 (BK). Possible Causes - Circuitry - Interior lamp Test G: The Illuminated Entry Is Inoperative When Using The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter PINPOINT TEST G: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9819 G1-G2 Normal Operation The illuminated entry provides interior lighting whenever the smart junction box (SJB) receives a doors unlock request from the RKE transmitter. The SJB provides voltage on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT) for the courtesy lamps. Possible Causes - RKE system - SJB Test H: The Battery Saver Does Not Deactivate After Time-Out PINPOINT TEST H: THE BATTERY SAVER DOES NOT DEACTIVATE AFTER TIME-OUT H1-H2 Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) provides a battery saver function. The battery saver function provides automatic shutoff of the interior lamps (courtesy lamps and demand lamps) after a predetermined time has elapsed in order to save battery power. Possible Causes - Circuitry - SJB Test I: The Puddle Lamp(s) Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST I: THE PUDDLE LAMP(S) ARE INOPERATIVE Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9820 I1-I3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9821 I4-I5 Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) provides voltage to the puddle lamps through circuit CLN25 (VT). The puddle lamps have separate ground circuits. The LH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK), and the RH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD140 (BK/GN). DTC B2A39 - sets when the SJB detects an open on the puddle lamp output circuit. DTC B2A3A - sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the puddle lamp output circuit. Possible Causes - Fuse - Circuitry - Exterior mirror - SJB Test J: The Puddle Lamps Stay On Continuously PINPOINT TEST J: THE PUDDLE LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY J1-J2 Normal Operation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9822 The smart junction box (SJB) provides voltage to the puddle lamps through circuit CLN25 (VT). The puddle lamps have separate ground circuits. The LH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD133 (BK), and the RH exterior mirror is grounded through circuit GD140 (BK/GN). DTC B2A39 - sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage on the puddle lamp output circuit. Possible Causes - Circuitry - SJB Test K: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative From The Dimmer Control Switch PINPOINT TEST K: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE FROM THE DIMMER CONTROL SWITCH K1-K3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9823 K3-K4 Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the dimmer switch status on circuit CLN28 (GN/BU) to determine if the courtesy lamps are requested. Based on the dimmer switch status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps through circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). Possible Causes - Circuitry - Dimmer switch - SJB Test L: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With The Liftgate Open PINPOINT TEST L: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH THE LIFTGATE OPEN Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9824 L1-L4 Normal Operation When the liftgate is opened, the ajar switch (or power liftgate module, if equipped) opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuit, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). DTC B2721 - sets when the power liftgate module detects a short to ground from the SJB, or liftgate ajar circuit. Possible Causes - Circuitry - Liftgate ajar switch - Power liftgate module - SJB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9825 Courtesy Lamp: Service and Repair PUDDLE LAMP Removal and Installation 1. Release the tab to remove the puddle lamp from the mirror housing. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. NOTE: An audible click can be heard when the puddle lamp is fully seated. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9826 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9831 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9832 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9833 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9834 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9835 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9836 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9837 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9838 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9839 Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9840 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9841 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9842 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9843 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9844 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9845 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9846 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9847 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9848 Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 97-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9849 97-2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9850 97-3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9851 97-5 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Inspection and Verification Daytime Running Lamp: Testing and Inspection Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the daytime running lamps (DRL) following these steps: - Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. - Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. - Place the transmission in any gear other than PARK (P). - If the DRL does not operate, make sure the SJB is configured for DRL before proceeding to the next step. 2. Carry out the continuous and on-demand self tests for the SJB. - If any DTCs are retrieved related to the concern, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). If no DTCs are retrieved, go to the next step. 3. Verify the low beam operation. - Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position. If the low beams do not operate correctly, refer to Headlamps. - If the low beams operate correctly and the DRL operation is incorrect, proceed to the next step. 4. Check the SJB inputs. - Monitor the ignition switch, the headlamp switch input PIDs and the transmission gear status PIDs. If the ignition switch PIDs do not agree with the ignition switch position, refer to Ignition Switch. - If the transmission gear status PIDs do not agree with the gear selector lever position, refer to Transmission Control Systems. - If the headlamp switch PIDs do not agree with the headlamp switch position, refer to Headlamps. - If the PIDs indicate correct ignition, headlamp switch and transmission gear status, install a new SJB. Test the system for normal operation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Inspection and Verification > Page 9854 Daytime Running Lamp: Testing and Inspection Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION NOTE: When installing a new smart junction box (SJB), it must be configured for this feature, if originally equipped. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). The SJB controls the DRL by using various inputs to determine whether or not the DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include: - Ignition switch position - Headlamp switch position - Headlamps on or off - Transmission gear selection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9855 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch assembly. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Release the 4 tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Lamp - Front Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Interior Lamp - Front INTERIOR LAMP - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. Pull the overhead console down and remove the console from the headliner retainer. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Lamp - Front > Page 9863 Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Interior Lamp - Rear INTERIOR LAMP - REAR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear interior lamp lens. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Interior Lamp - Front > Page 9864 2. Release the 2 retaining clips (through the access holes) and remove the rear interior lamp assembly. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9868 C479 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair FOG LAMP BULB WARNING: The fog lamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: - The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed. - Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fog lamp bulb. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9880 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP BULB Edge Low Beam Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9885 Edge High Beam Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9886 MKX Low Beam Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9887 Removal and Installation WARNING: The headlamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: - The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed from the headlamp. - Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. MKX 1. Remove the headlamp bulb access cover. All vehicles 2. NOTE: To remove, rotate the headlamp bulb approximately 1/8 turn counterclockwise. Remove the headlamp bulb. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Control Module: Service and Repair ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING MODULE Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Remove the 3 screws and the adaptive front lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Illumination Dimmer Switch View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Illumination Dimmer Switch > Page 9895 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 9898 C2298 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 9901 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 9902 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Illumination Dimmer Switch Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 9903 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9904 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9905 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9909 C205 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9910 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9911 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9912 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left > Page 9918 View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left C2996 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 9921 C2997 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9926 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9927 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9928 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9929 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9930 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9931 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9932 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9933 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9934 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9935 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9936 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9937 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9938 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9939 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9940 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9941 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9942 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9943 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views C452 C462 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9944 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9945 92-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9950 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9951 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9952 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9953 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9954 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9955 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9956 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9957 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9958 Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9959 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9960 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9961 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9962 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9963 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9964 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9965 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9966 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9967 Marker Lamp: Connector Views C151 C161 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9968 C4136 C4355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9969 C4138 C4356 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9970 Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9971 92-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9972 Marker Lamp: Service and Repair SIDE MARKER LAMP - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Release the tabs and remove the side marker lamp. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9977 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9978 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9979 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9980 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9981 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9982 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9983 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9984 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9985 Parking Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9986 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9987 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9988 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9989 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9990 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9991 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9992 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9993 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9994 Parking Lamp: Connector Views C412 C415 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9995 C1023 C1043 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9996 Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9997 92-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Parking Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. - Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10000 B1578 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10001 Symptom Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10002 Parking Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test O: One Or More Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST O: ONE OR MORE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE O1-O3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10003 O3-O4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10004 O4-O6 Normal Operation When the headlamp switch is placed in the PARKING LAMPS ON position, the smart junction box (SJB) provides a ground for the parking lamp relay coil (integrated into the SJB). When the parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps. Ground is provided to the rear parking, liftgate and license plate lamps through circuit GD149 (BK/GY) or circuit GD151 (BK/GN). Ground is provided to the front parking and side marker lamps through circuit GD120 (BK/GN) or circuit GD123 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10005 - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Liftgate lamp - Liftgate release handle - Headlamp assembly - SJB Test P: The Parking, Rear Or License Plate Lamps Are On Continuously PINPOINT TEST P: THE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY P1-P4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10006 P5-P6 Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the parking lamp request input from the headlamp switch through circuit CLS34 (GY). The SJB provides a ground for the parking lamp relay coil (integrated into the SJB) when a request for the parking lamps is received. When the parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) to the rear and front parking lamps. DTC B1578 Lamp Park Input Circuit Short to Ground - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground in the parking lamps on input circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Headlamp switch - SJB Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10007 Parking Lamp: Service and Repair PARKING LAMP BULB - FRONT Edge Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10008 MKX Removal and Installation MKX 1. Remove the headlamp bulb access cover. All vehicles 2. Remove the front parking lamp holder from the headlamp assembly. - Remove the front parking lamp bulb. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10009 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10014 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10015 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Control Module: Service and Repair ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING MODULE Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 screws and position the fender splash shield aside. 3. Remove the 3 screws and the adaptive front lighting module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10023 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10024 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10027 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10028 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10029 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10030 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10031 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10036 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams C286 C287 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10037 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair LIGHT SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the light sensor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 10046 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging TSB 07-11-9 06/11/07 BRAKE DRAG FORD: 2007 Edge LINCOLN: 2007 MKX ISSUE Some Edge/MKX vehicles may exhibit brake drag from the rear wheels or all wheels. Customers may notice an odor and/or reduced powertrain performance. In some cases, the driver may also note an integral vehicle dynamics (IVD) light after driving a given distance due to pressure noted in the module without a change in brake on/off (BOO) state. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to resolve brake drag concerns. SERVICE PROCEDURE Raise the vehicle on a hoist, with engine running, and vehicle in park. Rotate all of the wheels by hand to verify excessive force is necessary to turn wheels. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from all wheels - Replacement of the BOO switch is necessary. ^ To resolve the brake drag concern from the rear wheels only - Adjustment of the park brake cables are necessary. BOO Switch Replacement (All Brakes Drag) Removal 1. With the vehicle shut off and in park, remove the stop lamp switch by rotating the stop lamp switch in the clockwise direction. 2. If the brake pedal moves up during the removal of the switch, the pedal was being inadvertently held down by the stop lamp switch thus keeping the hydraulic circuits pressurized. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 417-01. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch and discard the switch. Installation NOTE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW STOP LAMP SWITCH MUST BE DONE WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL AT ITS NORMALLY INSTALLED AND RESTING POSITION. DO NOT PULL UP OR PUSH DOWN ON THE BRAKE PEDAL DURING STOP LAMP SWITCH INSTALLATION. REFER TO WSM, Section 417-01. 1. With the brake pedal at its rest position, insert the new stop lamp switch into the keyed hole on the brake pedal and rotate the switch 45 degrees counter-clockwise to seat the switch. You may hear a click sound during this step, this is normal. 2. Plug the wire harness connector to the new stop lamp switch. 3. Verify that the brake lamps are functioning properly and that the brakes are no longer dragging. Park Cable Adjustment (Rear Brakes Drag) Brake drag noted on rear wheels only likely caused by over adjusted park brake equalizer adjustment (or all 3 cable lengths built at the minimum levels). 1. With vehicle on Hoist and shut off, verify rear brake pads are positioned properly per WSM, Section 206-04: Rear Disc Brake. 2. With a fully released parking brake pedal, back off the adjustment until the wheels spin freely. NOTE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NUT AND END OF THE STUD SHOULD BE 7/8" (22 mm) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 07-11-9 > Jun > 07 > Brakes - IVD Lamp ON/Brakes Dragging > Page 10052 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071109A 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch (Do Not Use With 13480A) 071109B 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.4 Hr. Diagnose, Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 2780B) 071109C 2007 Edge/MKX: 0.5 Hr. Diagnose, Replace BOO Switch, And Adjust Park Brake (Do Not Use With 13480A, 2780B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13480 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10053 View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10054 C2064 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10055 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10056 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOPLAMP SWITCH Removal 1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. 2. NOTE: The stoplamp switch will be difficult to remove if the switch plunger is not depressed. A slight rearward force should be adequate to depress the plunger. With a light force (approximately 1-4 N [1-3 lb]), pull rearward on the brake pedal, rotate the stoplamp switch 45 degrees clockwise and remove the stoplamp switch. Installation CAUTION: It is very important to not press, pull or touch the brake pedal assembly during the installation of the stoplamp switch. Failure to follow these instructions may damage the stoplamp switch. 1. Without movement to the brake pedal assembly, install the stoplamp switch and rotate 45 degrees counterclockwise. 2. Connect the stoplamp switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10060 C479 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10064 C2355 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Illumination Dimmer Switch View 151-8 (behind Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Illumination Dimmer Switch > Page 10069 View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 10072 C2298 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 10075 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 10076 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Illumination Dimmer Switch Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Lamp Portion > Page 10077 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10078 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10079 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10083 C205 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10084 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10085 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10086 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Left > Page 10091 View 151-10 (Steering Wheel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left C2996 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 10094 C2997 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10098 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10099 Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10100 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10101 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10102 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10107 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10108 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10109 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10110 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10111 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10112 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10113 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10114 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10115 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10116 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10117 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10118 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10119 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10120 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10121 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10122 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10123 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10124 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10125 92-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Lamp Assembly Tail Lamp: Service and Repair Rear Lamp Assembly REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The rear lamp assembly is held in place by snap-type retainers. The lamp should be pulled straight and rearward to remove. Remove the 2 screws and the rear lamp assembly. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - An audible click should be heard when the rear lamp assembly is fully seated to the quarter panel. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Lamp Assembly > Page 10128 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair Rear Lamp Assembly - Liftgate REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY - LIFTGATE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the luggage trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate lamp electrical connector. 3. Remove the 8 nuts and the liftgate lamp. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10133 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10134 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10135 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10136 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10137 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10138 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10139 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10140 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10141 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10142 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10143 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10144 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10145 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10146 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10147 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10148 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10149 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10150 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10151 95-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): 9 (20A) (trailer tow parking lamps) - 24 (15A) (trailer tow LH stop/turn relay) - 46 (15A) (trailer tow RH stop/turn relay) - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relays - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10154 Symptom Chart Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10155 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Test X: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All PINPOINT TEST X: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL X1 Normal Operation The trailer tow connectors receive ground through circuit RAT08 (WH) for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer Test Y: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Turn/Stoplamp PINPOINT TEST Y: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER TURN/STOPLAMP Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10156 Y1-Y2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10157 Y3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10158 Y4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10159 Y5-Y6 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10160 Y6 Continued Normal Operation The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 24 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and BJB fuse 46 (15A) supplies voltage to the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Joint connector - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - BJB - Trailer Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10161 Z1-Z3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10162 Z3-Z4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10163 Z4 Continued Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10164 Z5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10165 Z6 Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 9 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Joint connector - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - BJB - Trailer Tests AA: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 10166 AA1-AA2 Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10167 Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10172 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10173 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10176 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10177 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10178 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10179 Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lamp Relay > Page 10180 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Park/Turn Lamp Turn Signal Lamp: Diagrams Park/Turn Lamp C1023 C1043 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Park/Turn Lamp > Page 10189 Turn Signal Lamp: Diagrams Park/Stop/Turn Lamp C415 C412 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10193 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10194 Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10195 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10196 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10197 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left C907 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left > Page 10202 C906 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10208 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10209 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10214 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10215 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch View 151-24 (Right Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 10221 View 151-23 (Left Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 10222 View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 10223 View 151-22 (Passenger Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Adjust Switch C504A C504B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10226 C535A C535B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10227 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch C701 C801 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10228 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Power Window Switch, RH Side Front C624 C648 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Adjust Switch Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10231 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10232 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switches Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10233 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10234 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10235 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10236 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation Edge only 1. Pull the switch bezel straight up to unclip it from the door trim panel. MKX only 2. NOTE: LH front shown, all others similar. Pull up on the front edge of the switch bezel and pull forward to unhook it from the door trim panel. All vehicles 3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 4. Unclip the window control switch from the switch bezel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - FRONT DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: - LH shown, RH similar. - For MKX only, the front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the front door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10242 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plugs and lower the window until the glass clamp bolts can be accessed through the 2 access holes. Tape the glass in position. 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolts are loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolts. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. If equipped, remove trim and disconnect the power mirror electrical connector. - Remove the wiring harness pushpins from the door. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10243 8. Disconnect the electrical connector at the A-pillar. 9. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 10. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 11. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 12. Remove the 3 door latch screws. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 13. Remove the access plug from the latch side of door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 14. Remove the outside door handle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10244 15. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 16. If equipped, remove the keypad. 17. Remove the 10 door module bolts and remove the front door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 18. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - MKX Only, if installing a new front window motor, it must be initialized. If installing the original front window motor it must be de-initialized, then initialized. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10248 Part 2 WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - REAR DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the rear door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plug and lower the window until the glass clamp bolt can be accessed through the access hole. Tape the glass in position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10249 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolt is loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolt. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector at the B-pillar. 8. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 9. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 10. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 11. Remove the 3 door latch screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10250 - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 12. Remove the access plug from the latch side of the door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 13. Remove the outside door handle. 14. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 15. If equipped, remove the door keypad. 16. Remove the 9 door module bolts and remove the rear door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch View 151-24 (Right Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 10255 View 151-23 (Left Rear Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 10256 View 151-21 (Driver Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 10257 View 151-22 (Passenger Door) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Adjust Switch C504A C504B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10260 C535A C535B Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10261 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch C701 C801 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10262 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Power Window Switch, RH Side Front C624 C648 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Adjust Switch Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10265 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10266 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switches Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10267 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10268 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 10269 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10270 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation Edge only 1. Pull the switch bezel straight up to unclip it from the door trim panel. MKX only 2. NOTE: LH front shown, all others similar. Pull up on the front edge of the switch bezel and pull forward to unhook it from the door trim panel. All vehicles 3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 4. Unclip the window control switch from the switch bezel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10276 2. Remove the front door window glass inner weatherstrip. 3. Remove the front door glass top run. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure the top run is fully seated before reinstalling the front door window glass. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair WINDOW GLASS - LIFTGATE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Material Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10280 Removal WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses and heavy gloves when cutting glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the liftgate window wiper arm and motor. 2. Remove the liftgate spoiler. 3. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window defrost electrical connectors. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the existing urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool while cutting. Using the special tool, place the flat side of the knife against the liftgate window glass. Start cutting the adhesive away from the liftgate window glass at the top and work toward the corners. 6. Using the special tool, distance the liftgate window glass from the body. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10281 7. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the liftgate window glass. 8. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld. Installation CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the windshield. NOTE: For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation information. 1. Dry fit the liftgate window glass to the existing urethane adhesive bead on the body pinch weld. 2. For a uniform fit, use the 2 liftgate window glass alignment pins to align the liftgate window glass in the opening. 3. Remove the liftgate window glass. 4. NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld, see the manufacturer's recommendations. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm (0.03 in) to 2 mm (0.07 in) base of original equipment urethane on the pinch weld. 5. If installing the original liftgate window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive. 6. Clean the inside of the liftgate window glass surface with glass cleaner. 7. CAUTION: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. NOTE: Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area. If installing a new liftgate window glass, apply urethane glass primer according to the manufacturer's instructions. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 9. NOTE: Use either a high ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at the bottom of the liftgate window glass opening near the center. 10. NOTE: Before the urethane has set, partially lower the windows to prevent the glass from being pushed out of position when a door is closed. Install the liftgate window glass on the vehicle using the alignment pins. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10282 11. CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the rear window glass. After the urethane has cured, check the liftgate window glass seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 12. Connect the 2 liftgate window defrost electrical connectors. 13. Install the liftgate trim panel. 14. Install the liftgate spoiler. 15. Install the liftgate window wiper arm and motor. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair WINDOW GLASS - REAR QUARTER Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Material Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10286 Removal WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses and heavy gloves when cutting glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the C-pillar, D-pillar and rear quarter trim panels. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the existing urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool while cutting. From inside the vehicle, using the special tool, cut the glass starting at the upper C-pillar and work down, across the D-pillar, then across the bottom. 3. Remove the rear quarter window glass. 4. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld. Installation CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the quarter window glass. NOTE: For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation information. 1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass to the existing urethane adhesive bead on the body pinch weld. 2. For a uniform fit, use the 2 alignment pins on the rear quarter window glass to align the rear quarter window glass in the opening. 3. Remove the rear quarter window glass. 4. NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld, see the manufacturer's recommendations. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm (0.03 in) to 2 mm (0.07 in) base of original equipment urethane on the pinch weld. 5. If installing the original rear quarter window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10287 6. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass surface with glass cleaner. 7. CAUTION: Be sure to use the same brand urethane and cure-rate products for adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. NOTE: Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area. If installing a new rear quarter window glass, apply urethane glass primer according to the manufacturer's instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 9. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at the bottom of the rear quarter window glass opening near the center. 10. CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the quarter window glass. NOTE: Before the urethane has set, partially lower the windows to prevent the glass from being pushed out of position when a door is closed. After the urethane has cured, check the rear quarter window glass seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 11. Install the C-pillar, D-pillar and rear quarter trim panels. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10292 Part 2 DOOR GLASS RUN AND BRACKET - REAR Removal and Installation NOTE: The bracket is removed with the rear door glass. 1. Remove the rear door glass. 2. Remove the rear door glass top run. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - FRONT DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: - LH shown, RH similar. - For MKX only, the front window motor must be de-initialized, then initialized whenever the front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, a new window regulator is installed, a new window glass is installed, a new top run is installed or for any operation in which grease or lubricants are applied to the window regulator or glass run. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the front door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10297 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plugs and lower the window until the glass clamp bolts can be accessed through the 2 access holes. Tape the glass in position. 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolts are loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolts. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. If equipped, remove trim and disconnect the power mirror electrical connector. - Remove the wiring harness pushpins from the door. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10298 8. Disconnect the electrical connector at the A-pillar. 9. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 10. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 11. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 12. Remove the 3 door latch screws. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 13. Remove the access plug from the latch side of door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 14. Remove the outside door handle. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10299 15. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 16. If equipped, remove the keypad. 17. Remove the 10 door module bolts and remove the front door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 18. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - MKX Only, if installing a new front window motor, it must be initialized. If installing the original front window motor it must be de-initialized, then initialized. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair GLASS, FRAMES AND MECHANISMS - EXPLODED VIEW, REAR DOOR Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10303 Part 2 WINDOW REGULATOR AND MOTOR - REAR DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Window operating/not operating 1. Remove the rear door speaker. Window not operating NOTE: Cutting the regulator cable should only be done if installing a new window regulator assembly. 2. NOTE: Support window glass before cutting the window regulator cable. Cut the window regulator cable. Window operating 3. Reconnect the window control switch. Window operating/not operating 4. Remove the access plug and lower the window until the glass clamp bolt can be accessed through the access hole. Tape the glass in position. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10304 5. NOTE: If the window regulator cable was cut previously, support the regulator before the glass clamp bolt is loosened. Loosen the glass clamp bolt. To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 6. Lower the window regulator downward until it reaches the stops at the bottom of the regulator tracks. 7. Disconnect the electrical connector at the B-pillar. 8. Remove the 2 bolts from the electrical harness grommet to the door. 9. Using the speaker hole for access, release the clip on the harness from the inside to disconnect the harness from the door. 10. Unclip the weatherstrip and feed through the wiring harness between the weatherstrip and door. 11. Remove the 3 door latch screws. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 10305 - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 12. Remove the access plug from the latch side of the door and remove the outside door handle reinforcement screw. 13. Remove the outside door handle. 14. Remove the screw. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 15. If equipped, remove the door keypad. 16. Remove the 9 door module bolts and remove the rear door module, transfer parts as necessary. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 17. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Windshield: Procedures WINDSHIELD RESEAL Material 1. Remove the cowl panel grille. 2. Position the LH and RH weatherstrips aside. 3. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors. 5. If equipped, remove the overhead console. 6. Lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner. Material 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to 6 mm (0.24 in). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10310 9. NOTE: - Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. - Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive over top of the existing urethane adhesive. Apply the urethane to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle. - Apply the urethane to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle. 10. CAUTION: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or water leaks. After the urethane has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the urethane bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 11. Position the front portion of the headliner. 12. If equipped, install the overhead console. 13. Install the LH and RH sun visors. 14. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 15. Install the LH and RH weatherstrips. 16. Install the cowl panel grille. 17. Clean the interior and exterior windshield glass with glass cleaner. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10311 Windshield: Removal and Replacement WINDSHIELD GLASS Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Material Material Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10312 Removal WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses and heavy gloves when cutting glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the sun visors. 3. Remove the interior mirror. 4. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner near the windshield header and block with suitable material. 5. Remove the cowl panel grille. 6. NOTE: - Lubricate the existing urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool while cutting. - Removing the windshield glass requires more than one technician. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10313 7. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body. 8. Using the Pneumatic Knife with offset blade, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass. 9. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld. Installation CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the windshield. NOTE: For additional material guidelines, refer to the manufacturer's installation information. 1. Dry fit the windshield glass to the existing urethane adhesive bead on the body pinch weld. Align the windshield glass in the opening for a uniform fit. 2. For a uniform fit, use the 2 alignment pins on windshield glass to align the windshield glass in the pin holes on the top pinch weld. 3. Use a non-permanent pencil to make alignment marks on the windshield glass at the setting blocks and the body to aid in the installation alignment of the windshield glass. 4. Remove the windshield glass. 5. NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld, see the manufacturer's recommendations. Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1-2 mm (0.04-0.08 in) base of original equipment urethane on the pinchweld. 6. If installing the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive. 7. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner. 8. CAUTION: Be sure to use the same brand urethane and cure-rate products for adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. NOTE: Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area. If installing a new windshield glass, apply urethane glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10314 9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 10. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio, electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center. 11. Install the windshield glass on the vehicle, aligning it with the markings made previously. 12. CAUTION: When installing urethane-installed glass parts, the vehicle must not be driven until urethane has cured. Adequate cure time is specified on the drive away chart for each urethane product as temperatures and humidity vary. Inadequate or incorrect curing can adversely affect retention of the windshield. After the urethane has cured, check the windshield glass seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 13. Install the cowl panel grille. 14. Install the headliner. 15. Install the interior mirror. 16. Install the sun visors. 17. Install the A-pillar trim panels. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10320 C1552 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10325 C138 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10329 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10332 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10333 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10334 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10335 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10336 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10340 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10343 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10344 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10345 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10346 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10347 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 (Engine Compartment - Edge (1 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10351 C138 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair WASHER HOSE REPAIR 1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose. 2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose. 4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required. Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) inside diameter black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose, and clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10358 C137 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 2. CAUTION: When replacing the washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the washer reservoir before washer pump removal. Remove the washer pump. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the hoses. 3. Remove the washer pump. 3. CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair WASHER RESERVOIR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 2. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 3. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the washer reservoir before removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. 4. Remove the bolt from the washer reservoir filler neck. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. Remove the washer reservoir nuts and the washer reservoir. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10368 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10371 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10372 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10373 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10374 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10375 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws and remove the switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - WINDSHIELD 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers. 2. Verify that the RH and LH windshield wiper blades are located at the alignment marks on the glass. 3. If necessary, remove the windshield wiper pivot arm nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them to the correct locations. - To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 10380 Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear Window WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - REAR WINDOW 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear wiper blade is positioned at the first defroster line located on the rear window glass. 3. If necessary, remove the rear wiper pivot arm nut and the rear wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct location. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the upper cowl panel grille. 2. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft > Page 10383 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Front WIPER PIVOT ARM - FRONT Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front wiper pivot arm caps. 2. Remove the front wiper pivot arm retaining nuts and the front wiper pivot arms. - To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - To adjust the windshield wiper pivot arms, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment Windshield. See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft > Page 10384 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear WIPER PIVOT ARM - REAR Removal and Installation 1. Open the rear wiper pivot arm nut cover. 2. Remove the nut and the rear wiper pivot arm. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - To adjust the rear wiper pivot arm, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear Window. See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear Window Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 (Engine Compartment - Edge (2 Of 2)) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10388 C1552 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 (Liftgate - Edge) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in Power and Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagrams in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in Vehicle/Diagrams. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10394 Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System; and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which fuses and relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10395 Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagrams that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10396 This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. C904 Component and Connector Information Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in set Component Location Charts. Component Location Views shows the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Location information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe,catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Symbols Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10397 Symbols Part 1 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10398 Symbols Part 2 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10399 Symbols Part 3 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10400 Symbols Part 4 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10401 Symbols Part 5 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10402 Wiper Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10403 Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10404 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10405 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10406 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10407 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 1/4" (6.35mm) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10408 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles until ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10409 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10410 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10411 C4218 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield WIPER MOTOR - WINDSHIELD Removal and Installation NOTE: The windshield wiper motor is not serviceable separately. The windshield wiper motor and the mounting arm and pivot shaft must be replaced together. 1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 10414 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window WIPER MOTOR - REAR WINDOW Removal 1. Remove the rear wiper pivot arm. 2. Remove the liftgate interior trim panel. 3. Disconnect the rear wiper motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the 3 rear wiper motor screws. 5. Remove the rear wiper motor. Installation 1. Position the rear wiper motor on the liftgate and install the 3 rear wiper motor screws. - Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Connect the rear wiper motor electrical connector. 3. Install the liftgate interior trim panel. 4. Install the rear wiper pivot arm. Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 (Dash Panel) Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10418 C202 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10421 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10422 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Rear Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multifunction Switch, Wiper/Washer Portion - Front > Page 10423 Ford Edge Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10424 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Release the upper steering column shroud by pressing inward on the sides of the shroud and lifting upwards. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Release the tilt lever, remove the 3 screws and then remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector.